Google 



This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 

to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 

publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 
We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at |http: //books .google .com/I 



l-[ 1 5r.-ll' ''®° 



■3 2 

r 



3 2044 102 776 333 



HARVARD COLLEGE 
LIBRARY 




THE ESSEX INSTITUTE 
TEXT-BOOK COLLECTION 



lUS 



illona In 
lie guide 



rnpletaly 



OF NEW YORK 



lages, 
if added 



KMt«Ty S«ri«K— Oerman, In this Method the Stndy of Oni 
mST te irholly eidaded, ■» b«lni, intagOBietIc tu the Natni 

ProCeSB. B; ThOMU PBXHItSBQAST. 13I11D. 



T 










'1 J -'i •'. 



-'. 



z' 



' /' T 



/'' / 



.^r. 



STANDARD SPAKI8S W0MK8. 



OUendorft'i New Method of Tiearnfag to Bead, WHte, and 
Speak the German Language. ^7 Ubobsi J. Aoubb, A.M. 
13mo. 610 paji^es. 

EST TO BXBRCISBS. Separate volame. 

Few books have maintained their popolarity in the flchoole for 
BO lone a period as the Ollendorff series. The verdict pronoanced 
in theu llEtvor, on their first appearance in Enrope, has been signally 
confirmed in America. 

GTammari for Teaching Englith to Oermans. OUendoriTs 
New Method for Germans to Learn to Read, Write, and Speak 
the English Language. Arranged and adapted to Schools and 
Private Academies. By P. Gjkinw. 12mo. 609 pages. 

EST TO THE EXEBCISES. Separate volnme. 

Boemer'i Polyglot Reader. 6 vols., i3mo. Consisting of a Se- 
ries of English extracts, translated into French, German, Span- 
ish, and Italian respectively. The several volumes designed as 
mntnal Eeys to each. 

Wrage'i Practieal Orammar of the Oerman Language. 
ISmo. 815 pages. 



i 



"nrjfnpo. 



SPANISH TEXT-BOOKS. 

Ahn'i Spanish Orammar. Being a New, Practical, and Easy 
Method of Learning the Spanish Language ; after the System 
of A. F. Ahn, Doctor of Philosophy, and Professor at the Col- 
lege of Neuss. First American Edition, revised and enlarged. 
12mo. 149 pages. 

KEY TO THE EXEBCISES. Separate volume. 

Butler'i Spanish Teacher and Colloquial Fhrase-Book. An 

Easy and Agreeable Method of Acquiring a Speaking Knowl- 
edge of the Spanish Language. 18mo. 293 pages. 

Be Vere'i Orammar of the Spanish Language. With a His- 
tory of the Language and Practical Exercises. 12mo. 273 pp. 

Morales's Progressive Spanish Reader. With an Analytical 
Study of the Spanish Language. By Agustin Jos£ Morales, 
A. M., H. M., Professor of the Spanish Language and Literature 
in the New York Free Academy. 12mo. 



" SEE Eznl 07 raifl toluhz. 









; ' 









V s^ 



I { 









/•»- 

v' >_ 



<• „ 

L,'' 



•V V 



c .^ 



/ . . t 



/'' 1 1_ . « . 



-t / 



6 , . A 



^ 








J 



<i 






■-I 




«-] 



/] 



A NEW 



PRACTICAL AlTD EASY METHOD 



OF LEARNING 



TUB 



GERMAN LANGUAGE. 



BY 



F. AH N, 



DOCTOR OF PmLOSOPHT AKD PttOFE880B AT THE GOLUCOZ Of KStTSS. 



FIBST C0UB8E. 



8BC0XD AFRICAN FROM THE EIGHTH LONDON EDITIOTl 



• ♦ • 



NEW YOEK: 
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY 



649 & B51 BROADWAY. 

is:?. 






HARVARD o a . ?. ll. .Jtt 

PREFACE. 

Learn a foreign language as you learn your mottiet 
tojigue : this is in a few words the method which I havi 
adopted in this little work. It is the way that nature her- 
self follows, it is the same which the mother points out in 
speaking to her child, repeating to it a hundred times the 
same words, combining them imperceptibly, and succeeding 
in this way to make it speak the same language she speaks. 
To learn in this manner is no longer a study, it is an amuse- 
ment. 

Supposing the pupil to have learned his own language by 
principles, I thought ifc proper to add a few rules, which 
will serve to shorten the course and render the progress 
more secure. 

Tkb AuTIIOil. 






'Kt cuCi*^ 










TABLE 

OP THE GERMAN DECLENSIONS 



ARRANGED 



fiy Br. UABTIK WEISS, 



FBOM Tn« UNIVEBSITT OP BEBLIN, LATK niEKCH AHD GKBMAS MA8TKR« AT TAB 

BOTAL COLLBOB DI7N0ANN0N. 



Almost every German Grammar used in England states 
a different number of Declensions. Dr. Ncehden whose 
Grammar is in every respect unquestionably the best, has 
attempted to reduce the number of Declensions to four, and 
I think most successfully. But German Grammarians have 
not adopted his system. Wendeborn who tries to imitate 
the Latin gives five Declensions, whilst Dr. Render in his 
anxiety to smooth the way to the learner, has made appear 
an absurd doctrine of one Declension. In Germany itself 
Grammarians follow either Adeluno or Klopstock. The 
system of the former being the best and offering the least 
confusion to the student. I have tried in the following 
table to arrange the Declensions of all German Nouns upon 
Adelijno's plan. 



1 = 

j 


\ H ilitiii , 

S5 & .a .i 


1 
1 


:i:-:-if.iJliIiJsJilll 


3 

1 


nil- 1^:1^151 . 




1 


1 
Sli 




1 






|5 1 ^ _ __ 



I! •l5 2^Eia^'6 






2 = '»s is |« 



i f Is S i SI If t«^f » § Jll f ■^ I 



S3 ."JpiJIifll'^gi^ll^lJ^E 



-■ B I 8 S 'o i -i § -E-p i --■^° s "&^ i^ 1 1 

■?2 .l!s«i"i^|5M 



Specimens of German/ Current Hand 




^jj^^^x^^*^^/^ 








The Small Alphabet. 




SS t U V w 



tD'^d 



ue oe ae 



German Capital Letters 




?i^^^%. 



Double Letters and Combinations. 





'k^uze^ Ljhy L^'^.ve' 





^y^f4^ y4^y 






THE PRONUNCIATION. 



I. THE ALPHABET. 

« 

The German Alphabet is composed of the follo^ying 
twenty-six letters : 

% a, a. 
«, b, b. 
G, c, c. 
®, b, d. 
@, e, e. 
S. f, f. 
• ©/ 9/ g- 
^f i)f h. 
-3. h i. 

if, I, k. 
1^ I, 1. 

2J?, nt, m. 

The vowels are : a, a, t, \, o, 5, it, il» The diphthongs 
or compound vowels are : at, ci, ait, 'ivi, cu ; all other 
letters are consonants. 



% 


n. 


n. 


o, 


0, 


0. 


% 


Pf 


P- 


o, 


q, 


<1- 


% 


r. 


r. 


©, 


f. 


S, 8. 


% 


t. 


t 


u. 


", 


u. 


as, 


», 


V. 


as, 


te 


r W. 


X, 


h 


X. 


?), 


^r 


y- 


3f 


3/ 


z. 



ir. SrVIPLE VOWELS. 

Every vowel, followed by two consonants, is pronounced 
.short: followed by only one consonant, it is long. 
^ 21, a, is pronounced like a in the English word 
father. 

Sllter, banfen, %t^^^, 

SSater, laben, ®altc. 

31^, a, is pronounced like a in the English word caves 
mXitr iParm, 4Slatter, 

le, ©abet, gclnbcr. 



►7 

« 



8 

®, e, is pronounced like 6 in the English word leitcf 
©fef, benfen, iXid, 

@fel, treuncn 5Kanncr, 

rcben, Snbe, SRebc* 

.3, i, is pronounced like e in the English word me, 
^{i% immer, in, 

finbcn, ©itber, Sinb* 

i©, 0, is pronounced like o in the English word ho^c 
Dfen, fonbern, ^oft, 

rolfciv ober, SBort. 

^ iOc 6/ is pronounced like u in the English word 
murder, 

m\h toncn, 8op, 

gome, lonnen, ^ ©orfen 

U, tl^ is pronounced like oo in the English word roof. 
S3Iut, S3rubcr, mmi, 

^Blume, SWutter, ©tunbe* 

He, ti/ is pronounced like the French u. There is 
no corresponding sound in the English language, 
ilben, miibe, WXiitx, 

triibc, )3rufen, 92u[fc. 

^, X^, has the sound of the German x, by which it is 
generally replaced. 

III. DOUBLE VOWELS. 

The double vowels, aa, cc, oo, are no diphthongs, 
because only one letter is sounded, and the second only 
serves to indicate that the syllable is long. 
Star, SWcer, 2Roo§, 

®aal, ©cele, S5oot. 

.3e, iCf is pronounced like ea in the English word 
meat, 

S3ienc, iSier, tief, 

licbcn, 5Dieb, 8ieb. 

IV. DIPHTHONGS. 

In the German diphthongs, the two vowels must bo 
gounded one after the other, but so quickly as to form 
jnly one syllable. 

^t and et are pronounced almost alike, and have the 
sound of the English i in the word fire. 



9 

©aitc, £ai[er, Icibcn, 

^ ^ ©cite, rcimcn, SOScin. 

3tlt^ is pronounced like ou in the English word house 

man^, raubcn, blau, 

^ 5}auin, laufcn, faum, 

Slett itnd (tit, are both pronounced like oy in Uio 
English word joy. 

SKaufc, iScutcI, grcunb.. 

^Saimic, gcucr, 2:rcuc* 

V. CONSONAinS. 

The pronunciation of the consonants differ but little 
in the two languages; the scholar should remark the 
, following peculiarities. 

■^ ®f C, before 8, c, and i, is pronounced like is. 
Scifar, Eebar, Sitrone. 

^ Before a, o, u, before a consonant and at the end of a 
syllable, it is pronounced like A, by which in most cases 
it may be replaced. 

Sarf, Surt, Stombac, 

Sonrab, Srcolc, Slaffc* 

^ &^p at the beginning of a word is pronounced like k 
except in words derived from the French, when it pre 
serves the French pronunciation. . 

S^or, S^arlatan, 

e^rift, C^ariDari. A^^ott-.-^f 

In the middle or at the end of a word d) Iias^ pr^nun- ,<^t^u rt> 
ciation quite peculiar to the German language, and more 
or less gutteral, but for which no corresponding sound 
can be found in English ; it is like the Scotch ch in the 
word loch after a, o, it, au, but softer after % c, i, 5, U, du, 
eu, and after a co^sonantj 

®ad), 'JRaud^^ ntdEjt6, 

8oc^, ^ild^e, rcd^nen, 

SQwi), S'ir^c, fud^cn, 

gi^t, Stouter, ©auntd^eu. 

"^ ^8 or 4)f is pronounced like x when those conso 
aants belong to the root or radical syllable. 

1* 



10 

'^ But the d) preserves its gutteral pronunciation, when 
it stands before the § or f by contraction or in a com- 
posed word, 
aad^fel^cn, tuad^fen, bc^ S3ud)§ instead of be§ 53ud)e§ 

^ @, ^, at the beginning of a syllable is pronounced 
like the English g in the word good/ b a1 >- b o tw een two 
vowels, in the middle of a word, and at the end of a syl* 
I able, it has a sound like the d), only much softened, 
ge^en, gro^, ®a6e, 

SBagcn, ®ieg, arttg, 

JRegen, ^ug, rid^tig. 

After n at the end of a word it is pronounced like l 
very soft h 

©ang, 9ttng^ ©prung. 

^, }), is always aspirated at the beginning of a syl^ 
lable. 

j^ter, r)art, ^cc^t, 

§au§, ^immcl, grei^eit. 

The aspiration becomes however almost imperceptible 
before an e in the end-syllables. 
';;^ 9tei^e, $Rut)e^ fel)en. 

-^^ After a vowel or a t, the 1^ is not pronounced, but only 
indicates that the syllable is long. 

§a^n, ©trol^, SHjter, 

Vii)v, frul), 5Rat^. 

"* .3# h o^^y stands at the beginning of a syllabic, and 
is pronounced like the English y in the word yet. 

3a^r, Qoi), ^ ^ugenb.- 

cf replaces the double f, and is pronounced shoit, 

©to(f, Sriidc, Stder. 

'^SSlU^ <|tl, has the sound of qu. in ^iiglish. 

Qual, QueHe, Qucr* 

S, f# Sf at the beginning of a syllable is pionouncod 
like the English 2, at the end of a syllable, however, like 
the English s. 

©ommcr, 5Rctfe, §auiJ, 

<Bad, ©fen, JReie. 

The long f is placed at the beginning and in the 
middle, § only at the end of syllables. If in a non- 



11 

composed word there are two f, one after another, they 
are written ff. 

SBaffer, luiffcn, nmffcn. 

^ is only placed at the end or in the middle of syl- 
lables ; it IS always preceded by a long vowel, and has 
the sound of the English ss. 

©trage, grog, ffiegeu. 

®^f f^ is pronounced like the English sh, 
©c^attcu; ®d)u(c, '»]5citfrf)e, 

. fcfjlafen, ®^ifb, X\\^. 

fl and fp are pronounced like st and sp in English ; 
but in some parts of Germany they pronounce ft at the 
beginning of a word like sht, and fp like shp. 

©tu^f, ftc^fcn, fptctcn, 

I ©tern, fpred^cn, fted^cn. 

95# tl has the sound oif. 

25ater, aSogcI, SSicl^. 

3SS, tp is pronounced like the English v. 

2Sclt, ffiiefc, SBaub. 

3/ } is sounded like ts, 

3at)f, 3orn, §ol3, 

3eit, imnm, ^txi. 

^ replaces the double g and is pronounced very hard. 

Stife, Jiufeen, fefecn* 

VI. SYLLABIC ACCENT. ftc^ffi^ 

The Germans never pronounce several successive syl- 
lables one after the other with the same force ; the prm- 
cipal syllables are pronounced with a louder, and the 
others with a softer tone. The end-syllables in German 
words are pronounced very softly. 

The accent is always laid upon the radical syllable, 
that is, upon the one which includes the principal idea ; 
thus in the word ®erecf)ttgfeit (justice) which is derived 
from rec^t (just), the second syllable is pronounced more 
strongly than the rest 

In compoimd words, the first syllable always has the 
accent, because it presents the principal idea and modi- 
fies the following one : ©lumcngarten, (Sartenblume. 



PART I. 



1. 

Singular. \^ bttt, I am ; 

t>u bijl, thou art ; 
er i\i, he is ; 
fic ijK she is ; 
Plural. Xoix finb, we are ; 
i^r fcib, you are ; 
fie jinb; they arc. 

ISut^ good ; gtpg, treat, large, big ; Jfleitl, little, small ; xti^, rich ; 
tXMXf poor ; j[ung; ycung ; alt; old ; mube/ tired ; hanf, ill, sick. 

Sii) bin grog. !Du bift Hein. er ift att ©ic tft int. 
SBir finb jung* Qijv feib rcii^- ©ic fiub arm. Sin itS} 
gro6? Sift bu ntiibc ? 5ft cr Iran!? Oftfieiung? ©inb 
mir reid)? ©eib il^r arm? ©inb fie alt? 

2. 

I am little. Thou art young. We are tired. Thoi^ 
are rich. Art thou sick ? You ai>e poor. Is she old ? 
Are you sick ? Are they good ? He is tall (gro^). Aui 
I poor ? 

3. 

^i6)t, not. 
8tavf; strong ; trcU; faithful ; Jaul, idle, lazy ; ^dfiq, diligent ; b6[e. 
wicked, naughty ; traurig, sad ; gludKid;, happy ; l^ojwc^; polite. 

Sift bu bofc? 3d& bin nii^t bofe. Sr ift traurig. Sir 
finb nidjt ftarl. ©inb fie treu? Sift bu nid^t gmittd^? 
S^x fcib nidjt fleifeig. ©ie ift nid^t faul. Oft er ntd^t muber 
mv finb nic^t arm. ©inb fie ni(^t ^5f{icf)? ®u bift nit^t 
franf. 

4. 

I am not tall. They are idle. She is not ill. We are 
not happy. He is not short (Kein). Are you not tired ? 
They are not rich. Is he not diligent ? Thou art not 

12 



13 

«trong. They are not happy. He is not polite. Are 
they not faithful ? Is she not rich ? He is not wicked, i 

5. r^ 

Masculine nouns : bcr SSotcr, the father ; bet ©attcit, the garden ; 

Feminine " ; bic 9Kuttcr, the mother ; bic ©tabt/ tlie town ; 

Neuter " .• ba5 ^inb, the child ; bad •&au«, the liouse. 

SdjSn, beautiful, fine ; lang, long ; f^t>(i)f high ; neu^ new ; uiib, and j 
^t^Xf very. 

©cr aSatcr ift gut. !Dlc SUiuttcr ift traurig. 5Da« Sinb 
ift fauf. ©er ®artcn ift ni^t fctjr lang. !J)ic @tabt ift grog 
imb reid^. ©a^ §au« ift ni^t \)oi). 3^ft bcr ©artci! f^5n ? 
3f ft ber 3Satcr Irani? Oft bae Siub nicfjt flci6ig? 3ft ba3 
^auS ncu? 5Dcr 9Satcr unb bic 3)?uttcr finb gtUdiid). 

" Observation. All German Bubstantives begin with a capital letter. 
When two or more substantives follow each other, the article must ' 
be repeated before each, unless they are all of the same gender. 

6. 

The house is not new. The mother and (the) child 
are ill. The town is very heautiful. The child is not 
naughty. The father is very old. The house and (the) 
garden are very large. Is the mother not happy ? The 
house is not very old. Is the garden not very fine £ 
The house is very small. -^ 



Masc. biefer S3aum, this tree. 
Fern, biefc Srau, this woman. 
Neut. bicfeS $fcrb/ this horse. 

!Der SOJann, tlie man ; bet Scrg, the mountain ; bie Sbinme, the flower ,• 
ba£f Senjlcr, the -window ; pjfcn,. open ; jufriebcn, contented, satisfied, 
pleased ; ober, or. 

SDicfcr Mann ift fc^r arm. 5Dicfe6 gcnfter ift fcl^r l^odf). 
!E)icfc «fnmc ift fd^on. ©iefc^ ^ferb ift inng unb ftarl. Oft 
bicfc grau gmdlid)? 5Dicfcr SSatcr nnb bicfc SKuttcr finb 
nid^t gnfricbcn. 5Diefcr 53anm ift fel^r gro§. S)iefc ^^rau 
ift arm unb Irani. !Diefc« ^nb ift fc^r bofc. ©icfcr SDJanu 
ift nid^t Ijoflid). iSift bn traurig obcr Irani? 

a 

This woman is tired. This mountain is not high. Is 
this child good or naughty ? The man is not satisfied- 



Specimens of German/ Girrent Hand 




-^^^^^ 



r2j 





.yt^<^^^t-t-^^^€p4^^/n'i^^ 




The Small Alphabet. 



/r i^ 



/ 




a b c d e ^f 

-^^^^-^ ^^^t^^ ^<^ ypy y^y<r^^ 

m n o c>p 'q r ^s 




^" -^*^ y^^ y^^f/^ 



»/ 



" . 'f 



ss t 



u 



"W 





^-^'/^ yC^ .C^C^ 



ue oe ae 



y 



German Capital Letters 





Double Letters and Combinations. 



6^^^^^^-^:^r^<^:^<^ O^ ^Ce^ 



"yH^ y4^€€y 






16 

3Kcm «udi ift fd^oner, aU icneS. mdnt gcbcr ift beffcr, 
-al^ biefe. ©cr ©ta|t ift l^artcr, ate ba« ©fcu- SDiefcr Scrg 
Ift ^o^er, ate jencr. 5Dic Safec ift nii^t fo treu, ate bcr §unb. 
©as «Iei ift nic^t fo ^art, ate ba^ (gifem Oft S^r ftauS 
uirfit grader, ate jcneS? 3fft ba« Sfci t^curer, ate ba« (Sifcn? 
S)cr 5monb ift ni^t fo gro^, ate bie (grbc* S)iefe« ^nb ift 
flei^iger, ate jcncS* O'cnc fjrau ift iirmer, ate biefc. llnfcr 
Oarten ift nid^t fo tang unb fd^on, ate bicfcr. 

(The) lead is heavier than (the) iron. This tree is 
not so high, as that Is this book not better than that? 
Our garden is smaller, than this one. This house is 
higher than that one. (The) iron is more useful than 
(the) lead. I am not so old as he. (The) lead is not 
BO dear as (the) steel. Our town is larger and finer than 
this one. We are not so rich as this man, but we are 
more contented than he. ,^ 

.17. 

Singular, id) l^aBc, I have; 

feu l)Ci% thou hast ; 
cr, flc ^t/ he or she has ; 
Plural, toir I)aBcn* we have ; 

x^v IjaBt; Sic l^aBcn, you have ; 
ftc l^aBcn, they have. 
!S:>k UffX, the watch ; baS SKcjfcr, the knife ; fStt^t right ; Unrcd^h wrong 
^cinrid^; Henry; £ufett)ig; Lewis ; fur, for ; aa^, also ; tootumf why. 

Obs. The Accusative of the fern, and neut. nouns is like the Komi 
native, — In German the verb to have is used with right and wrong 
thus : id) ^aU Sftcc^t, ex l&at Unrcd^t* 

S6) ^abt SRec^t. 5Dtt ^aft Unrcd^t. QS) l^abc ctn SSn6). 
5Du l^aft einc gcbcr. SKein ^ruber l^at eiue Ui^r. SBir i^abcn 
cin ^au«. Qt)^ ^cAt cin ^ferb. ^arl unb Souifc l^abcn cine 
Sa^c. §aft bu cine ©d^tucfter? ^at bicfer SWann cine 
Softer? §abt i^r ein ®inb? ®iefc U^r ift filr ntcinc 
3»utter^ SDiefc geber ift fUr Sari. S^ahm ©ie nod^ 3^re 
2Jtutter? S23arum ^aft in mein aWeffer? Q^ fjaiz bein 
SKeffer nid^t. 

18. 

Charles, hast thou my pen? Louisa, hast thou my 
book? Henry has thy pen, and Lewis has thy book. 
Thou art rignt My son is wrong. We have a book 
and a pen. ifave you also a horse and a watch ? Thi? 



17 

fcnife is for IIen^J^ Is tliis watch for thy mother ? Has 
your friend a knife ? Charles and Lewis have a horse* 
Has your father still a sister ? Is this flower for my 
daughter? /- 

19. 

©cfcl^eit/ seen ; »cr(orcn, lost ; gcfunbeit; found ; Qcfauf t, bought ; ^ctfawft, 
sold ; gettcinmcn, taken. 

Ohs, The past participle ia^etached frojn the auxiliary and placed 
It the end of the mntnno ^ C^t^t^UJ *tf O'vA^U/x, vt ^f?i-'i<^d^. 

^i) l^abc nteiu S&wi) berloren. $aft \i)x ntcin 2Weffer gc* 
funbcn? ^^ l^abc bein SWcffcr mcf)t gcfunbcn. SBo ift mcinc 
gebcr? §abt il^r mcinc gcbcr? ffijir l^abcn bcinc gcbcr 
tti^t. SWeitt aSatcr l^at btc[c« ^fcrb gcfauft. SBir l^abcn 
unfcr §aud Dcrfauft* 2Bo l^aft \^)X mctnc Ul^r gcfimbcn? 
SBarum l^abcnSic mcineU^r gcnommcn? 3^d^ l^abc^'^rc 
SWuttcr unb Oj^rc ©d^tocftcr gcfcl^ctt. SBarum |at ^^jt SSatcr 
biefc« §au« ntc^t gcfauft ? §at bcitt Srubcr mcinc gcber 
genommen ? (5r l^at bcinc fjcbcr nid^t gcnommcn. 

20. 

Where hast thou found this book? Have you lost 

^our pen ? Has your father bought this horse ? Why 
ave you sold your watch ? Why have you not taken 
my pen? My brother lias found thy knife. We have seen 
thy mother. I have ngt ygt seen this woman. Charles 
and Lewis have lost their mother ; they are very sad. ^ 

Nominative. Accusative. 

2)cr aSatcr, ben SSatcr, the father ; 

bicfcr 93atcr; bicfcn SSatcr, this father. 

JDcr ^om'g, the king ; bcr ^ut, the hat, bonnet ;i bcr (Stocf; the stick, 
cane; bet Sticf, the letter; gcfc^mbcn, written ; ctl^altctt; received, got; 
eft, often ; f d^Ott, already. 

Obs. The subject is placed in the nominative case, and the object 
in the accusative case. 

i}d} f)abc ben SBnig gcfcl^cn. §aft bu ben 53ricf crl)altcn? 
Sficine ©d^wcfter I)at ben Sricf nid^t gcfdjricbcn. ^cinridj 
^at ben ©tod tjcrlorcn. SJiein SSater l^at bicfen ®artcn nnb 
bicfc6 §an« gefanft. SBo l^abt il)r bicfen §unb unb bicfc 
Satjc gefunbcn? Qd) I)abe bicfen 2Jiann fd^on oft gcfcl^cn. 
iEBarum l^abcn ©ic bicfen ^ut genommen ? SBir ^abcn biefen 
Srief gefunbcn. ^at bcin JSruber biefen ©tocf tjcrforen ? 



x- 



^- 



18 



22 



We have sold the house and garden. Have you 
bought this dog and this horse ? I have seen the man 
and woman, the son and daughter. I have not written 
this letter. Where have you foimd this hook and cane ? 
lias thy brother bought this tree? This letter is for 
this man. Hast thou lost this hat ? Hast thou not taken 
his book and pen? Hast thou already seen the ki^? 
r have not yet seen the kino: 

'^ 23. 



Nom. 
Accus 



cm®artcn, ^ ,rj,^. T"^' "'^'^^ "^"2^' x Uy dog. 



IDcr aSogel, the bird ; hex <BtVLf)l, the chair ; bcr ^i\6), the table ; bet 
ffilciftift, the pencil ; bcr £flad;bar, the neighbor. 

SJJctn 53rubcr ift feljr gufrieben ; cr ^at cincu SSogeL ^aft 
bu etncn Srief erl^alten ? S^ I)abc ntcinen §ut tjcrtorcn. 
§abcn ©ic ntcinen §nnb fcfjon gcfel^cn? SD3ir l^aben einen 
Zi\d) nnb cuten ©tul^I gcfanft SDietn ©ruber Ijat beinen 
©tod gcnommen^ SBo l^aft bn betnen Steiftift gefauft? SBir 
l^aben unfern SSater nnb unfcrc abutter Derloren. Qd) l^abe 
S^xcn 53rtef nid^t erl^altem ^ai bein Smber nnfern ®artcn 
nnb unfer §au« [d^on gefel^en? Unfcr S^ad^bar l^at ben lonig 
gcfeljcn. §aft bu biefen SSoget gefanft ober jencn? 

24. 

We have lost our dog. This man' has ^ lost a son and 
a daughter. Where have you found my pencil ? Have 
you already seen my brother and mother? I have bought 
a bonnet for my sister. Our neighbor has found thy 
knife and cane. Where hast thou bought this table? 
Thy brother has taken my chair. Have you written a 
^ ictter ? We have found this stick and that one * 

25. 

Norn, fcitt, fcinc, fcin, ) j. ■. . tf)r; i\)xc, tl)r, ) .^^ 
Accus. (oincn, (cine, jcin, $ * * i()rcn, i^rc, it)x, S 
©elcfcn, rend ; gcfannt; known ; bcr Onfcl, the uncle ; bic %w\Ui the 
Hint ; bet fjingcf^ut, the thimble ; btc Sd)ccrc, the scissors. 

SKcin %xt\xx[b ift traurtg ; fein SSater nnb fcine 2Kntter 
finb franl. a)?eine STontc ift gufrieben ; i^r ©ol^n nnb iljre 
ITodjter finb fc^r ficipig. §einrid) Ijat fcincn ®to(f; feint 



/ 



19 

U^r unb fcin SDJcffcr t)cr(oreiu gouifc Ijat xi)xm fjingerljat, 
iljrc tjebcr unb i^r SSnd) tjcrforeit* gucr Dnict ^at fciit §aufl 
imb feinen ©arten Derfauft. ©iefc grau l^at il)rctt 3)Zaun 
unb i^r ^inb bcrtoren. ©iefc SCod^tcr l^at cincn S3ricf fur 
l^rc Wtntkv gefd^riebem ^arl l^at feinen SSatcr nid^t gcfanut. 
!IDic 2^ante f)at bcinen unb mcinen 53rief gelefen* 

26. 

The father has lost his son. This mother has lost 
her daughter. My uncle haS sold his watch. Our aunt 
has sold her scissors. Henry has found his pencil. 
Louisa has found her thimble. I have seen this mq.n 
and his son, this woman and her daughter. My mother 
has lost her pen and her knife. My brother ha^ taken 
his hat I have seen your aunt; has she still her 
horse? This man is very sad; he has lost his wife 
(0rau). Charles has written a letter for his father. 
My aunt has bought this book for her son. ^ 

Nom. bic Sl^attcr, the mother ; bicfc SWuttcr, this mother ; 

Gen. hex SDiuttcr, of the mother ; bicfcr SDiuttcr, of this mother. 

2)ic ^agb, the maid-servant ; bie ^onigiit, the queen ; hit 9iad;Barin; 
the female neighbor ; angcfommcn, arrived ; obgcrcifi, departed. 

5Dic SKutter ber iiiinigin * ift angef ommen. S)er 23ater ber 
9?arf)barin ift abgereift. Qdj l^abe ben ©arten ber 2^ante 
gcfc^eu. §aben ®ie btn Sleiftift be^ ©dj^efter gefunbcn? 
®iefe Sr^ii ift bie ©djttjefter ber S^adjbarin. ©icfcr SKaun 
ift ber 53ruber ber SUfagb. !Da§ 0ub bicfer gran ift iinmcr 
fraul. 

28. 

The bonnet of the mother is beautiful. The sister of 
the queen is not' beautiful. Is the father of the servant 
arrived ? Are you the brother of the (female) neighbor 1 
I am the sister of this woman. Hast thou taken the 
chair of the sister? Have you seen the horse of the 
aunt ? We have known the father of this servant. 

29. 

Xom, ber SSatcr, the f-^thcr ; btcfcr 93atcr, this father ; 

Gen, bc3 55atcr5, of the father ; bicfcr SSatcriJ, of this father , 

iVom. ba5 ^inb, the child ; bicfc« £inb, this child ; 

Gen bc3 filibeg/ of the child ; blcfe« ^mbcfl, of this chila. 



H 



(y^.^JUA^J^ , 



20 



fbiX <E<i^U]6ma^cr, the shoemaker ; ^cr ^^Xit\\itXf the tailor ; ber ®a(t 
ncT; the gardener ; bcr i^aufmann; the merchant ; bet Slrjt; the physi- 
cian ; bod 3immcr; the room ; baS SScH; the people. 

Ohs, All neuter nonns and most masculine nouns take it or e< in 
the Genitive Singular. 

S)ic SKagb bc« ©d^ncibcrd ift IranL 5Dcr ©o^ii be$ 9?ac^* 
Imr^ ifl no(| fel)r juug. 5Dic Slume bc^ ®(irtucr« ift fet)r 
fvtjon, S)cr ©artcn be« iliimge ift fe^r grog* 5Der ^onig 
tft ber ajatcr bc« SSotfe^. 5Dic grau be« Slrjtcd ift immcr 
iufucbcn. ^i) l^abc ben ©artett beSDnleld gcfel^cm S33it 
^abeu bad ^ferb be^ ^mifmann^ gelauft* §aft bu ben Sfci* 
ftift be« 53ruber« genommen? SBo ift bie 2)?agb bee ©^ul^* 
Jitad^ere? 5Die Stpre beS 3^^^^^^ if* itnmer offcn. iDie 
STodjter biefc^ ajJanneS ift abgereift S33ir l^aben bie SKutter 
bicfcS Sinbee gefamtt. ©cr Oarten biefcS §aufe6 ift Hein. 

sa 

This man is the brother of the gardener. Tiis'voman 
is the sister of the shoemaker. This 'cljild is the son 
of the tailor. The door of the house is not open. I 
have seen tho son and daughter of the physician. We 
have seen the horse of the merchant The servant of 
the neighbor is the sister of this gardener. Wty is the 
door of this room open? We have known the son of this 
merchant Th^ dog of the neighbor is faithful. Tho 
mother of this child is arrived. .i 

K 31. ^- ♦ 

Nom, cin 93atcr, cine 5Kuttcr, cin ^ino ; 
Gen. chics S3atcr3, cincr SWuttcr, cmc3 ^iubcs. 

5>er Sftcgcnf^irm, the umbrella ; ba« Scbcrmeffcr, the penknife ; gcjlcnt^ 
yesterday. 

Ohs. Tlie pronouns mciit, bciit, \t\xi, i^r, unfct; euct; are declined 
like txxif cinC; cin. 

©inb ®ie ber ©ol^n cine« Slritcg? Qi) bin ber ©ol^n 
clncS Saufmanne. ^aben ©ie ba^ §alt§ meine« 9?ad;bard 
gefauft? !Dct ©ruber beine« greunbed ift gcftern angcfom* 
men* SBo ift ber SRegenfd^irm beinee Dufele? ftaft bu 
ba6 3^^^^^^^ meiner ©d^wefter gefe^en? SBir Ikben ben 
iBrief beiner 2Jlutter gelefen. 2Rein Dniet \)cA t!o« §au3 
OI)red aSaterS gefauft ^6) l^abe itxi ©tod 3^re« JSBruber^ 
berloren. ©er ®arten unfer^ Slad^bard ift fel^r gro^* Unferc 
SWngb ift bie ffod^ter euved Ofirtncr^. SBo ift ber SWegen* 



21 

fdjirm unfcrcr 2)?utter? ^art Ijat htn gingcrl^ut fcincr 
©d^tocftcr gcnommen. gouifc Ijat ba6 JJebcrmeffcr i^rcr Slant, 
gcnommcn. 

32. 

I have found the hat of a child. Are you the servant 
of my uncle? I am the servant of your tailor. The 
penknife of thy brother is .very good. The pen of thy 
sister is not good. The house of our aunt is large. 
ELenry has lost the letter of his father. Louisa has 
found the pen of her brother. Is the garden of our 
uncle as fine as this one? Wo have toutA the hat of 
your neighbor's son (the hat of the sou of your neigh- 
bor.) Lewis has read the letter of his friend. Louisa 
has bought a flower for a child of her sister. -, 

Nom. hex SSrubcr, the brother ; 

Dot. tern SrubcT/ to the brother ; 
Nom, baS S5u(J^, the book ; bic ©djtDcflcr, the sister , 
Dot. bcm ^Vid)if to the book ; ber ^d)\De^cx, to the sister. 

©cl^ort, belongs; gclicl^ctt, lent; gcgcBeit, given; gefc^icft, sent; ^cxs 
ivrod;en, promised ; gcjcigt, shown ; bcr Srcunb, the friend ; bie Sreurn 
bin, the female friend. 

Obs. 1. If the Genitiye terminates in c5, the Dative takes t, S3ucl^e8, 
^U(i^e. 2. The Dative generally precedes the Accnsative. 3. In in- 
terrogative and negative sentences the English auxiliary verb to do is 
not translated in Geiman. 

5DiefeS §au§ 9et)6rt bcm Dniet mcincS 9^acf)bar6. Qtncx 
©arten getjort bcr 5ldnte mcine^ grcunbc§. Qd) I)abc bem 
SSatcr eincn 53rief gcf^riekn. ©ie Ijat ber gveunbin il^rer 
©d^toeftcr cine Sbiimt gcgeWn. -Sari l^at ber ©djtoeftcr fein 
gcbcrmcfftr gclicl^cn. |)a[t bit bcnt.llrgtc tnein SSn6) gcfdjicft ? 
5^ ^cibc Mefem ^inbe eincn SSogct Derfprodfjcn. §einrid[) l^at 
bicfcr grau unfcm JRcgenf^irm gcHcl^cn. Souife l^at bicfem 
SKanne imfcrn ©arten gcjctgt. Qd) f)alie meinc geber bcm 
grennbe mcinc^ S3nibcr6 gegeben. ^ ' 

34. 

This hat belongs to the gardener. This house belongs 
to the mother of my friend. I have written to my uncle 
and aunt. My sister has lent her thimble to the friend 
(fem.) of your brother. ^ My uncle has sgnt^a watch to 
the Bon of your neighbor (fern-.) Have you given a 






.» 



\ 



22 

chair to this child? Have you lent an umbrella to this 
woman? Does this garden belong to the king? (belongs 
this garden, &c.) . No, it belongs to the sister of the 
king. We have sold oiirTiorse to the friend of our un- 
cle. Does this knife belong to this or to that servant ? 

35. 

Nom. cut S3ud&, a book ; cine Scbcr, a pen ; 

DaL cittern Sdndjt, to a book ; cinet Seber, to a pen. 
UDct S3<tter, the cousin; bie SSafe, the female cousin; $(malte; Amelia; 
^r Oartner, the gardener ; bie Odrtncrin, the gardener's wife. 

©iefer ©artcn gel^ort cincm ©i^ul^mad^er. SDicfcS SKeffcr 
8cl}ort einer 9J?agb. 8outfe l^at ntcinem SSatcr cinen Srief 
cjefc^ricbcn. ^mxid) ^t meiner Wlntttx cine 53Iume gcgeben. 
^c^ f)abc S^xtm Dniet ntcin ^ferb getiel^cn. ®ie l^abcn un* 
fever STante i^r §au^ t)crlauft. Sari l^at feincm greunbe cin 
S3iic^ gcfdjidt. Slmalic l^at il^rer greunbin cinen ^ingerl^ut 
gclie^en. ©tefer Wlann \)at curcr S^ad^barin cinen 25oget ge* 
[d^tdEtSv §aft bu ntcinem SSatcr btefe Ul^r- gcgcben ? §abt 
i()r nnferer Safe cinen 53Ieifttft geliel^en? 

86. 

I have lent my pen to a friend of my brother's. Hast 
thou given thy cat to a friend (fem.) of my sister's ? 
We have given the letter to a servant of the physician's 
Have you sent this flower to our gardener? This gar- 
den belongs to my cousin (masc. and fem.) This um- 
brella does not belong (belongs not) to your brother. 
Does this pen belong (belongs this pen) to thy brother 
or to thy sister? Has Henry written to his father or to 
his mother? Has Louisa written to her uncle or aunt? 

37. 

93oit; of, from, by. 

Of the mother, bet SOhittet, or t)on bet SKutter ; 

cf the child, bc8 ^inbe0, or jjoti bctit £mbc ; 

of the father, bcS 93atcr0, or jjoti bem SSater; 

of this garden, biefeS ©artcng, or t)on bicfent ©attett ; 

of my sister, tnciticr ©d^tocficr, or »oti meitter (b^U)efler. 

5<^ ']'^xcd)t, I speak, or I am speaking ; toir fptcd^ett, we speak, we are 
ipcaking ; Wixi gelicBt, is loved. 

Obs. Of is expressed bv the Genitive, when of relates to a substan- 
^vc, and by i^on followed by the Dative, when of relates to a verb 



23 

Q6) \)abt ba§ ^u^ beS Slr^tcS gcferjcn* ipabcu ©ic biefe3 
©ud^ Don bcm Slqtc erl^alten ? SBir I)abcn ben ®artcn un^ 
fcr^ 5Ka(^bav« gclauft §abcn ©tc bicfen ©artcn Don O^rcm 
9?ad^bar gefauft ? 3^d^ l^abc bicfc Ul^r Don ntcincm Onlel 
cr^ttcn. §cinrid^ l^at cincn 59rief Don feincm SSatcr unb 
(Don) feiner 2Jiuttcr erl^altcn. S6) fprcd^e Don bcm S5ttigc 
mib ber SiJntgim SBir fpred^cn Don Severn S3ruber vmi 
Sl)xcx ©d^ttjcftcr, Don biefem 3Jiannc unb bicfer gran* ©pre* 
^en®ie Don nieincm SScttcr ober ntclner Safe? ^cinric^ 
toirb Don feincm 23ater imb fctncr 2Kuttcr gelicbt 

88. 

I have received this horse from my friend. I have 
bought this cat of thy sister. Louisa has got an um- 
brella from her uncle and a watch from her aunt I 
speak of this dog and of this cat, of this bird and ot 
this flower. We are speaking of your cousin (masc. 
and fem.) Amelia is loved by her uncle and aunt. 
Our gardener's wife has received a letter from her son 
and daughter. Henry is the son of this shoemaker and 
Louisa is the daughter of this tailor. ^ ^ 

<S^6n, beautiful ; f(^oncT, more beautiful ; bcT fc^onjlc, the most 

beautiful ; 

gut, good ; Bcffcr, better ; bet Bcfle, the best ; 

l)0(t^, high : l^o^cr, higher ; bcr t;6c^pc, the highest. 
^^-aS %\)kXf the animal ; bcr £oWC, the lion ; bcr %\0^tX, the tiger ; bol 
3Jietan, the metal ; ba5 ©itbcr, the silver ; ba3 ®olb, the gold. 

Ohs. The Superlative is formed by adding jlc or cf!c, and softening 
the radical vowel. 

$Dic S^afee ift ntijt fo ftarf, al^ bcr §unb. ©cr 85tt)e ift 
ftdrfer, aid bcr Sigcr. ®cr 8(5lDC ift bad ftarf ftc X^tcr. 
2Rcin Sladjbar ift reid^cr, aid ®ie ; er ift bcr rctd^fte 50iann 
bcr ©tabt* ©ad ®oIb ift f^gieiir, aid bad ©ilbcr. 5Da3 
eifen ift nufelti^cr, aid bad ©itber. ©ad gifen ift bad nUfe* 
li^fte aJietall. goutfe Ift fdjoner, aid Slmatie ; abcr ^cinridfj 
ift bad fd^Snfte^inb^ 8ubtt)ig ift jUngcr, aid bu; er ift bcr 
[ilngfte ©o^n unfcrd 9?ad^bard. -Sari ift fitter, aid \S) ; er ift 
bcr attefte ®o!^n nicined Dnicld. ©er §nnb ift fel^r trcn. 
©er §unb ift bad treuefte Z^tx. ©icfed ^yxi^ tft beffer, aid 
iened. ©n bift bcr befte grcunb meined Sruberd. ©ad 
^a\x^ biefcd Sanfmanned ift bad ^odjfte bcr ©tabt. 



y 



24 

40. 

It is, U i^'y that is, ^aS ffl. ^ 

This bird is very little ; it is the snjallest bird. Louisa 
IS very beautiful; she is more beautiful than her sister 
(The) silver is not so useful as (the) iron. The tiger is 
not BO strong as the lion. The tailor is the happiest 
man in the town. Henry is more diligent ttan Lewis, 
but Charles is the most diligent. Thy umbrella is very 
beautiful; the umbrella of my cousin is the most beau- 
tiful. You are not so poor as my cousin ; he is the poorest 
man in the town. My chair is too high; this one is 
higher; but the chair of my mother is the highest. I 
have given my brother the best pencil and the best pen. 

41. 

^ Norn, Wx, who ? 

^ Dat, tocm, to whom ? 

Ace. tocn, whom? 

2Ba3/ what ; ettDOS, something ; md}tS, nothing ; Scmanb, anybody 

somebody ; S'licmanb, nobody ; j^icr, here ; ta, there. 

aScr ift ba? e« ift ber ©d^nciber ; c« ift |)cinrtd; : id) bin 
e§. SOSerift icner3Jiann? g§ ift ber @d;u^mad^er ; eS ift 
ber ©o^tt bcS Slr^te^. 2Ber l^at btefen SSxkf gefd^riebcn? 
aSem gcprt bief er §unb ? gr gel^tirt unfcrm 5Rad^bar. SBem 
geprt biefc U^r? @ie gel^ort mciner ©d^tocfter. S03cm l^a* 
ben ©ic ben §ut gegeben? S3on toern ]^aben©ie biefe 53tmne 
erl^alten? SBen Ijaben ©ie gefe^en? 2Ba« ^aben ©ie t)cr* 
loren? Qd) ijobt nidjt^ Dertoren. §)aben ©ie tttoa^ gefun* 
ben? SBo ift Q^t Sruber? & ift ni^t l^ier. 3=ft ^entanb 
ba ? S§ ift 9?icmanb ha. ^at ^^entanb meine geber genom^ 
men? ^Jiiemanb fjat if)re ^cber genommen. 

^ ■-' 42. 

Who is there? It is my tailor; it is Charles. Who is 
that woman ? It is the wife of tlxe shoemaker ; it is the 
servant of the neighbor. To whom have you lent your 
knife? To the son of the gardener. To whom has your 
brother sold his dog? To the sister of my friend. From 
whom hast thou received this bird? From the father 
of this girl. What have you bought? I have bouglit 
an umbrella for my cousin (fem.) What have you 
taken? I have taken nothing. Of whom do you speak ? 
(fpred^en ©ie). I am speaking of nobody. Has anybo.dy. 
read my letter? Nobody has read your letter. 



•-\ 



25 



\^ 



43. 

Aom. tocl(!^cr, \T>cl*c, ta)etd^c3, ^HwrDr which ; 

Da/, toelc^cm, toclci^er, toclc^cm, to whom or to which ; 

-4cc. toctd^en, t»cl(^c, ti)cl(i^c3, whom or which. 

5)ct Xif^lcr, the joiner ; gcniad^t, made ; auSgegatigctt, gone out ; )ei 
lOCint, cried, wept ; in, in ; tnit, with ; bcl, with (at the house of). 

Obs, The prepositions in, Xdiif bci govern the Dative. 

SBcId^er Sifd^Icr ^at biefcn %x]i^ gemad^t ? SBcIc^c aWagb 
Jat biefen Srtef gcfd^ricben? SOSel^c^ S'inb I)at flcttjcmt? 
JBeldjen §unb l^aben ©tc gefauft? SBeld^c U^r l^aft bu Der 
forcn? SBeld^cS §au« l^at O^r SSater t)erlaiift? SSon tgel 
(^em 2JoHe fpred^cn ®ic ? SWit toct^cm grcunbe btft bu au«* 
gegangcn ? 3'^ toeld^cm ©arten l^at cr ben SSogcI gefunbcn ? 
SBetc^e {^ebcr ^aft bu ba? SBeld^er JJrau l^aft bu bein SSlt\\tx 
gcgcben? SBelt^cm SKabd^cn l^aft bu bcincu gingerl^ut gclie* 
i)cn ? 53ei toeWjcm Saufmanu l^abeu ©ic biefcn SIciftift gc^ 
fanft? Wit toddler gcber l^abcn ®ie biefcn 53rief gcfd^ric* 
ben ? SDlit teem finb ®ic angelommen ? 

44. 

Where is your sister? She is in her garden. Where 
is your brother? He is mth (at the house of) his friencL 
Is your father gone out? He is gone out with the phy- 
sician. Which hat have yo^ bought? Whjch_book have 
you read? Which' pen have you taken? Which boy is 
the most diligent? Which watch is the best? From 
which gardener hast thou received this flower? At the 
house of (bei) which woman hast thou bought this 
bird? In which house have you lost your thimble? 
With whom is your brbther departed? To which man 
have you lent your/iimbrella ? Which stick h^ve you 
lost? Which joiner has made this table ? . 

45. -'^'-^- ' 

JDct 5(vf^/ tli« apple ; tie ©irnc, the pear ; gcgcljctt, eaten. 
Ols. In those sentences, which begin with a relative pronoun, tho 
f rrb is placed at the end. 

2Btr l^abcn cinen ©ruber, tecld^ev fcl^r grog ift. ^^x l^abt 
eine ©djtocfter, ttjcld^e fc^r Hein ift. 3)Zcln ©ol^n l^at ein 
^\xi), xoziijt^ fcl^r nUfelit^ ift. SDcr ®artcu, toefd^en bein 
DnIcI gelauft l^at, ift fc^r fd^cin. SDie fjeber, teethe ntein 
S3etter gefunbcn l^at, ift fel^r gut. ^6) ^abe bad §aud ge* 
feljen, tnel^ed ^%x SSater gelauft l^at. §aben Ste itn gin* 

2 



26 

gerl^ut gcfuubcn, tod6)tn mcinc ©ci^ueftcr t)crIoren ^ot? §afl 
hVL htn Slpfet gcgcffen, totl6)tn bu gcfunbcn l^aft? Q6} I|abc 
bic S3ime gcgcff en, xotldjt i6) gclauf t ^abe. §icr ift bcr SKann, 
iDcId^cm ©ic 3^^rctt Srief gegcbcti l^abcn* |)icr ift bie graii^ 
mi6)tx \mx unfern §)unb Derlauft l^abcn* ^tcr ift ber Slrjt^ 
Don tpeld^m wir fo oft fprc(f|cn. 

46. 

0^9. Instead of toel^et <&c. may be used bet^ bie ba0 ; for iustanoe ; 
Ht (Garten, ben or n>el(^cn )oir gcfauft l^obcm 

I have a dog which is very little. We have a eat 

which is very fine. My father has bought a house which 

is very beautifuL Have you seen the umbrella which 

my mother has bought? Hast thou found the pear 

which thy brother has lost? We have seen the horse 

which your uncle has sold. Where is the thimble which 

you have found? I have taken the pencil which my 

cousin has bought. Henry has eaten th'e apple whicn 

his brother has received. Have you seen the woman 

of whom we speak? Have you read the letter which 

I have written? Have you found the boy to whom thig 

',^ penknife belongs? 

47. 

IDcrjenige tvelc^er, he who ; bicjentge totl^t, she who ; boiSjcnige Wi6^9, 

that which. 

Obs. Instead of berjctiige <&o. may also be used be?/ bt^ bofS ; foi 
instance : bet/ XOti^tt* 

5Dcrjenigc, todijtv gufrieben ift, ift rcid^. SDiefer ginger* 
^ut ift bcffcr, aU berjicnige mciner ®d^n)cftcr. S)iefc Ut)r ift 
Reiner, ofe bicj[enigc beincS S3ruberS. 5Diefe6 §au« ift \d)'o^ 
ner, al^ ba^jenige unfereS Sia^bard. Qd) ^aht nteinen §ut 
dertoren . unb ben nteinen Setters. SBir ^ben beine gcber 
gefunben unb bic beine« greunbcS* ^einrid) l^at meln ^im* 
mer gefel^cn unb bad meinee Dnfete. §aft bu nteinen ©tod 
gcnommen ober ben meined 53ruber8 ? ©ad ift nid)t beine 
S3tunte, bad ift bie nteiner SKutter. <^aben ®ie mein 9Keffcr 
ober bad bed Oartnerd ? ©pred^cn ®ic Don meinem ©ol^ne 
ober t)on bent bed Slrated ? 5Dad ^ferb, toetdjed toir gefauf 1 
l)abcn, ift jiinger, aid badjenige ^^l^red 33aterd- 

48. 
He who is rich, is not always contented. My dog ia 
more faithful than that of my uncle. Our servant is 



27 

Btxonger than that of our ^neighbor. My^room is largex 
than that of my friend. This umbrella is finer than 
that wh?ch we have bought Have you taken my pen 
or that of my sister? This is not your pencil; it is that 
of my brother. I speaf of my book and of" that of 
vour friend. Louisa has losi her thimble and that of 
her mother. Thou hast eaten my apple and that of my - 
cousin. My watch is better than that of my cousin (fern.) 
I have received your letter and that of your brother. 

49. ^ 

^citiri^, Henry ; l^ouifc, Louisa ; 

«&emrl(^j«, Henry's ; 2om\tM» Louisa's ; 

bcm ^tinxifi), to Henry ; bcr fiouifc, to Louisa ; 

von ^cinrtd^, of or from Henry ; toott Souifen^ of or from Louisa. 

SQiliclm, William ; 0Oicn, Vienna ; 

Softann, John ; ^dln, Cologne ; 

(Smtlie/ Emily ; ^a^cn, Aix-la-Chapelle ; 

ffci^tf is called ; gel^t, goes ; toef^nt, lives. 

Qtt ^ctfit Raxi, his name is Charles. 

The hat of Henry, bet «&ut ^dnxi6)9*, to Brussels, nasii liBtuffcI) ai 
Brussels, gu or in ^ruffeL 

gouife. 5Der SSater ffiJU^etmS ift angelommcn. SMe SKuttcr 
fiouifcnS ift abgcrcift 8ubtt)tg« Dnlcl ift fel^r rcic^. (Smu 
(icn« §ut ift fe^r fd^5n. .^abcn ®ie bicfcn §unb t)on $ein* 
ric^ ober Don gcrbinanb crl^altcn ? ShnaKc I)at bem ^^ol^ann 
i^rc gcbcr gcliel^cn. ^arl l^at bcr Smitic cine S3Iume gcgc=» 
ben. ®el)5rt biefer ©arten bem 8ubn)ig ober ber Caroline ? 
SBo ift SSU^elm ? & ift mit Sari mb S^ofe^jl^ au«gegangen. 
SBo^nt O^r Dniet in Srilffct ober in ^ari«? Oe^t Sfft 
Setter m6) SBien ober nad| 53erlin ? 3ft ^ari« grader, aU 
?t|on? Oft O^r greunb Don Mn ober t)on aad^en? 

Ob». The proper names of persons are declined with or without 
an article. If declined with t^'ie article, they remain unchanged. 
Without the article, the feminine names ending in c add, ltd in the 
Genitiye and n in the Dative.. 

50. 

My cousin's name is John. The daughter of our 
gardener's wife is called Jane (3^or}anna). Art thou 
Charles's or Ferdinand's brother? Where are Henry 
and Lewis? They are in my father's room; they are 

fone out with William, Have ybu lent ^our pen to 
[enry? Who has given this flower to Louisa? Wo 



28 

have received a letter from Lewis; he is at Dlissel* 
dorf. The scster of Charles is very short The bonnet 
of Josephine is too large. My tincl^ lives in "Vienna 
and my cousin in Paris. My friend goes to Cologne. 
William is arrived from Amsterdam. Have you seen 
John and Lewis? My garden is largfer than that of 
Emily. Louisa is gone out with her mother. Henry 
k departed with his friend Ferdinand. 



^' 



\ 

\'^ PART II 

^■' , 51. 

Nom, bte Xi\6)e, the tables ; 

Gen. bet Xi\6)e, of the tables ; 

Dot. ben ^if(|)en/ to the tables ; 

Ace, bie Xtfd;e, the tables. 

Obs. Substantives of one syllable take e in the plural. Those 
nouns the radical Yowel of which is a, 0/ it, an, generally change 
It into h, if U/ oa. The Dative plural of all substantives terminates 
in tl. ^ 

!Cic grcunbc mcinc« SSaterS ftnb angelommcn. 5Dic 
©oI)nc unfere« SWa(^bar« finb fc^r flcilig. 5Dic ©tii^Ic, 
toeld^c toir gefauft l^abcn, finb fetjr fd^on. §aben @ie bic 
©tabic SBien unb Serlin gefe^cn ? Sari l^at btc §Utc mu 
^etm§ unb gcrbtnanbd gcfunbcn. SKein SSater l^at bic S3ricfe 
3^rc« Dnicte ni^t crl^attcn* 5Da8 ©ifen unb ba6 ©itber 
finb aWetattc. 5Dic ^fcrbc finb niifelic^cr, or^ bic §unbc. 
©ic aJicigbc enrcS 5Rad^bar« finb fc^r flei^ig. SDic Slcrjtc 
in biefer ©tabt finb fcl^r reid^. SBcm l^aben ®ic bic ©tiJcfc 
mcine^ S3rubcr« gcgebcn ? SDic SHjicrc, tpctd^c xoxx in ^fl^rcm 
®artcn gcfcl^en ^aben, finb fc^r ftarl. fiabcn ©ic bcu 
grcunbcn ^einrid)« gcf^ricbcn? ®cbct biefen §unb ben 
©5^nctt tttcineS Srnber«. S33ir fprci^en t)on \^tn Sricfen 
^e« Slrjle^. 

52. 

Thy brother has bought the dogs of my neighbor. 
The friends of Charles are ill. Have you seen the 
horses of our uncle? Who has written the letters of 



29 

my brother? Where are the hats that you have bought? 
I have received this bird from the sons of the phy- 
sician. I have given your umbrella to the maid-ser- 
vants. (The) metals are very useful. (The) dogs are 
very faithful. Your brother is gone out with the sons 
of our neighbor (fem.). Colome and Aix-la-Chapelle 
arc towns. I speak of Henry's and William's friends L^ 

53. M ^^ 

3)cr 3al^tt, the toothy bet SRing, the ring ; (X^-^ 'a, 

bet Suf, the foot ; bic Sluf, the nut ; ' .4 )yy 

bic ^atih, the hand ; bcr ^aunt/ the tree ; * / "^ 

bcr ^(i)VLf), the shoe ; Xmrm, warm ; tcitt, clean ; 

bcr ©trumpf, the stocking ; n)cifi, white. 

Obs. The determinative words, as : btcfcT, jcncr, mem, bein, Wclci^cc 
Ac. takf in the plural the same terminations as the article. 

30?einc 3^^^^ finb fcl^r tt)cig. Qii) Italic bic gligc fc^r 
warm. S^)xc §)anbc finb nid^t rein. §at bcr ©c^ul^mad^cr 
mcinc ©d^u^c gcbradjt ? SBcr f)at ntcinc ©tritm^jf c genoui=* 
men ? @tnb ba§ ^l^rc ©trUm^jf c ? S)ad finb ni^t bic mei* 
ncr ©d^tueftcr. S33o l^abcn ©ic bicfc Siilffe gclanft ? §afceu 
©ic meinc Sclumc fd^on gefc^en? S3on tt)eld)cn SS'dnmcn [pre* 
i)m ©ic ? aSon benicnigcn, njcld^c id) Don bcm ©totncr bcr 
^Snigin gefauft Ijabt. Unfcrc gi^eunbc finb fd^on abgcrcift. 
3Ber I)at bicfc ^ricfc gefd^riebcn ? 3Jicin SSatcr ^at fcine 
^fcrbc unb §unbc Dcrlauft. 3Kcin 9tad^bar ^at cincn 49rief 
Don feinen ©ol^ncn crl^attcn, JDctd^c in 53erfin finb, §at 
S'cmanb mcinc 9Iingc gefunbcn ? Sliemanb f)at bcinc Stingc 
gefcl^cn. ^axi xoixi Don feinen gfennben getiebt. 

54. 

Their, il^r ; those, bieicnigcn or bic. 

Charles and Ilenry have lost their sticks. The shoe- 
maker has not made your shoes. Where have you 
bought these tables and chairs? From whom have 
you received these pencils? My feet are very small. 
My sister has lost her thimbles. I have received these 
letters from my friends. These trees are higher than 
those. These animals are very fine. These servants 
are very lazy. Have you already seen our hats and 
our rings? Emily's stockings are whiter than those 
of Louisa. Your teeth are not clean. My hands are very 
warm. I have found these nuts in my imcle's- garden. 



80 
55. 

me, all. 

3)a« i^mb, the ehVA ; bad JDorf^ the Tillage ; 

bad Sdviii), the book ; bad ^iatt, the leaf ; 

bad $aud/ the house ; bad So(i^/ the hole ; 

bad 3)o(f/ the peoj le ; bad ^vi^n, the chickcp : 

bad ©lad, the glass ; bad Stalh, the calf ; 

bad f&axih, the ribbon ber SDumt/ the worm ; 

bad ^Icib, the dress ; ber SBolb/ the forest ; 

bad <B6)\e^f the castle ; ber SJ^antt/ the man, the husbaLi 

Obs. All these monosyllabical nouns are exceptions from the 
general rule, and form their plural by adding er, and softening th« 
radical vowel. Substantives ending in' tl^um follow the same rule, as : 
3rrtt)um, Srrt^umcr (mistake). 

5Diefc §aufcr fiub ^5^cr, ate jicne* ^enc JSBSnbcr fmb 
fc^dncr, ate bicfc* SDcine 59Uci^er finb nU|}H(i^cr, ote bie 
?ouifcn«» SJicfc SWuttcr f)at x^n Sinbcr Dcriorcm S)cr 
^5nig fjat [cine ©c^Wffer Dcrlauft* aSon tocm l^aben ©ie 
biefe ®Iafcr cr^altcn? SBer tjat bicfc 0cibcr itmaH^fi 
©iefer aBann ift fd)on fel^r att; cr l^at atlc [cine S^l^nt Der* 
lorcn* SBo [inb 9t)re grcunbc ? SlCe meine grcunbc fmb 
auSgcgangcn. 5Dic[e SSotfcr finb fcl^r gliidlidj; fie l^abcn 
cincn Sfinig, toeldjer fc^r gut ift 2)ic ^iinige finb nid^t 
immer glildlid^* ^einrid) unb SBill^cIm l^aben aCe ifjre S3il^ 
d)cr tjcrtprcn* 2lCe cure fflricfe finb angcfommcn* ffiir 
I)abctt alle bicfc SKUffe in bem SBalbe unfcrcS Dnicid gcfun* 
ben. !Ccr SSater ift mit alien feincn fiinbem abgcrelft. SJicfc 
5Dorf er finb f el^r f d(|5n. SSon teelt^cn SJCrfcm fprc^en ©ic ? 
a03el(^e ©tabte I)aben ©ie gcfcl^cn ? ©inb alle biefe ©trilm^^fe 
filr gouifcn ober filr (Smilien ? §abcn ©ie ben ^inbern bc« 
3la^hax^ einen SSogtt gegeben ? SBcr l^at alle biefe god^er in 
meincnt SCif d^e gcmadjt ? 

56. 

Not yet, \\Q(ii nid^t 

Where are your children? My children are gon 
out Their friends are arrived. Have you not yet 
written your letters? Who has boueht all these, rib- 
bons? llenrietta has lost all these books. We have 
seen all these houses. Have you also seen the castles 
of the king? Who has taken all my nuts? These 
children have lost their hats. Give these glasses tc 
Henry and these rings to Louisa. This tree has 



31 

lost all Its leaves. My neighbor has sold all his 
chickens. 

57. 

S)cr ©tiefeh the boot ; ber ^tfd^ct/ the coachman ; 

ber ^)pitQtl, the mirror has SctiftcT, the window ; 

ber Scffeu the spoon ; bad SO^db^en, the girl ; 

bie 9labeL the needle r ber Gngl&nber/ the Englishman ; 

bte ®cibd, the fork ; ber 3taiicner, the Italian. 

Obs, Masc. and neuter substantives ending in er^ el/ eiti do no 
•hange in the plural ; the feminine nouns ending in er and e( take n, 
except : hit ^DtntteXf the mothers ; bie ^((ter, the daughters ; ber S3et« 
(cr, the cousin, bte ^ettcnt* 

!Die ©d^ncibcr unb ©^u^mad^cr in bicfer ©tabt pnb attc 
rei(|. SJicfc ©ngtiinbcr finb fcljr flci^ig. 2Jicinc JSBruber 
finb attc Irani. |)abcn ®ic mcinc ©ci^iDcftcrn (jcfel^en ? SBo 
i)abm ©ic bicf c Slcffcr, goffrin unb Oabcin Qdm]t ? 5Die 
genftcr S'^rcS 3i«tmer^ finb offcn. ^arl unb ^dnxid) finb 
meinc S^cttcrn* S33ir l^abcu bicfe SS5gcI in bcm SBalbc gc* 
funbcn. 5Dic Siigcr finb fe^r ftart SDicfc SKabd^cn finb fc^v 
gtildlic^. ©inb ntcine Z^6)kx au^gcgangcn? ©inb mcinc 
3intmcr nid^t fcl^r \^'6n ? ©at S^rc 2^antc allc bicfc ©<3ic* 
gel gclauft? SBcr i)at bie Siii^cr unb {Jcbcrn biefcd SKab* 
^cn« gcnommen ? 2Bcm gel^orcn bicfc ©drtcn unb $auf er ? 
gouifc unb ^enricttc l^abcn il^re 5KabcIn Dcrlorcn. 5Dcr 
©ci^ul^mad^cr fjat Qf)Xt ©t^ul^c unb ©tiefel no(f| nicf|t gc* 
brac^t SBer finb {cue aKiinncr? g« finb 3'talicner; e^ finb 
bie Dnlel nteined greunbc^* S)icfe SDiUtter finb fcl^r traurig; 
fie l^abcn attc il^re Sinber Dcrloren. 

58- 

The shoemaker has brought your shoes and boots. 
The houses of this village are all very fine. Bring us 
(bringcn ©ie un^) the spoons, forks and knives. Where 
have you bought these needles? Your brothers and 
sisters are not come. Lewis and Ferdinand are cou 
sins. Our mothers have seen the gardens of the king. 
Mv sons have bought the mirrors of my neighbor. 
(The) horses are bigger than (the) tigers. Are my 
ttockings clean? Are your shoes new? 

59. 

(5m«, (em) on>; \jier, four; 

mei, two ; funf, five • 

breif three; \t6)9, six 



32 

fteben, seyen; tlcimgcl^n, niaeteen; 

'ad)tf eight ; paniij^ twenty ; 

ncun, nine, oie SfumaBc, the task-, exercise 

gcl^n, ten; baS ^a^x, the year; 

c(f, eleven ; bic SBod^e, the week ; 

itoolf, twelve ; bcr QKonat, the month (pi. c) 

oreigcBtt, thirteen ; bet Stag, the day ; 

ijiencl^n; fourteen ; bie ©tunbe, the hour , 

f unfgcl^n, fifteen ; bcr ^taBc, the boy ; 

jcdjSjcl^n, sixteen; (cit, fiince (Dat.); 

fiebcmel^n, seventeen ; eS qiht, CS i\t, there is ; 

a(^tjc5n, eighteen ; « c5 qiht, c5 {Inb, there arc ; 

qcma^t, made, done. 
0&9. Substantives encting in e take n in the plural. 

^'tt unfenn §aufc [inb biergel^n 3tittmcr» ^n bicfcm S^m 
met finb ixod SCifd^c unb jttjolf ©tu^tc^ Unfer JJad^bar ^al 
fUnf ^nber: brei ®ot)nc unb gtt)ci SlCdjtcr. SBlr l^abcn t)ier 
Sateen imb brei §unbe. 3^n curem Oarten finb funfge^n 
Sd'dnrm. ®a« 3=a^r ^at stofilf 2Konate; bcr 2Konat f)at Dier 
SBoi^cn; bie SOSod^c l^at [ieben Za^c. QS) ijobt t)on nicincnt 
SJatcr fcd^« Sle^jfel unb a6)t 59imen cr|aften. SKein Dnfcl 
I)at meiner @(f)tt)cftcr ein }Stbtxmt\\tx unb stDanjig gebern ge* 
gebem |)aft bu fd^on atte beine Slufgaben gemad^t? 3^o!^ann 
$at nod^ niijt feine Slufgabc gemad^t SJJiein ©ruber ift fd[)on 
brei O^^i^c in Berlin. |)aben @ie nod^ m6)t gcgeffen ? ^^j 
I)abe fc^on feit brei ©tunbcn gegeffen^ Qft S^x SSater nod) 
nid^t angclommen? Sr ift fd^on [eit 3tt)ci S^agcn angefommen. 
SDlein Dnfcf ift feit t)ier 2Konatcn Irani; cr l^at fcit a^t SCagen 
nid^t§ gegc[fen» SWein Srubcr ift neun S^ljxt alt, aber nteine 
©d^mefter ift nod^ nidjjt fieben ^a^re alt. 

60. 

My father has three houses and two gardens. This 
man has five boys and four girls. My friend has seven 
sisters. We have received six letters. In this town 
there are twenty physicians. My cousins (fern.) have 
bought two cats. My cousin is seventeen years and 
two months old. My mother has bought six knives, 
twelve forks and eighteen spoons. Our joiner has 
made three tables and ten chairs. We have received 
this week fifteen chickens and three calves. William 
has eaten five apples, four pears and eleven nuts. 
Henry is arrived three days ago (since three days). 
My uncle is departed a twelvemonth ago (since a 
year). Charles and Ferdinand have made six exercises 



83 

There are two holes in this door. The gardener haa 
given three flowers to my children. 

61. 

35a« S3rob, the broad ; SBrob, some or any bread 
2)05 %id\a)f the meat ; %ki\i), some meat ; 
bic SCc^fcl, the apples ; Sic^)fcl, some apples. 

3)ct SBcitt, the wine ; bic ^irfd^c, the cherry ; 

has SdkXj the beer ; t)u ^pflaumc, the plum ; 

ba3 SBajfcr, the water ; bic JDtntc, the ink ; 

baa ©emiifc, the vegetables ; ^ic 8u^^c, the soup ; 

bcr Sttcfcr, the sugar ; %tatt pnbct, one finds, they find ; 

bcr ^affcc, the coflfee ; gctrunfctu drunk ; 

gcben Sic tnir, give me ; ptingcn (^ic uni, bring us. 

S^ ^ait 53rob unb gleif(^ flcgcffcn. SBir fjobcn ^irfc^cn 
mib $p^i^»^^tt gefauft. SWein 4Bruber 1)at SBein gctrunlcn 
unb i^r l^abt S3icr unb SBaffcr getrunlcn. 5Dcr ©c^ul^maci^cr 
xmdjt ®4u^c unb ©ticfcl. !Der SEifdjter mai)t Zi\i)t unb 
©tU^Ic. SSd biefcm S^aufmann finbct ntan JSBuci^er, gebcrn, 
5Dintc unb SIciftifte. ©cbcn ®ic ntir ©u^jpc unb ©cmflfc. 
^ier ift SSein unb SBaffcr, unb ba ift Saffcc unb SKUd^. 
©aben ®ic audi) ^ndtxl SBir l^aben 3Kc[fcr unb Oabein, 
Saffctt unb ©Wfer gelauft. 5Dcr ©(irtncr l^at bet gouifc ^ir* 
fc^en unb Slunten gcgcben. ^aben ®ic fdjon Saffce gctrunfcn? 
On iencm §aufc finbet man ©^Jicgel, SRcgcnfc^trnte, S3(inbcr, 
Singcrl^utc unb Siabeln. SKetne grcunbin fjat Don il^rem 
Onfd Sirncn unb S^itffe crl^altcn. SBir l^abcn 8i)tt)en, SCigcr, 
ffafecn unb ^nbc gcfc^cn.. Qn biefcr ©tabt gibt c« ©i^ncl 
Dcr unb ©d^ul^mad^er, n)ct(^c fel^r rcii^ finb. 

62. 

SBoHctt (Bic ? will you (have) ; gcfdnigft, if you please. 

Will you have some wine or some beer, some milk oi 
some water ? Give me, if you please, some soup, vege- 
tables, meat and bread. Where does one find (finds one) 
ink and pens ? Are you a father ? Have you children ? 
Has your father bought any trees or flowers? My bro- 
ther has books and friends. Here is coffee and sugar 
My neighbor has birds, dogs and horses. We are speak* 
ing of towns and villages, of houses and gardens. Iron 
ftnd silver are metals. Vienna and Berlin are towns. 
What have you made? We have done exercises (2luf« 
gaben gcmadjt), we have written letters. We have eaten 
ftpples and plums, and we have drunk some wine and beer 



9* 



84 

SeniQ/ little, few ; ju, too ; tole? how ? 

\)id, much ; had Dh% bie gru^t, the fruit; 

ticlc, many ; haS @clb/ the money ; 

Qcnug, enough ; fccr ^feffcr, the pepper ; ^ 

mif)X, more ; hoi ©alj, the salt ; 

toeniger, less, fewer ; ber ^tn], the mustard. 

§cmrid^ ijat t)iel ®ctb ; cr l^at mel^r ®ctb, afe id^- ®cbct 
Bie mir cin tDcnig glcifc^^ S(i) l^abc gcnug Srob* 5Du l^afi 
ju t)icl ©al} unb ^fcffcr. SBBg l^abcn tDcniger Dbft, ate Qi}v. 
Pouifc l^at njenlger gcbcm, afe\g)enrictte. .Sari l^at mtf^x 
Slufgaben gemat^t, ate Subtoig* §aft bu fo t)icl ©elb, ate 
mcin ©ruber? ©er Slruie ^at toentg grcunbe* e« gibl 
toenig SWemc^en, iDcId^e gufrteben finb. @tbtn ®ie ber §en* 
riette m6)t ' gu t){el ©enf. SKein ©ruber I)at gu Diet SBein 
getrunfen. 5Diefe SWutter ^at Diete ^inber. SDiefer 3Kanu 
$at tJietc Sfumen. ®ie t)ielc §unbc i)at S^^ SJ^^tcr ? (Ss 
gibt btefeS ^^al^r toenig Sirfcfien, aber t)tete ?ppaumen. 3Kein 
greunb i)at biefe SBo^e ntel^r ©riefe er^Iten, ate tci^, §at 
bein SSater fo Diele ©ud^er, ate mein Dniet? ®thtn ®te 
mir gefaCigft cin ttjenig IDinte. SBotten ®ie nod) me^r ? 0^ 
l^abe genug. 

64. 

There is much fruit this year. Our gardener has 
many trees and flowers. Will you have a little meat or 
some vegetables? Have you mustard enough ? I have 
salt and pepper enough. Our neighbor has much money; 
he is very rich. Give a little wine to this woman. This 
man has few friends, but he has many dogs and cats. 
There are many birds in this forest. How many phy- 
sicians are there in your town? Have you as many 
apples and pears as we ? We have not so many as you, 
but we have more plums and nuts than you. Charles has 
fewer friends than Henry. This tree has fewer leaves 
than that one. There are too many chairs in this rocra. 

65. 

fDaiS <Btu(f, the piece ; bad ^u^etib/ the dozen ; 

bic ^CL\6)t, the bottle ; ber ^oro, the basket ; 

bie Xa\\t, the cup ; bte £emtoanb, the linen ; 

bad $mnb^ the pound ; boiS Xa\6)mt[i6)f the pocket hand 

bie (mCf the yard, ell ; kerchief; 

hca $aar/ the pair ; bet ^gatibf^ul^/ the glove ; 



85 

ba£ <&cmbf the shirt ; bcT J^fifCy the cheese , 

btc «6aldbtnbe, the cravat ; bet @4)mfett, the ham. 

Obs. The words $funb; $aar and ^u(^nb are invaria'ble when thejf 
are preceded by a number. — The English word of which follows th« 
names of weights and measures is not expressed in German. 

3Wcinc SKuttcr \)at ber ficnrtette brci ^aar §anb[d^u^c, 
fcc^^ $aar ©triimpf c, itoti loufeenb $cmbcn unb cincn ^orb 
Siv\i)tn gefc^icft S^ bicfem goffer finb gcl^n eCcn 8cin^ 
iDanb, Dicr 2:af(^cntil^cr unb fc(^« ^atebinbcn. SKcin Sru» 
bcr ^at gtoci $aar ©c^ul^c unb cin $aar ©tiefet gclauft. 
SBir ^abcn bcm grcunbe unferS Dnicte giDangig ^funb ^^der 
unb jcl^u tJtafd^cn SBcin gefc^idt. @ebcn ©tc mtr cin ©tild 
Safe, cine gtafc^e 4Bicr unb cin tecnig ©cnf. S^ ^^^^ fin 
@Ia« SBcin getrunlcn unb cin ©tild ©cfjinfcn gcgcffen. SBiv 
^abcn bei unfcrer greunbin cine 2^affc Saffec getrunlcn. 
©cbcn ©ic ntir cin ®ia^ SBaffer unb cin ©tfid 3wdcr. 
aWeine ©d^tocfter I|at gtoci ^funb Sirft^cn unb cin ^funb 
^flaumcn gclauft. SBir l^abcn cin !Du<}cnb ©tftl^Ic bei bcm 
iifc^Icr unferd Dnfcte gclauft Qd) ^abe t)on bcm ©Brtncr 
cincn Sorb Slumcn crl^attcn. 

66. 

The shoemaker has made a pair of shoes for Louisa 
and two pair of boots for William. We have drunk two 
glasses of wine and three glasses of beer. Give me a 
bottle of water and a little meat and bread. Will you 
have a piece of ham or cheese ? My aunt has bought. 
a dozen of cravats, two dozen of shirts and ten pair of 
gloves and stockings. How many shirts have you ? I 
have three dozen. This linen is very fine ; how many 
yards have you bought ? I have bought twenty yards. 
That is not enough for ten shirts. My uncle has given 
to Henry a penknLfe, twenty pens, two cravats and a pair 
of gloves. Ferdinand has bought a pound of plums, six 
pounds of coffee and two yards of ribbon. Will you have 
a cup of coffee or a glass of wine? Give me, if you 
(please, a glass of water. 

67. 
Sing, gutcr, (jutc, fiutc«; Plur. Qute. 
S^le^^t, bad ; t)Ottreff(t<^, excellent , 

folt, cold ; ItebettinDutbtg, amiable , 

ftub(<^(* pretty ; ba« ^aipitx, the paper ; 

»obt, dead ; baS ®<{4^' , the affair, basineo 



S6 

Obs. If the Adjective is not preceded by an article or any oUiei 
ieterminatiye word, it takes the terminations of btefer^ hu\t, biefc<. 

©icr ift '9Uter ©d^infcjt^ gutc ©u))))c unb 9utcd JSrob 
^aben ©ic gute^ ^o^Jier unb gutc ©inte? SBtr l^abcn 
fc^tcd^ten SQSein unb gute^ ^ier getrunfen. Unfer ©artner 
f^at Dortrepdje^ Dbft. Un[ere 2J?agb ^at gutcn ©cnf^ abcr 
c^ted^ten ?Pfcffer gefauft. gbuarb l^at gutc greunbc unb 
iiUfetid^c JSiic^cr. 2Rcin Dnict J)at fd^onc ©ftrlen unb grogc 

taufer. (guer 9lad^bar Ijat trcuc ^unbc. 3^ol^ann, gcbcn 
ic mir cin ®Ia« SBaffer I SQSottcn ©ic faltcd ober toarmeS 
Staffer ? SKetnc ©(^toefter l^at tin ?Paar pbfc^c ^anbfd^u^c 
gefauft. gucr S3rubcr fprlc^t immer Don gutem SQSein nni 
guter ©u))))e, abcr ntc^t Don nu^Iic^cn Sud^crn^ t)on Slufgabcn 
unb ©cfd^aftcn. $ari« unb Conbon finb fc^one ©Ubtc. 
.^cinrtcJ; l^at cin ^aar ncuc ©d^u^c cr^altcn. 

68. 

Have you any good mustard ? We have good bread 
and good meat Your gardener has very fine flowers. 
These children have fine dresses. We have faithful 
friends, amiable brothers and useful books. Give mo 
some better cheese and better beer. At (bei) this mer- 
chant's one finds pretty gloves, fine penknives, and good 
pens. Iron and silver are very useful metals. You 
always have excellent wine. My brother is not gone out, 
he has too many affairs. Henry has bought good paper 
and good ink. We speak of good cofiee, of excellent 
fruit and new dresses. 

69. 
®(n 9utet; einc gute, cin gutcg. 

(Solbcit^ of gold, golden ; gefunb^ healthy, wholesome ; 

fUbcm, of sUver ; Uin, no, none. 

Obs. If the adjective is preceded by the indefinite article, by fctti 
or b^ a possessive pronoun, as : mcin, btin, un\tt, <bc., it takes in thr. 
Nominative Sing, the terminations er, t, tS, and in all other cases en, 
except the Accusative fcm. and neuter, -which is the same as the 
N'ominative. 

Unfcr ©Srtncr ift cin gntcr SWann. (Sure ©ftrtncrin ift 
cine gutc xSxavu (gmi(ie ift cin gutc^ 0nb. SBir l^abcn cintn 
auten SJatcr unb cine gutc SDJuttcr. ^cinrid^ l^at cin fd^iJncS 
^fe£b unb cincn fd^bncn $unb. 8ouifc ^at gro^c S'd^nt, 
abcr ctnc Heine ^anb unb cincn Heincn gug. gcrbinanb 
fft Uiit mcincm jUngcrn JSSvubcr au^gcgangen. ^enrict^r 



87 

:ft mit wciner Bttcicn ©d^tocfter abgcrcift. ®cbcn ©ic biefcfi 
ffliob ctnem armen Sinbe. 5Diefe« gebermeffer gcl^firt ciuent 
{uugen SKanne, ber bci unferm 5Wa(^bar too^nt 8ubtt)ig ift 
bcr ©ol^n cine^ rcic^eh SaufmannS* $aben ®ie guten SBcin 
obcr gutc^ Sier? SBfr fjaben feinen guten SBcin wnb fcin 
gute« JSBier. 2Bcr l^at meinc filberne Ul^r unb metncn golbc^ 
neu 9iing genommcn ? 2Bir l^abcn unf em beften JJreunb Der* 
crcit* Sure Heinen ^Inber finb fel^r gefunb* g^ giebt felnr 
guten ^irfd^en biefe« QQ:i)x. 2Wetn Dnfet l)at feine fd^onfteit 
?Jferbe Derlauft* 4Bift bu mit beiuen neuen ©ticfein gufrteben ? 
^aft bu fd^on Don un[ern guten ^ffaumcn gegeffen? 

70. 

Charles is a good boy. Henrietta is a pretty girl 
That is a happy mother. That is an excellent wine. 
Where is my little Henry, my good Louisa ? We have 
a very rich uncle. William has an old father. Iron 
is a useful metal. The dog is a faithful animal. I 
have received a new umbrella and a gold watch. My 
neighbor has done much business this year. Give thid 
bottle of wine to a poor man or to a poor woman. I have 
no friend in this town. Have you no good pens for this 
child ? Our best friends are dead. This joiner makes 
no good chairs. 

71. 

S)er gutc, btc gutc, ba3 gutc. 

©ePcrtt/ yesterday ; tct (B6)ukx, the pupil, schoolboy 

l^cutc, to-day ; bic ©djulc, the school ; 

i^ lithe, I love, I like ; ba5 fickn, the life. 

Obs. "When the adjective is preceded by the definite article, ot 
any other determinative word, which has the same terminaticu, as • 
btefeT, icnet; &c., it takes in the Nominative Sing, the final t, and in 
all other cases ctt; except the Accusative Sing. fern, and neuter. 

©er gute §einrid^ ift franl. ©ie Heine ®o})^ie ift fef)r 
ieben^miirbig. !Dad arme Sinb Ijat feine SUiutter Derloren 
$Da« ift bcr i)od)fte SSaum in unferm ©arten. Cifette ift bie 
f(et|tgfte Don unfern SDidgben. SDiefer reid^e (SngKnber 
h)of)nt bet meinem Dniel. 9330 l^aben @ie biefe gofbene 
9?abet gefunben ? 2Bem gel^iirt bicfe^ gro^e ^an^ unb j[enet 
(d)5ne ©arten? granj ift ntit bent Ketnen kaxi au^gegan^ 
gen. S33ir l^aBen geftem bet ber guten Smifie ^rfd^en ge« 
geffen. SSer too^nt in biefent fd)5nen ©d^foffe? SBie l^cigt 



38 

biefc pbf(^e «lmnc? S33o l^aben ©ic bicfcn fc^iec^ten S33cia 
unb biefe^ fd^tcc^tc SBitv gctouft? S^ i^^^^ ^^^ flciSiflcn 
©dottier unb bic treuen greunbc* 5Dcr CStoe unb bcr iEigcr 
finb bic ftSrfftctt SC^icrc* 5Da« finb bic gtUdHtd^ftCtt Sage 
mcincg 8cbcn^* ®cbcn @tc bicfcm armcn JKannc cin tocnig 
SBcin. gci^cn ©ic bicfcm Hcincn STOftbd^cn Si)Xtn SRcgcnfc^irnu 

72. 

Every one, Scbcrmonn* 

The diligent pupil is loved by every one. The idle 
child is loved bv nobody. The good King is loved by 
his people. This poor woman has no bread for her 
children. This rich merchant has given much money 
to the poor. I like the pretty flowers and the pretty 
children. I do not like the fine dresses. This fruit is 
not wholesome. My brother has found this gold ring 
to-day. Lewis is gone out with his little brother. The 
father of this young man is a shoemaker. The daugh- 
ter of this old woman is ill. Have you drunk of this 
excellent wine? Will you (liave) some of these fine 
plums ? Which hat have you taken ? I have taken tlie 
white hat Which watch have you sold ? I have sold 
the silver watch. 

73. 

IDer crfle, the first ; unartia, naughty ; 

bet itodtt, the second ; bcfc^toctt; modest ; 

bet ctittc, the third ; bet ^til, the part ; 

bet \)iivte, the fourth ; bet IBanb/ the volnme ; 

bet le^te; the last ; nut, only ; bie Piaffe, the class, 

^et to)te)9ielfle ? what day of the month? 

Obs, Of before the name of a month is not expressed in German. 

!SDicfer jungc aWann ift fcl^r ficigig: cr ift ber crftc in bcr 
^taffc. kaxl ift bcr gtocitc; bcr bcfd^cibcnc ^cinrid^ bcr 
brittc; 3^o]^ann ift bcr t^icrtc; bcr Heine SBill^cIm ift bcr 
fUnftc; f uul ift bcr fc^^tc ; granj ift bcr ad^tc ; Ouftat) ift 
bcr ncuntc ; bcr unartigc dbnaxi ift bcr clftc unb bcr faitlc 
8ubtt)ig ift bcr tctjtc. ^mi ift bcr fUnfte Zf^tH t)on gcl^n. 
giinf ift bcr Dicrtc iE^cit t)on gtoangig. Sin 2:ag ift bcr ftc* 
bcntc St^cit cincr SBodE|c. !Dcn toict^iclftcn bc^ 2)?onat« l^abcu 
njir l^cutc ? SQSir l^abcn l^cutc ben brciicljntcn obcr ben Dicr- 
gc^ntcn. ^'ft e^ nid^t bcr gtoangigfte ? 3Kcin SJotcr ift ben 
brittcn 3Wai abgercift. 3Kcin Onfet ift ben gc^nten 'Dcgcntbei 



89 

tnflclommcn. §abcu @ic ben crftcn unb jtpeitcn Saub? 3«% 
f^aht mx ben crftcn. 

74. 

Louisa is the first in the class; Maria is the second; 
the good Josephine is the third ; Henrietta is the fifth ; 
the modest Sophia is the ninth ; Matilda (3J2at{)t(be) is 
the fifteenth ; the naughty Caroline is the last Three 
is the sixth part of ei^teen. A week is the fourth part 
of a month ; and a month is the twelfth part of a year. 
What day of the month is it (have we)? It is to-day the 
eleventh or the twelfth. We departed on the second of 
May and arrived on the sixteentn. Which volume have 
you taken? Have you taken the third and the fourth? 
I have only taken tne third. 

75 

Singular. Plural, 

^cr mcmtge/ bte memige, ba0 mcinige, mine ; bie meintgen ; 

bet htiniQt, thine ; bcr unfrigC; onn ; 

bet jcinigc, his ; bcr curtgc, S^tigc, yours ; 

bcr il^rigc, here ; bcr iif>rigc, theirs ; 

Icid^t, easy, light. 

Obs. Instead of: bertneintge; bcr betntgc, &o. may be said, mcincr 
mcinc, mcine* or mcini, with the terminations of btcfcr, biefc, blcfc«.— 
The declension of bcr mcmtgC; bcrjcnigc^ &c, is the same as that of the 
adjective, preceded by the definite article. 

!Dctn aSatcr ift grSgcr, ate bcr mcint^c. SWctnc abutter ift 
flctncr^ ate bic bcinige. Unfcr Suc^ ift nlit}Kc^cr, ate bad 
^'^rige. fSltin ©o^n ift nid^t fo alt, ate bcr bcinigc. (5ncr 
$fcrb ift jfingcr, aid bad unfrigc. Unfcrc ^fid^cr finb nii<jU^ 
t^cr, ate bic curigcn. SKcin SSatcr f^at fcine Ul^r t)crtorcn ; 
^cinrld^ l^at and) bic fcintgc t)crtorcn. SKcinc ©d^tocftcr l^at 
bic il^rigc t)cr!auft. 2Kcin SSatcr l^at bcincn ©ricf unb ben 
mcinigcn gclcfcn. SKclnc 2^antc l^at i^rcn ©artcn unb ben 
nnfrigcn Dcrfanft. ^at bcin ©ruber mctncn ©tod obcr ben 
fcinigen gcnontmen ? $at 8ouif c meinen gtngcrl^nt obcr bci 
i^rtgen gcfunbcn? S5cinc Slufgaben finb tcid^ter, ate bie mci 
nigcn. !5)icfe ©ttume finb l}'6i)tt, ate bie unfrigcr. Qn nnfc* 
rcr ©tabt finb mcl^r Slcrjte, ate in bcr curigcn. 

76. 
My thimble is as fine as yours. Tour umbrella is not 
80 large as mine. My son is more diligent than thine 



40 

My friend has sold Lis house and mine. My sister has 
eaten her apple and thine. Has Louisa taken my pen 
or hers ; my pencil or hers ? Henry has read my books 
and yours. Your sisters are younger than ours. We 
speak of our friend and of yours. Is my room smaller 
than thine ? I have promised a book to your son and to 
mine, to your daughter and to mine. I speak of my 
tasks and of thine. This castle belongs to my uncle and 
)c yours. 

77. 

Singular. * Plural. 

Norn. cXf he ; ftc, she ; e3 it ; fie, they ; 

Ace. il^Tt, him ; \ic, her ; c«, it ; fic, them ; 
Ocl^abt, had ; gcJannt, known ; \a, yes ; 

gclcfctt, read ; gcbra^t, brought ; ndn, no. 

§abcn (Sic meincu ©tod? Sa, xi) l)abt i^n. §abcn 
Sic mctnc U^r ? 9lctn, ii) l^abc fie nid^t. §aben ®ic mctn 
5D?effcr? Qd) l^abe eg nld^t. §aben ®ic meinc (Sc^u^e? 
Sa, id) I)abc fie. SBo ift mein $unb ? Qi) l^abc i^n nid^t 
flcfc^cn. 2Ber ^at meinc geber genommen ? 5Dein Srubcr 
$at fie genommen. SBo ^oft bu btefe^ S^afc^entut^ gefunben ^ 
Qd) ^abc eg in i^rem 3^^^^^^ gefunben. 5Diefe 8S5geI finb 
fel^r \d)'6n. 95on teem l^aft bn fie er^alten? ©cine (S^toefler 
ift fel^r fleipig; meinc SDtotter liebt fie fet)r. §aben ®ic met* 
nen Dl^etm gelannt? Qd) fjabe i^n ntdjt' gclannt. SDieg ift 
fin nii^Iit^eg SSxid) ; *]^aben @te eg f d^on gclcfen ? 2Bo ift 
mein gingerl^ut? Qd) fjabc i^n Ql)xzt ©c^tocfter gcgeben; 
fie fjat i^n Dcrloren. ^at ^'cmanb meinc ®abel genommen ? 
^art l^at fie genommen. ffiJem ^at ber ®Srtner attc bicfc 
©tnmen gefd^ictt? Sr fjat fie S\)xcx SWutter gefc^idt. ^at 
^einrid^ beincn Sleiftift get)abt? • 5Kein, er l^at iljn l^eute 
uic^t ge^abt. 

78. 

Has the shoemaker brought my boot? Yes, he has 
brought it Hast thou already done thy task? I have 
not yet done it. Have you seen my new room ? No^ 
I have not yet seen it Where hast thou bought these 
pretty rings ? I have bought them in Paris. Who has 
had my penknife ? I have not had it, your brother has 
had it. I have received a letter from my aunt, have 
you read it? Have you already seen the king ? I have 
uot yet seen him. You have a good pen ; lend it to 



41 

my sister. There is your brother; do you see him? 
Do you not see him? Where are your glovea? Lend 
them to your aunt. Whore is your umbrella? Give 
it to this child. My aunt is dead; did you know her? 
Which books have you there ? Have you read them V 
Where is thy dog? My father has sold it 
79. 

3*l>lii,un.>:vn, IhaTflbcen; 
bu b'\\{ l;i'u<i''i'^i, thou lioat been ; 
a iff iicwicn, ha baa been ; 

i&r (nb ijViivJLnl/you hnvo been'; 
fit (itip [IlIViJvii, they haya been. 

$,cr,Mr.; " -' — -.— - 

bet ^err, gontlcn 

SrSulein, J" 

baa gtauhi , 

Sflabame, Mndnm, Mrs. ; 

fcie !DonK, tha lady ; 
Jbat crfle 3Ral, tho first time ; US Ic^U iSfoI, the last time ; (in Wat, 
unoe i ffoti WtH, tnice. 

Obs. The word $cn takee in nil coses of the Singular n, and in 
all cases of the Plural en. It is also used with the article in the sense 
of Ur. In speaking politely, the words frcr, ^au and ^^ein are 
naed as a title, aa in French, for instance : 3^r ^cTT SJatcr, your 
father; 3&K Srau BBj^ter, year motlier; S^w griultin ©^nxpctn, 

®cr ift tjier eeroefen? fierr fStoU ift Ijiet gEWefcn; et 
^t biefeS -^uc^ geliradjt. Sift bu bet bem ®d)u|mad^er qc 
wcfcn ? Qi) bin Ijcule 6et beiiient ©i^ul|inai^er flcwjefen ; er 
fiat 3^te @Hefe£ ft^on gcmnc^t. SEBo [eib ifit biefen 2)?ot()Eii 
geioefcrt ? SBir finb bei iinferm gtEiiiibe ffiarl gciuefen, mX^n 
fe^r firon! ift. SDiefcr ^nru ift brct ^a^re in ^'^tt fleroefcir, 
unb feine iSriiber finb fe^r tange in itonffontinopel geirefEn. 
S)u bift nidjt flei^tg flcWEfEU, bu I)ttft bcine Slufgaben noi^ 
iiidjt gemoi^t. ^r^ bin geftent Set OTobamc SRobEC gElOEfen; 
fie ift eine fefjt (iebenemiirbigc gtau. 5ft gtSulein 9!. ofl 
in bicferStabt geWefEn? ©ie ift fc^on brEi Mai ^ier g** 
iBEfen. §aben'Ste ben ^errn @d|oU gElmint? Qd) ifobt 
if)n in SQtxiin QEtannt ; loir finb oft jufommen auSflcgonaEit. 
aSie lange finb ©te in aJJobrtb geWEfEu'; Qii bin nur Ein 
tialbES ^atjr ba gemefcn, abet i^ bin brEt SJiertel 3at|r in 
Siffobon geTOEfen. §abEit ©ic bie ^tntn 5RoHet f^on ge. 
if^en ? 3(6 ^nbe fie geftern bsi cincm raeiner greimbe ge[ef|en 



42 

80. 
Have they (has one) brought my shoes ? Yes, they 
have brought them. Has the tailor been here ? No, he 
has not yet been here. Hast thou been at the joiner's ? 
No, I have not yet been there. We have many flowers ; 
we have been in the garden of (the) Mr. Nollet Have 
you also been at Mr. Moll's ? My brother has never been 
more contented than to-day ; he has received from his 
uncle a beautiful gold watch, and half a dozen pocket- 
handkerchiefs. How long have you been in Paris ? We 
have been there six months. These gentlemen have done 
much business ; they have been very happy. Are Messrs. 
N. already departed for Cologne? They have departed 
this morning with their uncle; I have seen them at 
Mrs. Sicard's. 

81. 

3(^ tear, I was ; 
bu toarfl/ thou wast ; 
ex tear, he was ; 
toix toarctt, we were ; 
i^ir toaxct, you were : 
fie toatctt, they were. 
(S^cmol^, fonnerl^ ; ta)arum, why ; aU/ when. 
Oba. When a sentence begins with old, when, the verb is piaoel 
tt the end of the phrase. • 

SBo iDarft bu btefcn SDlorflcn ? Qd) wax bet mcuicm aSct* 
tcr, totldjtv t)on fjranffurt angelommen \]t aWcin JSruber 
unb ic^, njir toarcn bet beittem SJater. Qijxt SCante tear fc^on 
abgcrcift fierr fBloU tear edentate fel^r retd^; cr f)at feit jcl^n 
^'a^ren DiclDcrtoren. SQ3arctt©ienoc^nid^tbet§errnSKab(t|? 
Q^ bin gcftcm ia getocfen^ aber er tear au^gcgangcn. SBte 
alt tear Sf)x S3ruber^ at^ er in S:'6ln tear ? gr tear jcl^n 
ober clf Qafjxt alt 2Bir toaren nid^t gufammen ; er tear in 
fl'fifn unb ic^ toax in ©Uffetborf. aKetne ©d^toeftem toarcit 
fange in Srilffel bci §erm ^Roltet. SBarum finb ©ie geftem 
nic^t gefomnten ? S^ ttjar geftem Iran!. SQSaren btefe §errn 
immer fo rcid^ ? §aben ©tc intmer fo tJicIe fjreunbc gefabt ? 
SSJarft bu btefen SKorgen in ber ©c^ule ? Qi) bin fftVLU nid^t 
In ber ©c^nle getocfen. 

82. 

I was formerly much happier ; I was young and strong, 
Wast thou always as contented as to-day ? My father was 
formerly very rich. You were gone out, when I came (I 



43 

am come.) Where 'were you, when -we (are) arrived? 
My sisters were very ill yesterday. How old were you 
wnen you were at N.? I was fifteen years and six 
months old. Was my room open when you came (you 
are come)? No, but the windows were open. This girl 
was much prettier when she^ was young. John and Wil- 
liam were always my brother's friends. Were you no 
Trith my brother, when he (has) lost his handkerchief? 

83. . 
3^ fjatte, I had ; 
bu l^attefl, tlion liadst ; 
cr l^atte, he had ; 
\oix Ibatteii; we had ; 
fC)r ijattct, you had ; 
fic flatten, they had. 

2)ic ©tent, the parents ; bet 53cfu(^|, the visit ; 
ber ^anbel; the commerce ; ber anberC/ the other. 

SBir l)aitm biefe SBod^c bcu S8t\nS) bcr $errcn TloU, 
totlijt mit il^rer ©d^mcftcr angclommcn finb. Qljx l^attet 
Dicle g^eunbe, ate i^r nod^ {ung toarct. SS3ir l^atten tnel^r 
SB^6)tXf al« il)r. Unfcr Dnfel ^atte cl^cmate Dicic ^ferbc 
imb ^unbe, !J)u tt)arft fcl^r ficigig, ate bu nod^ bcinc St 
tern I)attcft. ©iefc gtTjet Saupcutc warcn cremate fc^r rcid^; 
fic l^atten ctncn gro^cn §anbeL Qi) l^atte gwei S3rilbcr; 
ber cine tear in ffiStcn, ber anberc in Berlin. §aft bn nieinc 
gttjci Sriiber gefannt? Qd) ^aht benienigen gclannt, mU 
6)tt in Serlin roar; ber anberc tear jiilngcr, at^ ic^. SBo 
ift cuer SSetter, ber fo Dtele SSdget l^attc ? (Sr ift f eit einem 
S'atire in ^riiffeL SWein gcbemtcffcr tear Dertoren ; Qf^x 
©ruber ijat c^ gefunben. §attet t^r cure Sriefc fc^on ge* 
\6)xkitx\r aU xoix an^gcgangen finb? SBir l^atten fic nod^ 
ntd^t gef^rtebcn; toir tjatten feine guten gebern unb fein gutc« 
papier. 

84. 

^et SSetflanb/ the intellect ; bie ®vlU, the kindness. 

Mr. Maury was formerly much happier, he had many 
friends, much money, many horses and dogs. Henry 
is dead ; he was a good boy, he had so much intellect 
and kindness, he was loved by everybody. We were 
often in his garden ; his sisters were very amiable anc! 
they had many flowers and books. His parents were 
not rich, but they had a great trade. I was ill yester« 



44 

day : I had eaten too much fruit Hadst t^ou not yet 
done thy exercises when I came (I am come)? No, I had 
not yet done them. My brother had already done his, 
when thou camest (art come.) 

Wttf to me, me ; ^m, tc him, him ; 
' hit, to thee, thee ; ii)X, to her, her. 

gu, to. 

5faufcn, to buy ; f^rciBcn, to write ; 

Vcrfaufett, to sell ; • tcfcn, to read ; 

?icbcn, to give ; fejiett, to see ; 

cil^CTi, to lend ; (btc) £ttjl, a mind ; 

tj^un, to do ; bie 3eit, the time ; 

tna^cn, to make, to do ; ha& SSctgnuQen, the pleasure. 

3(^ fann, I can ; bu fannfl, thou canst ; er fann, he can ; h)ir fonncn, 
we can ; ii)x fdnnet/ you can ; fic fdnneit, they can. 

Obs. The infinitive is placed at the end of the sentence. 

Sannft bu nttr biefc« SSnS) Ux^tn ? QS) lann bir bicfeS 
JSBudj nid^t leil^cn; c§ gel^ort tneincm SSetter |)cmrid^* SBer 
laun bicfcn iSricf Icfen? S^ It^nn i^n Ie[cn; cr ift fel^r 
gut gcfdjricticn. SBir Knncn biefcn 2Korgen nidit fdjrcibcu, 
SBarum fonnct il^rnic^t fd^rcibcn? SBtr Ijabcn Icine 5Dinte. 
gdnncnSie mcincm Srubcr ^'^rc U^r lei^cn? Si) lann 
il)m ntcinc Ul^r ui^t Ict^cn, i(S) fjabc fie bent |)erm ©♦ \)cx^ 
fauft. ^aben @ie nteiner ®d)tt)efter eine tJcber gcgcben? 
Si) f)ait \l)x leine tJeber gegebcn* $aben ®ie 8uft, biefen 
^imb gu faufen? Si) ^Q^^ feinc 8uft, xi)n 3U fanfen; er ift 
utd^t trcu, $at if)r ©ruber I)eute nic^t« 3U tl^un ? gr l^at 
brei 53riefe gu fd^reiben. 2Bir l^aben nod^ gttjei Slufgabcn gu 
madden. S^ ^^^^ gcftern ba« 3SergnUgen gel^abt, 3|r tJrfiu* 
tein ©d^njefter gu fel^en* §aben ®ie ^eit, biefen *53rief gu 
lefen ? S^ ^^^^ vi^ i^^t ^eit^ i^n gu lefen. ^'6mm ©ic 
mir cinen 9tegenfd)irnt geben? Si) fonn S'^nen leinen geben, 
ic^ l^abe nur cinen. S^^ ^^^^ ^ruber f)at bie Oilte, mir ben 
feinigen gu tei^cn. ©inb ®le geftem bei nteinex^STante gen^e* 
fen? 5Rein, id) ir»ar gcftern nid^t bei il^r; id^ l^atte gu Died 
6)cfd^afte. 

86. 

Can you do that? Yes, I can (it); but my brother 
cannot. Will you lend me your penknife? I cannot 
lend thee my penknife ; my sister has taken it. Have 
you given a pen to my cousin? Yes, I have given hin> 



45 

Dne. Hast thou sold thy dog to my sister? I have not 
sold her my dog. Canst thou not do thy exercise ? I 
cannot do it to-day. We can read this book. These 
gentleman cannot write their letters ; they have no 
paper. Hast thou a mind to buy a pair of boots ? Has 
your brother a mind to sell his ring? Have you had 
the kindness to ^ive a glass of water to this poor man ? 
My friend has had the pleasure to see his parents. I 
have not had time to read all these letters. My father 
has had the kindness to buy me a gold watch. Hast thou 
seen it ? I have not yet seen it. Have you been with 
Ferdinand to-day? I have been with him this morning. 

UniS; to 118, us ; tn^, S^nett; to you, you ; tl^nen, to them, them 
©cl^cn, to go ; Ijabcn, to have ; 

fommctt, to come ; fcitt, to be ; totrm, if; 

trinfen, to drink ; imtool^l/ indispoBed ; 

cffcit; to eat ; jc^t, now, at present. 

3^ h>in, I "will ; btt toillft, thou wilt ; ct toi\l, he will ; tort tooKctt, wo 
will ; ii^x toolkt, you will ; jie tootten, they will. 

SBiKft bn mit ntir gcl^cn ? S^ I^^nn nid^t mil btr flel)en, 
tc^ l^abc fcinc ^txt QS) toiti btr cin fd^onc^ Sbni) leil^en, 
toemi bu f(ci|ig bift. ^ann bein S3rubcr l^cute nic^t fommen? 
gr f^at feinc 8uft ju fommen, cr ift unwol^t SBir toottcn iti^i 
unfcrc Sufgaben mac^en. S33otten ©ic cin ®ta^ SBcin trinfcn? 
Qd) fjabe \i)on tin ®ta« ^icr gctrunlcn. Qd^ tolH cin ©tiid 
glci[d^ ober ^afc c[fen. SBoficn @ie ein tDcnig ©enf unb 
©atj? ^onncn ®ie un^ bic[en ©tod tei^cn? Qd) fanir 
^l^ncn bicfen ©tod nid^t tci^cn, mein 4Bruber toitt i^n (jabcn 
^an lann nic^t unglildfic^cr fcin, at« bicfer Junge 3Kann; e: 
ijat feinc gttern unb feinc JiBriiber unb ©d^tocftern Dcrlorcn* 
SBer tt)ia bicfen Stpf el l^abcn? ^^c^ toitt i()n l^abcm ©a^ 
toiKft bu jefet tl^un ? QS) totH cin paax SSriefc fd^rcibcm Qd) 
toiU cud) eincn Sorb ^irfd^cn gcben, toenn ii)t fleigig fcin 
njoCct. S33otten ©ic bic ®iitc l^abcn, mtr einc 9labct gu 
gcbcn? Qd) l^abc ie^t feinc, id^ fann SW^ fcinc gebcn. 
laben ©ic ^cit, mil un^ gu gcl^cn ? Qd) |abc feinc ^tit, mil 
?]^nen gu ge^em ^abcn ©ic ben§erren5W. fdE|on eincn Sefudf/ 
gemac^t? ^6) l^abc t^nen bicfen SKorgen eincn 53efitd^ gemadE|t« 

88. 
What hast thou to do ? I have nothing to do. Wilt 
thou read this book? Yes, I will read it. How is thy 



46 

brother? He is indisposed, be cannot come. Whore 
can one buy these fine penknives? One can buy them 
at the merchant's who lives at our neighbor's. Will you 
give me a little ink ? Can your sister lend me her pen- 
knife ? What do these gentlemen want (what will, &c.)? 
These ladies will buy an umbrella. One cannot be more 
unhappy than I (am) ; one cannot have more misfortune 
than L Give us something to drink. What will you 
(have)? Will you have wine or beer? I have lent you 
my stick. Where are your brothers ? I have sold them 
my dog. This man is very rich ; all these houses belong 
to him. 

89. 

SKid^, me, myself; hid), thee, thyself. 
un«, us, ourselves ; tno), you, yourselves ; 
^6)f one's self, him- her- itself, themselves. 

Sobcn^ to praise ; gelobt/ praised ; 

Itcbetl/ to love, like , qditbt, loved ; 

bcf ud^cn, to visit ; befuc^t, visited ; 

f(^lagen, to beat; gc{ci(;laaen; beaten ; 

jiq) wagcn, to fight; bcr ficbrcr, the master; 

toafd^en, to wash ; Qc\oa\a)cn, washed. 

!©cr Ccl^rcr ^at bid^ flctott, n^cit bu ftcigig gctocfcn btft. 
"Ccin S3rubcr ift cin Bdfer Slnabe; cr fjat ntid^ gcftcrn Qt^ 
fdjiagcn. §aft bu bid) \d)on gcwafd^m? Qii) fjait ntid^ 
nod^ nidjt flcn)a[ci^cn; abcr §cinri^ i^at fid) f$on fcit cincr 
©tunbe gctuafd^cn. SSBarum toiHft bu mcincn §unb fd^Iageu? 
Sr ^at jucin 53rob genommcn. Uufcre gltcrn ftnb uuferc 
bcftcn greuubc; n)ir tooKen fie imnter ticbcu. I^avl, bu bift 
fcl^r uuartig; man lawn bid) nid)t licbcn. 2Bic Dicfc ©Wfer 
SBetn l^aft bu getrunfcn? Qd) i)ait nur cine l^afbe fjlafd^e 
gctrunlen. SBo bift bu btcfen SO^orgcn geiDcfcn ? Qii) bin init 
mcinem SSater bci §crrn 5W. gcwefen. S^t §err 9?. nod^ imnter 
untool^I? gr ift feit gcftern ein toentg beffer; abcr er fann 
nod^^ ntd^t cffen, nod^ trinlen. !Dcr Slrjt tear ijzntt gttjeimal 
6ei i^m. Qit) toiU iijn morgen aud^ befudEien, obcr i^m eincu 
Meincn Sricf fc^reiben. §Iber toarum ^abcn ©ie un6 nod^ nid)t 
bcfuc^t? Qd) Ijdht nod^ leine ^dt gel^abt^ ®ie gu befud^en. 

90. 

Who has beaten thee ? Tour cousin has beaten me. 
With whom wilt thou fight? I will not fight. I have no 



47 

mind to figlit Lewis will fight with Henry. The sei> 
vant has not yet washed my shirts. She will wash 
them now. I have sold you my penknife, but you have 
not yet given me the money, x our children have been 
very good (artig) to day; the master has praised them 
very (much) ; he has given them a beautiiul book, and 
a basket of cherries. Why has the master not yet vi- 
sited us? He has no time; he is always in his school 
He is an amiable man: he is loved by all his pupila. 
There is Ferdinand; hast thou washed thyself, my 
child? Yes, mamma, (2Kama) I have already washed 
myself. 

91. 

8agen, to say, to tell ; glouben, to belieye ; 

\6^idtn, to send ; toiffen, to know. 

SKuffcn, must; i^ muf, I must; bu muft, thon must; er maf, ho 
must ; toir muffen, we must ; i^r muffet; you must ; fie muffcn, they 
must. 

Obs. The Accusative of the personal pronoun is placed before the 
Dative. 

Sonnen ®ie tnir f agcn, too §err TloU tool^nt ? Qd) lann 
c« O^ncn ntc^t fageu. fflBotfen ©le uiir biefc JJcber Ici^en ? 
3d) fann fie Q^mn ntdjt teit)cn, fie gel^brt mir nic^t. Qdf 
aniig ^eute bem grSuIein ©. einen Sefuc^ tnac^cn, fie ift ge* 
ftcrn mit i^rcr SUiutter angefouunen. ^n^t bu iet}t fc^on 
ge^cn ? SBo finb meine ©(^ul^e ? ^at ber ©c^u^mad^er fie 
nod^ nic^t gebradjt ? 9letn, er toiK fie bir in einer ©tunbe 
fd^icten. SBie lannft bu ba6 totffen ? gr Ijat e« mir gefagt. 
S^ fann e« ntd^t glauben. SDein SSruber mug nod^ feine 2luf» 
gaben madEien. SBir mtiffen 5lHed t^un^ toa^ unfere Sltern 
unb getter tooKen. S^x miiffet meinen SSater etnmat befud^en ; 
er Ift felt brei SQSod^en franf. ^einrld^ unb SBlC^elm mUf[en 
Diele Siid^er l^abcn. SQSer f)at bir biefcn 9ting gegcben? SKetne 
S^ante f)at xiju mir gegeben. gouife, ic^ tciU bir ettoa« f agen ; 
bu l^aft meine ©c^eere genommen. Q6) l^abe e^ fc^on gefel^en, 
SKutter. Sotfen ©ie meiner ©d^toefter biefen gingert)ut ge* 
bm? Q6) toiti i^n i\)x iefet gcben. 2Ber l^at 3^ncn biefcn 
Srief gefc^rieben ? 3Kcine Safe Ijat i^n mir gef^rieben. 

92. 

My friend has had the kindness to send me a hasket 
of cherries. You have not yet sent me my book. I have 
not yet had time, to send it you. Who has taken my 



48 

Sen? I cannot tell (it) thee. Wilt thou not believe me? 
!his penknife belongs to my brother; thou must give 
it hiuL Charles will not lend me his umbrella. Why 
will he not lend it thee? My uncle is arrived. Your 
brother has told (it) us. Who must do that? Your 
sisters must do it You must tell it to Mr. Moll. This 
letter is not well written; I cannot read it Hast thoa 
my stick? No, I have it not I have lent it to you 
You Iiave not lent it to me. 



PART III. 



93. 



3c^ loBe, I praise ; I am praising, I do praite ; 

bu lobcji; bu loh\tf thou praisest; &c. ; 

cr lohct, cr Uht, he praises ; 

\m loBen, we praUe ; 

i()r lobct, i^ir lobt, you praise ; 

jic Icbcn^ they praise ; 

Sinbcn, to find ; has Xnd), the cloth ; 

n)oI;ncTt/ to live, to dwell ; bic ©trajc, the street ; 

brmgeit, to bring ; fu^cn, to seek, look for. 
tfjeuct/ dear ; 

aBa« fud^cn ®ic ? Qd) fud^e meine tjebcr. 2J}c{u ©ruber 
fud^t fcincn SIciftift. SBir fud^cn unfern ^unb. ©icfc S:hu 
ber fud^en i^re JSBild^cr. S33o faufcn ®ic ^^r ^a^tcr? SBir 
faufcn unfcr ^a^jicr bet bem S3ud^^anbter. Qi) finbe meutcn 
StodC ntdjt SBer fjat nteincn ©todC genomnten? S^ fliaube, 
bag 3^^r ©ruber iijn genomnten f)at Qd) Ilebe biefen ^naben 
nic^t, er ift intmer unartig* 35u liebft beinen fiel^rer. ®ott 
Uebt bie guten aKen[c^en. ®ute ^inber Iteben il^re SItern* 
3ft e^ xoaijv, bag Q\)v Dnfet feln $au« t)erlauft? SSSte teener 
tjcrfauffn ©te bie ©Ke t)on btefem 2:ud^e? ^'d^ tjerfaufe bie 
gtfe btefe« Jnd^e^ gu Dier SEI^ater. 5Da« ift fe^r teener, gin* 
beft bu nid^t, ^einrid^, bag ba^ fe^r teener ift? S^, ii) finbe 
ce fel^r tl^euer. 2Blr t)erfanfen aber Diet t)on btefem SCud^e. 
Oebermann finbet e« fc^5n. ©d^tdlen ®te mir brei*unb einc 
bafbe eHe. SBiffen ©te, n^o td^ toofjne ? Qa, @te n^ol^nen in ber 
tJeter^ftrage. 3Wetne a)eagt) fann e« ^l^nen Ijente noc^ bringen. 



49 
94 

Jtabcltt, to blainc ; ^Uci, all, every thing , , 

axhtitcn, to work ; ^Utt toas, all that. 

What are you doing? I am reading the book, ^rhich 
your brother has lent me. You read too much. Why 
do you not write? I have already written three letters. 
My cousins never write. You always blame your cou- 
sins; one must blame nobody. What art thou doing? 
X am doing my exercise. What is thy sister doing? 
She is working. What do you drink? I drink wine and 
my brother drinks beer. We drink no wine. I eat 
cherries. My brothers eat plums. You are always 
eating, but you do not work. Can you tell me, where 
Mr. N. lives? He lives in (the) William-street. Livest 
thou with thy uncle? No, I do not live with him. 
Dost thou go to Paris ? No, I do not go to Paris. I do 
not like this young man; he always blames his friends. 
He will never lend me his penknife. I lend him all 
that I have. We lend everything to our friends. You 
always beat my brother; you are very naughty. These 
boys beat everybody. Do you sell paper? I sell paper, 
pens, and ink. What do you say? I say, that you have 
taken my knife. 

95. 

3^ lobUf I praised, I did praise, was praising ; 

bu lobtc^^ thou praisest, &c. ; 

ct lobte, he praised ; 

Xoix UWn, we praised ; 

\i)X lohttt, you praised ; 

ftc lobtett, they praised, 
©^jicleit, to play ; bic ©cfd^id^tc, the story ; 

la^en, to laugh ; ber ^benb, the eyening ; 

tanitn, to dance ; fo \iffX, so much ; 

crja^lctt, to tell, relate ; ganj, quite, whole ; 
t^eilctt/ to share, divide ; Hii, till, until ; 
erlauben, to allow, permit ; baf ; that 

Ols. The adverb fO/ which connects two sentences, is not translated 
't English. 

!Dein Srubcr unb iS), toxt tool^ntcn gu 5W. in bent nam* 
lidjtn §aufc. 2Btr toaren ben gangen Stag gufammen. 2Bir 
mac^ten nnfere Slnfgaben gufammen, n^ir f))ielten gufammen 
unb fatten lein grfi§ere« SSergnilgen, aU toenn toir gufammen 
toaren* Sr Iicbte mid^ unb ii) (iebte i^n fa fe^r, ia^ U)ir toxt 

8 



60 . 

Srllbcr xoaxtn. SQScnii fcin Satcr il^m ctwa^ \6)iitt, fo t^cit. 
ten njtr e«» S^ arbettctc oft fUr il^n unb cr arbcitetc fUr mit^. 
'SDer gcl^rer lobtc unb licbtc un«* SilCe gutcn ©d^Utcr toarcn 
unfere ^^cunbe ; fie befud^ten imd ieben Sag ; n)ir erja^Iten 
m^ fdjdne ©efd^tc^ten unb lad^ten unb tanjten^ bid ed 9lbenb 
mar. £)tt fc^idteft und oft pbfd^e ^iic^er^ &)etc^e und t>iti 
Scrgnilgen ma6)tttu SDSir fatten fe^r oft S^it ju tefcn, SSScnn 
loir unfere 8luf gabcn gemad^t l^atten, criaubte ber ge^rer uM 
bnnier gu fpieten obcr ein niifelid^ed JSud^ gu lefcm 

96. 

SB&l^Ien, to choose ; bad S^iel, the play, the game ; 

toeinen^ to cry, to weep ; to&l^reiib/ while, daring. 

Obs. The NomiDatiYe is always placed after its verb, in a sentence, 
which serves to complete the preceding one ; tDCitn et !cmmt; ge^e t^ 
nut ii^nu 

When we were yotmg, we lived in this house. Your 
sister bought some ribbons and chose the finest for 
you. Formerly I loved play, but at present I love 
Dooks. This people always loved their king. Thy cou- 
sin was still looking for his hat, when we (are) de- 
parted. The merchant, whom thou soughtest yester- 
day, has been here. Thy brother sold his penknife 
this morning. While we were crying, you were iaughins 
and dancing. My father allowed me always to read 
good books and to play with my friends. We often 
worked together, when you were living with your 
uncle. I danced better than you, but you did your 
exercise better than I. Thou wast often idle, and 
thou hadst not always a mind to read and to write. I 
told thee pretty stories, but thou lovedst play too much, 
thou didst play the whole day. The master blamed 
Ihee often, and the good scholars did not love thee 

97. 

34 )Vcrbe loBctt; I shall or I will praise ; 
bu tDtrfi lobcn, thou wilt praise ; 
er toixh Uhtti, he will praise ; 
toil toerben lol^cn, we shall praise ; 
xf^x toerbet loben, you will praise ; 
{te ttetben Icbett, they will praise. 

Oh». SBerbeit; taken in an absolute sense, signifies to become ; but 
jphen constructed with ai other yerb, it answers to the English auxil 
4ary verb thall or itilL 



51 

Qd) tocrbe bicfcu 3l6cttb ba^ SJergnttflen l^abcn, mctnen 
JDnfet gu fcl^em Qi) tocrbe btr bicfen pbfd^en 9itng (jebcn,. 
wcnn bu Pci^ig fcin toirft ftctnrid^ iDirb mix locate cm ^aai' 
fc^Sne ^anbf^ul^c laufcn. ©cine ©c^tocfter tpirb gufricbcn 
cin, tocnn ftc l^rc Hufgabe gcmad^t l^at. Senu t»ir in 9t 
etn iDerben, tDerben tptr t)iel ^ergtiUgen l^abem SBann toett 
)en @ic mi^ bcfud^en? S^ glaube^ wir tocrben ©ic morgca 
befuc^cn. Snetne ^rilbct merben and) l^eute ober morgen lontu 
mcxu Sd toirb tneinem SSatcr fcl)r t)icl SSergnftgen wad^eu^ fie 
nod^ clnmal gu fc^em S33aun tpcrbcii ©ic O^rem grcunbc 
S'arl fc^reibcn? S^ fd^rcibe i^m in ad^t bi« Dicrge^n SEagcn. 
SQSoQen ©te bte ©Itte l^aben^ mir bad J33ud^ gu [d^iden, iveld^ed 
©ie mir t)crfpro^cn ^abcn? .0^ ^^^^^ ^^ O^w^w ^^iJtc 
fd^icfcn, graulein. 3Kcin 4Bebicnter tovch e« O^ncn bringcn. 
3^c5 l^atte ed cinem Sreunbc gelie^en, ber cd bid jcfet gcl^abt |at 

98 

SO^te, tired, fAtigued ; boi SDettCT/ the weather; j^tecl^, hither. 

Shall you go with us ? I do not believe, that my fa« 
ther will allow me (allows it to me). Has the shoe- 
maker brought my boots? No, he will bring them to you 
this evening. What shall we dp now ? We will drink 
a glass of wine. Will you have the kindness to lend 
me your horse? I shall lend it you with much pleasure. 
We shall play to-day in the garden of our uncle; he 
will allow (it) us. I shall tell you a beautiful story, if 
vou are good and diligent Wilt thou work to-day? I 
believe that I shall not work to-day. Come hither, my 
children ; you will be very tired. If your cousins are 
departed, they will have fine weather. Thy exercise is 
badly done; the master will blame thee. All (the) 
scholars will go to N. to-day. Charles, thou must wash 
thyself,, if thou wilt go with Henry. Yes, Mamma, I 
shall wash myself at present 

99. 

3(^ tourbe lobeit; I should or would praise , 
ttt kouTbefl lobtn, thou wouldst praise ; 
CT tourbc loBcn, he would praise; 
Yoix tourbm hibm, we should praise ; 
i^r tourbct lohen, you would praise ; 
fic tourbctt Uhttif they would praise. 

fSknw 16} T)5tte, if I had ; toenn id} \0&rt, if I were ; gem, wimugly j 
9^/ it 



52 

Obs. After tlic conjanctions ivcitn and tb, if, tlie Subjunctive Mood 
» used in German, when the verb ifi in the Imperfect or in tiie Fluper* 
feet tense. 

Qd) \mxht gtiicfttiiicr fcin, iDcnn icf) Slicker uub fjrcuubc 
ij'dttc. Qd) tDiirbc ntel)r SScrgnugcn fjobm, mnn mcine SSct* 
tern l^ter to'dnn. !Du n)urbeft nidjt fo rctt^ fcin, totnn bu 
mS}i [o t)tele ©cfc^Sftc gcmad^t Ijattcft SBenn §cmric^ ®ctb 
^atte, n)Urbc cr bicfc 3Bcffer faufen* -^d^ wUrbe bcineu Snu 
&er bcfnd^en, n)cnn i^ 3<^tt l^attc. 5Du wUrbcft bicfcn §unb 
«i(^t fo fcl^r licBcn, wcnn cr ntc^t fo trcu luSre* S33ir toiirben 
bid) md)t tabcin, ipenn bu ficiliger gmcfcn wttrcft !J)cin 
Diifcl fagtc mix, bu toUrbcft ntorgen nic^t fommcn. SUtt^m 
Don btcfen ©t5(fen wiirbeft bu n?a^tcn? 2Sem toiirbct i^r 
cure Stumcn gcben? SBa« toUrbcft in fagen, tocnn td^ nteU 
ncn ^unb t)erfauftc? 3^cl^ wiirbc bir crtaubcn ju fpielcn, 
n?cnn bu bcine Slufgabcn gcmad^t pttcft SDtefc ^inber wttr^ 
ben fe^r mixim, n)enn t^re SDiutter abgeretft toiire. 35ein 
iBatcr wttrbc un« cine fc^onc ®efd|icf|te craS^Icn, toenn toix 
artiger gen?cfen todxtn. S33enn bu 3^it gu lefen Ijtttteft, wiirbe 
Id^ bir ein nUjjtid^e^ SSnd) lei^en. 0^^ iDiirbc gern ntit bir 
gel^en, aber ntein Scorer tpill e« nid^t crlauBeit; id) ntu§ l^cutc 
no^ brei JSSriefe fc^rciben, 

100. 

ijouisa would be very (mucli) pleased, if she had all 

these flowers. Henry would not have so man^ friends, 

if' he were not so kind (gut) and good (artig). We 

should not yet have (be) come, if we had not received 

a letter from our father. We should not have sold our 

house, if my father had done more business (pi.) The 

master would blame thee, if thou hadst not done thy 

exercise. I should not believe it, if thou hadst not seen 

it If we had an apple, we would share it. We should 

go with you, if we were not so tired. If I had some 

money, I stiould buy a pound of cherries. If you loved 

me, i should love you also. If you told me, where 

Mr. N. lives, I would give you a glass of wine. Would 

you believe that I have done this? Would you do me 

this pleasure, if I allowed you to play this ev3ning? 

I would do it willingly, if I had time. 

101. 
$(u$gel^eit; to go out 
3<( gelfte am, I go out ; 



63 

btt gcl^jl au9, thou gocst out 
€T gc^t aviS, he goes out ; 
toil gc^cn a\xs, we go out ; 
i^r gcl^ct ans, you go out ; 
fie gel^cn am, they go out. 

9(ttfma^en, to open ; abfc^itciBcn, to copy , 

^vanai^n, to shut ; mtt^tikn, to commuDioate , 

gurucffc^idfen, to send back ; aitj^ic^cn, to put on ; 

angcnc^m^ pleasant ; f<^<^i/ black ; 

bie Sladj^rtd^t, the news , ftu^et; earlier, sooner 

Obs, The compound verbs are tormed by the addition of a partieic 
which modifies the sense of the simple Tcrb, and which is detached 
from it in the Present and Imperfect tenses of the Indicative Mood« 
unless the sentence begins with a conjunction or a relative pronoun. 

Qd) gel^c l^cutc niti^t avL^ ; ba« Setter ift gu fd^ted^t 3Bein 
©ruber mitt auc^ nid^t au^ge^en* SBenn ba« SBetter fd^5uer 
tDare, toiirbeu t»ir gem au^gel^en. §einrtd^, bu mad^ft nie 
bie S:^ttre git. ilannft bu biefe ^ommobe aufmad^en? S^ 
imd)t mm 3ltnmer gu, tocuu id) au^gcl^e* Qd) [djicfe 3^«cn 
biefcn Slbenb ba^ ^ud^ gurildf^ toetc^e^ ©te ntir gelle^eu 
l^abeu. 2)?ein SSetter fc^ldte inir geftem beu ©todf guriidf, 
beu Id) i^m getie^cn l^atte. ©d^reifift bu atte biefe Sriefe ab? 
SKugt bu aCc^ ba« abfc^reibeu? 0^ fd^reibe nur fo t>id ah, 
M id) xoxU. S^ toiirbe biefe Slufgabe nod| abfd^reibcn, tpenu 
meiu Se^rer eS mtr ertaubte* S^ mu§ Qfjntn ettoaS ntit* 
tl^eileu. 2Sa« xooUtn ©ie ntir mittfietten ? ^c^ t^eite 3^^uen 
eiue angeue^me 3lad)xid)t mit. S33arum t^eilteu ©ie ntir ba« 
nid^t frfi^er mit? ScId^eS fl'teib gie^ft bu l^eute anl Sdj 
ixti}t melu fc^toargeS ^leib an mih nteine ©cfiwefter tt)irb i^r 
iDeige^ ^tetb angicljen. S3So ift baS ^ki\>, \vttd)t^ ©ie an* 
gtel^eu? ^ierifte^. 

102. 

^(c (Bttocf^n^eit, the habit ; aufflel^ett^ to get up ; 
3)ct ^pdlicx^aaa^ the walk ; Wcggc^ctt, to go away ; 
einen Sv^sicrgattg mad^ett; to take a walk. 

Do you not yet get up? No, I am indisposed; I shall 
not get up to-day. You always get up very late, that is 
a bad habit I go away; I have much to do. I shall 
also go away. The weather is so fine, that I have a 
mind to take a walk. Shut the door, if you please. 
Open the window. Your brother always opens the door 
and the windows. Do you not go out to-day? I shaU 
not ffo out to-day. My father wishes (will) it not My 



54 

brother goes out twice every day. I shall send you back 

your umbrella to-morrow. Send me also back the cane, 

which I have lent you. What is my son doing ? He 

copies the letters which you have written this morning. 

My uncle is arrived ; I shall communicate to him the 

good news. Put on your new dress ; Mr. N. comes to 

see (visits) us to-day. 

103. 

ffletnigen, to deceive; jcrrcigcti; to tear; 

bclcibigen, to offend; tt)arten, to wait; 

t>crliercit/ to lose ; aturenbctt; to employ ; 

\)crbef}cm, to correct; lurucfgcbcn* to give back; 

Mrbictcn, to forbid ; lit ©cjcKfdfaft, the compaDj ; 

cxiicf)tn, to bring np ; bic ©orgfalt, the care ; 

er^olten; to receive ; (od^cicitf/ immediately, at once. 

Obs. The syllables be, ^e, cnt/ CT; )>eT and get serve to form the 
denied verbs, and are not detached from the simple verb. 

!iDicfer ^aufmann ift cin Sctrilgcr, cr bctriigt 3^cbcrmann. 
SKan mug SKiemanb bctrttgcn. SBir bctriigcn SRicmanb. . Du 
bclcibigft mtc^ tmmcr* SDctn SScttcr belcibigte geftcm bic 
ganjc ©cfcllfdjaft. S33arum bclcibigcn ©ie bicfcn SBann? 
Od) crl^attc I)eutc ctnen S3rtef Don mcfncm g^cimbe in Stotn. 
SJir cr^alten affc SEagc SJac^ridjt t)on unfcrm SSatcr. S^ 
werbc morgcn ®elb crtialtcn. ©iefc 3Buttcr crjie^t i|rc 
^inber mit t)ietcr ©orgfatt. S33enn tt)ir xooUtn, bag unferc 
Sinbcr gut n)crbcn, mllffcn njir fie ntit ©orgfalt crjic^cn. 
aBa§ fuclft bu, Sari? -3d) l^abc meincn 9ting cerioren. 5Du 
t)criierft tmmcr cttt)a«. ^omm, tpir mitffcn gc^cn, xoxx fonnen 
uic^t Wnger toartcn ; in famtft ben SRing fpater [u(^en. ®e^en 
©ie nur, ic^ lomme ' f ogtcid^ ; tc^ tocrbe ben 9iing fmben. 
SBarum gerretgeft bu btefeS papier? !J)a« "papier ift ntetn, 
ii) tarn e§ jerreigen. 0^^ t)erbiete bit c«^ c« gu gerrcigcn. 
SBittft bu bie ®Ute l^aben, mir tnetne Sluf gaben gu Derbeffern ? 
Dein Sruber Dcrbefferte nttr intmer meine Slufgaben, afe cr 
noc^ ]§ier wax. S33ann geben ©ie mir meinen Steiftift guriid 
®eine53rubcr geben nie guriicf, toa^ man il^nen lei^t SBenbei 
fure 3^it gut an. 3Ran mug feinc ^cit tmmer gut antoenbeu. 

104. 

I will not wait (any) longer. I lose my time. Shall 

you play to-day? No we shall not play, we always lose. 

xou would not lose, if you played better. We should 

play better, if you played oftener If I receive my money 



I shall play once more (iioi^ etniua^;. Does yonr fathei 
not forbid you to play? No, he doea not forbid ('t) us 
Thia child ia very naughty ; he tears his dresses. My 
neighbor brings up his children very badly. I do not 
like thia yonng man; he always offends me. Henry 
corroctiS his exercise; he employs his time well. lie 
who employs well his money, is wise (TOeife). If yoa 
give me back my pencil, I shall give you back your pen, 
Onemost always give back, what is lent ua (what ono 
lends us). 

105. 

Sffiefinen, fo dwell; acroo^nf, dwelt, been dwelling; 

bcltibfaen, to offend ; Ddeibigt, offended ; 

aniwncen, to employ ; flngcawnbct, employed. 



fabm ©le 3f|re Stufflobe ft^on Berteffnt? Qi^ '^dbt fi? 
nic^t oerfiEffert ; i£& tocrbe fic fogtcii^ Ber6e|Jcni. Q^t 
Sniber I)at niitl) geftern telcibigt ; itfj wiH nidjt3 nie^r niit 
i§m ju t^un ^a6en; bon I]cute {an) ift er mein gtcunb nidjt 
n'.c^r. SBJir Kolfcn eiiiett ijpasicvgiiiig jufomnien nta(f)eit. 
^c^ fann in biefem 2lugeii&lii.f c iiiiljt nudge^eii; Id) ^tie bicfen 
anotgen fi^on cinen ©paiiergang flcmo(I)t. Sffiarum i)<ibm 
Sie mir mein {5Ebe;:mcffer nod; nit^t juriidgegctEn? SCec ^Qt 
lie 3r|)UrE Qufgemat^t? Ser ^at Q^mn biefe 9ia^rid|t mit. 
jct^EiIt? Qij'c SBoicr f)at una gsftcrn eine ortige ®e\i^i6)tt 
itiiiljtt. aJieine 3JJuttEc ^at mit erinulit, biefen 2[Ccnb noc^ 
K. ju gc^EH. ©t«b ©ie gEftEoi bEt meinEm SBetltr gEtocfcitV 
Qia, mir ^aben ben ganjEn £ag bei i^m gE[pieIt, gefai^t nnb 
Betanjt. ^ber ^abt i^r audi geaibeitet ? Qif gfoube eS ni(^t; 
bee Setter ^ot bic^ fc^on mel)rere 5DIaIc gctobelt, bcine ©c^ioc 
ft« IjQt cS mic oft gefagt. ffier ^at eui^ biEfen ^oxi ffiirfd)Ei 
gefc^idt? §aft bu beiiiEn franlen greunb itoi^ iiidjt befudjt? 
aWcin Dnlel ^at ein neues ^ferb getauft ; er ^at baa olte bcin 
SiUfdier unfera 9iad)6nr8 filr jmaiijig Sftjoter nerlouft. 

ice. 

Qinji^i, single, only ; ni^t mc^i, no more ; Sa^<, ^'"XSi tI>iDg- 

Thou hast employed thy time very badly, my dear 

Uonry. I see that thou hast not done a gingle csercise 



66 

I have always praised thee, but I shall praise thee nc 
more. Have you played together, my children ? Yes, 
mamma, we have been playing and working. That is 
very well (flut); I shall give you some cherries and 
plums. I will divide thenu We have divided them 
already. Why have you shut all (the) windows? The 
weather is so fine ; I shall open them. Who has copied 
these letters ? I believe that Henry has copied them. 
Have you been waiting long? We have waited (for) 
half an hour. Mr. N. has sent back the umbrella, which 
you had lent him. I have received a letter from my aunt 
which I have not yet opened. Your cousin is arrived ; 
he has told us (a) hundred things. One must not believe 
all that he tells. I have not believed all. 

107. 

tint JU; iu order to, to ; 

um gu loBen, in order to praise, to praise ; 

um anjutoenben, in order to employ. 
SBunf<!^en; to wish; al^Tetjen; to depart, set out; gefdlltg; obliging, 
lonbent; but (after a negative phrase). 

Obs. The preposition ju, which generally precedes the Infinitive, 
is placed in the compound verbs between the particle and the verb. 

Sd) lomme, um bir gu fagcn, bag id) morgcn abrcifc. Qd) 
f)aht ntcincn JSBcbicntcu gcfc^idt^ um mir cin ^funb ^^dcv gu 
laufcn. Sir Icben nid^t, um gu effen, fonbcm toir cffcn, um 
gu tcbcn. Um gtitdlic^ gu [cin, mug man gufricbcn fcin. Um 
Srcunbe gu I)abcn, mug man gcfdCig fciit. S^ ^^^^ ^^^^ 
3elt, au^gugc^cn. §aben ©tc blc ®iite, bicfc gtt)ci Sricfc 
abgufc^reiben. Sottcn ©tc [o gut fcin, btc Sl^urc aufgu- 
mac^cn? SBir I)abcn 8uft, cincn Hcincn ©pagicrgang gu 
mac^cn. 3Kctn 9?a^bar l)at gtoci ^fcrbc gu Dcrfaufcn. S33cr 
l^at bir criaubt, f o fritl^ tocggugel^cn ? Oft ^^ no^ nic^t S^it, 
aufguftct|cn ? Qd) ^abc ba« SScrgnilgcn gcl^abt, ben $errn 
WloU gu fcl^en. SBitnfdjen ©ie mit meinem SSatcr gu fprcd^en? 
Qd) to\xn\d)t mit Qfjxtv grau SWutter gu fprec^en. ^abcn 
©ic ®clb, um btcfen SRing ju faufcn ? $aft bu 3^it, mir 
mcinc Slufgabc gu t)erbcffem? $at bcin SSatcr bir bicfed 
©elb gcgcbcn, um c« fo \d)kd)t anjun?enbcn ? 

108. 

^aiS Ungtu(f; the misfortune ; ber ©egenflanb, the subject. 
It is no subject for laughter (in order to laugh). It is 
very difificult. I have had the pleasure to dance with Miss 



57 

N. Mr. NoUet has had the kindness to lend me his 
horse. Do you wish to go out with me ? I have no time 
to go to N. We have much to do to-day. My brother has 
six letters to copy. I have good news to communicate 
to you. Have the kindness to send me back my book 
It is time to set out. Which dress do you wish to put 
on? Allow me. to open the window, it is so warm. I 
am come to see, if you are well (tt)oI)(). I am very (much) 
indisposed ; I have too much to do. You have the bad 
habit, to get up too late. A voung man must get up 
earlier. My friend has had the misfortune to lose his 
parents. I come to bring you your boots. That is very 
well (gut). I had no mind to wait (any) longer. 

109. 

3(26 toerbc adicbt, I am loved ; i6) Wurbc gclicbt, I waa loved , 

bu toirfl gclicbt, bu tourbeji adicbt, 

er totrb Qditbt er tourbe Qdid)t, 

toix tocrben geiicBt, toix tourben gclicBt, 

ii)x toerbet geltebt, if}X tourbct Qdicbt, 

jic tocrbcit gclicbt, fic tourbcn gcUcBt. 

©clol^nen, to reward ; jhafcit, to punish ; aSitcn, to esteem ; »cra^tcn, 
to despise ; Qt\6)idt, clever ; untt)iffcnb/ ignorant. 

Obs. The verb Wctbcit constructed with the past participle forms 
the passive voice. Thus the verb to be is translated by koerbett; when 
the subject is sensible of a certain action ; and by feiit, when he finds 
himself in a certain condition.. / am paid in the sense of : they pay 
mcy is expressed by : tc!^ toerbe Bega^U ; but in the sense of : they have 
paid me, it is expressed by : idf Btn Bejoi^t. 

S^ tpcrbc Don mcincm SSater gclobt, n?cnn id^ fleigig unb 
artig bin. £)u wtrft Don beincut 8c^rcr gctabcit, toeil bu 
immer faut btft. §ctnrid& loirb geftraft, loeil cr unartig ift. 
SDBctd^er aWann loirb gelobt unb tocld^cr toirb gctabctt ? S5er 
gcfd^tdtc aJiann loirb gelobt unb bcr untotffenbe getabctt. 
2BeI(J^c ^naben tocrben bclol^nt unb tott6)c tocrbcn gcftraft ? 
©icicmgen, mlSjt ftci^tg ftnb, iDcrbcn bclo^nt, unb bic, tod^t 
faut finb, gcftraft. SBir tocrbcn t>on unfcrn Sltem gelicbt; 
il^r locrbet Don ben curigcn gctabctt. 2Kcinc Srubcr-tpcrbcu 
oon O^^^rniann gcad^tet. 2Bir iDcrbcn Don unfcrn gcinbcn 
Dcrat^tet. SBirb bicfc« Siub nic gcftraft ? SSon mm locrbet 
l^r gctobt ? !iDctnc ©(j^tocftcr totrb Don t^rcr SKuttcr getabctt, 
tocit fie nid^t arbcitct. S^ lourbe immer Don mcincm Scl^rct 
geliebt unb gctobt, locit \6) ftci^tg unb artig tDar.- $etnrtd^ 

8* 



58 

wurbe immcr t)on fciueni SSatcr jjeftraft, xotmx cr nld^t ar- 
frcitctc. 

110. 

3^ V\n gcKcbt tocrbcn, I hare been loved ; 
bu Btfl geliel^t toorben, 
cr tfi gciieBt toorbctt, 
toix {tnb geltedt toprben^ 
• il^t feib geliebt toorben, 
iie {tnb Qtiicbt tocrben. 

rsbtctt, to kill ; crfunben. invented ; cntbccft, discovered ; hit ^Hufft, 
(he troable, pains ; boiS $ubcr, gunpowder ; md^iete, severaL 

Si) bin t)Ott ntctncm ffiatcr gcftraft tporben, toeit ii) biefe 
Sriefc ntc^t abgcfc^rieben l^abc. SJu bift t)on bcutcm Dnfd 
bctoI)nt iDorbcn, iDcit bu feme Ul^r gefunben l^aft ^cinrid^ 
ift fiir [eine fSRn\)t n\6)t bclo^nt njorben. ©iefc Slad^rid^t ift 
un« burc^ §crrn 3Bott ntitgct^citt iDorbcn* 9Son toem ift 
biefe aufgabe t)erbeffert worben? S33ir fmb t)on bicfem SKen* 
f^en mc|rere SWalc betcibigt iDorben. !J)icfe fierren fjnb 
geftem in ber ®cfettf(]^aft fel^r getabelt toorbem $)icfc« ftinb 
ift t)on feincr SDtottet gett)af(|en worben. @« ift tnit gefagt 
toorben/ ba§ @te elncn Sebienten fuc^ten. SSon toem finb 
btefe ^tnber gcfc^ldt hjorbeu? ©tefe ^ftufer finb geftem 
alle Jjerlauft toorben* SBir finb oft t)on unferm Sel^rer ge* 
tobt )])orben^ lueil iDtr intmer unfere S(ufgaben tnaf^ten. 
Ouftat) %Mp^ ift bet gufeen getobtet iDorbcn- !0a« fniott 
ift tjon Scrt^otb ©d^marj erfmtbcn ttjorben. Slmcrifa ift Dort 
Sotumbue cntbetft n?orben. 

111. 

^id^ frcuen, to rejoice. • 

3c^^ freue m\6), I rejoice ; 3^ l^oBc mic!^ ftcfrcut, I have rejoioed ; 

bu frcufi bic^, bu l^afl tid^ flcfreut, 

cr freut ^6), cr f)at flc^i gcfrcut, 

toir freucn uns, toix leaden uns gcfreut, 

i^r frcuct evL(i), t^r l^abt cudb gcfrcut, 

fic freucn jtd^. flc l^obcn pc^ gcfrcut. 

C5ti1i| imu; to be mistaken ; {tdtf bcfinbcn* to be, to do ; ^6) )[Ounbcrn, to 
he astonished ; ^H) anHctbcn; to dress (one's-self ) ; ft^ untcrl^oltcni to 
i^ amused ; banfcn, to thank ; gtoctfcln, to doubt ; totcbcrfcl^cni to see 
again; fdtctt, seldom: auf, on, upon. 

®uten SCag, lieber ^einric^. Qi) freue mid^, bl^ iDie* 
berjufe^en. SBie gel^t e«? SSSie befinbeft bu bic^? S^ 
bante bir, xi) befinbe niid^ fel^r tool^I, feit vS) auf bem 8anbe 
too^ne. S33a« ntat^t bein ©ruber ? 3fft er too^I ? Qa, ct 



59 

bcfinbct [id& fe^r h)oI)L SBa6 tl^uft bu, gubtoig ? 3^^ Ifcibe 
mid^ an* ^Icibet S¥ ^^ nod^ nidjt an ? SBir lucrbcn imd 
^pattt anHeibcn. ^abm @ic \\iSf [d^on gctoafd^cn, ^cnrictte? 
-3d^ l^abc uiic^ nod^ nic^t gcmafc^cn, abcr uicinc ©d^tocftcr l^at 
fit^ fd^on 9Ctt)afd^cn. Oft ba^ ntein JSrubcr, bcr ba mit bcm 
^errn "St. lommt? ©ic irren fid^, c^ ift nid^t 0^^ Srubcn 
Q6) gtaubc niijt, bafe id^ mtc^ irrc. -Od^ inre mid) fcltcn* 0<^ 
^bc mid^ no(^ me gcirrt. 2Bir gc^cn bicfcn Slbcnb nad^ 91* 
3fd& gtpciflc nxtSjt, ba§ toir und gut untcrl^alten tt)crbcn. SBic 
^abcn @te fid^ gcftcrn in bcm Sonccrt untcr^alten ? ©cl^r gut, 
Ifcrr 9?. ]^ fel^r gut gc^ieft. Q^ tounberc mid), bog ®tc 
nid^t ba toarcn. Si) l^attc nod) a3tc(c5 gu tl^uu; id) l^abc bi« 
gcl^n Ut)r gcarbcitet 

112. 
Art thou not yet dressed, Charles ? I shall dress my- 
self at present Why hast thou not yet dressed thy- 
self? I had still two exercises to do. I rejoice to see, 
that thou art so diligent. I love him, who rejoices 
when his friend is praised. I saw your brother yester- 
day. You are mistaken ; my brother is no longer here. 
I am not mistaken, I haye seen him with his friend Fer- 
dinand. Why have you not washed yourself? I should 
have washed myself, if I had had any water. We were 
in the country yesterday; we have been very much 
amused. How does your sister do ? She is very w^U, 
since she has been (is) with her uncle. And how have 
you been, since I saw you ? I have been very well. I 
am astonished that you are not yet departed. I shall 
set out this evening. 

113. • 

(S3 rcgnct, it rains ; c8 ftcut mi6}, 1 am glad, happy ; 

U f^ncit, it snows ; c« tBut mix Icib* I am sorry ; 

ed i^a^dt, it hails ; ci ift mix fait, I am cold ; 

ed iii^t, it lightens ; cS tfi mix toaxm, I am warm ; 

c5 bonncrt, it thunders ; cS l^ungert mi(i)p I am hungry ; 
c8 ftiert, it freezes ; c« turjict mi^, I am thirsty. 

fSi^tfj/ltn, to command; Blctlbett^ to stay; tttooxim, to expect; ju 
SHitti^ effeit, to dine ; leben @te too)§l, farewell, adieu. 

SRcgnet ce? $Kein, c« rcgnet nu^t. @^ rcanctc, afe id) 
flclommen bin. e« l^at bie flange 3^ad^t gcregnet. @e toirb 
tttorgen flcnjig regncn. Qd) glaubc, ba| c^ [d|ncit. ^at cS 
acfd^ncit? SBJenn c« [d^neitc, toflrbe c« nid^t rcgnen. g« n)irb 



60 

oicfc 5Kac^t frlercu, bcmt e6 ift fcj^r fatt S^ tttug au^gc^fen. 
aber ed l^agett/ tok \d) fel^e. STHr ift fcl^r tDarm ; ed bli^t^ 
bg(eid^ luirb ed bonnerm SQiir xooUm md) ^aud ge^m. d^ 
tetttnttd^^ ba§i(^©ie ftnbe; aber ed t^ut mtr letb, ba§ ic^ 
nii3^t mit O^ticn gcl^ctt fann. 3Mcin Dnlcl ift geftern abcnb 
angetommen unb n)iinfc^t, bag n)ir l^eute bei i^m gu SOttttag 
cffcm . $abcn @ic nid^t^ ju trlnfen, mid^ burftct fc|n SBlbi* 
fd^en ©ie cin ®ta« 53ier obcr SBaffcr ? ©ic l^aben nut gu bc» 
fc|len; l^icr ift, toa« ©ic tottnfd^en* Slbcr mi6) l^ungcrt mi); 
gcbcn ©ic mir ein ©tUd ©d^infen unb cin toenig SSvoh. ©ic 
§aben ba f^finc Sirucn unb ^floumen. (£« gicbt btefc« ^Qifx 
Did Dbft. aSottcn ©ic l^cutc bei un« bleiben ? S6) banfc 
3^l^ncn, ic^ ^abc uicincm SSetter tjcrfproc^cn, l^eutc uiit il^m 
nac^ ©♦ gu ge^cn; er tptrb mic^ gen?i§ fd^on ertoartcn* 8cbcn 
©ic tpo^l. 

114 

SBod fur Setter tfl tS ? What kind of weather is it. 

What sort of weather is it ? It is bad weather ; it is 
raining (it rains). It did not rain when you came. It 
will rain the whole day. It has been raining this morn- 
ing. Does is snow ? No, it does not snow. It would 
snow, if it were colder. I believe that it freezes. The 
weather is finer to-day ; it is warm. I am very warm. 
It has lightened ; it will thunder later. I am sorry that 
you did not come sooner. Art thou hungry ? Yes, I 
am hungry and thirsty. I have taken (made) a long 
walk. 1 shall drink a glass of wine, if you (will) allow 
it. My sister will be happy to see you again. She has 
often spoken of you to me. Will your nephew come 
also? 1 doubt whether he will come (comes). He has 
too much to do. 

115. 

SBfc »tel Ul^r tjl c« ? What o'clock is it ? 

08 tfl fe(&d U6r; it is six o'clock ; 

ci ifl i^aib fteben ; it is half past six ; 

t9 ifi em fQUxtd auf fleBen; it is a anarter past six. 

Wuffieljett, to get tip ; \6)la\cn ge^fcit, to go to bed ; ausvuifen, to repose: 
^ajierctt, (pajicren Qtf)tn, to go to walk ; gu Sttenb effen, to sup. 

Urn tt)ie t)id Ul^r ftc^en ©ie gctoo^ntu^ auf ? Qi) ftc^e 
[ebcn aWorgcn urn, [cc^« U^r auf unb gc^e um gc^n Ut)r 
fc^tafcn. ®inb ©ic fpagieren gcipcfcn ? ^a, id) -^abt cine 
etunbc in bem SBatbe [jjajiert. Q^ bin fel^r mUbe, i^ 



61 

mia eiit n)enig audru^etu S93te t)tel U^t ift ed? (£« ift ad^l 
U^r; ed ift nod^ nic^t ifaib ntm. Urn n)te Dtel U^r futb @ie 
augnommen? 0<^ ^in itm tin SBiertel auf fcd^d ongefommen. 
fBltxm ©c^iuefter ift um brei 93ierte( auf ac^t abgereift SBte 
fonge bleiben @ie l^ter? 0<^ ^^^^^ ^^ Stuei bid brei 2:age 
bleiben« Um luie t)te( Ul^r effen ti)ir gu SRittag ? Q6) glaube 
tun jtootf Ul^r ober um l^alb eind* Um brei U^r trinfcn toir 
^affce unb um fieben U^r effen xoxt gu $(benb. 

116. 

SoUfixti^, ntunerons ; )09t, before ; nac|^ ^anfe, home. 

Have the kindness to tell me what o'clock it is. It is 
not yet eleven o'clock; it is half past ten. I must depart 
at twelve o'clock, or at half past twelve. Have you al- 
ready dined? No, I shall dine with my cousin; we dine 
generally at two o'clock. At what o'clock do you sup? 
I shall sup at nine o'clock. Have you a mind to walk 
a little ? If it does not rain, I will walk a little with you. 
It is fine weather ; we will go to N., we shall find there 
a numerous party (OefeCfd^aft). Are you already tired? 
I am very tired ; it is too warm. If you allow (it) I will 
repose a little. Get up ; it is time to go home. I must 
go to bed before ten o'clock, in order to get up to-morrow 
at five o'clock. 

117. 

Ace, Dai. Dot, and Ace. 

gur, for; aui, out of; ait, at, of; 

buT^/ by, through ; mit, with ; auf, upon, on ; 

Cl^ne, without; naij, to, after; in, in, into; 

gegcn, to, towards, against ; t>on, from ; unter, under. 

gricbriti^, Frederick; bcr Wladt, the market; bet fSSiUm, the will; bn 
Pellet; the cellar ; bte SvL<i)c, the kitchen ; bie ^tti^e, the church ; legcn, 
o put, lay ; fl^eit, to sit ; beitfen, to think ; too, where ; tootiin, where 
•o; too^cr, where from. 

Ohs. The propositions an, auf, in, untct, govern the Accusative, 
when the verb of the phrase denotes a movement or a direction to- 
wards an object; and the Dative, when it does not express this 
movement. 

pr wen fmb bicfe SUd^er? 5Dicfce tft fiir mtd^ unb icnc« 
Ift fiir utcinc ©c^mcftcr. S33o ift ber jnngc SKann, fiir ben 
©ie atte biefc ©ad^en gcfouft l^aben ? 'SDurd^ toctd^e ®tra§c 
miiffen toir gel^en, im auf ben SKarft ju fommcn? ©urd^ 



62 

bie grtcbrtc5«ftra§c ober btc SBid^cImdftratc ? Oc^eu ©le 
o{|ne SRcgcnfd^irm au«? e« toirb fogleit^ regncn. SSSad ifl 
bad Scben o|ttc etncn greunb? Q^ fann ol^nc bi^ md^t 
kbtn. S)u btft gegen ben SBtQen beined 93aterd aitdgegcmgett 
SBarum ift bein ^ruber intmer gegen mid^? SBal^r lommft 
bn? Qi) fomme Dom ®))agiergange, and ber ®d^nle, and i)er 
^6)c. !iDie SRagb lommt and bem Setter, m^ bent ©arten, 
and ber ^c^e* SDWt toent feib i^r andgcgongen? SDKt bem 
Dnfet, mit ber Xante, mit O^w^"* 9lad^ bem Sffen gej^en 
njir and» S33ann lommen @te jnrfld? Sommcn ©ie Dor 
ober nad^ nnd gnrflrf ? Sir »erben nad^ SW^ anrndt 
lommen, S33o ift meine ©(^mefter? @ie ift in ber Sird&e, 
in bem ®arten, auf bem SKarfte, SBol^in gel^t betite SKntter? 
©ie ge^t in bie fiiid^e, in im ficfier, anf ben SKarft, SBol^iti 
l^aft bn mein SBu6) gelegt? Q^ l^abe ed anf ben £ifcl^, mtter 
ben ®tn\)i getegt. SBo ift bie Heine Sonife? ©ie fifet auf 
bem ©tnf;Ie, nnter bem SEifd^e, an ber 23^ure, ©d^reiben ©ie 
an Ol^ren better ober cat S^xt Safe? SSln wen bcnfen ©ie? 
S^ benfe an bie arme gran, njcld^c id^ geftem bei Ql^ntn 
gcfc^cn ^abe. 

118. 

3>er ^^xca^, the closet ; unbanfbar, ungrateful. 
This is for me, that is'for you. He who is not for me, 
is against me. I cannot do this "without him, without 
her, without you. I shall arrive before you; you will 
arrive after me. You are ungrateful towards us. I al- 
ways think of you, but you never think of me. There is 
thy little sister ; hast thou nothing for her ? You do not 
love my brother, you are always against him. Where 
is your son ? This fruit and these flowers are for him. 
Where have you been? We have been at (in the) 
church and at (in the) school. Where are you going ? 
We are going into the garden, tP (on the) market, into 
the kitchen. Where do these children come from? They 
come from the public walk (©pagicrgang), from church, 
from the garden. Where have you put my stockings 
and shoes? I have put them on your chair, on the 
table, in the closet. Have you seen my brother? I 
have seen him at the public walk, in the garden, at the 
door. I write to my uncle and aunt We often speab 
of him and of her. 



68 

119. 

Snt instead of m bem ; am instead of on bent; 

tniS in ba« ; on^ on baiS; 

gum gu bem; ^cm .))cn bem, 

gur gu bcr; unterm unter bem. 

TaS %sutx, the fire ; fid) jlellen^ to place one*8-self, to stand. 

Obs. The quickness of the pronunciation has introduced the coetoni 
">( contracting the definite article with certain prepositions. 

!J)ic aKagb ift im ficHct obcr im ®arten. SBir gcl^cn bicfcti 
Kbcnb tn« SEl^cater obcr ui« Sonccrt. @d^tden ®ic ben sbc* 
btenten gum ©d^ul^mad^er ober gum@d^neiber? ©el^en loir 
fjcute gur S^autc obcr btcibcn loir gu §aufc? SBarcn ©ic 
geftcm bet bem SJUnifter? ^ommett @ie gu mir ober gu 
meinem ^ruber? SHJarmn fifcen ®ic immer beim geuer? 
S'ft^fl^uett fo faft? S5Ja^ l^abenSie amSuge, amgu^e? 
ffiJarum tragcn ©te cine g^ber am ^utc ? ® tctten ©ie fid^ 
an bie Sl^iire ober and t^nfter* ^abcn ©ie biefe SShmt oom 
®artner erl^alten? ©ic arbeiteu oom SRorgen bid gum Sbenb. 
SBad madden ©ic unterm Zi^dfcl Qd) fu^e meine SSIeifeber. 
^ar( fjai fie ind ©d^reibgeug ge(egt. 

120. 

fSk'iWtlf of what ; bot^on, of that, of it ; 

)i>omit| with what; bamtt/ with that, with it 

toogu, for what; bagu, for that, for it; 

tooran, at what ; baran, at that, at it ; 

toortn, in what; bartU; in that, in it; 

\D0burc3f, by what; babur^, by that, by it. 

$craB, l^inaB, down ; 

l^crauf, l^inauf, up ; 

l^ctein, ^finein, in. 
f&xau6)tn, to use; gefpro^ett; spoken ; gcba^t, thought; gmg,wcnt; ffel^ 
fell ; bos £lat)tcr, the piano. 

Obs. 1. All these particles are formed of prepositions, combined 
with the adverbs Yoo, va, l^ct and ]^tn. If, in the formation of these 
words, two Towels meet, an t is inserted, to avoid the hiatus. 2. ^cx 
denotes a moyement towards the person speaking ; f^ixi a movement 
from the speaker. 

SBooon fpred^en ©ie ? Q\t bied bad 4Bud), toooon ©ie 
fpred^cn? SBomit l^aben ©ie bad gcmac^t? Q\t bad bie 
geber, ft>omit ©ic biefen JSBrief gefd^rieben l^aben? SBogu 
brau^en ©ic bad? SBoran benfen ©ic benn? OP i><id bad 
^aud, toorin ^l^r Dnfel iool^nt, bie ©tabt, njoburd^ ©ie ge» 
tommen finb? ^at man oon meinem UnglUdt gef|)roc^en? 
Sa, man f)at baoon gef^jrod&en. §aben ©ic an meine ©ad^r 



64 

gebad^t ? 92etn, id} l^abc ntd^t baran gebad^t ®tnb @te ttrii 
O^rcm ncuen ^tauicr jufricben? 5Rctn, td^ bin nid^t gufricbcn 
bamit 3ft nod^ SBctn in bcrfjlafd^c? 5Wcin, e«ift!ctncr 
mc^r barin. SBie btct Sttcn uittffcn ®ie jn ctncm ncuen SRodc 
l^abcn? SS) mug brci unb einc l^albc (Site bagu l^aben. 
^ommen (Sie l^erauf. ©el^en @ie l^inab^ l^inunter. SBarum 
fommcn ®ic nlc^t l^erein? SBarum gel^en ©ic nic^t l^incin? 
©cr filiabe ging gu naff an« SBaffer unb flct l^lncin* SBerben 
©ie bicfen abenb ine 2:]^eatcr gel^en? SBir toerben ni^t ^in* 
gc^cn^ abet ^einrid^ unb Aarl ge^en l^in. 

121. 

IBttten, to beg, to ask ; bet Stxitf^, the war ; bad ^6)cai\pid, the play. 
Do you know of what I speak, of what I think? That 
is not the same street, through which we came (are 
come) this morning, the same house where we were 
yesterday. Do you speak of (the) war ? Yes, we speak 
of it Do you think of the concert? We do not tnink 
of it Are you pleased with this ring? I am very 
(much) pleased with it Why do you not come up? 
Tell your brother that I am coming down directly. 
Come in, my friends. I beg you to come in. Do you 
go to the play this evening ? We shall not go there. 
Do you know, where this gentleman lives, where he goes 
to, and where he is ? We do not know it 

122. 

^cr Tl\6i, the table ; has Xi\(i)6)tn, the little table. 

2)ic XaubC; the pigeon; ^jjlanjcn, to plant; cbcn, fo cbcn, jiisf now, 
just. 

Obs. Diminatives are formed by adding the BjUable djcn, and 
Boflening the radical vowel. If the primitiye word ends in e or en, 
this termination is omitted. 

Slmalic l^at i^r ^iltd^en berlorcn. S33ir ^abcn brci pbfd^e 
fflttumd^en itpflanit SBem gc^5rt btcfe« arttge ©(irtd^en ? 
SBie bid l^aft bu fUr btcfc« SCaubdjcn bcga^ft? SBo^in ge^en 
btcfe §crr(j^en ? &omm, goui^^en, n)lr tooBen gu ber Xante 
gc^en, fie l^at etn ncue« iiafed^en unb ein nenc$ ^ttubd^en. 
Q^ ^abe eben ein Sriefd^en bon mciner ©d^toefter erl^eiften, 
ttjorin fie ntit^ bittet, il^r ein STOefferd^en unb ein 85ffd^cn gu 
faufen. Qd) ttiK red^t artig fern, SDWltterd^en, mm bu nrir 
ein neuee Steibc^en faufft. Xrage biefe« SCifd^^en in ben 
©arten, ^enriette, toit tooUm ein ©tttnbd&en barin arbeiten 



66 

©clc^c« S)5rfc^cn fc^e 16) ba untcn Un SBalbc? SBcId^cfl 
Sitib l^at bicf c @c!^ul^4cn Dcriorcn ? gricbrid^ ]§at ein arttgcd 
SSagcId^eu t)om ©Srtncr erl^altcn. SBcm gc^arcn aCe bicfc 
Sliim^cn? SBo ift bcin ©^tocftcrd^cn, ^ol^ann? 

123^ 

Dldtl^tg haben, to want ; {16 fd)&men. to be .ashamed of; )p^tQeti, to 
use, to be in the habit of; fd&lafrig, sleepy ; JDurjl 1^ bttl^ to be thirsty; 
ter ©^Jajicrgang, the walk, the public walk ; fdj^cineHi to shine ; frul^, 
early ; fpdt^ late ; t^ mc^te, I should like. 

|)cinri(^, l^aft bu 8uft, eincn ®|)agicrgang mit mix git ma* 
c^eu ? S^ ^ttbc leinc 8uft, jicfet au«gugc^cru 0^ ^ta [c^I<i^ 
rig. ©d^amft bu bid^ nid^t^ fo faul ju fciit? ^omm, toit 
woCcn in ben ©artcn mcinc^ Dniefd gc^en. SBic t)iet UI)r 
ift c«? e« ift crft fe^« U^r, bic ©onne fc^cint ttod^. ©u 
l^aft SRec^t, e« ift no(| friil^, id^ will mit bir gc^ciu S4 Pf^^i^ 
icben abcttb cinett ©pagicrgang gu mac^cn, c^e id^ gu JSBctte 
gc^e. !J)a« ift einc gutc ©ctool^nl^cit g« ift mix abcr fcl^r 
toann; toir gc^cn gu gefc^winbc 3^^ l^abc gro^cu ©urft, 
i^ mOd^te cinmol trinfcu. aSciut man toarm ift, mn^ man 
nic^t trinlen. S^ ^^^^ u^tl^ig, ein toenig au^gurul^en; id^ bin 
fo miibc, ba§ i(| nic^t mel^r fort faun* 5Dh mu^t einen 5(u« 
genbltdf ©ebulb l^aben. ^omm, id^ fttrd^te gu fpat nad^ 
^aufe gu fommen* 

124. 

To have patience, (Ucbulb l^aBcn; to fear, fun^^tcn; to be hard- 
hearted, l^artl^erjtg fetn ; to have the head-ache, 5t'ov|ive]^ f^dben ; to 
take pains, ftd} bemul^en ; the moment^ ber ^ugcnblicf : some pretext, 
ein ©ottoanb, (masc.) ; directly, fog(ei(^ ; the advice, bcr SRotl^. 

How, you are still in bed ? Are you not ashamed, to 

sleep so long ? I should be ashamed to get up so late. 

I cannot get up to-day, I have the head-ache. You are 

a little idler (^auCengcr). When you must go to school, 

you always look for some pretext You are in the 

habit of going- to bed early and getting up late. That 

is a bad habit I beg you, to have patience (for) a 

moment I shall get up directly. I have no mind, to 

wait (any) longer. I fear to come to church too late. 

You are very hard-hearted; you have no pity for a poor 

patient (ber Stanfe). You are not ill; you have no mind 

to go to school. You are right my friend ; I shall take 

pains to get rid of this fault (biefcu gel^lcr abgutcgen) and 

to follow your good advice. 



66 
125- 

@lwbtn, to believe 
I believe that it is already late. We do not believe 
it. Neither does my brother believe it l)o you believe 
it ? I do not believe it If I did believe it, you would 
laugh. I have never believed this. Who would have 
believed that ? I should believe it, if you told me so 
(it me). It is an incredible thing. You would believe 
it indeed, if you saw it These gentlemen do not be- 
lieve it How will you have me (that I should) be- 
lieve it ? Your brother believed every thing that was 
told him (all that one told him) ; he was too credulous. 
He would not believe it, if he Knew you. 

Neither, aud^ nid)t ; laugh, lad^en ; would have, l^attc ; incredible, 
uitglauBlid^; indeed, toel^C; eaw, fe^fctt; credulous, le[(iS|t(jlcbibi(l ; 
knew, tenute. 

126. 

(Sagen, to say, to teU. 
I have something to tell you. What have you to say 
to me ? I tell you nothing. Tell (it) me only. I shall 
tell you another, time. You will not tell my brother, 
what I have written to you ? Do not tell him, that I 
am still in bed. What nas he told you ? Have I not 
told it you? You have not yet told (it) me. Do you 
wish (will you) me to (that!) tell it? One must not 
tell everything that one knows. He has told it me in 
a whisper. Your uncle told me yesterday, that he 
would sell his house. What do you say to that? I 
would tell you with pleasure, if I knew it If I said 
otherwise, I should lie. 

Only, nut; knows, Xocif; in a whisper, inS JDl^t; if I knew, toenn 
tc^^lDu^te; otherwise, anber* ; lie, lugeit. 

127. 
SButtfii^en, to wish ; l^olfen, to hope. 

I wish, that your enterprise may succeed. We often 
wish (for) things, which are hurtful to us. I should 
wish to be able to serve you. I hope that our friend 
will obtain the situation that he wishes (to get). She 
did hope to win her law-suit, but she was mistaken. 
My cousin has nothing more to hope. We hope every- 
thing of Providence. My sister hopes, that you will do 
what you have promised her. Never wish tfor) what 



you cannot Lave. What do you wish? (Fur) what do 
you hope? I believe that my father will arrive to-day 
We must hope it These gentlemen wish that we 
should depart Does your sister wish to go with us? 

May succeed, gclingcn; linrtful, f^&bltc^; to be able, fcnnen; to 
fcrve, bienen, nu^iii^ 'fcin; obtain, erl^altcn; situation, Stefle ^fem.), 
win, Qctoinncn;. law-suit, ?prcjeg; Providence. 3)pr|c]^ung (fem^j fo 
% bat, ko^rauf* 

128. 

^(i^x^ibm, to write ; t^ WticB, I wrote; gcfd^ricben, written ; 
U\cn, to read ; i6) lai, I read ; . gelcfcn, read. 

I am writing a letter to my brother. My mother 
will write to him to-morrow. You wrote bettor for- 
merly. What have you written to him? Have you not 
yet written to him, that our friend Henry is dead? 
Write that to him. If I had a good pen, I should 
write also. You write too fast; write more slowly.. 
Show me what yoa have written. You must write' 
once more. What do you read? I read an amusing 
book. What didst thou read yesterday, when thou wast 
with thy uncle? I read the fables of Gellert, which 
are very well written. We should read oftener if we 
had more time. How must we (one) read this word? 
Remember well, what you have read. Would you like 
(will you) me to (that I should) read this letter to you ? 
I should like to know how to read like you. 

Formerly, fruiter; fonfl ; fast, ]i^ncll; slowly, longfam ; show, gcigcnj 
once more, 110^ cinmal; amusing, untcrl^aUcnb ; fable, %\M (fern.); 
remember, bcl^altcn ; I should like to know how, id^ xnoci^tc !dnnen ; 
like, toic. 

129. 
<£e]^en, to see ; i* fal^, I saw ; gefd^cn, seen ; 

fenncn, to know ; id) fanntc, I knew ; gcfannt, known. 

What do I see? Do you not see it? I see nothing. 
But do look. It is well worth the trouble to see it 1 
saw your cousin yesterday. Have you not seen him? 
Uo you see how I do this ? Your cousin does not see 
me. If I saw my friend, I should tell him that you are 
here. Would you like (will you) me to (that 1) bring 
(a) light; or can you see still? I have seen Mr. N. to- 
day. Does he know me ? I believe that he knows you. 
He has greeted me. Have you also known my uncle? 
Have you not told me that you knew him? I should 



68 

kiiow him again if I saw him. Your brother has 

recognized me by my voice. These children do not 

know me (any) more. 

Do look, fc^ctt <£ie bc^ cinmal; well worth the trouble, xoetjl bei 
3)^u]^e toert^ ; to greet, grugen ; to know again, to recognize, voictct 
ctfcntten; by the voice, cat tcx (Stimmc. 

130. 

©elicit, to go ; id) ging, I went ; Qcgangcn, gone ; 

toeggc^en, to go away ; au^gel^en, to go out. 

Where are you going? I am going to my aunt, and 
my brother goes to school. Where did you go this morn- 
ing with your cousin? We went to churcn. I should 
willingly go to walk, if you would go with me. I shall 
go with you, but do not go so fast Where is your sis- 
ter? She is gone to see her uncle. We should have gone 
together if I had had time. Shall you not go to If. to- 
morrow? My father does not wish (will not) me to (that^ 
I should go there. I go away. Do you go away already r 
Henry does not yet go away. Wiiliim is already gone 
away. Go away, I must go away. I believe that your 
friends are gone away already. At what o'clock do 
you go out? I go out every morning at seven o'clock. 
And at what o'clock dost thou go out? I went out 
yesterday at six o'clock. Is your brother already gone 
out ? To-morrow I shall go out early. I must go out 
at half past one. My mother did not wish (would 
not) that I should go out (went out). 

To go to walk, f|)ajicrcn gc^cn ; to go to see any one, gu 3cmanbcin 
geBen. 

131. 

^ommctt. to come ; id) fam, I came ; gcfommeit; come ; 

}urucnomuien, to come back ; anfommen, to arrive. 

Whence do you come so late ? We come out of the 
garden. Eliza does not come to-day; she is gone into 
the country with her father. Come to see me this af- 
ternoon. It is possible that I may come. I should 
wish that you came early. Formerly you came every 
day. I should come oftener if I had not so much to 
do. My brother is not yet come back. He will come 
back this evening. My uncle does not come back (any) 
more. We saw your uncle, when we came back from 
the country. At what o'clock does the post arrive ? I 



69 

believe it arrives at three o'clocL Yesterday it came 
very late. Formerly it arrived at two o'clocL My 
sisters will arrive to-day from Liege. 

Eliza, QSIifc ; to come to Bee, befuc^^en ; afternoon, ^la^miita^ : poo- 
Bible, uidalt(j^ : evening, ^htXih : the pos^ tit $ofi ; Liege, £utti(9. 

132. 

Srlnfcti, to drink ; id) ttanf, I drank ; getrunfeit, drunk ; auittitifcn^ 
to finiBli (a glass, a cup, &c.) ; efjen, to eat ; t(i^ af, I ate ; gegcffen, 
ttcn ; gu SD^ittag cffen, to dine. 

Have you notliing to drink. I drink no wine. We 
drink only water, and my brother drinks beer. You do 
not drink. I have the honor to drink your liealth. 
When I was young, I drunk nothing but (only) milk. 
This gentleman has drank a little too much. He does 
not eat much, but he drinks much. Who has drunk 
out of my glass? I will drink no more. We will drink 
another glass. The wine which we drank yesterday 
was so good, that every one drank a bottle. Finish 
your glass. You have not yet finished your glass, 
brink again. Have you no appetite? Eat a little ham. 
I have eaten enougn, I have no more appetite. You 
will eat another piece of meat This child eats the whole 
day. We ate some days ago (some) delicious fish. At 
what o'clock do you dine? I dine generally at two 
o'clock, but to-day I dine at four o'clock. After dinner 
I drink a cup of coffee and then I go out to walk. 

To your health, auf il^rc ©cfunbl^cit ; the honor, tic (SffXt ; another 
glass, nod^ tin ®(aS ; every one, Seber ; again, no(^ einmol j the appe- 
tite, bcr §(^)\>ctit; some days ago, »or einigctt i£aacn; delicious liah, 
fdfUi(if>c Sifdj^e ; the dinner, "bag &ittagcffcn ; then, bann. 

133. 

RHtitn, to be able, to know ; id) !onnte, I oould ; gefonnt, been able . 

tDiffen, to know ; i(j^ tOUptC/ 1 knew ; getougt, known. 

Can you tell me what o'clock it is? I cannot tell (it) 
you, I have not (got) my watch with me. If I had il 
with me, I could tell you exactly. I shall not be able 
to go out to-day; my father is ill. My brother will 
not be able to come. I should wish, however, that ho 
could come. I should be able to lend you this book, 
if it belonged to me. Lewis can carry this letter to 
the post-office. I could not go out yesterday. My 
friend could not answer your letter, because he haa 
too much to do. Do you know when my father will 



70 

coine back ? I do not know. Does your sister know it? 
We know all, that we must die. Do you know (how) to 
dance ? I have known it, but I do not know it (any) 
more. My father knew several languages* Henry can 
speak German. Q^hese boys know neiuier how to read 
nor how to write. The men do not know (how) to em- 
ploy their time. I did not know that your brother was 
departed. I shall soon know who has done that. How 
can you suppose (will you) that I should know this? 
I should wish that you knew it (I would, &c.) 

Exactly, gcttau; however, |ebo$; I should wish, i^ \v9ilte; to ho- 
l«>*f?» Qc^^own; answer, antwortcn oiif (Ace.) ; because, tt)<i(; to dano«. 
ton^cn ^ to speak German, htut\6) fprc(|cn. 

134. 

• Jtfiun, to do ; id) t^ai, I did ; 0ct()an, done , 

ne^mcn, to take ; t^ ttol^m, I took ; gcncmmot, taken. 

What are you doing? I do what you have ordered 
me (to do). What wereyou doing when I came in? I 
was lightmg the fire. W hat will you do this evening ? 
I shall do nothing this evening. Your brother does 
nothing but run. These children do nothing but drink 
and eat. When one has done one's duty, one has noth- 
ing to reproach one's self (with). You have done a good 
action. Why are you in bad spirits ? What have they 
done to you ? One must do the will of God. You will 
write to him; in your place I should not do it 1 
shall do my best to satisfy him, I take this for mysel£ 
How many books do you take? Your brother always 
takes my pen. Will you take my place? Take what 
you wish. Take this child " by the hand. Who has 
taken my copy-book? Your cousin took my cane yes- 
terday. I shall take one of these apples, if you allow 
(it). I have taken the liberty to write to him. We 
took some chairs and we sat down. If I took these 
!H)oks, my father would scold me. 

To order, Bcfcl^lcn ; to come in, l^ereinfommcn ; to light, aniunben ; 
■othing but, tti6)ti olS ; one's duly, fcine ^fii<i}t ; to reproach one'f 
self, fid) »OTt»erfcn; action, ^anblung, S^at; in bad spirits, uhUk 
iiounc ; in your place, an Sifter ©telle ; to do one'a best, fein SKogtic^* 
fU» tlftutt; to satisfy, bcfriebigcn; myself, mi^; place, $lafe (m.); by 
the hand, hd bcr •Danb ; liberty, grei^^cit ; to sit down, fit^f fe^ett j to 
Mold any one. mit Bemanbcm f^mficit. 



71 

185. 

^(^lafcti, to Bleep ; i(]^ fd^ltcf, 1 slept; gcfd^Iafctt, 8l«nt; 

hvc6^n, iCTlbre(i(|cn, to break ; t(^ hxad;), I broke ; gebrc^en, brokeu. 

We sleep too much ; you sleep less than we. I sleep 
generally (for) seven hours. Formerly I slept longer. 
Sly brother slept yesterday till eight o'clock; but to- 
morrow he will not sleep so long, because he must 
depart for Cologne at four o'clock. Our mother does not 
allow us to sleep longer, than till six o'clock. I sleep 
soundly. You were very uneasy in your sleep last night 
This child sleeps very peaceably. We have no knife to 
cut our bread; therefore we break it You will break 
this stick, if you bend it so. I do not believe that it 
(will) break. I should not like it to (that it did) break. 
This boy has broken a pane. He broke two last week. 
This servant is very heedless; she breaks something 
every day. Yesterday she broke two glasses, and on 
Sunday half a dozen cups and saucers. 

Less, tocniger; soundly, fcl^r fcji; to be uneasy in one's sleep, unvut^lg 
J^lafeit; last, vcrig; peaceable, fanft; to cut, f<i^tteiben; therefore, begs 
i)alb ; to bend, bcugcn; I should not like, {(S^ wod)U ni<i)i; pane, (Bc^cibcj 
heedless, unBcbad()t ; on Sunday, am Sonntag ; cups and saucers, fj^ajlcn. 

136. 

SRat^en, to advise; id) xkif), I advised ; geratl^cn, advised ; Bringcn, U 
bring; ii) hxa6)U, I brought; gcBrac^t, brought; cm)p^tf)Un, to re 
c()nimend ; t^ cm)>fa]^, I recommended ; cmpfclffTcn, recommended. 

I do not know what to resolve ; what do you advise 
me to do ? One advises me this, the other that They 
advised me yesterdayj to give up a part of my rights. 
I should like you to (that you advised) me; in you I 
•ave the greatest confidence. Because you wish me to 
(that I advise) you, I tell you that the most unprofit- 
able accommodation is better than the most favorable 
law-suit I shall bring you tha fruits which you desire 
(to have). I believe they have brought them to me 
already. They brought me yesterday some letters 
from Berlin. When you come back, bring your sister 
with (you). Mn N". will bring his son with (him) to- 
morrow. They brought their aunt with (them) from 
Vienna. I should wish you to (that you brought) the 
young man with (you) of whom you have spoken. He 
recommends his son to me. You recommended your 



72 

business to liim. I have recommended liim to watch 
over him. 

What to resolve, ttjpju {(§ mid^ etttf(^l(cfctt fcH; one, they, man; 
even, fogar^ to give up, abtrcteit; the right, bad IHe^t; I should like, 
id^ »cHtc ; m you, gu S^ncn ; the greatest confidence, bod mciflc 3tt« 
trauen ; the most unprofitable accommodation, &c., ctn magerer 9kr« 
ftlci(^ 15 bcffcr, al« cin fetter ^rogeg; todesire, »imf<<>cnj the business 
f «5 ®cfd)aft ; to watch, xoa6)en ; over, uBcr. 



EXERCISES FOR READING, 



1. THE LITTLE DOG. 

Sin graulein, mit Slamen Caroline, ging cinft an bcni.Ufcr 
cined ^(uffcd \paiitxm. @te begegnete |ter etnigen b5fen 
Snabcn^ t>k tin ^Unbc^en ertrcinlen tooUttn; fie l^atte 3Rit(eib 
mit bem armen Zljitxt, faufte ed unb nal^m ed mit fid^ auf ba^ 

©a« ^iinbd^en l^attc batt mit feincr ncucn ©cbictcrin 53c* 
fanntfdiaft gemad^ unb tjcrlie^ fie leinen Slugenblid me^r. 
6ine« Slbenb^, aW fie fid) gu JSBette legen ttoCte^ (fipg ba« 
A §ilnb(^en pBfelid^ an gu betten^ Caroline nal^m ba^ gid&t^ 
fal^ unter bad Sett unb crblid te einen aJienfd^en^ (pon fiirt^ter:* 
tidiem ^udfe^en^ btt fid^ l^ier Derborgen l^atte, @d toar ein 
SDieb. 

Sardtine rief urn ^illfe unb aCe ©etoo^ner bed ©d&toffed 
eilten auf i^r ©efc^rei fjerbei. ©ie ergriffen ben Stftuber unb 
iibcrlieferten il^n ber ©erec^tiglcit* (5r geftanb in feinem SScr* 
I)5re, bag e« feine SSlbfic^t gemcfen ttare, bai grSufein gu er* 
morben unb bad ®(^Io§ gu ptUnbern. 

Caroline banlte bem ^immel, bag er fie fo glilcMi^ geret* 
M l)aitf unb fagte: 9{iemanb l^Stte geglaubt^ bag bad arme 
^^^ierc^en^ bem id^ bad Seben gerettet l^abe^ mir aud^ bad mei« 
ttige rctten ttttrbe. 

2. THE GOOD NEIGHBORS. 

!I)er ffcine ^nabe eined SKilllerd nS^erte fid) gu fel^r bem 
Sa^e unb fiel l^inein. ©er ©c^mieb^ ttelc^er jienfeit bt^ SSa- 
d)ed too^nte^ fal^ ed, fprang in ba^ XBaffer^ gog bad ^nb 
^et'and xmb brad^te ed bem SSater* 



78 

©n 0^^^^ barauf Lra^ iDdl^rcnb ber 3la6)t gcucr in bci 
Sd^mUbe au«. !Da§ §au« ftanb ganj in glammen^ cl^c ber 
©d^micb c« ntcrltc. Sr rettctc fic^ ntit ^rau unb ^inbcrn. 
SKur fcitt fleinftcd STod^tcrdjen fjattt man im crften ©d^vcdcn 
dcrgcffcn* 

©a^ ^nb fing in bcm brenncnbcn §anfe an ju fd^rcicn* 
attcin Icin aKcnfd^ tootttc fic^ l^incmtDagen. ;Da lam pWl^Iid) 
ber aJiuCer, [prang in bie iJtammen/ brad^te ba6 ilinb gliid (id) 
^eran«^ gab e§ bem ©d^mieb in bie SIrme unb fagtc: 

®ott fei gelobt^ bag er mir ©elegcnl^eit gab, gud^ mcine 
©anlbarfeit gu betocifem S\)v l^abt mcincn ©ol^n au6 bcm 
SBaffer gejogen, unb ic^ ^abe mit ®ottc6 ^iilfe ©ure Zodjkx 
a\x^ bem gcucr crrcttet. 

3. THE BROKEN HORSE-SHOE. 

Gm55auer ging mit feinem ©ol^ne/ bem Heinen S1^oma6, 
in bie ©tabt* ©iel^, fagtc er untcrmeg^ gu il^m, ba fiegt ein 
©tUdE t)on einem ^ufeifen an ber Srbc, l^ebe e6 auf unb ftedEc 
c« in bie Za\^c. fflal^, tjcrfefetc S^l^oma^, bad ift nid^t ber 
SKul^e tocrtl^, bag man jid^ bafiir bttcft* 5Der SSater ertoiebertc 
nid^te, na^m bad ©fen, unb ftedEtc cd in feinc SCafd^e. ^m 
n(l(|ften SDorfc tjcrlauftc er ed bcm ©d^miebe fttr brei fetter 
unb laufte bafiir Sirfd^cn. 

§ierauf fefeten fte i^ren 2Beg fort. 5Die ©onne \mv ixtiu 
nenb l^cig. 3)?an fat) toeit unb breit U)eber ^an^, nod^ SBalb, 
nod^ Quelle* SC^omad tjcrging )dov 5Durft unb lonnte feinem 
SSater nur mit SlJJiiJ^c folgcn. 

©a fie§ biefer, toie burd^ S^^^^f ^"^^ Sirfdjc faKen* 
Il^omad l^ob fie fo gierig auf, aid toare ed ®oIb, unb ftedEtc 
fie fd^ncH in ben 3)?unb» ginige ©c^ritte iDcitcr Keg ber SSa* 
ter cine gtocite ^ir[d^c fallen, meld^c SC^omad mit berfctben 
©icriglcit crgriff, SDicg banertc fort, bid er fie allc aufge* 
^oben l^attc. 

Slid er bie tefetc tjcrgcl^rt Ijatte, wanbtc ber SJater fid^ gi 
il)m l^in unb fagtc: ©iel), iDcnn bu bid^ ein eingiged Ttai l^ot* 
tcft bilden tooKen, um bad §nfeifcn aufgul|eben, fo toUrbeft bu 
nid)t not^ig gcl^abt ^aben, ed Ijunbcrt 2)ial fUr bie ^irjIc^CG gu 
lf)un. 

4. THE HIDDEN TRI:ASUR:^ 

fl'urg Dor fcincm STobe fagtc ein Saner gu feinen brei ©61^ 
ncn: giebe ^inbcr, id) fann cud| ni^td l^intcrfoffcn, atd biefe 

4 



74 

^Uttc imb bcu SSSciubcrg, bcr baran ftogt. Slflciu in blcfcm 
ffijcinbcvgc licgt cin ®^a§ tjerborgcn. ©rabet flcigig uad^, 
fo iDcrbct il^r i^n finbcn* 

iWad^ bcm 5£obe bc^ SSatcrd gruBcn bic ©Cl^nc ben ganjcn 
SBeiubcrg ntit bcm gro^ten gleigc um, abcr fie fanben loeber 
®oIb no^ ©ilber. $Da fie aber ben JSBoben nod) m mit fo 
Diet ©orgfalt bearbeitet l^atten, fo brac^te er eine f old^e SKengc 
STrauben l^erijor, ba§ fie bariiber erftaunten* 

Qciit erriet^en bie ©o^nc, toad i^r aSater mit bem ©djajjc 
gcmcint Ijaitt, unb fie fc^rieben an bie 2:i)iire bed SSSeinberged 
mit gro^en JSBud^ftabcn : 2lrbcitfam!eit ift ber gro^te ©c^aft 
bed SKcufd^en. 

5. THE OAK AND THE WILLOW. 

^aS) eiuer fcl)r ftilrmifd^en SWad^t giug cin 3Sater mit 
feinem ©o^ne auf bad gelb, um gu fel)cn, iDcIdjcn ©cfiaben 
ber ©turm tjcrurfat^t l^abe. ©ie| boc^, ricf ber Snabe, ba 
liegt bie groge, ftarle @id&e auf bem 53oben l^ingcftredft, to&fj^ 
renb bie fc^mad^e 2Beibe am 53ad^e nod^ aufred^t baftcl^t. Qd) 
ijMt geglaubt^ ber ©turmtoinb ttilrbe leic^ter bie SBcibe atd 
bie ©id^e niebergcriffen l^aben. 

SKein ©o^n, fagte ber aSater^ bie ftolje (Sid^c, bie fid; nid|t 
biegcn lann, mugte bred^en; allcin bie gcfd^meibige SBeibe 
^at bem ©turmminbe nad^gegeben unb ift balder tjcrfd^ont 
gcblicben. 

6. THE GRATEFUL LION. 

Gin armcr ©Haijc, bcr and bcm §aufe feined ^errn ent- 
flo^en tear, tourbe jum SCobe ijcrurt^cilt. 3Kan fti^rte i^n 
auf elnen gro^en ^lafe, toddler mit 3D?auern umgcbcn tear, 
unb licg cinen furditbaren Stimen auf i^n lod* SCaufenbe t)on 
SDflenfc^cn toarcn S^W^ ^'^f^^ ©d^aufpicld. 

5Der StJttJC f^rang grimmig auf ben armen 9Kenfd^en gu , 
oKcin pwyid^ blicb er ftc^cn, toebelte mit bem ©d^tocife^ 
Ijiipfte DoU ijrcubc um if|n lucrum unb ledEte i^m freunblid^ bie 
.^dubc. 3^bcrmann tjcrtounberte fid), unb fragte ben ©Ha# 
Den, tt)ie bad lommc. 

5ber ©HaDc ergiil^Ite: Slid ic^ meinem §erm entlaufen 
war, tjcrbarg id^ mit^ in einer ^5^Ie mitten in ber aSSilfte, 
X)a lam auf einmal biefer gome l^crcin, tDinfelte unb geigte mir 
felne Za% in ber ein gro|er ©om ftat QSj gog i|m ben 



75 

©oni Ijerau^ unb Don bcr ^txt an Dcrfal) niid^ bcr 85tDC mil 
SBilbprct unb tt)ir Icbtcn in bcr ^ol^tc fricblid^ gufammcn. 
Set bcr Icfeten S'agb tourben toit gcfangen unb t)on einanbct 
getrennt 9ton frent [id) ba« gute it^ier, mid^ toieber gefun* 
ben }u l^aben* 

3lCe« aSoII toat fiber bie SDonttarleit bicfc« toilben Sintered 
entjUdt, unb bat (aut urn ©nabe fttr ben ©HaDcn unb ben 
85tocn* 5Der ©ffatjc tourbe fret gelaffen unb relc^Iiti^ be* 
fi^cnlt. 2!)er Sdtt)e folgte il^nt U)ie ein ^finb^en nnb blieb 
ftetd bet il^nt^ ol^ne ^^manb cut Seib }u tl^un. 



76 



COLLECTION OF WORDS. 



1. THE 

S)te Stabt, the town ; 

ble 9$or[tabt; the suburb ; 

bo^ %\)ox, the gate ; 

ber $Ia^, the square ; 

ber 2)lar!t, the market-place ; 

bie Stia^e, the street ; 

ba^ ?Jflafter, the pavement ; 

bad ^an§, the house ; 

bad ©ebdube, the building ; 

bie fiird&c, the church ; 

ber S^l^unn, the tower, spire ; 

bie S)om!ird&e, the cathedral ; 

bie $oft; the post-office ; 

2, THE 

^ad $au§, the house ; 
bie Zi^ik, the door ; 
bad %f)OX, the gate ; 
bod Sd^Io^, the look ; 
ber ©(^lilffel, the key ; 
t)k filingel, the bell ; 
bie S^reppe, the staircase ; 
cine Stufe, a step ; 
cin Slower, a room ; 
ber 6aal, the saloon ; 
bad Senftcr, the window ; 
bie Saben, the shutters; 

3. 



TOWK. 

bad ^oU^au^, the custom 

house ; 
bad SE^eater, the theatre ; 
bie iBorfe, the exchange ; 
bad 6pital, the hospital ; 
bad SBirtl^^aud, the inn ; 
bad ^affeel^aud, the coffee 

house ; 
ber $Palaft, the palace ; 
bie aJlauer, the wall; 
bie fjeftung, the.fortress ; 
ber ^afen, the harbor ; 
bie Umgegenb, the environs. 

HOUSE, 

bie S)e(Ie, the ceiling ; 
ber Supoben, the floor ; 
bie SBanb, the wall ; 
ber flamin, the chimney ; 
bie Au(^e, the kitchen ; 
ber teller, the cellar ; 
ber Speid^er, the garret, loft ; 
bad S)ad&, the roof; 
ber ^o\, tJie court-yard ; 
ber @arten, the garden ; 
ber StaU, the stable ; 
ber iBrunnen, the well. 



THE FURNITIJRE. 

Ser %i\d), the table ; bie ^ommobe, the chest of 
ber Stul^I, the chair ; drawers ; 

ber Spiegel, the looking-glass ; bad ^anapee, the couch ; 

be« 6c&ranf, the wardrobe ; bad ©emdibe, the picture ; 



77 



bie Stanbul^r, the clock ; 
ba^ Sett, the bed ; 
bie SRatrage, the matress ; 
bie S)ede, the bed-cloth ; 
ber D\en, the stove ; 
bet £eu(^ter, the candlestick ; 
ber £6ffel, the spoon ; 
bie ®abel, the fork ; 
ba5 Ticket, the knife ; 
bie Saffe, the cup and sau- 
cer: 



baS ^ifd^tud^, the table-cloth 
baiS ZtUextnd), the napkin ; 
baS <^anbtud^, the towel ; 
bie fii^tfd^eere, the snuffers ; 
ber Setter, the plate ; 
ba^ fiiffen, the pillow ; 
baS iBettud^, the sheet ■ 
bie SSorl^dnge, the curtains 
baS ®la^, the glass ; 
bie Slafd^e, the bottle ; 
ber Roxbf the basket. 



4. THE mOFESSIONS. 
S)a» i^anbtoerf, the profession ; ber 6(^loj)er, the lock-smith ; 



car- 



ber ^anbtoerfer, the artisan ; 
ber SDleJger, the butcher ; 
ber SBddter, the baker ; 
ber aOfiatter, the miller ; 
ber ^Vitma6)et, the hatter ; 
ber 6(i&neiber, the tailor ; 
ber 64ufter, the shoemaker ; 
ber iBarbier, the barber ; 
ber ©d^reiner, the joiner ; 
ber 3i'"wermann, the 

penter ; 
ber ©lafer, the glazier ; 

6. 
S5a3 iBrob, the bread ; 
baS 3Rel^I, the meal, flour ; 
ba^ 5leifc&, the meat ; 
ber SBraten, the roast-meat ; 
Salbfleifd^, veal ; 
Winbfleifc^, beef; 
^amtnelfleifd^, mutton ; 
ber Sif(i^> the fish ; 
ba^ Qx, the egg ; 
ber Salatf the salad ; 
ber €enf, the mustard ; 



ber 6(^mieb, the smith ; . 
ber .^uffd&mieb, the farrier ; 
ber Sattler, the saddler ; 
ber iBottc^er, the cooper ; 
ber ©erber, the tanner; 
ber fiaufmann, the merchant; 
ber iBud&^dnbler, the book- 
seller ; 
ber S3ud&binber, the bookbinder; 
ber 3Raurer, the mason ; 
bie S^d^terin, the seamstress ; 
bie SBdfd^erin, the laundress 

THE VICTUALS. 

ba^ 6al3, the salt ; 
ba^ Oel, the oil ; 
ber Gfftg, the vinegar ; 
6(i&tDeinePeifd&, pork ; 
ber B(f)inUn, the ham.; 
bOiS ©emilfe, the vegetable ; 
bie 6uppe, the soup ; 
ber Ro^, the cabbage ; 
bie ^artoffel, the potato ; 
bie Grbfe, the pea ; 
bie Scl^nc, the bean ; 



78 



Der Aud^en, the cake ; 
ba^ Dbft, the fruit ; 
ber ?5fef[cr, the pepper ; 
bie Sutter, the butter ; 
ber ^dfe, the cheese ; 
bie mild), the milk ; 
ber SBein, the wine ; 

6. THE 

S)er ^cd, the coat ; 
ba^ ^leib, the gown ; 
ber SKantel, the cloak ; 
bie 2Befte, the waistcoat ,* 
bie ^ade, the jacket ; 
ber Bd)U^, the shoe ; 
ber Strumpf, the stocking ; 
ber ©tiefel, the boot ; 
"ber $antoffeI, the slipper ; 
baiS ^emb, the shirt, shift ; 
bie Sd&urge, the apron ; 
ber $anbf(i&ul^, the glove ; 



bo^ iBier, the beer ; 
boS ^T^W^d, the breakfast ; 
bad SRittagleffen, the dinner ; 
bad SSedperbrob, the after* 

noon's luncheon ; 
bad Slbenbeffen, the supper. 

CLOTHING. 

bad %a\d)tntud), the handker- 

chief; 
ber ^ut, the hat; 
bie Tl^e, the cap ; 
bie U^r, the watch ; 
berWegenfd&imt, the umbrella; 
ber ©onnenfd&irm, the parasol ; 
ber Sdc^er, the fan; 
ber Sd&Ieier, the veil ; 
ber 6tO(f, the cane ; 
ber iBeutel, the purse ; 
bie iBriHe, the spectacles. 



ber 9ting, the ring; 

7. THE HUMAN BODY. 



S^er Tlen\d), the man ; 
ber fiorper, the body ; 
ber fiopf, the head; 
bad ^aax, the hair ; 
tiasi ®efi(^t, the face ; 
bie Stime, the forehead ; 
bad Stuge, the eye ; 
bie Sflafe, the nose ; 
bad O^h the ear ; 
ber SKunb, the mouth J 
bod ^inn, the chin ; 
ber S3art, the beard ; 
bie fiippe, the lip ; 
ber 3tt^tt/ *^® *ooth ; 
bie 3unge, the tongue ; 



ber ^ald, the neck ; 
bie ©d&ulter, the shoulder ; 
ber fRMen, the back; 
ber arm, the arm ; 
bie $anb, the hand; 
ber Singer, the finger • 
ber Kagel, the nail; 
bie Sruft, the breast; 
bod $er3, the heart; 
ber 9)lagen, the stomach , 
bod iBein, the leg; 
ber Su^, the foot; 
bad Anie, the knee ; 
bie S^^^f ^e toe ; 
bag @el^irn, the brain 



79 



8. THE QUADRUPEDS. 
S;ai %W^, the animal; ber ^\t\^, the stag; 



ba$ 55fetb, the horse ; 
ber @fel, the donkey; 
ber igunb, the dog , 
bic Ral^, the cat; 
bte S^atte, the rat ; 
tie 2Jlau5, the mouse ; 
ber SDflauItourf, the mole ; 
bag 6dbtt?ein, the hog ; 
bie Siege, the goat; 
bie ©emfe, the chamois ; 
ber ^afe, the hare ; 
bag &6)f)0xn, the squirrel ; 
ber Slffe, the monkey ; 

0. 

S)er SSogel, the bird ; 
ber ^a^n, the cock ; 
bag ^ul)n, the hen ; 
bag i&ill&nd&ett, the chicken; 
ber Sd&ruan, the swan; 
bie ©ang, the goose ; 
bie QntCf the duck; 
bie %avbe, the pigeon ; 
ber $fau, the peacock ; 
bie 2Bad&teI, the quail ; 



bag 9lel^, the roe ; 
ber Dd&fe, the ox ; 
ber Stier, the bull ; 
bie &vif), the cow ; 
bag Mh, the calf; 
bog Bd)a\, the sheep ; 
bag Sximm, the lamb ; 
ber Sud&g, the fox ; 
berSBolf, the wolf ; 
ber SQat, the bear ; 
ber fiohje, the lion ; 
bag ^ameel, the camel; 
ber (Slc^^ant, the elephant. 

THE BIRDS. 

bag Meb^u^n, the partridge; 
ber &aminctii?oge(, the field 

fare, 
bie Slmfel, the black-bird ; 
bie fierd&e, the lark ; 
bie S^a(^tigaII, the nightingale; 
bie Sij^iualbe, the swallow; 
ber 3cip9/ the green-finch ; 
ber gin!, the finch ; 
ber 6perling, the sparrow. 



bie Sd&nc^fe, the snipe ; 

10. THE FISHES AND INSECTS. 



S)cr Sifd&, the fish ; 
ber $ed&t, the pike ; 
ber S,ad)^, the salmon ; 
ber ^arpfen, the carp ; 
bic 6d^(eie^ the tench ; 
ber Slal, the eel ; 
bie goreUe, the trout; 
bie flrote, the toad; 
ber grofd&, the frog; 



ber SBurtn, the worm ; 
bie SRaupe, the caterpillar; 
,bie Slmeife, the ant; 
bic 6pinne, the spider ; 
ber i&aring, the herring ; 
bie Slufter, the oyster ; 
bie 3)luf(^el, the muscle-fish ; 
ber firebg, the craw-fish ; 
bie Sd6Iange, the snake; 



80 



ele gliege, the fly ; 
tie Siene, the bee; 



bie S5Bc5pc, the wasp , 
ber^d^mettcrling, the butterfly 



11. THE TREES AND FLOWERS. 



^cr S3aum, the tree ; 

be*. Slpfelbaum, the applc-trce; 

h\ iBimbaum, the pear-tree; 

5or'$f(aumcnbaum, the plum- 
tree; 

bcr ^irfd&bautn, the cherry- 
tree; 

ber Slufebaum, the nut-tree ; 

bic ©id&e, the oak-tree; 

bie Sid&tc, the pine-tree; 

bic Sparine, the fir-tree ; 

bic S5ud&c, the beecb; 

bic Ulmc, the elm ; 

bic $appcl, the poplar ; 

bic Slumc, the flower ; 



bic SRofc, the rose ; 

bic SRcKc, the pink ; 

bic Xul^pe, the tulip ; 

bic fiilic, the lily ; 

bic 2ct)!oic, the stock ; 

ba^ SBcild&en, the violet; 

bic SWaiblumc, the lily of the 

valley ; 
bic ^omblumc, the corn-flower ; 
bcr glicbcr, the lilac ; 
bic Sonnenbliimc, the sun. 

flower ; 
ba^ ©eisblatt, the honey 

suckle 



12. THE COUNTRY. 



S)ag Sanb, the country, land ; 

bag gelb, the field ; 

bic ©egenb, the country ; 

bie (Sbcnc, the plain ; 

ber S3er(j, the mountain ; 

bal %\)al, the valley; 

ber SBalb, the forest; 

ber S3ufd^, the copse 

ber SGBcg, the road ; 

be4:93a^, the brook; 

bie 2Biefc, the meadow ; 

tie .^aibe, the heath ; 

ter ^ugel, the hill ; 



bie .^iitte, the cottage ; 

bal S)orf, the village ; 

ber glecien, the borough ; 

t>a^ Bd)lo^f the castle ; 

ber SDlcicrl^of , the farm ; 

bic SUm^Ic, the mill ; 

ball Rom, the corn ; 

ber SBcijcn, the wheat; 

bic ©erftc, the barley ; 

ber ^a\cx, the oats ; 

bag Strolf), the straw ; 

bag $cu, the hay ; 

bic 3'raiibe,the bunch of grapes: 



81 



EASY DIALOGUES. 



1. EATING AND DRINKING. 



A.re jou hungry ? 

[ have a good appetite. 

E am very hungry ? 

Eat something. 

What will you eat ? 

What do you wish to eat ? 

You do not eat. 

I beg your pardon ; I eat very 
heartily. 

I have eaten very heartily. 

I have dined with a good ap- 
petite. 

Eat another piece. 

I can eat no more. 

Are you thirsty. 

Are you not thirsty 1 

I am very thirsty ? 

I am dying of thirst. 

Let us drink. 

Give me something to drink. 

Will you drink a glass of 
wine ? 

Drink a glass of beer. 

Drink another glass of wine. 

Rir, I drink to your health. 

I have the honor, to drink to 
your health. 



Sinb 6ie ^ungrig? 

^(S) ^aU gutcn Wp)pMt. 

^6) bin fel&r ^ungrig. 

©jfen 8ie cttuag. 

SBa5 tooUen 6ie cffcn ? 

2Ba3 toilnfd&en 6ie ju cffen? 

Sic cffen nid&t. 

^6) bittc urn SBcr5ci^ung, i6) <}i 

fcl^r J)iel. 
3(3& ^abc fe^r toiel gcgcffen. 
^df f)ahc ntit gutcm Slppctit ju 

aWittag gcgcffen. 
Gffcn Sic nod& cin Stiidd&cn. 
^d) lann nid^ts ntcl^r gcnie^cn. 
Sinb Sic burftig? 
$abcn Sic Icincn S)urft? 
^6) bin felfir burftig. 
3<i& tocrgc^c tjor S)urft. 
fiaffen Sic unl trinfen. 
©ebcn Sic mir ju trinfcn. 
SBoIIcn Sic cin (Sla5 SBein trin 

fen? 
S^rinfcn Sic cin (SIa3 S3icr. 
3!rin!cn Sic nod^ cin (Sla§ SBcin 
3Jlctn igctr, id^ trinfe auf il^r 

©cfunb^cit. 
3d^ ^abc bic .(Sf)xe, auf il&rc Ch« 

funbl&eit jju trinfcn. 



82 



2. GOING AND COMING. 



Where arc yoxi going ? 
I am going home. 
I was going to your house. 
Where do you come from ? 
I come from my brother's. 
I am coming from church. 
L just left the school. 
Will you go with me ? 
Whither do you wish to go ? 
We will go for a walk. 
We will take a walk. 

With all my heart, most will- 
ingly. 
What way shall we take ? 
Any way you like. 
Let us go into the park. 

Let us take your friend along 

on our way. 
As you please. 
Is Mr. B. at homo ? 
He is gone out. 
He is not at home. 
Can you tell us, where he is 

gone? 
I cannot tell you, precisely. 

I think he is gone to see his 

sister. 
Do you know when he will 

come back? 
No, he said nothing about it, 

when he went out. 
Then we must go without 

him. 



SBo^in ge^cn Sie? 

^6) gel^e na6) $aufe. 

^df iDoQte gu S^nen. 

2Bo^cr lommcn 6ic? 

3d& fommc loon mcincnt Sruber 

3<i& lomme au2 ber ^ird&e. 

^df fommc fo cbcn au^ bcr 6^u(c. 

SBoHen 6ie mit mir gel^en? 

SBo^tn iDoIIen €te ge^en ? 

SBir tooKen fpajtcren gel&cn. 

ffiir hJoKen cinen 6pa§icrgang 

madden, 
©e^r gem, mit SScrgnflgcn. 

SBeld&en 2Bcg hjottcn \mx nc^mcn? 
SBeld^en SBeg Sie moQen. 
Saffen 6ie un§ in ben ?Par! 

ge^en. 
Saffen Sie un3 im SSorbeigc^cn 

i^ren grcunb ab^olcn. 
fflie eg S^nen gefaffig ijl. 
3ft$errSB. stt$aufc? 
dt ift auSgegangen. 
Gr ift nid^t §tt $aufe. 
Jl5nnen Sie unS fagen, mo^in er 

gegangen ift? 
3d^ fann e3 i^nen ntd^t gewtft 

fagen. 
3d& glaube, baf er ju fcinct 

Sd^toefter gegangen ijt. 
SBiffen Sie, teann er jur(ld» 

lommt? 
S^etn; er \)at nid^td ba))cn ge> 

fagt, al& er gtng. 
%ann milffen loir o(ne t^n 

ge^en. 



83 



8. QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS. 



Come nearer; I have some- 
thing to tell you. 
I have a word to say to you. 

Listen to me. 

I want to speak to you. 

What is your wish ? 

I am speaking to you. 

I am not speaking to you. 

What do you say ? 

What did you say ? 

I say nothing. 

Do you hear ? 

Do you hear what I say ? 

Do you understand me ? 

Will you he so kind, as to 

repeat . . . . ? 
[ understand you well. 
Why do you not answer me ? 
Do you not speak French ? 
Very little, Sir. 
I understand it a little, hut I 

do not speak it. 
Speak louder. 
Do not speak so loud. 
Do not make so much noise. 
Hold your tongue. 
Did you not tell me, that. . . ? 
Who told you that 1 
They have told me so. 
Somehody has told it to me. 
I have heard it. 
What do you wish to say 7 
What is that good for ? 
How do you call that ? 
That is called .... 



S!reten <Sie ndl&er, id& ^abc S^i 

nen ctiuag ju fagen. 
3[d& ^a6c 3(mcn cin 2Bortd&cn gu 

fagen- 
$oren Ste tnid^ an. 
3^^ tncd&te tnit S^ncn fprciifecn. 
2Ba^ fte^t ju S^rcn S)icnftcn? 
3<i& fpred&c mit S^nen. 
3<i& fpred^c nid^t mit Sl&ncn. 
2Ba§ fagcn Sic ? 
SBai \iQbm 6ie gefagt? 
^^ fagc nid&tl. 
$orcn 6ic? 

§8crfte]&en 8ic, Xoa^ ic^ fagc? 
SScrftelfien 6ic niid&? 
2BoKcn ^\t fo gut fein, §u tuic* 

bcrl^olen ? 

3(5 toerftel^e 6ie h)olE)I. 

SBarum anttoortcn 6ie mtr ni^t^ 

Sprc^en 6ie nid&t franjSfifd^? 

Selfir hjcnig, mcin $err. 

3ci& Jjcrftc^e c^ ein hjenig, abet 

id& fprcd^c e^ nid&t. 
6pred&en Sie lauter. 
Sprcd&en 6ie nid&t fo laut. 
SOlad^en Sic nid^t fo totcl Sann. 
Sd^iDcigen 6ic. 

Sagten 6te mir ntd&t, bag 1 

SBcr &at 3]Eincn ba^ gcfagt? 
ajlan bat c5 tnir gcfagt. 
(S3 bat niir*5 Semanb gcfagt, 
3(b babe cjS gcbCrt. 
2BaS tooHcn 6ie fagen? 
SB03U foQ baiS bicnen ? 
SBic ttcnncn 6tc baiS? 
S)aS bet^t 



84 



May I ask you . . . . ? 
What do you wish ? 
Do you know Mr. G.? 
I know him by sight. 
I know him by name. 

4. THE 

How old are you ? 

IIow old is your brother ? 

I am twelve years old. 

I am ten years and six 
months old. 

Next month I shall be sixteen 
years old. 

I was eighteen years old last 
week. 

You do not look so old 

You look older. 

I thought you were older. 

I did not think you were so old. 

How old may your uncle be ? 

He may be sixty years old. 

He is about sixty years old. 

He is more than fifty years old. 

He is a man of fifty and up- 
wards. 

He may be sixty or there- 
abouts. 

He is above eighty. 

That is a great age. 

Is he so old 1 

He begins to grow old. 



S)arf id) Sic fragcn ? 

2Ba^ hjunfd&en etc? 
ilennen 6ie ^^xxn ®.? 
^d) fenne i^n Don Slnfe^cn. 
3d& fenne i^n bcm 9lamen !ia<^ 

AGE. 

ffiie alt fmb 6ie? 

2Bie alt ift 3^r $err S3ruber? 

^6) bin gmolf S^i^re alt. 

^d) bin 5e]^n unb cin (;aIbeJ 

Salfir alt. 
3lm ndd^ften 2Ronat trerbe icj 

fed^^el^n ^al^rc alt. 
SBergangenc 2Bod^e hin id) ad)U 

gel^n ^df)xc alt (jetoorben. 
6ie felEien nid^t fo alt au^. 
Sie felEien alter aul. 
^d) l&ielt fie fur alter. 
3« ?)telt fic nid&t fur fo alt. 
2Bie alt mag il^r O^eint fein? 
Gr !ann ettoa fed&jtg Salfire l^abcn 
(Sr ift ungefdlEir fed^^ig 3lal&re alt 
(Ex ift fiber funfaig Sal^re alt. 
(Sr ift ein 2Rann t)on funf^ig un> 

cinigen Sa^ren. 
Qx tarn cttoa fed&^ig ^df)xt 

gd^len. 
@r ift fiber ad^tjig Sal^re alt. 
5)a§ ift cin ^ol^^e^ Sllter. 
3ft cr fo alt? 
©r fdngt an gu altem. 



5. THE TIME. 

What o'clock is it ? 2Bic toiel U^r ift c^ ? 

Pray, tell me what time it is ? ^d) bitte, fagcn Sie m\x, h)cl<6 

3eit el ift. 
It is one o'clock. (S^ ift ein U^r. 



85 



It is past one. 
[t has struck one 
[t is a quarter past one. 
It is half past one. 
It wants ten minutes to two. 
It is not yet two o'clock. 
]t is only twelve o'clock, 
t is almost three o'clock. 
It is on the stroke of three. 
It is going to strike three. 
It is ten minutes past three. 
The clock is going to strike. 
There the clock strikes I 
It is not late. 
It is later than I thought. 
I did not think it was so late. 



(S3 ift ein Ul^r Dotbei. 
@3 l&at cinS gcfd&Iagen. 
63 ift ein SSicrtel auf iitjei. 
(53 ift \)alh atuct. 
(53 fel&len gcl^n 3?linuten an jmel 
(53 ift nod& ntd&t jtoei U^r. 
(53 ift crft jtoolf. 
(53 ift beinal^e brei. 
(53 ift gegen brei. 
©3 hjirb gleid^ brei Ul^r fd^lagen 
63 ift it^n SJltnuten nad) btci. 
S)ic U^r hjirb fogleic6 fd^Iagen. 
S)a \m^t bie UJr! 
63 ift ttid^t fpdt. 
(53 ift fpdter, aU id& bad&te. 
:3<i& bad^te nid^t, ba^ e3 fo fpdt 
mdre. 



6. THE WEATHER. 



What kind of weather is it ? 

It is bad weather. 

It is very cloudy. 

It is dreadful weather. 

It is fine weather. 

We are going to have a fine 

day. 
It is dewy. 
It is foggy. 
It is rainy weather. 
It threatens to rain. 
The sky becomes very cloudy. 
The sky is getting very dark. 
The sun is coming out. 

The weather is clearing up 

again. 
It is very hot. 
It is sultry. 



2Ba3 ift c3 fiir ffietterV 

63 ift fc^Icd&te3 SBctten 

63 ift trube. 

63 ift ein abfd6eulid&e3 SBetter. 

63 ift fd&one3 SBetter. 

2Bir hjerben einen fd^onen Za^ 

babcn. 
63 t^aut. 
63 ift nebelig. 
a^ ift regncrifd&e3 SBcttcr. 
63 brobt su rcgnen. 
S)er ^immel umjlel^t pd&. 
5)er i&immel toirb bunfel. 
6ie 6onne fdngt an fid^ $ 

jeigen. 
S)a3 SGBetter !ldrt fid^ tuieber auf 

63 ift fclfir ^ei^ 

63 ift eine crftidfenbe $i|c. 



86 



It is very mild. 

It is cold. 

It is excessively cold. 

It is raw weather 

It rains. 

It has been raining. 

It is going to rain. 

I feel some drops of rain. 

There are some drops of rain 

falling. 
It hails. 

It snows ; it is snowing 
It has been snowing. 

It snows in large flakes. 
It freezes. 
It has frozen. 
It begins to moderate. 
It thaws. 
It is very windy. 
The wind is very high. 
There is no air stirring. 
It lightens. 

It has lightened all night. 
It thunders. 
The thunder roars. 
The thunderbolt has fallen. 
It is stormy weather. 
We shall have • a thunder- 
storm. 
The sky begins to clear up. 

The weather is very unsettled. 
It is very muddy. 
It is very dusty. 
It is very slippery. 
It is bad walking. 



e^S ift fc^r mi(b. 

Gi5 ift tali. 

Q^ ift eine ilbermd^tge MUt^ 

QB tft rau^el SBcttet 

(SiS tegnet. 

@0 ^at geregnet. 

@^ loirb ^kii) regnen. 

^6) faille SRcgcntropfcn. 

Q^ fallen Slegcntropfen. 

G5 lEiagclt.- 

(S3 f<3&neit; c§ fdOt Sti^nee. 

Q§ ^at gcfd&neit ; e§ ift Sd^nec 

gcfaHen. 
Gj3 fd^ncit in gro^cn glccfen. 
m friert. 
Q^ ^at gefrorcn. 
Q& fdngt an gelinber ju toerbcn. 
@3 tl^aut auf. 
65 ift fc^r totnbtg. 
S)er SGBtnb toc^t ftarf. 
e^a »c^t Icin fiiiftd&cn. 
6iS blt^t. 

@l \)at bte gan^e ^ad^t gebligt* 
(S3 bonnctt. 
S)cr S)onncr rottt. 
QB })at eingefd^lagen. 
(S3 ift fti4rmifd&c3 fflettcr. 
2Bir toerbcn cin (Sctoitter be* 

lotnmcn. 
S)cr igtmmel fdngt an, f\d) auf 

SU^ettern. 
S)a3 SBetter ift fe^r unbcftdnbig 
63 ift fe^T fd^mu^ig. 
(S3 ift fe^r ftaubig. 
(S3 ift fel&r glatt. 
@3 ift fd^led^teS ©el^eiu 



87 

It is daj-light. (Sd ift ZaQ. 

It is dark. (Sd ift bunfel. 

It is night. 6^ ift 9la<i^t. 

It is moon-light. S)er SRonb fij^eint. 

Do yon think it will bo fine @(auben @ie, ba^ e^ guUd 3Bet# 

weather. ter geben toirb? 

1 do not think that it will 3<i^ glaube nid^t, baf c^ rcgncn 

rain. loirb. 

I am afraid it will rain. ^6) \ik^tt, eS tt>irb regnen. 

r fear so. 3(i& filrd&te el. 

7. THE SALUTATION. 

Good morning, Sir ! (Sutcn SMorgen, mcin $crr ! 

I wish yon a good morning. 3d& loflnf^e 3^ncn gutcn 3Jlor« 

gen. 

How do you do ? SBie bcfinben Sic fid^? 

How is your health ? SBie ge^t «3 mit 3^^ ®efunb« 

licit? 

Do you continue in good SBcfinben €ic fx6) mrntx tool&l? 

health ? 

Pretty good; and how is 3icmlid& toolfil, unb Sic? 

yours ? 

Are you well ? 6inb Sic too^I? 

Very well, and you ? Scl^r tool&l, unb Sie au^'i 

I am perfectly well. 3^ bcfinbe tnid^ fel^ \do% 

And how is it with you ? Unb loie gc^it cjS mit 3^i^cw? 

As usual. SBte gem5^nltd^. 

Pretty well, thank (Jod. 3«mli<i& gut, ®ott fei ®an!. 

I am very happy to see you S3 freut taxi} fc^r Sic ttJC^I in 

well. fc^cn. 

8. THE VISIT. 

There is a knock. (S§ flo)p\t 

Somebody knocks. Q^ floi)ft 3«nanb. 

Go and see who it is. ©cV unb fiel^, toer ba ift. "^ 

Qo and open the door. ©e^ unb 6ffne bie S^ilt. 

It is Mrs. B. ei ift SKabamc ». 



88 

I wish you a good morning. Qd^ h?unfdbc O^bncn gutcn SRon 

gen, 
I am happy to see you. 65 freut mx^, 6ie ju fcl&en. 

I have not seen you this age. 6j3 ift ein Sa^^unbcrt, fcit ic^ 

6ic nic^t fa^. 
It is a novelty to sec you. Q^ ift eine 6elten^eit, €ie }U 

fe^en. 
Pray, sit down. Sejen 6ie fid^, i<i& bittc. 

Sit down, if you please. 6e^en 6ie [id) gefddtgft. 

Take a seat * 3l^^men Bit $Ia^. 

Give a chair to the lady. ®ib SWabame cincn Stu^I. 

Will you stay and take some SBoHen 6ie lum 3Jlittag0effcn 

dinner with us ? bet uniS bleiben? 

I cannot stay. ^d) !ann nid^t bleiben. 

I only came in to see how ^d) bin nur gcfommcn, urn 5U 

you are. erfal&ren, toic Sic fid) befinben, 

I must go ^d) mni ge^en. 

You are in a great hurry. 6ie fmb febr ctlig. 

Why are you in such a hurry ? iffie^b^tt fmb Bie fo dlig ? 
I have a great many things ^d) J)dbc t)tcl ju tbun. 

to do. 
Surely you can stay a little 8ie fonnen toobl nod^ cincn 3lu» 
. longer. genblidC bicibcn. 

I will stay longer another 6in anbcr Wlal tviH id^ langcf 

time. bleibcn. 

I thank you for your visit. ^d) ban!c Qbncn filr 3^rcn SScs 

fud&. 
I hope to see yoH soon again, ^d) f)oWt @ic balb toicbcr ju 

febcn. 

9. THE BREAKFAST. 

Have you breakfasted? $abcn ©tc gefrflbftil(It ? 

Not yet. %id} nid&t. 

You are come just in time Sic fommcn gcrabc 5U ud)in 

Seit 
You will breakfast with us. Sic tvcrbcn mit un^ friibftiidEeh. 
Breakfast is ready. 2)a§ fjrubftfid^ ift bcrcit. 



89 



Do you drink tea or coffee ? 
Would jou prefer cbocolate ^ 

I prefer coffee. 
What can I offer you ? 
Hero are rolls and toast. 

What do you like best ? 

I shall take a roll. 

How do you like the coffee ? 

Is the coffee strong enough ? 

It is excellent. 

Is there enough sugar in it ? 

If there is not, do not make 

any ceremony. 
Do as if you. were at home. 



3:nn!en Sic %f)u obcr flaffec? 
3&oIIen 6te t)telleid^t Ileber Q^o* 

folabc? 
^df ikf^e ben £affee )?ot. 
^oS !ann id) ^l^nen anbieten? 
^kx fmb SWild^brobd&en unb ge* 

roftctc S3robfd&nitt<i6cn. 
SDoS m5gen 8ie am liebfteu? 
^6) loerbe ein iBtobd^en nel^tneii. 
SBie flnben 6ie ben £af[ee? 
3ft ber fiaffce ftarl genug ? 
er ift toortrefflid^, 
3ft genug ^uda barin? 
3ft ed nid^t, fo mad^^n Bit 

feine ^mplimente. 
^^un 8ie, als ob Sic 5U $aufc 

lodren. 



10. BEFORE DINNER. 



At what time do we dine to- 
day 1 

We shall dine at two o'clock. 

We shall not dine before 
three o'clock. 

Shall we have anybody at 
dinner to-day 1 

Do you expect company ? 

I expect Mr. B. 

Mr. D. has promised to come 
if the weather permits it. 

Have you given orders for 

dinner ? 
What have you ordered for 

dinner ? 
Have you sent for fish 1 
I could not get any fish. 



Urn hjcld&c 3cit effcn lutr Ifieute 

3U aJlittag? 
SBir tocrben um jioei U^r effen. 
SBir toerben nid&t »or brei U^t 

effen. 
SBerben tuir l^eute gum Gffen 

3cmanben bet ur^ Ifiaben? 
erlDtttten Sic ©cfcHfd^aft? 
^d) crttjartc $crm S3. 
^tn 2). l&at toerfprod&en ju !oms 

men, loenn eS baS SBetter 

eriaubt. 
Robert Sic bie fflefcl^Ie lum 2Kit» 

tag^cffen gegeben? 
SEBaS l^aben Sic lum G^ffen bc« 

fteOt? 
$aben Sic gifd^ bcforgcn laffen? 
34 ^abc leinen gifd^ befommev 

ionnen. 



90 

I fear, we shall have a very 3id& bcforge, ba^ loir fein fott« 

indifferent dinner. berlid^eS SRittac^leffen l^ben 

hjerben. 

We must do as we can. SBir tnflffen im^ bel&clfen. 

11. DINNER. 

What shall I help you to ? 2Ba^ foO id& S&ncn tjorleoeu? 

Will you take a little soup? SBoKen 6ie ctmai Suppe? 

No, I thank you. I will trou- 3^ ban!e. 3<^ hjcrbc 8ie iiit 

ble you for a little beef. ettoa^ SRinbPcifd^ bitten. 

It looks so very nice. (S^ ficl^t fo QVLt au^. 

Which piece do you like best? fficld&cS Btxid f^obtn Sic am 

licbftcn ? 

I hope this piece is to your 3^ ^offe, ba^ bie3 Stfli nadj 

liking. S^'^cm ©efd^madc ifl. 

Gentlemen, you have dishes SMeine ^errcn, bie ©d^fiffeln 

near you. ftc^en toor S^ncn. 

Help yourselves. Scbicncn ©ie fic^. 

Take without ceremony what SRe^men 6ie o^ne Umftdnbc, 

you like best. toa^ 3^nen belicbt. 

Would you like a little of SBoQen 6ie tin loeni^ )7cn bie^ 

this roast-meat ? fern Sraten? 

Do you choose some &t ? SBoKen 6ie fJetteS? 

Give me some of the lean, if ®tben Sie tnir TlaQtte&, menti 

you please. c5 Sl^ncn {jcffittig ift. 

How do you like the roast- 2Bic pnben Sie ben Sratcn? 

meat? 

It is excellent, delicious. 65 ift tiortrefflid^, foftUd^. 

What will you take with your SBa5 toflnfd^en Sic gum SIcifiJ ! 

meat ? 

May I help you to some ve- S)arf idf S^ncn ©emflfc gcbcn? 

gctables ? 

Will you take peas or cauli- SEBiinfc^cn 6ic Srbfen obcr iBCut 

flower? mcnfol&I? 

It is quite indifferent to me. 53 ift mir gang glcid^. 

I shall send you a piece of 34 toiU 3^ncn cin StfidEc^cn 

this fowl. »on biefcm ®cf(i5gel reid^cn. . 



91 



Ko, thank jou, I can eat no 

more. 
You are a poor cater. 
You eat nothing. 
I beg your pardon, I do honor 

to your dinner. 
You may take away. 

12. T 

Ilaye you carried in the tea- 
things ? 
Everything is on the table. 
Does the water boil ? 
Tea is ready. 
They are waiting for you. 
Here I am. 

We have not cups enough. 
We want two more cups and 

saucers. 
Bring another tea-spoon and 

a saucer. 
You have not brought in the 

sugar-tongs. 
Do you take cream ? 
The tea is so strong. 
I shall thank you for a little 

more milk. 
Here are cakes and muffins. 
Do you prefer some bread 

and butter ? 
I shall take a slice of bread 

and butten 
Pass the plate this way. 
Ring the bell, if you please. 
Will you kindly ring the bell ? 

Wc want some more water. 



^i) bank, id; lawn nid^tS mebt 

cffen. 
€te fmb ein f(^n)a<j^er Sjfer. 
6ie effen gar nic^td. 
Sd^ bitte um iBerseibitng, !(( 

mad)t 3^reni 6ffen (S^e. 
^\)x Unnt alsbann abbeden. 

EA. 

$aft bu SlQe^ gebrad^t, toa^ sum 

Xl&cc gcbStt? 
6S ift Me^ auf bent Sifi^e. 
Ro(i)t bad SBaffer? 
S)eT 2:bee ifi fertig. 
Sic loerben ermartet. 
$ter bin id). 

SBtr baben ntd^t ^affen genug. 
SSBir ntHffen noi) imi 2:affen 

baben. 
SBringe nocb einen ^^b^^^cffel unb 

cine Untcrtaffe. 
^u baft bie gudterjange nid^t 

gebrad^t. 
Slebmen 6te 9tabm? 
S)cr 2bce ift fo ftarf. 
Sd^ toerbe nod^ um etn^oS SOttldft 

bitten. 
$ter ift Aud^en unb Sroblud^en 
^ctt 6ie lieber ffluttetbrcb? 

3d& iDcrbe ein 99utterbrob neb* 

men. 
6d&icb ben Speller bietber. 
ecbctten 6ie gcffinigft. . 
SBoQen 6ie gfitigft bie AKngel 

3teben? 
SSBir braud^cn nod^ mebt 9Baffct« 



92 



Bring it as quickly as possible. 
Make haste. 

Take the plate with you. 
Is your tea sweet enough ? 
Ilave I put sugar enough in 

your tea? 
It is excellent. 
I do not like it quite so sweet. 
Your tea is very good. 
Where do you buy it ? 
I buy it at ... . 
Have you already done ? 
You will take another cup ? 

I shall pour you out half a 

cup. 
You will not refuse me. 

I hav« already drunk three 
cups, and I never drink 
more. 



SBringe es fo fc^^ncd al3 ntSgfi^. 

S3eei(c bld^. 

SRimm ben ^cUcr tnit. 

3ft ber Sl^cc fa^ gcnug? 

$abe xdf gcnug 3"^^^^ ^^ ^xtn 

%f)e^ get^an? 
(St ift »orttcfflid&. 
3c& ^aU x^n ntd&t gem fo ffife. 
Sl&r Z\)ee ift fel&r gut. 
2Bo laufcn Sic il^n? 
3<i& laufe ijn bci 
6inb 8te fd^on fcrtlg? 
6ie tocrbcn nod^ eine Xaf\t 

tic^mcn ? 
3<i& tocrbe ^^nen ncd& eine l^albe 

2affe cinfd&cnfen. 
Sie tocrbcn e^ mix mi^t obt 

fc^lagen. 
3d& ^obe fiifeon brci Satfcn ge« 

trunfen, unb met^r trinfe t4 

ttie. 



A NEW 



PRACTICAL AND EASY METHOD 



OF LEARNING 



TUB 



GERMAN LANGUAGE. 



BY 



F. AHN, 



DOOTOB OT nULOflOPHY AND PBOFBSSOR AT mx OOLLKQB Of KSUBS. 



8EC0VD C0UB8E. 



SECOND AMERICAN, FRO]I THE EIGHTH LONDON EDITION 



NEW TOEK: 
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, 

B49 & 651 BROADWAY. 

1877. 



INDEX. 

TU£0RETICAL PaRT. '*•" 

Chapter I. — Of the Article 7 

Chapter II. — Of the Substantive 8 

1. Of the Gender of Substantives 8 

2. Of the Declension of Substantives 10 

3. Of the Formation of the Plural 13 

L Of Proper Names 16 

5. Of tho Formation of Feminine Nouns 17 

6. Of the Diminutives 17 

Chapter III. — Of the Adjective 18 

1. Declension of the Adjectives 18 

2. Degrees of Comparison of the Adjectives ... 20 

Chapter IV. — Of the Numbers 21 

Chapter V. — Of Pronouns 23 

1. Determinate Personal Pronouns 23 

2. Indeterminate Personal Pronouns 24 

Chapter VI. — Of Adjective and Eelative Pronouns, 25 

1. Demonstrative Pronouns 25 

2. Possessive Pronouns 27 

3. Eelative Pronouns 27 

4. Interrogative Pronouns 28 

Chapter VII.— Of the Verb 29 

1. Preliminary Notions 29 

2. Of the Conjugation of Assonant Verbs 30 

3. Of the Conjugation of Dissonant Verbs. . . 32 

4. Of the Conjugation of Irregular Verbs 88 

5. Of the Formation of the Compound Tenses . . 41 

6. Of the Conjugation of Passive Verbs 44 

7. Of Reflective Verbs 46 

8. Of Impersonal Verbs 48 

9. Of Compound Verbs 49 

Chapter VIII. — Of Prepositions 51 

Chapter IX, — Of Adverbs 56 



iv 



PAOB 



Chapter X. — Of Conjunctions 68 

Chapter XI. — Of the Use of the Moods 59 

1. Indicative Mood 59 

2. Subjunctive Mopd 59 

3. Imperative Mood 60 

4 Infinitive Mood 61 

5 Participles 62 

(JflAPTER XII.— Of the Use of the Tenses 63 

1. Present Tense 63 

2. Imperfect Tense 63 

3. Perfect Tense 64 

Chapter XIII. — Of the Construction 64 

Table of all Irregular Forms of the Irregular Verbs, 69 

Practical Part. 

Alphabetical List of all those words which are to be 
met with in the 136 exercises of the first course, 
and with which the pupil is supposed to be quite 

familiar . 81 

Exercises 84 

Diverse Exercises 106 

1. The Cane-pipe 106 

2. The Three Robbers 106 

3. The Pilgrim 107 

4. The Robin-Redbreast * 108 

5. The Voice of Justice ... , 108 

6. The Peaches 109 

7. The Desert Island 110 

Vocabulary <« ^ . . . . 114 

Collection of much used Phrases. 118 



THEORETICAL PART. 



CHAPTER I. 

PKELIMINARY NOTIONS. 

§ 1. The German Language is composed of eight 
kinds of words, called the parts of speech. They are : 
the Article, the Substantive, the Adjective, the Pronoun, 
the Verb, the Adverb, the Preposition, and the Con- 
junction. 
^ § 2, There are in German two numbers: the Sin- 
gular and the Plural; three genders: the masculine, 
the feminine, and the neuter; four c^^; the Nomina- 
tive, the Genitive, the Dative, and the Accusative.* 

OF THE ARTICLE. 

§ 3, We distinguish in German two kinds of Ar- 
ticles: the definite Article bcr, bte, ba^, and the indefi- 
nite Article ein, eine, ein. 

^1. DECLENSION OP THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 





Singular* 






Plural 






Masc. Fern, 


Neut, 


for 


all genders. 




Nom 


bcr, bic. 


bad, 




bie. 


tiie, 


Gen. 


bc5, bet. 


bc5. 




bcr. 


of the, 


Dat. 


bem, bcr, 


bem, 




belt, 


to the. 


Aec. 


ben, bie. 


baiS, 




bie, 


the. 




^^ 2. DECLENSION OP THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 






Nom. ein. 


cine. 




eiit. 


n> 




Gen. emc5. 


cincr, 




cinc5| 


0^%. 




Dat, eincm. 


cincr, 




eittcnv 


to a, 




Ace. eincn, 


cine. 




ein. 


9. 

•• 



* The Nominative answ^era to the English nonUaatire case, the AccasaMYV ^ 
the objectirie Qj\se, J^ncl the Genitive to the possessiye ca?Q, 



8 

It is to be observed that almost all declinable words, excepting the 
Substautiyes, take the same terminations as the definite article, viz. * 

Masc, Fern. Neut, 

Nom. cr, e, c8, 

Gen. cS, ex, c«, 

Dat. ent; cr, cm, 

V Ace. en, t, a* 

The neuter Gender differs from the masculine onlj 
in the Nominative and Accusative. The Accusative 
of the feminine and neuter genders is always the same 
as the Nominative. 



CHAPTER II. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE 



I. OF THE GENT)ER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

^ § 4. Of the masculine gender are: 

-V 1. The substantives, which denote a male being as 
well by nature as by condition or occupation. Ex.: 

bet ©ol)tt, the son ; bet ©d^ncibcr, the tailor ; 

bcr <&irt; the herdsman , ber (Stier, the bull. 

2. The names of the seasons, months and days. Ex.: 

bcr SGBintcT/ the winter ; bcr 9Kai, May ; 

bcr <&crbfi/ the autumn ; bet ®onnta(); Sunday. 

'3. The Substantives ending in all, cl, cr, cu and 
iug. Ex.: 

JDct ©an, the ball ; bet ^Utfd^cr, the coachman ; 

bet ©tall, the stable ; ber ^egett,/ the sword ; 

ber £6 jfcty the spoon ; bcr Dfen, the stove ; 

ber ©d^luffcl, the key ; ber ©pcrlmg, the sparrow ; 

ber ^ammct; the hammer ; ber <6artng, the herring. 

Exceptions from ihe preceding rules : 

bic ®aBcl, the fork ; bic ©d^uffct, the dish ; 

btc ^artojfcl, the potato , bic Scicr, the festival ; 

bie 2citcr, the ladder ; bic Scier, the lyre ; 

baiS S^bcr, the oar ; bad ^i^en, the cushion ; 

bad Slltcr/ the age ; bad 3etd^en^ the mark ; * 

bad Scnjicr, the window ; bad (iifen, iron ; 

ia9 §tcbcr, the fever ; bad SWcJftng; brass. 



9 

• » 

§ 5. Of the feminine gender are: 

^ 1. The Substantives which denote a female being, as 
well by nature as by condition or occupation. Ex.: 

3)ie XeiS^Ux, the daughter ; bic STOagb, the maid-servant ; 
bie SS^irt^in; the hostess ; bte Bicge, the she-goat. 

-2. The Substantives ending in cl, l^cit, feit, fcfjaft 
ung^ in andni^. Ex.: 

£)ie 3)nidferct, the printing-olflace ; bic «&offnung; hope ; 

kit $(Bteif the abbey ; bie ^ont^tn, the ^ueen ; 

bic ©cfunbBcit, health ; bic «&ctrm, the mistress ; 

bic Saubcrrcit, neatness ; bic ^cnntnif, knowledge ; 

bic Srcuttbjci^aft, friendship • bic (Srlaubnip, the. permission. 

Exceptions : 

5)a« 2Bcib, the woman ; baS ©unbnifl; the alliance ; 

ba3 graucniimmcr, the woman ; baiS Scfenntnig, the confession , 

ba5 Silbnif, the image ; ba8 3cugnig^ the testimony ; 

baS aScr^dltnif , the proportion ; ba5 •Sinocmif , the obstacle ; 

ba8 ©cbutfnif , the want ; bdS ©rcignig, the event ; 

baiS ©Icid^nig, the similitude ; bo^ fSeQXCtJbnii, the burial. 

^6. Of the neuter gender are: 

^1. The names of metals, countries, towns, and letters, 

Ex.: 

2)a3 @iycn, the iron ; Petersburg, Petersburgh ; 

has ®o(b, the gold ; 5prcugen, rrussia ; 

b05 % b05 S3, the A, the B ; ^oHanb, Holland. 

-^ 2. The Substantives ending in tl^um, fal and fel, 

Ex.: 

2)a« Sftittctt^um, chivalry ; bo« (B^idfat, fate ; 
ba« SUtcrt^unt; antiquity ; boS SRdtl^fct, the riddle. 

^ 8. The diminutives in d^en and Icin. Ex.: 

^ca @tu]^((^en, the little chair ; has f&^^Uin, the little brook ; 
has ©o^n^ctt, the little son ; boS Srdulcin, the young lady ; 
has ST^ab^cn, the girl ; has ^dbUtn, the little boy. 

^ 4. The Substantives beginning with the sjdlaH^ ^« 
Ex,: ;^wA^ 

S)a« ©cfd^tcf, the clamor; ' has ©ctoolf, the clouds; 
has ®tM, the prayer ; ba3 ©cbac^tnif , memory. 

^ 5. All kinds of words taken substantively, Ex.: 

3)a8 SBarum, the why ; has Jtrinfcit, drinking ; 
has ^dn, the no ; ba^ 9lu^i(i^c, the useful. 

Exceptions : 

3)ct ®ta()t, the steel ; bet ®cban!c, the thought ; 

bet Xoxttbad, tombac ; ber ©eru^; the odor, smell ; 

bcr 3inf, zinc ; bet ©cfd^madP; the taste ; 

bic ^latina, platina , ber ©ebraud^^ the use ; 



n 



10 

ber ®if)Cx\am, obedience ; tic XuxUi, Turkey ; 
bcr ©ctDinit; the gain ; blc ^falj, Palatinate ; 
ber ©efang, the song ; btc SKolbau, Moldavia ; 
bte @cfia(t, the shape ; bie ©ci^tuetg, Switzerland ; 
bic ®t\aljx, the danger ; bcr Strt^um, the error ; 
bic ©ebulb, patience ; bcr SHcid^t^um/ wealth. 

^ § 7. Compound Substantives take the gender of their 
last component. Ex.:-t/;^c6^^ ^^ ^2^4/^ c^^i^a^^ww*^^^ ^ 

JDcr ^auS^en, the master of the house ; ^M<4<4''^C •- 

bic <^auSfrau, the mistress of the house ; 
bag ^atf)t}aviS, the town-house. 

Exceptions. The following words, although terminated 
by the masculine Substantive, bcr 3Jiutl^, the courage, are 
of the feminine gender : 

3)ic Slnmutl^, gracefulness ; bic ^anftmutl^; meekness ; 

blc ^cmut^, humility ; W ^c^mut^, sadness ; 

bic ®ro§mut^, generosity ; bic ^c^>tt)crmutl^, melancholy. 

The other words compounded with SJZutl^, are mascu- 
line. Ex. : bcr §ocf)mnt^, haughtiness. 

§ 8. There are some Substantives which have two 
genders, but with different meanings : 

^cr S3anb, the volume ; baS ©onb, the ribbon ; 

bcr (Srbc, the heir ; ba3 @rbc, the inheritance ; 

bcr 8c^ilb, the shield ; baS 8(i^ilb, the sign (of an inn) 

bcr %\)f>Xf the fool ; ba3 3^]^or, the gate ; 

bcr 93crbicnii, the gain ; ba3 SJcrbicnfl; merit ; 

bcr Sec, the lake ; bic ^tt, the sea ; 

bcr Inciter, the guide ; bic inciter, the ladder ; 

bcr «6cibc, the heathen ; bic «&cibc, the heath. 



N II. OF THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

^ § 9. In general there are three declensions admitted 
for the German Substantives : 

The first forms the Genitive in §. 

The second forms the Genitive in n. 

The third is in the Genitive like the Nominative. 

. First Declension. 

§ 10. The first declension comprehends : 
1. All neuter Substantives without exception. 
2 All masculine Substantives, which cfo not follow 
kho second declension. 



y' 



11 

1. Genitive in iB* 

Noni bet @^?icgct, the mirror ; 

Gen. bed (BptegelS, of the mirror ; 

Dat. bcm S)>tegcl, to the mirror ; 'SZ ^ i i . » 

Ace. ben Spiegel, the mirror. 

To be declined in the same way: 

1^ JDcr ^immd, t\m eky ; -^bod Swifler, the window ; 
ber 93ater, the father; .. -^ ba5 ^uge, the eye ; f¥^ ^ '> <-flU 
, ^ber JDegcu, the sword ; «. ba8 aJi&bqieit/ the girl. 

\j^ 2. Genitite in cS* "^ 

When euphony demands it, the ^ of the Genitive may 
be preceded by an c, and this c must be preserved in the 
Dative. In familiar style this softening is almost always 
neglected, but it is necessary in the Genitive of all thcfse 
Substantives the terminations of which would be too hard 
without this half-mute e. Ex. : 

Nom. ber Sifc!^, the table ^ ba5 ^(nb, the child ; 

Gen. bcS XM^^if bcS ^mbc5; 

Dat. bcm2;ifc*e, ^ bem^inbe, '-^ 

Ace. ben %^^* baiS ^inb. 

y To be declined the same way : 

JDer Sug, the foot : ^' - baS JTsorf, the village ; •* tfA/ gkjjjgju 

• • ber ^ut, the hat ; 4/ - ba3 £an^, the countrjr ; t/kjj^t^ r<M^ Uf^^'""'^ 

%% ber Srjt; the physician \t/ boS <&aUiS; the house: f • JtAd 

3* Genitive in nS* 

/ The following masculine Substantives: 

ber ^amt, the name ; ber fBilU, the will ; 

ber ©cbanfc, the thought ; ber ©laubc, the belief; .^^j -^ 

ber %VLnU, the spark ; ber Sc^abe, the damage; 

ber Sriebe, the peace ; ber S3ud)jlabe, the letter; 

were formerly terminated in en in the Nominative (ber 
Stamen, ber SSiHcn) and are even now often met with in 
this obsolete form, from which they derive their other 
cases: ber 5?ame, be§ 9?amen6, bent 9iamen, ben 9?amcm 

The two words : ber ©cfjmerij, the pain, and baS $erg, 
the heart, are in the Genitive beS ©dfimergen^, or ©center* - 
jc§; be6 ^erjcn^; in the Dative bcm ©demerge, bem ^tvitn 
or ^crje, and in the Accusative ben ©^merj, ba§ ^erj. 

Second Declension. ^ 

I § 11. The second declension comprehends only mas 
euline nouns. The Genitive is in n or e n. The other 
cases of the Singular presei*ve the termination of th^ 
Genitive. Ex.: 



«. kV 



1 



12 

w 1* Genitive in tt* 

Norn, bcr £6toc, the lion 
Gen. bc« ^binm, 
Dat. hem £dtt)en, 
Ace. ben £dn)en. 

2« Genitive in en* 

^ In most Substantives of this declension, wliich end in 
iixe Nominative by a consonant, the it of the Genitive is 
preceded by an c. Ex.: 

Norn, bcr ©raf; the count ; 
Gen. be3 @rafen, J>i\^ 

Dat. bcm ©rofcn, 
Aco. ben ®rafen» 

^§ 12. The second declension comprehends : 
1. -AH masculine &9m»^f men and animals, termi* 
nating in c, as: ^rtA*«fl!i* 

2)cr ^naBe, the boy ; ^yy bcr Surge, the bail ; ^^^ 
ber atbtf the heir; ^^v bcr 9(ffe, the monkey ; ^j^v* 
bcr Sotc, the messenger ;;j^bcr ^afe, the* hare. -vi^ 

^ 2. The names of nations ending in e: 

3)er JDcutfci^c, the German ; bcr ^a(i)\c, the Saxon ; 
2)er Srangofe, the Frenchman ; bcr ^(^tocoe, the Swede. 

Those ending in cr follow the first declension: bet 
©panier, be6 ©Mg^.4^ y^^.j^ 

3. The following ncfiins ofmen and animals : 

5)cr -^clb, the hero ; bcr @cfcU, the partner ; 

bcr ®raf , ttie count ; bcr @c(f, the dotard ; 

bcr Snrji; the prince ; ber 3^or, the fool ; 

bcr ^irt, the herdsnuin ; bcr 5Jlorr/ the fool ; 

bcr 3Rcn\^, the man ; bcr fflSr, the bear ; 

tcr ^cxXj the geutleman ; ber D^9, the ox. 

^ 4. Most «dSns of persons derived from foreign lan- 
guages, and terminatea by a long syllable: 

2)cr ©olbat, the soldier; ber ^atljolif; the catholic ; 

bcr Scfutt, the Jesuit ; ber ^colog^ the theologian ; 

bcr Slbjutant, the adjutant; bcr Spftilofopl^, the philosopher; 

bcr Stubent, the student ; ber ^{tronom, the astronomer. 

Third Declension. 

§ 13, The third declension comprehends all feminine 
Substantives. It is distinguished from the two former 
ones, by not taking any inflexion in the Singular. Ex; 

Nom. bic $anb^ the hand ; 
Gen. ber $anb, 
Dat. bcr «&anb, ' • 4> 
Ace. bie «^anb. 



[ 



13 
To be declined in the same manner: 

. JDic Srau, the woman ;.Ai^#bic £irfd&c, the cherry; 'Vu' 
I bie Stabt, the town;.. ^ bic ®atcl, the fork; iKy 
tie fiuft, the air ;•»£, tie 3!ugcnO, the virtue. ^^'^ 

in. OF THE FORMATIONS OF THE PLUEAL. 

r § 14. In order to form the Plural of German Sub- 
stantives, c, cr, en or n is added to the Singular; some- 
times also the Nominative Plural is the same as the 
Nominative Singular. 

i^^tirH^ !• Plural in c. 

'^ 1 . -Aft monosyllables, a avo a few exceptions : 

2)cr •&unb, the clog ; bic •^unbc, the dogs ; 

bie <&anb, the hand ; bie «^dnbe/ the hands ; 

ba^ ^ein, the leg ; bie Seine; the legs. 

2. The Substantives ending in ni§, fat and ing, as 

irell as those beginning by g e arid ending by the radical 

iyllable: 

3)ic ^cnntnig, knowledge ; bie ^cnntniHc, knowledge ; 

bad @d(|cu{al; the monster ; bie Sd^cufole; the monsters ; 

ber Srcmblittg, the stranger; bic Srcmblingc, the strangers ; 

bod ®ebct; the prayer ; bie ©cbctc, the prayers ; 

ba5 ©efd^enf , the present ; bie ®t\6itvit, the presents. 

2. Plural in er : 

1. The Substantives ending in tl^um: 

fDer SHcid^tl^um, wealth ; W SHcid^tJ^umer, the riches ; 

h<r Si^um^ the error; bic Srrt^umcr, the errors. 

- 2. The fallowing monosyllables: 

JDcr ©eijl, the mind ; bet SRanb, the border; 

25ct J^ciB, the body ; ber SBolb, the forest ; 

SDcr ®ott, the god ; bet Sffiutm, the worm . 

ber 3)?anit, the man . ber t)xi, the place 



5)a5 5lmt, the office ; , bo3 S^S/ the cask ; 

ba5 S3anb, the ribbon ; ba5 gelb, the field ; 

bod ®ilb; the image ; baiS @lad, the glass ; 

bod $rett; the board ; ^a^ ©tieb; the limb; 

baiS 3u(!^; the book ; baiS @raB; the grave ; 

baiS S)a(!^, the roof; bad <&au§, the house ; 

bad ^orf , the village ; bod •^u^n, the chicken ; 

bod S9tatt, the leaf; bad StciSb, the calf; 

y bad ^inb, the child ; bad @^lof ; the castle ; 

"^ bad 5tletb; the dress ; bad ^al, the valley ; 

bad £teb; the song ; \>^9 S3o(fy the people ; 

bad ^t^f the hole ; bod SDelD; the woman. 

5* 






14 

^ 3. Plural inn: 

^ 8. All Substantives of the second declension, whicls 
kake-U in the Genitive of the Singular: 

JDcr ^nabe, the boy ; t>k ^aBcn, the boys ; 

t>cx 3)cutf^e, the German; t>k 3)eutjd^cn, the Germans. 

^ 2. The feminine Substantives in c, cl and er: 

bic S3icttc, the bee ; He S3icncn, the bees ; 

tie <£c^»c|icr; the sister ; bic (Bd^ttJcficrtt; the eiatcrs; 

bic Q^ahd, the fork ; bic ©abeln, the forks. 

4. Plural in ctt ! 

'^ 1. All Substantives of the second declension, which 
take en in the Genitive Singular: 

JDct Surfl, the prince ; bic Surflcn^ the princes ; 

bet ^olbat, the soldier ; bic Solbatcn/\he soldiers. 

2. The Substantives ending in l^e it, leit, fc^aft, in 
cndung: 

bfe SrciTjett, liberty ; bte 8r«^«{tctt; 

bic §Irtigfcit, politeness ; bic Slrtigfcitcn : 

bic grcunbf(i^aft, friendship; bic ^eunbf c^aftctt ; 

bic 2Birt^)in,* the hostess ; bic feirtl^finncit ; 

bic SDicinunj; the opinion ; bic SDJcinungcn. /* 

3. T4ie-ft)lloiTing~SttbstantiTes:it /* t*r ^7 Ia\^ '^t>etA-5i.*£. * 

ic Srau, the -woman ; 
ic ^6)la6^t, the battle ; 
ic fQdt, the world ; 
ic if)atf the deed ; 
ic Sd^rift; the writing . 
ic Sd^uli)/ the debt; 
ic 3cit, time ; 
ic jDuoI/ the torment 



S)a3 Sett, the bed; /b 

has «&cmb, the shirt. b 

baS «&crj, the heart : b 

ba5 D^Xf the ear ; b 

bic 5(rt, the kind ; b 

bic ^fliidftt, the duty , ^b 

bic Ul^r, the watch ; b 

bic 3<4|(, the number ; b 



5. Plural like Ike Singular. 

^ 1. The masculine and neuter Substantives in cr, el 
And en: 

JDcr ^^iegct, the mirror; bic ©^iegcl, the mirrors; 
bcr SIblcr, the ea^le ; bic Slbler, the eagles ; 

ba« SKdbc^cn, the girl ; bic SKobc^cn, the girls. 

^ 2. The two feminine nouns, hit SOJuttcr, the mother, 
bie Xoi)ttv, the daughter, which make their Plm'al: bic 
mntttv, bie SEod^ter. 

* Words ending in in double their final consonant in the Plural. 



JL 



) 



15 

^§ 15. When the Nominative Plural terminates in 
Kf all other cases have the same termination; but when 
it does not terminate in n, only the Dative takes this 
letter, and the Genitive and Accusative are like the 
Nominative. Ex. : 

Nom. bte ®rafett, the oounta ; bic •^anbC; the hanus » 

^Gen. bcr ©rofcrt/ of the c^Miits ; bcr ^dnbc, of the haudei ; S ^ 

Dat ben ©rafen, to the ccnnts ; ben ^anbcn, to the hands - 

> Ace bie ®xa\tn, the counts ; bie <&dnbe, the hands. 

Nom. bie ^dufcr, the houses ; 
I |Gen. bet ^dufer^ of the houses ; ^ « 

Dat. ben ^dufcm, to the houses ; ^Aa^^-^'^ 

Ace. bic 'Sdujcr, the houses. r 

In this way are declined the Plurals of 



/ JDcr J&(i6u5, the shoe ; -6^ ^pber ^etb, the hero ; >£n^ , ^J^ 



^i bcr S^ijd^, the table.; 4/ \^ bic <B6^mt>, the debt ; ji- i^ 
I ba3 ^inb, the child ; «a^ ^ / ba5 Df^x, the ear. jt^t^^ ^ 

^ § 16. Most Substantives change in the Plural the 
radical vowel a into (i, into o, u into ti and au into Sit, 

Of this number are: 

• 

^ 1. All Substantives which take the ending cr : -t-*^ rtii- 

3)cr SKonn, the man ; bic SKdnncr, the men ; , ' < t : • ^ L 

bcr Srrt^um, the error ; bic Srrt^untcr, the errors ; 

ba3 Sod), the hole ; bic Sd^cr, the holes ; 
bos •Sau^/ the house ; 




2. Tbe^ma ooulin o «id feip 
take the termination c : /i^ ^i^L /tt)oux^ . 

!Dtc <&anb/ the hand ; etc <&dnbC; the hands; 

bcr ©o^>n, the son ; bic So^jnc, the sons ; 

bcr <&ut, the hat; bic <&ittC/ the hats. 

-¥!<>» folloinng-masouUn^-Substaiitl^eft a¥« exee^Miio&s : 

IDcr STrm, the arm ; bcr Stoff, the stuff; 

bcr Saut, the sound ; bcr ©^ul^, the shoe ; 

bcr JDolci^, the dagger \ bcr 9Pun!t, the point i 

^ X bcr "fiunb/thedog ; bcr 3!ag, the day. 

^ 3. ^5Ebeloli^TOg Substantives, which do not change 
fn the Plural : 

2)cr 5(t>fcl, the apple ; / bcr SSatcr, the father ; 

bcr SKanact, the want ; bcr ©ruber, tlie brother ; 

bcr 9lagcL the nail ; bcr ®artcn, the garden ; 

bcr Sattcl, the saddle ; bcr $abcn, the thread ; 

bcr SKantcl, the cloak ; bcr Dfcn, the stove ; 

bcr SSogcl, the bird ; bic SKutter, the mother ; 
bcr jammer/ the hammer ; bic ^od^ter, the daughter. 



16 



TABLE 
of the different inflexioiia of German SubatantifM. 

I. SingtUar, 
1. 2. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace 

1. 

Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat 
Ace. 



or 60 
-or e 





11. 


e 


.2. 
cr 


c 


cr 


en 


m 


c 


er 



tt orcn 
tt or en 
n or en 

Plural. 

3. 
tt orcn 
n or en 
n orcn 
n or en 



n 

I - 



Nom. £arl, Charles ; 
Gen. ^axUf 
Dat. ' ^arl, 
Ace. Baxl, 



IV. OF PROPER NAMES. 

'^'^^ 117. The proper names of persons are declined 
with or without the article. K declined with the article 
they do not change in the Singular. Ex. : 

Nom. bcr ^arL Charles ; bcr ^6)i\kx, Scliiller ; 

Gen. bc3 ^arl|, of Charles ; bc5 B^ilkv, of Schiller ; 

Dat. bem Raxi, to Charles ; bcm S^iUtx, to Schiller ; 

Ace. ben £ar(, Charles ; ben <B6)iUcx, Schiller. 

^ Used without the article, proper names take no other 
inflexion than an S in the Genitive. Ex. : 

^6)iUcx, Schiller ; 
<B(i)ilkxs, 
(B6)iikx, 
<B6)iiUx. 

• The proper names of women are declined like those 
of men, except those ending in c, which take in the Ge- 
nitive n§, and in the Dative n. Ex.: 

Nom. (BoX>f)itf Sophia : Caroline, Caroline . 

Gen. <Bc^i}itnSf ^aro(mcn3, 

Dat. <£o\)t)icn, ^arotmen, 

Ace. ^cia^ic, Caroline* 

^ When proper names are used in the Plural, the 

masculine ones -take the termination t, and the feminine 

the termination n or en. Ex. : 

fiubtoig, Lewis ; bic Subtrigc, 

Slbcli^eib, Alice ; bic Slbcll^cibcn. 

' The names of towng and countries are always declined 
without the article, and only take ^ in the Genitive. Ex. : 

Otont; Rome ; fRcmS, of Rome ; 

^ca)pd,. Naples ; Sllca^xfS, of Naples. 



\ 



17 



V OF THE FORMATION OF FEMININE NOUNS. 

§ j.8^ In order to form tte feminine of a masculino 

noun, the syllable i n is added to the latter* Ex. : 

(Sm ^bniQ, a king ; ctne ^ontgtn^ a (jueen ; 

' Q em ©ciftaufpieler, an actor ; ctnc ^^an])fitUxm, an actress. 

^^ If the masculine ends in c, this termination is omit- 
ted in forming the feminine, Ex.: 

5)cT ®attc, the husband ; bic ®att(n, the wife ; 

bet ^btotf the lion ; hk Obtain, the lioness. 

^^^i^Mostly, in adding in the vowels a, o, u are changed 

'nto a, '6, Vu 

IDer ©raf, the count ; Die ©rdfin, the countess ; 

bet Sdaatx, the peasant *, bic ^duerin, tlie peasant-wife ; 

\ ber Xfiex, the fool ; bic 3!]&crin, the fool. 

From this rule are excepted all Substantives derived 

from foreign languages. Ex.: 

JDcr ©cttcrol/ bte ©citcralin, 

bcr ^Jrofcffor, bic ^rofcffotin. 

"^^ There are in German, as in English, some feminine 

nouns, which are not derived from their masculines. 

Ex.: 

. ^ JDer SKatui/ the man ; bic Srau, the woman ; 

^ ^ ber SSctter, the cousin ; bie ©afe, the cousin ; 

bcr 91cjfc, the nephew ; bic ^i6)tt, the niece. 

VI. OF THE DIMINUTIVES. 
\ 

^19. The German language is very fond of dimi- 
nutives, and particularly in familiar conversation they 
are frequently used. They are formed by adding the 
syllable d) c u or I c i n , to the primitive word. Ex. : 

2)er 3^ifd^/ the table ; ba« Jtifd^d^cn, the little table ; 

ber ?Kann, the man ; ba5 Wlanndjen, the little man ; 

bic Scbcr, the feather ; ba8 Scbcrci^cn, the little feather , 

bod ^inb; the child ; baS ^tnblcin, the little child, 

If the primitive word ends in c or e n , this tormina 

lion is suppressed in forming the diminutive : 

!£ie ZavAt, the pigeon , ^as Xaah^tn, the little pigeon ; 

ber ©ortcU; the garden ; ba^ ©drtd^ctt, the small garden. 

Almost all diminutives change a, o, u into a, 5 \u 



t'\'^^ • 



18 
CHAPTER III 

or THE ADJECTIVE. 



( I. DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVES. 

^ § 20. The Adjective is employed either as an attri* 
bute or as an epithet. In this phrase: My father is 
good, the adjective good is an attribute ; in this othei 
one : A good father loves his children, it is an epithet 

V The Adjective employed as an attribute is invariable 
in all genders and numbers. Ex.: 

25cr SSatet ifl gut, the father is good : 

bie SJlutter tfl gut, the mother is good ; 

\' tie ^inber flnb gut, the ehildren are good. 

The Adjective employed as an epithet always pre- 
cedes its Substantive, and is declined in three different 
ways, according to its being combined with the definite 
article, with the indefinite article, or as it is without any 

^ article. 

^ 1. If the Adjective is preceded by the definite article, 
it takes in the Nominative Singular the ending c and in 
all other cases, Singular and Plural, c n. The Accusa- 
tive Singular of the feminine and neuter genders, however, 
Is the same as the Nominative. Ex. : 

SINGULAR. 

Masculine. 

- N. hex gute fWonn, the good man ; 

\, G. bcS gutcn 9)?annc3, of the good man ; 

D. bcm gutcn SKannc, to tne good man : 

A. ben gutcn Wtann, the good man. 

Feminine. 

N. tit gutc Srou, the good woman \ 
\ G. bcr gutcn grau, of the good woman \ 
D. bcr gutcn §rau, to the good woman ; 
A. bic gutc Srau, the good woman. 

Neuter. 

N. bad gutc 5?inb, the good child ; 

N G. bed gutcn ^inbcS, of the good child , 

D bcm gutcn ^inbc, to the good child ; 

A. bad gute ^inb, the good child. 

PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS. 

Y N. bic gutcn aKdnncT; Sraucn, ^inbcr; 

G. bcr gutcn SKonncr, Sroucn, ^inbcr; 

D. ben gutcn SWvinncm. Sraucn, ^inbcm ; 

A. bic gutcn ^Wanner, ^raucn, l^'oibcr. 



19 

*\ The Adjective is declined in the same manner, if 
is preceded by any determinative word which has the 
terminations of the definite article, as : biefer, jencr j^ 

^this, that ; ieber, every ; toelc^er, which. f?^ 

^^ 2. If the Adjective is preceded by the indefinite 
article, it takes in the Nominative of the Singular the 
ending cr for the masculine, c for the feminine, and 
^ for the neuter. All other cases take e n, except 
the Accusative feminine and neuter, which is like the 
Nominative. Ex. : 

Masculine, a a 

• N. cin ganger Xa^ a whole day ; 4%Z/i4A>ifi^* 

\ G. cincS gangcn S^agcS^ of a wliole day ; / 

D. cincm gongcn S^agc, to a whole day ; C^ 

A. cinctt gaitjcn iCag, a whole day, ^^UU^^ J ^"9^' 



Feminine, 



N. 
G. 
B. ctncr 



ctnc ganjc 9la6)t, a whole night ; Q/f** S'f' 

ciitcr gangctt 9la(fet, of a whole night : ^^UK^ rC^t^^f^^^ 
ctncr gangcn S^a^^t^ to a whole night ; J^ A^ 
A. cine ganjc ^q>&i\,, a whole night. " »^ 

Neuter. 

N. cin ganjcS M)r, a whole year ; /l f 

G. cincs ganjcn Sal^rcS^ of a whole year ; ^<^^^'t'^V4^ 7 ^i/7vK^ ^ 

D. einem ganjeti Sal^rc^ to a whole year ; A / .f^ 

A. cin ganjcg ^^^x, a whole year. *^ v 

N The Adjective is declined in the same way, when 
preceded by the determinative word leiit, no, or by one 
of the possessive pronouns mein, bein, feiu, mifer, cuer, 
ifjr, my, thy, his, our, your, their. If preceded by any 
of these words in the plural, it takes the termination c it 
in all cases. Ex.: 

Plural for all Gendeks. 



^ N. fcinc guten SKanncr^ Srauen^ 5tinbcr ; 
^ G. fetncr guten 3!Rdnncr, grauen, ^inber ; 



D. fcinen guten a}ldnncm; grauen, ^inbem ; y^ 

A. fcinc guten SKanner^ gi^aucn, ^inbcr. f\ 

\ 3. If the Adjective is preceded by neither an article 
rior by any other determinative word, it adopts the 
terminations of the definite article and is declined in the 
foUowino: manner ; 



1 J 



20 







w^c'we^ 



/ 



J 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



Singular. 

M.a.9cvXint, 

gttter SBctn, good wine or some good win< 
guten SBcmciS, of good wine ; t oisU/u 
gutem SQ3eme, to ^ood wine ; 
guten SBein, good wine. 

fresh milk ; 
fresh milk ; 
fresh milk ; 
frifcie aKiUi^/fresh milk. 

Neuter* 

f(i»argc5 Xn^, black cloth ; ^ D ^^^ 

fc^tt)atjc5 iTu^cS, of black cloth j^^C^^ ^/«'*^^'i'^;»^^^ 
f(^n)aricm iCud^c. to black cloth ; SaJcM^, ) 

{(^VOatiCiS ^U(i(|, black cloth. 




/ 



Plural for all Genders. 

N. fd)6nc S3tumctt^ fine flowers ; 

G. {(^oncr 53lumcn, of fine flowers ; 

D. f (gotten ^lumett, to fine flowers ; 

A. f(^6nc ©lumen, fine flowers, 

Participles, used adjectively, are declined like' ad- 
jectives. 

11. DEGREES OF COMPARISON OF THE ADJECTIVES. 

\ § 21. The Comparative of an adjective is formed by 
adding the termination e r, and the Superlative by 
adding the termination ft C. Ex. : 

SHct'c^, lich ; rcic^cr, richer ; bcr rcidjflc, the richest , 

\ f^on, fine ; fdjoitet/ finer ; bcr f^finjlc, the finest ; 

milb/ mild ; milbcT, milder ; bet milb€fle,t the mildest. 

^ The radical vowel of the Positive is softened in the 
Comparative and Superlative : a changes into Qi, o into 
0, u into it. Ex. : 

Stlt;Old; dItcT, older; ^cr filteflc, the oldest ; 

^toS/ great ; ^togcr^ greater ; bcr Ojof tC/ the greatest ; 

jung, young ; junger^ younger ; bcr lungjlc, the youngest. 

* The word some before a Sabstantive, is neyei translated lu 
German. 

t In the Genitive masculine and neuter they employ at present 
more frequently the termination c tt , gutctt 2Bemc5, f(^toaT|€n XyxdCfti. 

X Instead of ft c / we add c fl c , when euphony demands it 




Tfar i»llowing A dy e cttwo arc cxoopti o n s : 






SBal^r. true ; 
fc^lanf^ slender ; 
W^% lax ; 
fanft, Boft ; 
matt, faint ; 
flad^Y flat ; 
falfcv, false ; 
ilaf , pale • 
glatti slippery ; 
gctabe/ straight ; 



fad^te, soft, slow ; 
far(», stingy ; 
runb; round ; 
Bunt, motley ; 
(himlpf, blunt ; 
froB, joyful ; 
tjclb, gracious ; 
rol^/ raw ; 
\Xi% mad ; 



as well as the Adjectives ending in Bar, l^aft and ^^^Xj 
fain. [Ex.: ban!bar, grateful; banf barer, more grateful j£-5^^.-^ - 
Oo^^aft, malicious; bo^^after, more malicious; S^^A^'^^f^y^y^^ 
economical; fparfamcr, more economical, j 

§ 22. The following Adjectives are irregular. 

^ ®ut, good ; bcffcr, better ; bet bcfle, the best ; 

\r»^ nal^, near ; n&^cr, nearer ; bcr nac^fte, the next ; 



l^O^cr, liigher ; 
me^r, more ; 



bet l^C(|()fle, the highest ; 
bcr mcijic, the most. 



l^od^, high ; 
V^ N ticl, much ; 

§ ^&. Comparatives and Superlatives are declined 
according to the same rules as the Adjectives in the 
Positive. Ex.: ber Heine %\\i), the small table; ber 
tleinere Xifc^, the smaller table; bcr Hetnfte 5£i[c^, the 
smallest table: cin f(etner £i[dj, a little table; cut 
Heinerer %\\i), a smaller table; ein fd^5ne^ 53nd^, a 
beautiful book ; ein fdjonere§ ©ud^, a more beautiful book. 



\ 



CHAPTER IV. 

OP THE NUMBERS. 



§ 24. The cardinal numbers are ; 

1 cin5, 11 elf, 

2 Jtoci, 12 itoolf, 

3 Brcf, 13 brcfgcfttt, 

4 toicr, 14 t)icrjc^|n, 
f>funf, 15futtfjc5tt, 

6 \t^i, 16 fcc^^«§c]^tt, 

7 pcbcn, - 17 ficbcngc^n 

8 Qi&iXf 18 ac^tgcjn, 

9 ncun, 19 nciiugc^n, 
10 iic^n, 20 atcangfg, 



-f 



22 

21 cin unb gioongt^, 80 ac^tgtc), 

22 ixcci unb gtoan^ig, 90 ncunjig, 

23 orci unb gwanjig, 100 Ijunbcrt, 

24 met unb jwonjig^ 101 Bunbcrt tin^', 
^ \ 25 fun{ unb jwanjig, 102 l^unbcrt ViWi, 

30 brctgfg, 103 l^unbcrt mi, 

40 vicniq, 200 jtt)ci^unbcrt^ 

50 funfiig, 1000 taujcnb, 

CO ]c(i)m, 2000 gttjcitaufcnb; 

70 ficbcngig, 10,000 gc^ntaujcnb;/ 

ia59 taufcnb acJ^tl^unbctt ncun unb funfgig, or a(!^tjcl^tt Tjunberl ncun utA 

>unf jig ; a million, cine SKilUon^ 

\ (iin^ is the neuter of ein, and is only used when no 
object of determinate masculine or feminine gender is 
understood. 3^^^ ^^^ ^^^t if not preceded -ty any 
determinative word, take in the Genitive the termina- 
tion e r. CEsr. bic 5lu«fagc gtueter 3^"9^^' t^® deposition 
of two witnesses^) The other cardinal numbers remain 
unaltered, except in the Dative, where they sometimes 
take the termination e it. 

^^ § 25. The ordinal numbers are adjectives, and are 
derived from the cardinal numbers by the addition of the 
syllable t e or ftc. From two to nineteen is added tc, 
the rest take fte. 

2)cr crjlc, the first ; bcr gttJanjigflc, the twentieth ; 

bcr jnjcitc, the second ; bcr cin unb gtoanjigflc/ the twenty- 

bcr orittC; the third ; first ; 

bcr »icrtc, the fourth ; bcr brcigigftC/ the thirtieth ; 

bcr funftC/ the fifth ; bcr Junfgigjic, the fiftieth ; 

hex ad)tc, the eighth ; bcr Ipunbcrtfic, the hundredth ; 

bcr gtoolftc, the twelftli ; bcr taufcnbjic, the thousandth. 

N From these are derived, by the addition of ii ^ , the 
ordinal adverbs: 

(Srficng, firstly, in the first place ; 
3wcitcn5; secondly, in the second place • 
2)rittcn3, thirdly, in the third place ; 
93icrtcn5, fourthly, in the fourth place. 



) 



§ 26. The other numbers are: 

1. Multiplicative Njimbers. 

Sinfad)/ single ; icljnfa^, tenfold ; 

iwcifad); double ; * ^unbcrtfa^, a hundredfold ; 

crcifad^, treble ; taufcnbfad[;, a thousandfold. 

» Instead of jvucifad) K. may be said : gnjcifdltig, taufcnbf&ltig ic 



23 

We may add to these the adverbs which are formed 

l)y the substantive SWaf, time : 

(SmmaL once ; t>{ermal; four times ; 

itocimal; twice ; l^unberttnol; a hundred times ; 

crcimali thrice ; taufcnbrnd; a thousand times. 

2. Distributive Numbers. 

^aXb, half; * cinjcltt; one by one ; 

bie ^Slftc, the half; Va^rtocifc, by pairs ; 

hai 3)rittcL the third part ; jc brci unb brci, by threes ; 

bod ^itxtd, the fourth part ; bu^nbtDetfe, by the dozen. 

Add to these the adverbs, formed by the old word I C i 

wliich signifies sort or kind: 

(SinttUi, of one kind ; mand^etlei, of several kinds . 

gtocicrlei, of two kinds ; ^kUxUi, of many kinds ; 
creicrUi; of three kinds ; alkxUi, of all kinds. 

Observe also the following ways of speaking of the 
Germans : 

Sfnbctf^olb, one and a half; l^alb dui, half past twelve ^ 
brttt^olb/ two and a half ; holb 2tt>et, half past one ; r 

^kxtf)aih, three and a half; l^olb ixti, half past two. 

§ 27. The ordinal numbers are used as in English^ 

after the names of sovereigns, and in dates : 

S5cr Jjicrtc ^)px\l, the fourth of April ; 
bcr a^tc Wlai, May the eighth ; 
i^ubtoig bcr elfte, Lewis the eleventh ; 
^tinxid) bcr ^kxtt, Henry the fourth. ) 



/ 



CHAPTER V. 

OF PRONOUNS. 



^ 1. DETERMINATE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

I § 28. The first person is expressed by id), I; Plural, 
itir, we; the second person by bu, thou; Plural, it)r, 
you; the third person by cr, he ; fie, she ; e^,. it; and 
fie, they ; Plural for all genders. They are declined in 
the following manner. 

Singular. 
First person. Second person. 

N. x6), I ; bu, thou ; 

• "■ G. mcincT; of me ; bcincr, of thee ; 

D. mix, to me ; bir. to thee ; 

A. tni^, me ; bi4/ ^^^^ 



\' 



24 



Plural. 
N. yoix, we ; • if)X; yoa ; 

G. un)cr|0fu9 cucriofyou; 

D. ttn«, to us ; cudb, to you ; 

A. vm9, us ; tm), you. 



Third person. 

Singular. 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

N cr, he ; pc, she ; c«, it ; 

\ G. jcmct/ of him ; iftrcr, of her ; fcmcr, of it ; 

D. iffm, to him ; t^T, to her ; if)m, to it; 

A. if)n, him. fie, her. cS, it 

Plural tor all Genders. 



N. fte, they ; 

G. itjxcv, of them ; 

D. il^nen, to them ; 

A. {te, them. 



y, § 29. The reflective pronoun of the third person [xdl), 
"^liimself, herself^ itself, has no Nominative, and is declined 
thus: 

Masculine and Neuter. Feminine. Plural. 

G. fcincr, of himself ; iBrcr, of herself ; xf)xcx, of themselves ; 
D. fi^, to himself; ffA; to herself; jic^; to themselves ; 

A. ftd^, himself. ff^/ herself. ^^f themselves. 

-.. Sometimes the word [clbft, self, is joined to the perso- 
nal pronouns. Ex. : ic^ [ctbft, myself; bu fe(bft, thyself; cr 
felbft, himself; fid) felbft, one's self; Voix felbft^ ourselves. 

— In joining the word fclbft to a verh, the pronouns are 
not repeated as in English. Ex. : Sr \)at e§ f elbft gcfagt, 
he said so himself; fie l^at e^ tnir fctbft gcfagt, she told it 
to me herself. 

'-^^ § 80. The pronoun bn is used in intimacy or con- 
tempt. When the Germans speak to a person who de- 
serves respect, they employ @ic and S'^i^^n, that is U 
Bay, the plural of the pronoun in the third person. Ex. 

Sic l^abctt c3 mir gcfagt, you told me so ; 

i(^ fcnnc ©ie ni(^t^ I do not know you ; 

iH) \oi\l eS 3^nen ge^cn, I will give it to you. 

2. INDETERMINATE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

81. The indeterminate personal pronouns are: 

SKan, one, thev ; ^ebcrmanti, every one ; 

' Scmanb. somebody ; fitter, some one ; 

Sliemanc, nobody ; Reiner, no one. 



^ aWan is indeclinable ; Ocbcrmauu takes in the Genitive 

an ^; |9tntimb-and 9ttemtmi^arfr -either invariable or take / 

the-eadbig3~of tfae'iie finit e ftytiele. Ex.: ^ 

2Bctttt man rcidj ijl, }:icl\ man grcunbe. When one is rich one has friendt 
Scbctmann-toirb c« il^itcn fagcn. Every one will tell you. 

^a ^oi Semonb nad^ S^nen'gejragt. Somebody has asked for you. 
'^cca mug 9ltemanben l^affcn. We must hate nobody. 

eincr tocify tb tt morgcn nod^ (cBcn No one knows, if he will live liU 

toirb. to-morrow. 

J 32. Add to these pronouns the following words : 

QttOQLif something, anything ; 
xd6)X^, nothing ; ^ 

JcbcV/ icbe, }cbe«/ every, each, every one ; % 
cMtXf die, aUe«/ all, everything ; 
S^KSiitx, \A&jtf folc^cd, such; 
man(i^et| mandj^e, tnand^ciS, many a, many a one; 
mcl^rere, several ; 
irgenb ein, any, some 

cmtgei some ; ) 

bic nteiflen, the most. i 

Examples, "^ 

3c!(> ^abc choad S^cucd )>cmommctt. I have heard sometliing new. 

3(^ ifoAt nic^tiS gcl^ort. I have heard nothing. 

3cbcr muf fciitc ^jlic^tcn ctfuKcn. Every one must fulfil his duties. 

Scbcd ^QX\\> l^ot fcine ^cbrau(||e« Eyery countiy has its customs. 

$(Ue 3)2cnfd^en ftnb flctblic^* All men are mortal. 

9U(c3 ifl »crlorcn» Every thing is lost. 

(Sin fo(cif)cr SBcrUifl f|i unctfcyic!^. Such a loss is irreparable. 

^and^er {act, ber nlc^t cmbtct. Many a one sows, who does not 

reap. 

3(^ ^abe ntand^cn ^ag t^crlcrcn. I have lost many a day. 

©cben <5ic mix cinigc gcbcm» Give me some pens, 

^ei^m Stc mtr trgenb em l^ud^. Lend me some oook. 

9)icin ©ruber l^ot mcljrerc Srcunbc. My brother has several friends, 

^ie mctflen SKenf^cn urtljcilcn nad& Most men judge according to ap , 
bent S(||ein. pcarances. 



*^. 



CHAPTER VI. 

OF ADJECTIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 






1. DEMONSTEATIVE PRONOUNS. 

^\^ "^ 83. The demonstrative pronouns are : 

For near objects : 
^icfcT/ bicfc, b(cjc8, this, tliis one. 

For distant objects : 
jcner, {ene, jeneiS, that, that one. 
Ex. il)icfer SWann, this man ; biefc Srau, this woman ; biefc« ^mb, 
ihis child ; jcncr ^i\a), that tabic ; jcnc gcber, that pen ; Jcnei t&w^, 



26 

ihat book, ^tefcr ifl glii(itt(^/ Setter ift unglucKid^, this oue is happy 
that one is unhappy. 

^ The demonstrative Pronouns have the same termina- 
tions as the definite article, and are declined in the 
same manner.^ 

Masculine. Feminine. 'Neuter. Plural. 



N. bicjcr, tic 



€, bicfcs, tiefe. 



G. bicjcs, bicfcr, biefcs, blcfcr^ 

D, bicjcitt, biccr, biejcm, bicjctt, 

y^ A. bte)en, bicje, biefeiS, biefe. 

Instead of bicfe^, one may say bie^ in the Nominative 

vand Accusative Neuter: bic^ Sdnd), this book. 

^ § 84. Instead of biefcr and jener the article ber, bic, 

ba^f is very often employed, on which in that case a 

greater stress is placed. Ex. : 

2) C r 2){atltt, this man ; hit %tcaif this woman ; 
^ b a « ^ittb, this child. 

^ When bcr, bic, ha^, taking the place of bicfcS or j[cne«^ 
does not accompany a substantive, it is declined as fol- 
lows: 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Plural. 

N. bcr, hie, ba5, hie, 

\ G. bcffctt, bcrctt, bcjfctt, beret, 

D. bem, bcr, bcm, bencn^ 

A. bctt, bic, ' has, bic. 

§ 35. With the adjective pronouns are also numbered : 

S)er}eti{gc, biejetiiac, bagjetitge, the one ; 
^ berfelbc; biefelSe, baffeKe; the same. 

These words are compound of the definite article which 
IS declined in all cases, andof jcntgc and fclbe, 
which are declined like adjectives. Ex.: 

Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

\ N. bcrfclbc, bicfelbe, ha^dhe, biefclBen, the same ; 

* G. bcSfclbeti, bcrjelbcit; beSjelbcn, bcrfclbcit, of the same ; 

D. bentfclbcn, bcrfelbcti, bcmjclbcit; bcnfclbeti, to the same ; 

V A. bctifelbcti, biefclbc, basfclbe, bicfclbctt, the same. 

§ 86. ©crjenigC/ &c. is always construed with the re- 
lative pronoun njcld^cr, ttJeld^c, &c. and answers in this 
construction to the English; he who, that 'which, the one 
who or which. Ex. : 

SJericnigc, toclc^cr fotitttit, he who comes ; 
btejetti^e, loelci^e {^rtd)t, she who speaks : 
basjcnigc, tocl^cS id) mtine, that which I mean ; 
bicicnigcit; ttjclci^c bcrcit jtnbi those wno .are ready. 



27 



2. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



§ 87. The possessive pronouns are either joined to 
a substantive or they stand alone; or in other words 
thev are either conjoined or disjoined. 

The conjoined possessive pronouns are the following : 



Masculine. 


Feminine, 


mdn, 


tncmc, 


b«(tt, 


beinc/ 


Sh' 


fcinc, 


px, 


%c, 


fciiif 


feme, 


unfcr. 


unfcrc, 


cucr, ' 


cucre, 


ii)x, 


ifixt, 



Neuter. 

mem, 

bem, 

fcin, 

ihx, 

fern, 

unfcr, 

cucr, 

i^x, 



my; 

thy; 

his ; 

her; 

its; 

our; 

your; 

their. 



/ f 



\ 

§ 38. The conjoined possessive pronouns take the 
^ame inflexions as the article ein, cine, ein* Ex.: 

Singular, Plural. 

N. mcin S3rubcr, my brother ; meine SStubcr, my brothers ; 
metrics S3Tubcr5, melncr ©ruber, 



G. 



meincn ©rubcm, 
meme ©ruber. 



D. mcincut ©ruber, 
A. memctt iBruber, 

^ § 39. The disjoined possessive pronouns are derived 
from the conjoined ones, by adding the syllable tcj. 



bcr meinigc, 
bcr bcinige, 
ber jcinigc, 
ber i^rije, 
ber feinijjc, 
bcr unfrigc, 
bcr eurige, 
ber i^rtge, 



bic meintgc, 
bie bemtge, 
bte feinige, 
bie t^ri^e, 
bie feitttge, 
bie imfrige, 
bic eurigc, 
bie i^rige. 



bas meinige, 
has bcinige, 
bad jcinige, 
bad t^ri^e, 
bad fetnt^e, 
bad unfrtge, 
bad eurigc, 
bad i^rige. 



/ 



mine; 
thine ; 
liis ; 

its; ^ 
ours ; 
yours ; 
theirs. 



Instead of bcr ntcinigc, bcr bcimgc, &c. they say very 
frequently bcr ntcirtc, bcr bcine; or without the article, 
meincr, ntcinc, mcinc^; bciucr, bcinc, bcinc^ or bcin^. 



J^^ lu 



/ 



3. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

^ § 40. Relative pronouns always refer to a preceding 
substantive. There are two of them in German : 

'^ SBcId^cr, njcldfjc, Voddjt^ are declined like the definite 
article: ,bcr, bic, ba6 are declined like the demonstra- 



K^f 






■i^o 



c< {7^tx. 



s^ • 



■/^ 



28 

live pronouns, bcr, bic, ba^, with the only difference that 
in the Genitive Plural it has always bcrcn* Ex. : 

// ( cCi V vA K.A^ ^%tx Wlccan, \ocl6)tt axbdkt, the man who works ; 

hit SraU/ toclci^c tccint; the woman who is crying ; 

baS^inb/ tocldS)c5 fpielt, the child that is playing. 



-»%^ l*3)cr JlnaBc, ben <Bic loBcn, the boy whom you praise ; 
' AjJZf^ '* ^^^ @artcn, xod^cn ©ic fclftctt, the garden which you see ; 
' ^^^^"^ hit •&dufcr, toeld^c ©ic faufcn, the houses which you buy 



-VW \ 2 i^^^ SScblcntc, bcm (Bic c5 ges the man-servant to whom you 

gcbcn Ijcibcn, gave it ; 

l,^ oi,^iO^ bic 9}2a9b, tocl^cr 8(e e8 gcs the maid-servant to whom you 

i a/T f^9* ^>abcn, said it ; 

^^ bic §rcunbc, bcncn tolr fcS^rciBeri/ the friends to whom we write. 

§ 41. One may use indifferently iDeld^cr or ber, ex- 
cept, in the Genitive, for which toddjer is not used. 
Whose, of whom ^djA of which are always expressed by 
beffen and beren. Ex. : 

2)er 3Kann. bcffcn ^ojn franf ijl, the man whose son is ill ; 

hit %CQiVif bercn ^in^ gcfiorben the woman whose children have 

jtnb; died ; 

hit ^inbct; bercn 9}Juttcr angcfoms the children whose mother is ar- 

mctt i)l, rived. 

4. INTEKROGATIVE PRONOUKS. 

§ 42. The interrogative pronouns are ; 

n>cr, who ; ttjas, what ; 
\&d6!itXf XOtl^tf Welles, which. 

^ SBcr and Xoa^ are never accompanied by a subst^iative ; 
Xotx is declined like the demonstrative pronoun bcr ; and ' 
lt)a§ is ordinarily indeclinable. u»v*v <^ d*-' ♦.v^4^<ru^-o/ tr^ 

0Bctiilba? Who is there? -{£/, i-w/X^i-c^xiL^. - 

2Bcr ijl btcfcr 2»ann ? Who is this man ? ^^ v^---t>u.*jj^ 

ffijer iji bicfe %tOiVi ? Who is this woman ? iU^^^^AAilOiAj , 

aBcjjen $au3 ijl bics ? Whose house is this ? ^T 

SBcm f^rcibcn ©ie? To whom do you write? 

2Bcn fud^fCtt ©ic ? Whom do you look for? 

2Ba3 flnb toir ? What are we ? 

SBa5 fagctt ©ic ? What do you say ? 

The interrogative pronoun toddler, which^is usually 
accompanied by a substantive and is declined like the 
definite article. Ex.: 



29 

»2Bclc^r 9(rjt ift angcfommcn 1 Which physician is arrived f 

iJBclci^c Scbcr ijl bic mcinige? Which pen is mine? 

5Bcld)e5 «&au5 iil »u »er!aufcn? Which house is to be sold? 

2Bcl^Ctt ^ut lo&^lctt (Bic ? Which hat do you choose? 

3Bclci&cr S3(ume gcbcn ©ie ben SSor* To which flower do you give the 

gug ? preference ? 

SBcldJcr »on bicfcn ©ortm gc'^ort Which of these gardens belongs 

Sl^ncn? to you? 

®cl(^c5 t)on bicfcn '6au[cni tooHcn Which of this houses do yo 

^it faufcn ? wish to buy ? 

(SelcJ^cm »on bicfcn ^aBcn l^afl bu To which of these boys hast thou 

bcin S3rob gcgcbcn? given thy bread? 

^d) Ifabt bcin Scbcrmcffcr cincr I have given thy penkni£» to one 

bcincr <sc^tt)c|lcm gcgcbcn? fQcU of thy sisters. To which (of 
» d)cr? them)? 

^ § 43. The pronoun toaS, accompanied by the inde- 
finite article ciit, and the preposition fUr, may equally 
be employed as an interrogative, and answers to the 
English : what kind ef. Ex. : 

®a5 fdr cin S3u^ licfcfl bu? "What or what kind of book do 

VQU read? 
2Ba3 fur cfn ^^CKa toat ©ofratcS ? What ^sort of man was Socrates ? 
29a3 fur cine Scbcr fud&fl bu? What pen do you look for? 

9Ba5 fiir cincn .^unb ^crfaufji bu? What dog do you sell ? 

^ In the Plural the indefinite article disappears: SBa^ 
fiir 2Jidnncr ? What kind of men ? 

•s § 44. The interrogative Pronoun toer is often used 
mstead of bcrjenige ti)e(($er, he who, and lua^ instead of 
baSjcnigc tt)eld^c«, that which. Ex. : 

9Bcr jufricbctt ifly ijl gludKid^. _ He who is contented, is happy. 
5Ba5 f4>on ifl, ijl xiv^i immer nu^* That which is beautiful is not al- 
lied, ways useful. 



CHAPTER VII. 

OF THE VERB. 

1. PEELIMINAEY NOTIONS. 
\ 

§ 45. German verbs have only three moods : the In- 
Jicative, the Subjunctive, and the Imperative. 

The Indicative Mood has but two simple tenses, viz.: 

The Present Tense : xiCf fd^rcibc, I write ; 
The Imperfect Tense : \^ fc^ricb, I wrote. 

6 



'30 

>A11 other tenses axe formed by means of the auxiliary 
rerbs. Ex.: 

Perfect Tense : id) Babe gcf^ricbctt^ I have written. 

Pluperfect Tense : i^ |attc gcfd^ricbcn^ I had written. 

Ist Future Tense : id) tocrbe fc^rcibcn, I shall write. 

2d Future Tense : id^ tocrbc Qcfc^fricbctt l^obcn, I shall have written. 

The Subjunctive Mood has the same tenses as tho 
Indicative Mood. The Potential or Conditional Mood 
ia expressed either by the Imperfect tense of the Sub- 
junctive mood or by a circumlocution, ^n*^ ^^*'*'i*'<^^*^«^^^ 

§ 46. The Infinitive of all German verbs terminal 
in en; by taking off this termination we find the root of 
the verb. Ex. : <S6)xdi is the root of the verb f d^rcibcn, 
to write ; fag the root of the verb f agen, to say. 
\, § 47. The regular German verbs are divided into 
assona/nt and dissonant verbs. 

We call assonant those verbs, in which the modi- 
fications of tenses, persons, &c. are marked by termv- 
nations or initials added to the root, without this roofs 
suffering any alteration. 

We call dissonant those verbs, whose Imperfect and 
often also the Imperative and Past participle are formed 
^ by changing the vowel of the root 

-w ' *^ 2. OF THE CONJUGATION OF 'ASSONANT VERBS. 

' § 48. The Present tense of the Indicative Mood of 
assonant verbs is formed by the following terminations : 

Sing. 1. — c 

2.— fi 

3.— t 
Pliir. 1. — en 

2.— t 

3. — ctt. 

The Present tense of the Subjunctive Mood is like 
that of the Indicative Mood, with the exeption that the 
third person Singular is like, the first, and that the ter 
minations ft and t are always preceded by an c. Ex.: 

Sing. 1.— e " 
2.-<fl 
3.— e 
Plur. 1. — Ctt 
2.-^t 

3.— ill. 



31 

\ The Imperfect tense of the Indicative as well as of 
the Subjunctive Mood is formed by adding the following 
terminations : 

Sing. 1. — tc 

2.— tcii 

3.— tc 
riiir. 1.— ten 

2.— tct 
\ 3.— ten* 

The Imperative 'Mood is formed by adding to the 
root of the verb an c for the Singular and ct for the 
Plural. 
\ The present participle is formed by adding enb to 
the root. The past participle is formed by placing the 
initials g c before, and the termination t after the root. 



MODEL OF CONJUGATION. 

Soben, to praise. 

Present Tense. 
IndicaU e Mood. Subjunctive Mood. 

id) lob — t, I praise/ I do praise, id) loB — c, (if) I praise. 

[am praisiDg. 

bu loB— jl bu loB— cjl 

er (ob — t cr lob — c 

toir (ob — en toir lob — en 

i^r lob — ^t if)x lob — ct 

fic lob — en pc lob— en. 

Imperfect Tense. 

id) lob — it, I praised, I did praise, id) lob — U, (if) I prai«ed. 

[was praising, 
bu lob— tcjl bu lob— tcft 

CT lob — tc er lob — ic 

toil lob — ten IV ir lob— ten 

\l}x lob— tct i^x lob — tit 

fic lob— ten pc lob — ten. 

Imperative Mood : lob — C; praise (thou) ; lob — ct^ praise (ye). 

Present Participle : lob — enb/ praising. 

Perfect Participle : gc — ^lob— t, praised. 

Observation. "When the euphony demands it, the terminations of tha 
Imperfect, as "well as those of the Present Tense in t and fl, are pre- 
ceded by an c* *»-. : ^d) rebc, I speak; btt Tebejl/ thon speakest; ci 
rebet, he speaks ; tl)r rebet, you speak, ^d) rebctc, I spoke ; bu rebctejl, 
thou spokest; cr rebetc/ he spoke; Voir rcbeten, we spoke; il^r rcbctet, 
5'ou spoke ; fte rcbeten, they spefcw In those verbs, the root of which 
ends in b or t this softening alwaj-s takes place. 



r , 



r> 



82 

§ 49. There are assonant as well as dissonant verbS| 
If hich do not take the initials G e in the Perfect Parti- 
ciple. Of this class are : 

1. The verbs, which have the foreign termination iren 
orieren. Ex.: 

rcgicrcn, to govera rcgicrt, governed 
fpajtcrctt; to walk fv^ijicrt, walked 
abbircn, to add abbirt, added. 

2. Those derived verbs, which begin by one of the 
particles be, gc, ent, cmt?, er, t)er, ger.* Ex.: 

bcjud^ctt, to visit bcjud^t, visited 

erlait^CTi, to attain txlauQi, attained 

DctlDcitcn, to stay ijcrwcilt, staid 

gcrj^rctt; to destroy jcrfiott, destroyed. 

3. The verbs, which are compounded with an inse- 
parable preposition or adverbs Ex.: 

unterrid)tctt, to instruct uhtcrrid^tct, instructed 
totbcrlcgen, to refute tDtbcrlcgt/ refuted 

ijollcnb^n; to complete tcttenbct, completed. 

In verbs, which are compounded with a separable pre- 
position or adverb, the syllable g c is placed between the 
verb and the preposition or adverb. Ex.: 

abfurjcn, to shorten aBgcfurjt, shortened 

anflagen, to accuse aitgcflagt; accused 

fortjagcn, to send away fortgcjagt, sent away. 

§ 50. Conjugate theToHowing' verbs: 

fagcn, to say ttjcmcn, to weep 

IkhiU, to love laci^ctt, to laugh 

glaubcit, to believe ful^lcn, to feel 

tDunf4>cit; to wish ^orcn, to hear 



'^ 



l^offcit, to hope fpiclcn, to play. 



3. OF THE CONJUGATION OF THE DISSONANT VERBS. 

^ § 51. The number of dissonant verbs is about 150 
and they^ take in the Present Tense of the Indicative 
and Subjunctive Moods the same terminations as the 
assonant verbs. 
\ The Imperfect Tense of the Indicative Mood in dis- 
sonant verbs is formed by changing the radical vowel 
or diphthong. The first and third person Singular 

* See tlie Chapter on derived and compound verbs. 



33 

take no inflexion^ the other persons take the same as in 
the Present tense of the Indicative Mood. 
^ The Imperfect tense of the Subjunctive Mood is 
formed by softening the vowel of the Indicative (a into 
(i, into 0, u into ii), and adding the terminations of the 

y Present tense (Subjunct. Mood.) 

The Imperative Mood takes commonly the same termi- 
nations as in the assonant vorbs; sometimes also it if 
formed by changing the radical vowel. 

\ The Present Participle is alwJ^s the same as in the 
assonant verbs; but the Perfect irarticiple terminates in 
en instead of c t and very often undergoes also an altera- 
tion of the radical vowel. ^ 

MODEL OF COIfJUGATION. 

Xvinltn, to drink. 

Present Tense, 

Indicative Mood, Subjunctive Mood, 

i(i^ trinf — c^ I drink, am drinking. \^ trinT — c. (if) I drink. 

bu trinf— fl bu trinf— eft 

er trinf — ^t cr trinf— e 

toir trinf — en tt)ir trinf — en 

i^r trinf — t i^r trinf — et 

ilc trinf — en jic trinf — en. 

Imperfect Tense. 

i^ tranf, I drank, did drink, was {^ trdnf — e, (if) I drank. 

[drinking. 
bu tronf- |l btt tr&nf— cjl 

er tranf cr trdnf — c 

tt)ir tranf — en teir trdnf — en 

i^r tranf— t iifc trdnf— et 

pe tranf — en flc trdnf— en. 

Imperative Mood : trinf — C; drink (thon) ; trinf — et, drink (je). 

Present Participle : trinf — enb, drinking. 

Perfect Participle : gc — truttf — en, drunk. 

Observation, The e of the Imperative- may be suppressed : tr(nf| 
irinft; lob', lobt. 

§ 52. The Singular of the Imperative Mood is some- 
times formed by changing, the radical vowel (§ 51), but 
the Plural always keeps the form of the assonant verbs: 
gekn, to give; gib, give (thou) ; gckt, give (ye). 



34 



\ 



Every time the Imperative Mood is formed by 
changing the radical vowel, the 2d and 3d Persons of 
Present Tense, Indicative Mood, undergo** the same 
change: gcbcn, to give; gib, give (thou); bu gibft, thou 
givest; cr gibt, he gives. Ex.: 



©terben, to die. 

Present Tense, 



X 



Indicative Mood. 

i^ ftetb— c. I die, 
bu ftirb— fl 
cr jiitb — t ^ 
toix ftcrb— en 
i^t jtcrb— t 
fie |icrb—cn 



Subjunetvoe Mood. 

\6^ j!crb— c, (if) I die. 

bu fierb — eji 

cr ficrb — c 

toir jlcrb — en 

i^x ficrb — ct 

fic ficrb — en. 



^. 



Imperative Mood : flirb/ die (thou) ; ficrb— ct/ die (ye). 

§ 53. The dissonant verbs change, in the Imperfect 
Tense of the Indicative as well as the Subjunctive Mood, 
their radical vowel either into o, i, a or u. Hence we 
have four different classes of dissonant verbs. The Per- 
fect Participle either keeps the vowel of the Imperfect 
Tense, or takes back that of the root, or differs from 
both, as is shown in the following table. 



Class. 


Imperf. 


Perf. Part. 


1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 




t 
, a 




• 

t 
tt or 
radical vowel. 


\ 


FIRST CLASS. 




The first class c< 
ivhich change their r 


Dmprehends those 
adical vowel into a 


dissonant verbs, 
long or short 0: 


Infinitive. 

\6)khzXif to push 
biegcn, to bend 
fitcgen, to fly 
toicgcn, to weigh 
fricrcn, to freeze 
»crUcrctt, to lose 
bictcn, to offer 
picl|cn, to flee 
jicf)cn, to draw 


1. Ion 

Impe 

bo 
flo 
n)c 
frc 

bo 


g- 

rfect. 

Ob 

3 

9 

<) 
r 

:(or 

t 

1 


Perfect Part. 

gcfd^obcn 

gcbogctt 

gcffogcn 

gcn)ogen 

gcfrorctt 

jjcrlorctt 

gebotcn 

gejlol^ctt 

gcjogcn 



35 



di^erett; to shear fd^ot 

ti^toorcn, to swear Wwor 

augcit/ to suck fog 

ugen, to lie (speak an leg 

untruth) 

Bctrugcn, to deceive Betrog 

2. short, 

fd^icfcti, to shoot .\^oi 

gicgen, to pour gcg 

ocnicgcn, to enjoy gcnog 

fc^Uegcn^ to shut fc^lcg 

ocrbriefcn, to grieve Sjctbrog 

f\)rieflcn/ to germinate f^rog 

frie^eit/ to crawl froc^^ 

deepen, to smell ted) 

triefen, to drip troff 

ftcben, to boil fott 

iet^ten, to fight foc^t 
[t(fyttttf to plait, to braid jlo6)t 

quellen, to spring quoU 

(^toeUett; to swell fc^ioon 
aufeit; to drink (to animals) {off 



gefc^oren 
gefc^tDoren 
gcjogcn 
gclcgcn 

bctrogctt 

gefd&offctt 

gcgoffm 

gcnojfm 

gcWojfctt 

\Jcrbroficn 

flcf^jrojfeti 

QdnQ)ttt 

geroci^en 

getroffcii 

gefotten 

gefod^lten 

geplo^tctt 

gequoHen 

gefd^iooUen 

gefoffctu 



Ohse oation. Most verbs of tho first class have { e for their radical 
Towel. The verb giel^en changes in the Imperf Tense and in the 
**erfect Part. 1^ into g; tricfctl/ flcbctt anH faufeii double the end-con- i 
sonant of the root, in order to make the o short. ia!^ 

SECOND CLASS. '^ 

The second class comprehends those verbs, which 
change their radical vowel into i (i short) or into ie (i . 
long). 

1. i short. 

Imperfect. 

>fiff 




Infinitive. 

))fetfen; to whistle 

ateifctt, to seize 

mcifett, to pinch 

f^lcifctt, to grind 

beigcn, to bite 

xdfta, to tear 

f^lcifett; to split 

f^mcifictt, to throw 

glet(i^en; to resemble 

]d)lei(!6en/ to sneak 

jheid^cn, to stroke 

tocidjen, to yield 

glcitcn, to glide 

reitcn, to ride on horseback ritt 

SifyctxitXif to stride fd&rift 

jhciten, to dispute jhitt 

icibcTt/ to suffer litt 

f^Tieibctt; to cut f(^ni'tt 



fc^mtfl 
gli* 



Perfect Fart. 

gegriffett 

gemtjfen 

^t\m^tXL 

geBiffm 

gcriffctt 

gcf^Uffctt 

gcf(<>mi|fett 

gealid^ctt 

geWtd^en 

gcflri(i^cn 

getoidgen 

geglitten 

gcritteti 

gcfd^rttteit 

gefhitten 

gciittcn 

gefd^nittctt 



36 



\ 



^-"-''^'''^ 2. 


ic long. 




^we. 


Imperfect. 


Ptfr/5c/ PiirL 


.4fen^ to stay 


hlieh 


gcBIteBett 


reiBcn, to rub 


ricb 


gcricBen 


fdSirciben, to write 


WricB 


gc((^ricbm 


ixcihen, to drive 


tricb 


gctricbcn 


mcibcn, to avoid 


mteb 


gcmieben 


fdjeiben, to part 


Wicb 


gefd)tebett 


flcigett, to ascend 


Picg 


gcjlicgen 


Wtoeigeti, to be silent 


f*»tcg 


gef(^ti)tegm 


lei^en, to lend 


Iic« 


geltcl^m . 


geil^en, to accuse 


J^^A . 


geiic^cn 
geotel^cn 


Qtttif}tn, to thrive 
focmen, to shine 


^ebicl^ 
4)ictt 


gefci^tenen 


weifen, to show 


toieiS 


gctoicfen 


^cifen, to praise 


))rtcd 


gcjpricfen 
gefd^ttem 


i6)xmn, to cry 


Wtic 


fpcicn, to spit 


fvic 


gcjpiectu 



Obsensation. All verbs of the second class have e i for their radical 
rowel, those which change it into i short double the end-consonant 
of their root ; except 6) and f* 

THIRD CLASS. 

The third class comprehends those verbs, which 
change their radical vowel in the -Imperfect Tense into 
t, and in the Perfect Participle into u or o : 



^ 



4 



1. a 



Infinitive. 

binbcn, to tie 
pnben, to find 
fc^icmbcn, to vanish 
tDinbcn, to wind 
bringcn^ to press 
gcUngcn, to succeed 
utngen^ to sound 
rmtjcn, to wrestle 
fd)fmgen, to sling 
fdjtoingcn, to swing 
fin^en, to sing 
fprmgen, to spring 
jtoingeit; to force 
ttnfen, to sink 
jlinfen^ to stink 
trinfcn, to drink 



2. a 



and u. 

Imperfect. 

Banb 

fanb 

fd^ttjanb 

toanb 

brang 

gelang 

Hong 

tang 

f^lang 

fd^tixnig 

fang 

f^jrang 

}»ang 

fan! 

jlanf 

tranf 

and 0. 



Perfect Part. 

gebunben 

gcfunbcn 

gcj^touttbett 

gctounben 

gebrungen 

gelungcn 

geflungen 

gerungen 

ge{(i^(ungen 

gefci^tottngen 

getungcn 

get^rungen 

gepungen 

gefunfcn 

gcjhtnfctt 

getrunfen 



btec^cn, to break 
fti6)aif to sting 
\^Xi^cx[, to speak 



brad^ 
ftac^ 



gcbro4)cn 

geflodf^en 

gcfrrcc^cn 



Imperative, 
bxx^ 

m 

fpri* 



37 



^dfeii, to help l^alf gd^clfcn l^ilf 

pelten, to be worth aolt geaolten gilt 

fi^elten, to chide jiii^alt gefi^olten j&ilt 

fterben, to die parb gefiorbeii flitb 

xocxbtn, to enlist toarb getoorben Voixb 

\jetbcrben, to spoil toerbarb »etborbcn tjerbirb 

toerfen, to throw toarf gettjorfcu toirf 

bergcn, to hide barg geborgen birg 

trcffcn, to meet traf getroflfcn triff 

neBmen, to take nabm genommcn nimm 

.fteblch, to steal jlal^l gcflol^len '^'^Jr^ 

bcfcblcn^ to command ijcfabl oefol^lcn bepebl. 

bcgmncit; to begin 

rinnctt^ to flow 

f^jmnctt^ to spin 

finnen, to meditate 

getoinnett; to gain 

fdSftoimmen, to swim 

Observation. All yerbs of the third class have i or e for their radi- 

:al vowel ; those which have e change it in the Imperative Mood intc 

if and this t is preserved in the second and third persons of the Pre^ 

Bent Tense of the Indicative Mood (§ 62) : ntmm; btt tltmmft, CI 

nimmt; jlicl&l; bu jlicblfJ, 4X Jlicljlt* \ 

FOURTH CLASS. r^ 



^aJf 


gcl^clfctt 


gait 

f*alt 


geaolten 
gefd^olten 


Parb 


geporben 


toarb 


getoorben 


toerbarb 


)>erborbcn 


toarf 


gettjorfcii 


barg 


geborgen 
gctrofen 


traf 
nabm 


genommcn 


fla^l 


gcflol^len 


bcfabl 


befol^lcn 


begann 


bcgonnen 


rann 


geronnen 


pann 


gcfponnen 


ann 


gcfonncn 


aetoann 


getoonncn 


ge[(^toommen« 



The fourth class comprehend 
have in the Imperfect Tense u, 
back their radical vowel in the 

Infinitive. Imperfect, 

fabrcn^ to ride in carriage fuljr 

graben^ to dig irub 

f(!&lagcn; to beat feeing 

tragcn^ to carry trug 

'\ — labcn, to load lub 

\ Wafdben^ to wash toufd^ 

^ tcadbfcn, to grow tou(^5 

ba(fen; to bake buf 



s all those verbs, which 
a or ie, and which tak^ 
Perfect Participle : 

Perfect Part, 

gearaben 

gewagcn 

getragen 

gclaben 

getoafd)en 

getoa^fcn 

gcbacfen. 



gebcn, to give gab 

trcten, to step trat 

lefcn, to read laiS 

fcben, to see fal^ 

gcfc^icl^cn, to happen gcfd^al^ 

cffen, to eat a^ 
frcjfcn, to eat (of animals) fraf 

mcjfcn, to measure mafi 

bitten, to beg bat 

fljen, to sit fag 

licgen, to lie down lag 

fommen, to come. fam 



gcgebcn 

getretcn 

gelejcn 

gefeben 

gefci^c^cn 

gegeffcn 

gefrejlen 

gcmcffen 

gebeten 

gefcfien 

gelcgcn 

gefommen. 



Imperative. 
gib 
tritt 
licis 

Sel) 
mif. 



6* 



«.^"5 



/ 




blafctt, to blow 
fdlcn, to falj 
— ^iratctt, to roast 
tat^cn, to advise 
l^altcn, to hold 
fci^lafcn, to sleep 
laffett; to let 
l^angcn, to hang 
f anaett, to catch 
laufen, to ran 



rufcn^ 



to call 



38 

ma 

fiel 

btiet 

rietl^ 

Btelt 

m! 

m 

lief 
rief 



gcblafen 

gefaHen 

gcordten 

gerot^ctt 

gel^olten 

gefd^lafen 

gclaffen 

gel)an9en 

gefongen 

geuiufcn 

gcru^cn 

gcl^etgcn 

gefiofen 



T)etf ett; to be called l^icf 
jlof en, to push fticj 

l^auen, to hew l^ieb 

Observation. The verbs of the fourth class which have a for theii 
radical vowel, soften this letter in the second and third person Sing, 
of the Present Tense Ind. Mood ; btt fdl^tfl, cr fafirt; bu fedfl, ct follt 
The same thing is to be observed in the verbs laufen and {lO^ett, which 
make : bu laufll, cr Iduft; btt ^cfcjl, cr jl^ft. The verb ijauctt takes a 
6 in the two Imperfect Tenses. 

§ 54. There are still six verbs which, though chang- 
ing their radical vowel, take the terminations of the 

assonant verbs : 

* fanbtc " gcfanbt 

xtoanbte "getoanbt 

rannte gerannt 

natinte gencmnt 

Brannte gcBratint 

fannte gcfotint* 



fcttbcn, to send 
tocttben, to turn 
tcnncn, to run 
nenncitf to name 
brenncn, to bum 
fcnnen, to know 



^ 



1 



r- 



The Imperfect Tense of the Subjunctive Mood ia 
formed without altering the radical vowel, fenbete, 
inenbete, nenntc, brennte, &c. 

i. OF THE CONJUGATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

§ 55. There are in the German language but fifteen 
irregular verbs : 

1. 3)?ii[fcn, must, to be obliged; bUrfcn, may, to be 
allowed ; fonncn, can, to be able ; nt5gen, to wish, to like ; 
are conjugated in the following manner: 

Present Tense {Indicative Mood), 
I must 
\6) mug 
bu muft 
erntul 
wit muffcn 
xlft xm%i 
He tniiffctt 



I may 


I can 


Hike 


x^ barf 


id) fattn 


id^ ntag 


bu barffl 


bu fannfi 


bu ntagfl 


er barf ' 


ct f ann 


er ntag 


ttJit burfctt 


toir fonncn 


xoix mogen 


xift burft 


il^t fdnnt 


ifir mogt 


<tc burfcn 


fic fonncn 


fie moftcn 


"••■■-i- 


,^< :t fiif/i 


• 


It 


• ^ . »/ \' 


' ' 'J' f^< «T.-'<y-/r 



89 



(if) I mast 
td^ mufj[e 

er muffe 
l»ir mujfcn 
i^x mujiet 
fte mujfen 



Present Tense ^^SuhjuncL Mood). 

(if) I can 



(if) I may 
i(^ buife 
tu burfefl 
er burfc 
tt)(r burfctt 
il^r burfct 
fii burfcn 



id^ fonnc 
bu fonnefl 
er !dnne 
toir fonnctt 
t^r fonnct 
fte lonnen 



(if) I like 
i(i^ ntoge 
bu mogefl 
er moge 
n)tr mcgett 
tBr mogct 
|te mdgcm 



td^ mo(l)te* 



td^ mod^te. 



^ 



Imperfect Tense (Ind, Mood). 
{^ tnuflt? i(6 burfte id^ fonnte 

Imperfect Tense (Subj. Mood). 

(df^ tnugte Hi burfte td^ tdnnte 

The Imperatiye Mood is wanting. 
The Present Participle is regular. 
Perfect Participle ; gemufit, geburft, gcfonnt; gcntod(|t« 

2. SBtfl'en, to know, is conjugated as follows : 

Present Tense. 
Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood, 

id(| toeifl, I know [{i^ »iffe (if) I know 

^tt tocif t bu tomeji 

er toeip cr toiflie 

vtir toijfctt • toir toiffeti 

ibr toigt ifer Xox'^ti 

fit toijjm fte toiffen. 

Imperfect Tense. 

id& tougte, I knew. "*" idj tougte, (if) I knew. 

Imperatiye Mood: toiffc, know (thou); toiffct, know (ye). 
Present Part. : toiffenb* knowing. 
Past Participle : getoufit, known. 

3. SDSotfcn, will, to be willing; foCcn, shall, ought; 
are iitegular only in the Pres. Tense, Ind. Mood. 

id& toin, I will i(5 foH, I ought 

bu toiuji bu foriji 

cr toill cr foil 

ta)ir tootlen \»ir foKcn 

i^r toom i^r foKt 

fletoolleti ^ ftcfollctt. 

The Imperil Tense of the Subj. Mood is like that oi 
the Indie. Mood: id) iDoHte, I would, (if) I would; ic^ 
foKtc, I should, (if) I should. 

4. fflringcn, to bring; bcnlen, to think; flcl^cn, toeo; 
ftd^cU/ to stand, and tl^Utt (contraction of tl^ucn), to do; 
are only irregular in the Imperf. Tense and in the 
Perfect Participle : 



Qo> 



t- 



40 

bringen brad^tc gcBrac^t 

bcnfctt batiste gebac^t 

ac^tn ging ^ jQcaangcn 

jtcl^eii ttaTibit)«A/4*4^Aa«gcf!attbcn 

t^un t^ot gctlfian. 

The verb tl^im has in the Present Tense of the Ind. 
Mood : ic^ t^ue, bu t^itft, cr tl)ut, wiv tfjun, il)r ti}ixt, fie 
tl)un. In the Present Tense Subj. Mood the contraction 
odoes not take place : 16) ti)nt, bu t^ueft, cr ttjuc. \^ 

^^ 5. @ein, to be, is conjugated as follows: , '^ 

Present Tense. 

Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. 

i^ Bin; I am i^ fci, (iO I be • 

bubiii t^ii^juuA.AZ^ 

tx iji cr fct 

toil ftnb \r>ix feten 

tjr jcib ifix fcict 

fte fiiib fte feten 

Imperfect Tense, 

V i^ ttjar, I was i6) to&rc, (if) I wert 

- bu toarfl bu t»&rcft 
ct \oax r er toarc 
'mix waren ttjir iodren 

- ii)x toatet il^r waret 
fie toaren fte to&ren. 

Imperative Mood : jcl, be (thou) ; jeib/ be (ye). 
Present Participle : fcic^j). being. 
Pagt Participle : gctocfett, Deen. 

6. §aben, to have, is conjugated thus : 

Present Tense. 

Indicative Mood, Subjunctive Mood. 

{(^ Babe; I have i^ f^obc, (if) I hare 

bu l}a^ bu l^abefl 

cr l&at cr l^obc 

toir l&abcn xoix Ifiabcn 

xi)x l^abt if^x Babct 

fte l^abctt fte l^oben. 

Imperfect Tense. 
i6) l^ottC; I had ^ i^ l^attC; (if) I had. 
The Imperative Mood and the two Participles are iMreguIar. 

7. SBerbcH; to be, to become, is conjugated thua; 

Present Tense. 

Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. 

i^ toerbc; I become td^toerbe; (if) I became 
bu toirfl bu tocrbejl 

cr Wirb cr tDcrbe 




toix toerben xoix ta)etben 

iUft iocrbct i^r loctbet 

jic toctbcn fic tocrbcn. 

Imperfect Tente, 
^ t4 U?urbc; I became. i^ tDurbC/ (if) I became. 
The Imperative Mood and Present Part, are regular, the Past Par 
ticiple is gctoctbcn, become, and worbctt, been. 

In order to facilitate the researches, we have added at 
the end of this part of the Grammar, an alphabetical list 
of the Imperfect and Present Tenses, the Imperative 
Moods and Past Participles of the dissonant and ir- 
regular^verbs, indicating also the Infinitives to which 
these Tenses belong. 



aifoV THE nOMPOUTfD TKNSfes. ^^ ^ 



5. OF THE FORMATION OF THE COMPOUKD TENSES. 

§ 56. The Germans have three auxiliary verbs: fcin, 
to be; l^aben, to have; tocrbcn, to become, shall or will. 
The verb fein serves to form the Perfect Tenses of most 
neuter verbs; l^abcn to form those of the active and 
reflected verbs; and toerben serves to form the Future 
tenses and the Conditional Mood* of all verbs without 
distinction. Ex.: A- ^ .{' 

1. STrinlen, to drink. 

"Perfect Tense, - '' ' 
Ind. Mood. Subj, Mood, 

^d} f)abc gctrunfctt, I have drunk. ic§ ^aBc actrunfcn^ (if) I have dnmk 
tu ]^a^ gctninfeit; )c. bu ](faBe|i getrunfcn, k. 

Pluperfect Tense. 

id;) -^attc gctrunfen, I had drunk. \6) ^attc getrunfen, (iO I had drunk 
btt Iffottejl Qctruttfcn, k. bu ^fattejl gctrunfen, jc. 

First Future Tense. . 

tci^ tt)crbe ttinfctt, I shall or will id) tocrbc ixinUn, (if) I shall or will 

drink. drink, 

bu toirp trfnfcn, jc. bu werbcfl hirdm, jc. 

Second Future Tense. 

id) loctbc gctrunfcn ^abtn, I shall i^ iocrbc gettunfcn IjaBcti; (if) I shall 

or will have drunk. or will have drunk, 

bu toirfl gcttunfen ^obeti, it, bu toerbcji gctrunfcn ^aBcn, jc. 

♦ The Conditional Mood is, properly speaking, only another way 
of expressing the Imperfect and Pluperfect Tenses of the Suhjunct. 
Mood ; inasmuch as it is quite the same if we say : i6) l^dtte or t^ 
r^urbe Jaben; id) l&dttc gcl^abt, or i^ teurbe Qif)aU iftaben. 



K » «. 



42 

First Conditional Tense. 

\6) tourbe ttinttn, I shoald or would drink. 
btttt)urbcfijrittfctt jc» 

Second Conditional Tense. 

i^ toutbe getrunfen l^aBen^ I should or would have drunk. 
. bu tourbejl jetrunfen ff^txtf )c* 

Jy( 2. ^ommen, to come. 

Perfect Tense. 
Indie. Mood. Subj. Mood. 

5c& blit gcfomittcn, I am come. i^ fct ^ctommcn, (if) I be come. 

H bifl gefommctt, jc. bu ^^^ommtn, ic. 

Pluperfect TaSe, 

i6) tear gcfommcn, I was come. i^ toatc acfommen, (if; I were come 

bu warfi gcfcmmcn, k. bu wdrejt gcfcmmcn, jc. 

Firss Future Tense, 

i(!^ tDcrbc fcmmctt; I shall or will ic^ toerbc fommcti, (iQ I shall oi 

come. will come, 

bu toirjl fommcn, jc. bu tocrbcjl fcmmen^ jc. 

Second Future Tense, 

i6) tocrbe gcfommcn fciu, I shall or 16) tucrbe gcFommen fcm, (if) I shall 

will be come. or will be come, 

bu toixft gcfommcn fcin, ic. bif tt)crbcji gcfcmmcn fern, jc 

First Conditional Tense. 
i6) tourbe fontmen, I should or would come, 
bu tourbcfl fcmtnen; )c* 

Second Conditional Tense. 

i^ toutbc gefontnten fcin, I should or would be come, 
bu tDurbefl gefommen \tin, iu 

By the two preceding models we see : 

1. That the Perfect Tense is composed of the Present 
Tense of l^aben or fein and of the Perfect Part of the 
verb; 

2. That the Pluperfect Tense is composed of the 
Imperfect Tense of ijaicn or fein and of the Perfect 
Participle of the verb; 

8. Tnat the first Future Tense is composed of the 
Present Tense of toerben, and of the Present of the 
Infinitive of the verb ; 

4. That the second Future Tense is composed of the 
Present Tense of iwerben and the Perfect of the Infinitive 
of the verb ; 

5. That the first Conditional Tense is formed of the 
Imperfect Tense, Subj. Mood, of IPerben and the Present 
of the Infinitive of the verb; 



-^ 48 

6. That the second Conditional Tense is formed oi 
ihe same Tense of tocrben, and of the Perfect of the J^ 
Infinitive of the verb. ^^ 

§ 57. As to the formation of the composed Tenses 
of the auxiliary verbs, l^aben and fein form their Perfect 
Tenses of themselves, and toerben forms thejiaJby the 
auxilipjfy feim Ex.: ^^ 

!• §aBcn, to have. 

Perfect Tense, 
3^ ^aBe gcl^abt, I have had ; 
i^ \)(At %i1:iM, (if) I have had 

Pluperfect Tense. 
i6) l^atte geBabt, I had had ; 
i4 ^attc gel^oBt, (if) I had had 

2. ©ettt, to be. 

Perfect Tense. 
3c3& Bin Qctocfcn, I have been ; 
i(i^ {ei getoefen, (if) I have been. 

Pluperfect Tense, 
t(B toar getoefett; I had been ; 
i^ toate gctoefen, (if) I had been. 

3. SBerbcn, to become. 

Perfect Tense. 
Sc!^ Bin gctoorbcn; I have become ;* 
ic^ \d gcworbctt, (if) I have become. 

Pluperfect Tense. 
t(^ ta>ar getDOrbett; I had become ; 
i^ i»dre gctuorben, (if) I had become. 

The tiYO Future and the two Conditional Tenses are 
formed like those of the other verbs by the auxiliary 
lt)crbeit. Ex. : 

First Future Tense, Second Future Tense. 

34 ^crbc IgaBen, I shaU have ; [6^ tucrbe gel^abt ^aBen, I shall have 

had; 
let tDcrbe {etn^ I shall be ; i^ koetbe getoefen fetn, I shall hAv« 

been; 
l4 i*«rbc tocvbcn, I shall become ; i^ tocrbc gctDOlben fein, I shall have 

become. 

♦ Instead of getoorbeti we say simply toorben; when the verb toetben 
•» constructed with an other verb and only has the function of an 
auxiliary 



7 




44 



Hrst Conditional Tense. 
/urbc l^oBcn, I should have ; 

i6:j tourbc fciit, I should be ; 

i(5 tt)urbc iwrben, I should become 



Second. Condition il Tense. 



ifi) toutbe qe^oBt l^aben, I should 

have haa ; 
i^ tijurbc gctoefcn fcin, I should 

have been ; 
i6) tourbc ge»orben \cin, I should 

have become. 

§ 58. Besides the verbs Ijaben, fcin and »cvbcn, the 
Germans employ also, like the English, \\>oUcn, will; 
laffen, let; mogcn, may; foHen, shall, and ntaffcU/ must, as 
auxiliary verbs, in order to express different respects ot 
Moods and Tenses. 

^d^t un« gc^ctt, let us go ; 

voir ioodctt gclffen, we will go ; 

bu foflji jicrben, thou shalt die ; 

bu muf t fterBcn, thou must die ; 

i6) ttjunfc^c^ bag cr c« crl^oltcn mogc, I wish that he may receive it ; 

mdgc cr glucfli^ anlommcH, may he arrive safely. 

§ 59. Conjugate the following verbs in all their 
Moods and Tenses : 



/ 



Assonant. 

3al^len/ to pay 
leBen, to live 
faufctt, to buy 
X arBcitcn, to work 
Icmcn; to learn 



Dissonant, 

Icibcn, to suffer 
ftngen, to sing 
ioetfen, to throw 
faHen, to fall 
fommen, to come. 



/♦ 6. OF THE CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 

§ 60. Transitive verbs have two forms: the active 
form and the passive form. It is in the active form, 
when the subject does the action which the Verb ex- 
presses, it is in the passive form when the subject suffers 
the action expressed by the verb. In the sentences : id) 
tiebe, I love, and i6) toerbc gelicbt, I am loved, the verb 
(icben is presented in those two forms. 

§ 61. "We have already in the preceding paragraphs 
shown the conjugation of tiie active form of verbs; it is 
therefore only left to represent their passive form. The 
verb in the passive voice has but composed Tenses, which 
are all formed by means of the auxiliary Werben, and the 
Perfect Part, of the verb. 



^ 




Aytyl 



^. 



^'^ 



45 

MODE OF THE CONJUGATIOK OF A PASSIVE VEEB, 

©clicbt tDcrbcn, to be loved. 

Present Teme, 
Indicative Mood*. Subjunctive Mood. 

5c^ to)ctbc gcIieM, I am loved ; ic^ tocrbe gclicBt, (if) I be loTed ; 

bu toirfl geliebt bu toerbefi gelicBt 

er tDirb geltebt er toerbe gelteBt 

rotr toerben geltebt Voir toerben gclieM 

ifjr tocrbet gclicbt ilft^ luctbct geliebt 

lie iDcrben gclicbt fte toerben geltebt. 

^Jm^ VH«A^ Imperfect Tense, 

\6^ tourbc geliebty I was loved ; id^ tourbc gelicBt, (if) I were loved 

bu wurbcjl gelicbt ..^aa^ ^^ toutbefi gclicbt 

cr tourbc gclicBt jt«-*^ /yw^*-^ ^^ tourbc gclicbt 

»ir tourbcn gelicBt tt)ir »urbcn gclicbt 

if)r tt)urbet geliebt * i^r tourbct gclicbt 

fie tourben geltcbt. jie iourbcn gclicbt. 

Perfect Tense. 

i(^ bin gclicbt toorbcii; I have been id^ fci gclicbt toorbcn, (if) I hay* 

loved ; been loved ; 

bu bijl gclicbt toorbcn bu ^ gclicbt tootbcn Aj.'^*<t 

cr ifi gclicbt tDorbcn cr fci gclicbt toorbcn 

»ir ftnb gclicbt tDoibJn wir fcicn gclicbt ioorbcu 

\\)x fcib gclicbt tcorbcn i^r fcict gclicbt toorbcn 

fte finb gclicbt toorbcn. fte fcicn gclicbt toorbcn. 

Pluperfect Tense. 

\6i) tear gclicbt ioorbcn, I had been i^ toarc gclicbt toorbcn, (\i) I had 

loved ; been loved ; 

bu toarfl gclicbt toorbcn bu todrcfl gclicbt worbcn 

cr toar- gclicbt toorbcn cr todrc gclicbt toorbcn 

toir toarcn gclicbt toorbcn xoix todrcn gclicbt toorbcn 

\{)X toarct gclicbt toorbcn ibr todrct gcKcbt toorbcn 

fie toarcn gclicbt toorbcn. flc todrcn gclicbt toorbcn. 

First Future Tense. 

tdt tocrbe gclicbt tocrbcn, I shall be [^ tocrbc gclicbt »crbcn, (if) I f*liaD 

loved ; be loved ; 

bu toirfi gclicbt tocrbcn bu tocrbcfl gclicbt toerbcn 

cr toirb gclicbt tocrbcn ~, er tocrbe gclicbt tocrbcn 

toir tocrbcn gclicbt tocrbcn toir tocrbcn gclicbt tocrbcn 

il)r n)crbct gclicbt n>crbcn i^r tocrbet gclicbt tocrbcn 

^c tocrbcn gclicbt tocrbcn. fte tocrbcn gclicbt tocrbcn. 

Second Future Tense. 

MiJ tocrbe gclicbt toorbcn fcin, I shall {6;^ tocrbe gclicbt toorbcn fcin, (if) I 

have been loved ; shall have been loved , 

bu toirft gclicbt toorbcn fcin bu tocrbcft gclicbt toorbcn fein 

cr toirb gclicbt toorbcn fcin cr tocrbc gclicbt »orbcn fcin 



46 

nix )cDCTbeit geliebt toovben {etn Voir tDcrbcn geliebt tocrben fern 

i(>r tocrbet gelicBt toorbeti fcin i^r tocrbct gclicBt tootben fcin 

fte n>erben geltebt tocrbcn {ein. {te toetben gcUebt tocrben {ein. 

Conditional Mood, 
First Tense, Second Tense, 

id) tDurbe gettebt toetbett; I should t(^ tourbe geltebt toorben fern, I slioald 

be loved ; have been loved ; 

bu toutbefi acltebt toerben bu tourbefi geltebt koorbeit fetti 

cr tourbe geltebt toerben er tourbe geltebt toorben {em 

toir tt)urben gclicbt toetben toir toutben gclicbt ioorben fern 

t'br tourbet geltebt )cDetben ii^r tourbet geltebt toofben kin 

fte tourben geltebt toerben. fte koucben geltebt toorben fetn. 

Imperatite Mood, 

IDetbc geltebt; be (thou) loved. 
toerbct geltebt, be (ye) loved. 

FarticipUs. 

l^ Present : geltebt toetbenb/ being loved. 
Perfect : geltebt tootben, been loved. 



^ 



7. OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



X 



§ 62. When a transitive verb expresses an action 
which falls back directly or indirectlj upon the person 
who performs it, we call it a. refiect/i/ve verb. The re- 
flective verbs like the transitive verbs take l^abcn for 
their auxiliary and the second pronoun, which is the 
Accusative of the first, is placed now before and now 
after the verb, 

« 

CONJUGATION, OF THE REFLECTIVE VERB 

®t(]^ freuen, to rejoice. 

Fresent Tense, 
Indie. Mood: Subj. Mood. 

^d) freuc m\6), I rejoice. icb freuc mi(i^, (if) I rejoice. 

bu freuil bt(ib bu freucjl bic^ 

cr freut ji(ib er freue fi6) 

tt)ir frcuen un« xoix freuen uns 

tbr freut cu(J^ i^x freuet cud^ 

f e freuen ^d). fte freuen fi(^» 

Imperfect Tense. 

id) frcttte nttc^, I rejoiced, idb freutc mi(^, (if) I rejoiced. 

hvL frcutefl btc^f bu freutefl btc^ 

er frcttte fi^ er freutc fJ^ 

toix frcuten un« toir freutcn un« 

i^r freutet eu^ xf^x freutet eu(b 

iie frcuten [x6), fic freutcn fidb. 



Perfect Tense. 

Indie, Mood. Subj, Mood. 

'\6i ^ate mi<ii gefreut, I have re- t^ ^aBe tni^ gcfrcut, (if) I li^ro 

joiced ; rejoiced ; 

btt l^afl bt4 aefrcut bu ^aU\i bt(^ gcfteut 

er l^at ft^ gefreut er l^abe ftc^ geffeut 

koir l^aben und aefrettt voir l^aBett unis gcfrcut 

tT)r f^ahi eudb gefreut ijr l^abct eud^ gcfrcut 

ftc ^abcn {l4 gefrcut fte l^oBen ftd^ gefrcut. 

Pluperfect Tense, 

i^ fjattt mi^ gcfrcxit, I had re- idf l^Sttc mic^ gefrcut, (if) I Im-I 

joiced ; rejoiced ; 

bu l^attcfi bt<^ aefreut bu (&ttefl bi<^ B^tat 

ex l^attc jt(5 gcfrcut cr l^dtte fu3J gcfreut 

loir Ijatten una gcfreut toix Iftdttcn utt« gcfreut 

ii)x l^attct eu(^ gcfrcut i^^r l^&ttct cud^ gcfrcut 

fie l&attcn ftd^ gcfrcut. jlc l^ottcn fld^ gcfreut. 

First Future Tense, 

i^ tocrbc tnid6 freucU/ 1 shall re- i^ toerbc tnid^ frcucii, (if) I ehall 

joice ; rejoice j 

bn totrjl btd^ frcuen bu n>crbefl bu^ frcucn 

cr toirb jtdj^ freucn ^ cr tocrbc ftd^ frcucn 

tt)ir tocrbctt una frcucn .. ' wir tocrbcn un« frcucn 

i()r tocrbct eud^ frcucn iT^r tocrbct cud^ frcucn 

flc tocrbcn ftd^ frcucn. fie tocrbcn [i6) freucn. 

Second Future Tense. 

i(S) iocrbe vxi^ gcfrcut l^aBcn, I shall i(i) ttjcrbc midj gcfreut l^oBcn, (iO I 

have rejoiced ; shall have rejoiced ; 

bu toirjl bi(^ gcfreut l^oBcn bu tocrbcfl bic^ gcfrcut f}aUn 

cr totrb fld^ gcfrcut l^abcn cr tocrbe ftd^ gcfreut l^abcn 

toix toerbcn una gcfrcut l^aBcn toix toerbcn und gcfreut ^aBcn 

ii^r tucrbet cud) gcfrcut ^oBcn if}x Werbct cud^ gcfrcut l^aBcn 

fie tocrbcn ftc^ gcfrcut l^abcm flc toerbcn ftdtf gcfrcut ^aBcn. 

Conditional Mood. 

First Tense. Second Tense. 

fd^tturbcmidft freucn, I should re- td^ tourbc midj gcfrcut l^aBcn, I 

|oice ; should have rejoiced ; 

bu tourbefl btd^ frcucn bu tourbefl bid^ aefreut l^aBcn 

er tDurbe ftd^ frcucn er tpurbe fic^ gcfreut l^oBcn 

loir tourbcn un* frcuen toir iourben un« gcfrcut ^aBcn 

il)r lourbet cuc^ frcuen tl^r tourbet eud^ gefrcut l^aBcn 

le tourben jtd^ frcucn. fte tourbcn ftd^ gefrcut fjobetu 

Imperative Mood. 

freue bic^/ rejoice (thou), 
freucn toir una, let us rejoice, 
frcuct cud^; rejoice (ye). 



48 

Participles, 

fic^ frcttcttb, rejoicing. 
' M ficf^cut ^oBcn^^iaving rejoiced. 

Conjugate in this maimer: 

ft4 benagen, to complain. 

§ 63. There are some reflective verbs, whose 8econ<3 
pronouns are in the Dative, as \i6) fdjmcidjclu, to flattef 
one's self. Ex.: 

i6} fc^mcid^tc ittir, I flatter myself; 

bu fd^metci^elfi bit 

cr \(bmtx(!^lt jtc^i 

toiv f^meid^eln uns 

t^r \6)mti6)dt eud) 

|Ie \d)mci6}dn jtc^. 



^ 



8. OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 




^ 64. Impersonal verbs are those, which can only be 
used in the third person Singular and with the neuter 
pronoun e^, it Tneir composed Tenses are formed by 
means of the auxiliary fjobtn. Ex. : 

Indie. Mood, Subj. Mood, 

Pres. T. c« rcgnct, it rains ; ed rcgttc, (iO it rain ; 

Imp. T. eiS regnete, it did rain ; c8 rcgnctc, (iO it rained ; 

Perf. T. tS f}at qtxeqnct, it lias c« l^aBc gcrcgnct, (if) it have been 

been raining ; raining ; 

Pliip. T. c5 Battcgcrcgnct, itliad c« ^dttc gcrcgnct, (if) it had been 

been raining ; raining ; 

let Fut. T. es torcb rcgncn, it will c« tocrbc rcgncn, (if) it will rain.; 

rain; 

2d Fnt. T. ed ttitb gercgnct ^obcn, ed toetbc gcrcgnet ]^aBcit^ (iO it wiL 

it will have been raining. have been raining. 

1st Cond. T. c« »urbe regticti, it wonld rain ; 

2d Cond. T. c« toutbc gcrcgnet l^afccit, it would have been raining ; 

Imperat. T. c0 tcgnc, may it rain ; 

Perfect Part, gcrcgnet, rained. 

§ 64. There are verbs which are impersonal by their 
nature, as : 

rcgncn, to rain. fci^ncicn, to enow, ^s 

bonnctn, to thunder, nebcin, to be foggy, 
bli^cn, to lighten. l^agcln, to hail. 

There are also others, which are employed imperso- 
nally but in certain ways of speaking : 



49 

Qcbtn, tu gi^e ; cS C^ibt, there is, there are ; cS Qnh, there was 

thei*e were. 
{cin, to be ; tS ifl, it is, there is ; cS i\t \»axm, it is warm ; ed toai 

fait; it was cold. 

Some verbs are employed impersonally in German, 
i\liich are not in English: 

a ift mix ttJomt, I am warm. e$ ift tntr lieB, I am glad, 

es friert mi^, I am cold. c3 t^t mix Icib, I am sorry. 

c5 jdjlafcrt mi^, I am sleepy. c9 frcut miij^, I am glad, 

mi^ l^utifjctt, I am hungry. * c5 tounbert mid^, I am astonished, 

mic^ butjlct, I am thirsty. mix ttiib iibcl, I feel sick, 

mir iji bangc, I am afraid. c5 rcut miii^, I repent. 

c5 Qclingt mir, I succeed. 

All these verbs can express the three persons of Plu- 
ral as well as of the Singular. Ex. : 

c5 frcut mi(i), I am glad. eS gclingt mir, I succeed. 

c5 frcut bid^, thou art glad. c« gelingt bit. 

€3 frcut il)n, he is glad. cs gelingt i^m. 

eS xeut uns, we are glad. c5 gelingt uns. 

c5 frcut cud), you are glad. c5 gelingt eu^. 

rcut jtc, they are glad. c5 gelingt il;ncn. 



cs 



"2^ 




9. OF COMPOUND VERB^. 
A 

§ 66. A simple verb becomes a compound one by 

the addition of certain particles -which are joined to it 

and precede it. 

\ There are twokinds of compound verbs : 

1. Those, the joined particle of which remains always 

attached to them in all Tenses and Moods : these verbs 

form their Perfect Participle without adding the syllable 
» g c, and are called inseparable ve7'h8. 
\ 2. Those whose particle is not always joined to the 

verb, but is detached from it in certain Tenses : those 

ones are called separable veris. 
\ §^7. Inseparable verbs are those, whose accent 

rests on the verb and not on the particle. There are 

but very few of them, and they begin either by the 

prepositions l^intcr and Voihtx, or by the adverbs offen 

and t)ott. Ex. : 

♦ "When an impersonal verb is constructed with a personal pronoun, 
tlic word c S may be omitted. 



A 






^ 



J<. 



50 

toCbctj^rec^cn, to contradict; i&) 'mibtx\'pxt6)t, i^ ^aBe toiberf^jro^enj 
^mtetbringen, to inform; i6) ^intcrbrtnge, id) l^aBe i^mtcrtxa^t; 
t^oHenben, to complete ; i6) Mtnht, t(^ f}dbt t)oI.(enbet ; 
cffenbaren, to reveal ; i^ offendate, i<i) l^abe offenbart. 

The compound verbs must not be confounded with 
the derived verbs ^ the latter are formed of a yerb 
and a prefixed syllable, that is never detached from 
•t, Ex.: 

acl^tcn; to esteem ; ijcrat^tcn, to despise ; idj t)cr ad^tc, I despise ; 
fagcit; to say j^nlfaacn/ to renounce ; i^ cntjagC/ 1 renounce. 

§ 6JJ C Separable verbs are those, vrhose accent rests 
on the particle and not on the verb.) Their number is 
very great, and they begin either by one of the prepo- ^jj^jif 
sitions ab, an, auf, au§, bet, cin, mit, nad^, t)or, ju, or by ^*^^ 
one of the adverbs bar, fort, njcg, l^in, fe^t, lo^, and nicbcr. 
Ex.: 

aBWrcibcn, to copy. tJOtiieUen, to represent, 

anfanaen, to begin. 2uf(i(|Tetben, to ascribe, 

aufflel^en, to get up. oocbteten, to offer, 

audlcgen, to explain. fcrtf^tdfen, to send aw a^-. 

bcifugen, to add. iseageben, to go away, 

cinful^rcn, to introduce. fe^fljc^lageii, to fail, 
mtttbeilcn, to communicate. toiSma^en, to detach, 

nad^fcl^ctt, to revise. tticbettDcrfcn, to throw down. 

*^ § 69. The compound verbs, which are formed by che 
prepositions burd^, ]^i»^, tibcr, urn, untcr, are sometimes 
separable, sometimes inseparable, according to their hav- 
ing the accent on the verb or on the particle. Ex. : 

uber f e t e n , to translate ; t(i(| ubetfe^e, vSii ]|^abe ubcrfc^t ; 
ubcrfeftctt, to cross (a river); \^ fe(jc ubcr, \&i l^abc iibcrgcfcft. 

Practice only can make up this rule. 



X 



CONJUGATION OF A COMPOUND SEPARABLE VERB. 

Slbfdjreiben, to copy. 

Present Tense. 
Indie, Mood. Subj. Mood 

^^ \<i)xt\U ab, I copy ; l^ fdBrcibc ab, (iO I copy ; 

bu f^reibjl ab bu (c^reibcii ab 

cr Wrcibt ab ex \d)xtiU ah 

toix ]6)xtibtn ab toit Jti^tciben ab 

ifjx \d)xdht ah ihx wrcibct ab 

fie fc^retben ah. fte fd^^retben ah» 

Impe*fecl Tense. 

idb fdjrieb ab, I copied i6) Ji^riebe ab, (if) I copied 

tu jc^^ricbft ab, k. bu fd&ricbcft ah, k. 



61 

Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses. 

iiif f^oibc a^t\(i)xiibcn, I have co- t^ f^aU abQt\6)xicbm, (if) I li*\ 

pied ; copied ; 

ii) l^ottc aBgefd;rte(eit, I had co- i^ l^atte aBgcfdOricbcn, (iO I hod 

pied. copied. 

First and Second Future Tenses. 

idj »crbe Qb\6)xciUn, I shall copy ; x6) toerbe ob\d)xcihcn, (if) I shail 

copy; 

i4)^erbe abaefd;rtcbcn]^aBen,l8hall id) totxU a'bQc\6)Xiebm l}cibcn, (if) 
have copied. I shall have copied. 

First and Second Conditional Tenses. 

id) \mxtt abfd^rcibcn, I should i^ tourbe aBgcfiJ^dcbctt l^aBcn, I 
copy. should have copied. 

Imperative Mpod. 

Wteibc Hbf copy ;thou) ; laSt un5 aBf(3&rciBcn, let us copy ; 

[(^ircibt ab/ copy (ye). 

Participles. 
abfc^)reibctib, copying ; abgefdjiricben, copied. 

If the compound verb is reflective, the particle 18 
ftlways placed at the end. Ex.: 

fl^ cinbilben, to imagine. 
Present Tense. 



i^ bilbe mlr eirt; I imagine ; 

bu btlbefl bit cin 

er bilbet ftci^^ tin 

\m bitben unis etn 

i^r btlbet eud^ etn 

fte bilbcn fic^ etn. 



\ 




r 



CHAPTER Vin. 

OP PREPOSITIONS. 



§ 70. The prepositions are invariable words which 
are placed beK)re the nouns or pronouns in order to 
express the relations which would not be suflSciently 
pointed out by the cases. They are : ^ ' i 

1. Either primitive words, as an, at, to; auf, upon A^^^^* j 
in, in; fUr, for; mit, with; \ 

2. Or derived or compound words, as auger, out of; 
^tDifcfjcn, between; oberl^alb, above; anftatt, instead of ; 



52 

8. Or words taken from other parts of speech, like 
fraft, by virtue of; tro^, notwithstanding; gufofgc, in con- 
sequence of. 

§ 71. Nouns or pronouns, whose relations are defined 
bj a preposition, are always placed either in the Geni- 
tive, or in the Dative, or in the Accusative. Some prepo- 
sitions govern but one case, others govern two, accordin 
to the kind of relation we wish to express. 

1. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 

Utttocit/ todl^rcnb; 
tnittcU, fraft/ 
laut, ijermogc, 
inncxljcdbf aufcrl^alB, 
oberl^olb; unteri^alb; 
biesfeit, jenfcit/ 
l^alben, isegeti, 
ungeaclitet, flatt. 

UnlDCtt/ not far from : untoett he9 ^6)U>^tS, not far from the castle ; 
untoett ttx <Btabt; not far from the town. 

SBal^rcnb/ during : Vodl^renb bed SommeriS, daring the summer ; VDdl^s 
rcnb bcr ^a6)t, during the night. 

WtteUf mittcljl or tjermittclfl, by means of: miMi 3^re« 93e((lanbe«/ 
3^ter <&t(fe, by means of your assistance. 

^raft or Ijctmogc, by virtue of : fraft bc3 ©efej^d, by virtue of the law ; 
»ermogc fcincS S3cfcl&l5, by virtue of his order. 

2axitf according to : (aut mctned ^d^xtihtnSf according to my letter. 

£hetf)oiX!bf above ; wntctl^arB, below ; fnner^alB, on the inside ; auger* 
Ijaibf on the outside : auperl^alb bed ^avi\t8f on the outside of the 
house. 

2)ieSfcit, on this side of; jetijcity on that side of : bieSfeit bc8 Slwf[e5, 
on this side of the river. 

^oiibcn, l^albcr or toegett, on account of, by reason of; precede or fol- 
low their substantive : bcr Slrmut]^ I)aibcn, by reason of poverty ; 
tecgcn femes SllterS or feine« StltcrS toeocn, on account of his age. 

/ When l^olben or toegen are preceded by a personal pronoun, the 
final r of the pronoun is changed into t and the two words drawn 
together: memetl^alben, beinetwegctt; fcinctl^albcn, Sl^rcttDegen, for 
my sake, on my account, &c. Unfer and euer keep their final r be- 
fore the t : unfcrtl^olben, cuerttwgen or cureltoegen, for the sake of us 
of you. 

Ungeati^tet/ notwithstanding, is placed before and after its substantive 
or pronoun : ungea(i(;tet femcr Unfd^ulb/ notwithstanding his innocence ; 
aUed beffenltngead^tet/ notwithstanding all this. 

8tatt or anflatt, instead of: fiatt or attflatt meincS S3ruber«, instead of 
my brother ; on wcincr <^(^Weftcr ^tatt, in my sister's strad. 



53 

There are three more prepositions, which govern the 
Genitive or Dative indiscriminately; Itofl^, along; gu* 
folge^ in consequense of, and tro^^ in spite of: langd bent 
gluffc or Ianfl« bc« Sluffc^, along the river ; gufotflc be« 
53crtra9C6 or gufolgc bcm SScrtrage, in consequence of the 
treaty; tro(j fcincn 2SorftcItungcn or trofe fciner SSorftcttim* j 
gen, in spite of his remonstrances. ^ 

2. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. ,, ' . t- 

Jf 3Rit>c]&fl, fammt, ' ' / 

ycntQcgcnyfcgegctt&ct, 7 f KkUW*^ 

Ttit, with : er ifl rait mement fflrubcr angcfommcn, he is arrived with 
my brother; t^ ge^e mtt bit; I go with thee. 

OTcbfl or fammt^ with, together with : cr, ttcBfl fcincr ^<i)\oc^cx, he and 
his sister ; bte SO^utter ntbft or {ammt t^rcn ^tnbent, the mother with 
her children. 

fSdf near, at, with : er Xoca Bet mtr, he was with rae, at my house ; 
hci ten 9lldmem, with the Romans ; Bet fQcxlin, near Berlin, 

8cit, since : fcit feittct Surudfunft, since his arrival ; feit gtt)ei Sal^ten, 
for two years ; fettbent/ since then. 

©en, of, from : idf f^abt c8 ^n bem ©rafcn cxf)alten, I have received it 
from tlie count ; ein £inb l>on brei Sal^ten^ a child of three 3-ear8 ; 
id) fcmme Ijon ©etlitt, I come from Berlin. 

9lad), after, to, according to : er fant nad^ mtr^ he came after me ; tta(^ 
bem ^^f t^^ dinner ; nad^ bcm ©efej^, according to law ; t(^ qtift 
nad) Berlin, I go to Berlin. 

fHviSf out of, from : toir fommctt auS ber ^d)uU, we come from sckou-f , 
am bcm Sd^ranfe nel^mcn; to take out of the cupboard ; ans A&en 
^&ftcn| with all (one's) power. 

l^ufer, out of, besides : er toc^nt auf er ber (Stabt, he lives out of town ; 
i<i) l^aBe fetnen Sreunb aufer 3)^nen/ I have no other friend but you. 

3u, to, at : jtommen @te }u mtr, come to me ; {e^en Sie H^ gu met^ 
nem 93ruber, sit down by my brother ; toofjnen <Bit gu initio) ? do 
you live at Liege? Sfl 3^r S3ater gtt <&aufe? is your father at 
home? 

3uti>tber^ against, follows always its regimen ; ber fBerorbnnn^ gtnvtbcr, 
against the ordinance ; ber ^em ifl mtr guttiber, I dislike wme. 

Vntoe0en; against, to meet; gegenuBcr^ opposite, follow generally 
their regimen ; er fam mtr ehtgegen, he came to meet me ; er tVo^iU 
mlr (KtQtmUx, he lives opposite me. 



64 



«. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVa 

^ r^' "^ * 4* c6nc;rfonbct/ 

JDur^, through, bjr means of: burci^ ba$ JDorf Qcl^cn, to go through tli« 
village ; bur^ bi(i& i)l cr rcid) gctoorbcn, by means of you (by you? 
help) has he become rich ; ti^^ gattjc Sal^T burci^ or l^inbutci^/ th# 
"whole year through. 

%\Xf for: bi'cfc« S9«d& ifl fur mid^l) this book is for me ; fut b(cfc« @€ft 
toill td^ mir $U(^cr faufcn^ for this money will I buy books. 

UiH, round, about, at: um bic £ir^e, urn bie 8tabt gcbett, to go round 
the church, round the town ; um S^lcuia^ft, um j0(icm, about New- 
year's-day, about Easter; um iDlcUiel U^r? at what o'clock? 
um funf tU)r, um SOttttemad^t, at five o'clock, at midnight; umbtc 
3ett ber @mbte^ at harvest-time. 

Dl&nc, fonbcr, without: it^i !ann nid^t Icbcn ol^nc bid^, I cannot live 
without you ; toaS ifl ba3 Scbctt cl^nc cittcn grcunb ? what is life 
without a friend ? Sonbcr is no more used except in poetry ; fonbct 
3t»eifcl, fonbcr SKul^C, without doubt, without trouble. 

©egetiy toiber, to, towards, against : bic $j!ic!^tcn ocgcn bic dltcm, the 
duties towards parents ; milbtl^dtig gcgen bic mmcn, charitable to 
the poor ; gegcn Slbctibt towards evening ; loibcr bie SKaiier, against 
the wall ; tcibcr bic @c|e|^e, against the laws. 

I. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE AND ACCU 

SATIVE. 

S(n, auf,^rt, 
uBcT, untcT, »or, 
\^ I l)inkx,pitUn, gtoifc^cn. 

^ ~ These prej)ositi^«s govern the Accusative, when the 
verb of the sentence denotes either a movement or a 
direction towards an object, and the Dative, when it does 
not denote this movement 

%, at, on : with the Dative : ex fitf)t an bcr 3^ur, he stands at the 
door ; bicfc ©tabt (icgt axa SR^ein, this town is situated on the 
Rhine ; an bit l&obc i(b cincn grcunb, in thee I have a friend. With 
the Accusative.' fcfec ben Jto^jf an bas Scucr, put the pot by the fire ; 
\6) ba<^>tc an \)i(i), I thought of thee ; cr tocnbcte [i6) an oen ^onig, 
he addressed liimself to the king. 

?luf, on, upon : tnth the Dative : fie fijt auf bcm Stul^lc, she is sitting 
on the chair ; bag S3u^ licgt auf bcm Xi\6}t. the book lies on the 
table ; mcin S3rubcr ifl auf bcr Sagb, my brother is out hunting. 
With the Accusative : fcjen Sie fxd) auf bicfcn ©tul^l, sit down upon 
this chair ; legcn ^U baS S&u6) auf ben Z\\(i), put the book on the 
table ; totr gcfecn I;cute auf bie 3agb, we go out hunting to-day. 



A. 



55 • 

Slti in, into; with the Dative: tx U>c(llt in bcr <Stabt, lie lives in tbc 
town ; cr tool^nt in fecc Wlittc fcincr ^inbcr^ he lives surrounJed by 
his children ; fte tfi tiO(!^ tm $ette, she is still in bed. With tht 
Accusative: i6) gc^c in bic <5c^>u(c, in ben ©artcn, I go to school, 
into the garden ; bOiS ^tnb ficl ixi ben Slufl^ the child fell into the 

' river; cr fagte ei mix in'S JO^x, he -whispered it into my ear. 

QcBer^ above, over ; with the Dative . baS ©em&lbe I;5ngt uBer bef 
^ur, libcx bem ^)pxi^tl, the picture hangs above the door, above 
the window ; uBer mix toOi^nt efn ^unfller, an artist lives above me. 
With the Accusative: l^angen <BU ben ^dffg ubcc bic Xf)Xix; hang 
the cage over the door ; VDtr gel^eit uBer btcfc ^tudc; we shall pass 
this bridge ; btc ($^tc gel^t ubtx ben SRetd^t^um, honor is better than 
riches. 

Unter, tinder, beneath, among; with the Dative: unlet bent Xi\(i)t 
Uegen, to lie under the table ; Sic too^ncn untcr mit, you lodge 
beneath me ; unter be( 9legtentng Subloig'S, in the reign of Louis ; 
unter grcunben/ among friends. With the Accusative: jiefie bld^ 
imtcT ben 93aum^ place yourself under the tree ; SBaffcr unter ben 
SDein t^un, to put water with the wine. 

SJor, before ; tpiih the Dative : »or bem ^aufe jiel)t ein 53«um, before 
tlie house stands a tree; »or bent ^riegc l»ar cr fe()r arm, before 
the war he was very poor; i^ bin »or bir angefommen/ I am 
arrived before you ; Btcfed i)l ))or meincn ^ugen gejd^el^en, that has 
happened before my eyes. With the Accusative: er trat t>or ben 
Spiegel; he stepped before the looking-glass ; t)or ben 0tt^tcr rufen, 
to summon before the judge. 

tinier, behind; with the Dative: toir tool^nen 1^ inter ber ^irti^e, we 
live behind the church; cr fam l^tnter mir, he came after me. 
With the Accusative: cr flefit fi^ l^intcr bic XijViX, Winter mici^, he 
places himself behind the door, behind me. 

Iflcbcn, by the side of; vnth the Dative: er faf neBen mir, ncBen 
nieiner ^c^tocflcr; he sat by the side of me, beside my sister 
With the Accusative : cr fej^tc {i^ neben nitc^, he sat down beside me 

^\Di\6)cnj between, among; with the Dative: jtoifc^^en bem «&aufc unb 
bem Garten ifl ber ^cf, between the house and the garden is the 
yard; ci cntflanb gtoifd^cn bem S)2annc unb ber Srau etn 8treit. 
tliere arose a quarrel between the man and the woman. With 
the Accusative: cr fcj^tc bcn Stul^l gtoifc^^cn bic bcibcn Xi\6)Cf he 
put the chair between the two tables ; ber 9t(ng ficl g)t>i{^en bic 
stetne, the ring dropt among the stones. 

§ 72. Frequently the prepositions are united in one 
word with the Dative or Accusative of the Article 
Ex.: 

/) am instead of an bem rom instead of »on bem 

\i an« — — an bas fiir« — — fur hai 

gum ' — — gu bem beim — — bei bem 

jur — — gu ber hmd)9 — — burci^ ba5. 






56 
CHAPTER IX, 

OF ADVERBS. 



( 78. The Adverbs are divided into three principal 
c1ji98CS : Adverbs oipla>ce^ of tvme^ and of quality. 

1. ADVERBS OF PLACE. 

9BC/ where tr^enbtoo^ anywhere, somewlMre 

i^xtXf here nirgwbttO/ nowhere 

ba, bort, there uBcratt, everywhere 

tocit, fern, far gururf, backward 

na^C; near ))Otto&rtiS, forward 

^tnten* behind {etttodrtiS, sideways 

^ont; before tuAo&ttiSi baolcwards 

oben, above ItnfiS, on the lefb 

unten, below xtiiiig on the right, Ao. 

2. ADVERBS OF TIME. 

ilOattn/ when bamali$/(then, at the time 

^icutc, to-day eft, often 

morgen, to-morrow nic, never 

ubermorgeit, the day after to- jutoctlen, sometimes 

morrow tntntcr, always 

geflctn, yesterday JWor, before 
ooraeflem, the day before j-cster- (^on, already 

day vx^f early 

ic^t, now fpdt; late 

t^emaU, formerly fitet^, fod^ctci^, directly, Ae. 



3. ADVERBS OF QUALITY OR KIND. 

9Bie, how toantm, why 

fo, thus beina^c, almost 

gem, willingly gtoar, indeed, although 

aut, well gctoil, certainly 

fc^Ie((t, badly t)icttet(i^t, perhaps, ^c. 

This last class of adverbs is the most numerous; it 
comprehends all adjectives, yrhich can be employed 
adverbiallji and which in English take the termination 
ly. Ex.: 

©iefc« $au« ifl ncu, this house is new ; 

Vxtki ^avii tfl ttcu angcflrtcl^cn, thi? house has been ixewly painted 



\ 



V 



57 



§ 74. The two adverbs t)Ci% here, l^in, there, are verj 
often combined with other adverbs or with prepositions, 
and serve to form a great number of adverbs of placa 
§er denotes a movement towards the place, where the 
speaker is ; I)in a movement from that place. Ex. : 

Bcrob, l^inoB, down l^icrffcr, l^icrl^m, this way 

l;crauf, ^finauf, up hai}cx, bal^in, there 

herein, l^ineitt, in bottler, bott^m^ from there, ihcro 

\bcrau8, f}mau9, out ttJO^ct/ tooBin, whence, where 

Ipcruntct/ l^inuntcr^ down obcn^ct, i>icvtf)in, at the surfece. 

■^ The adverbs l^tcr, here, ba, there, combined with pre- 
positions and adverbs, serve likewise to form compound 
adverbs. Ex.: 

Ijkxcm* by this barait, by that* 

^icrauf^ hereupon barauf, thereupon * 

l^icrbet; hereby babci, thereby 

l^icrburc^^i hereby babutc^, by that 



>C 



i^teraud^ out of this barauiS^ out of that 

l^tertn^ in this haxin, therein 

l^icrfiir, for this bafur, therefore 

^icrgcgen, against this bagegcn, against it. 



The adverb too, where, is combined in the same 
manner : 



^^ 



ttJoran, at which toobur^, whereby 

toorauf, upon which ttjomit, wherewith 

Woraus^ out of which Wcran, wherefrom 

tvorin^ m which tDOgu, for what 

toobci^ whereby tot>na6), after which.f 




§ 75. Some adverbs, and especially adjectives used 
adverbially, are susceptible of being compared, and form ,^ 
their degrees of comparison in the same manner as the '' "* *^'' 
adjectives : 

ft)&t, late • f^)dtcr, later ; ^fttcfl^ latest ; 

\oft, often ; Hftct, oftener ; oftefi/ oftenest. 

The simple form of the Superlative in eft is little 
used ; we more frequently have recourse to circumlocu- 
tions, in which the adverb is replaced by the neuter o' 
the adjective, preceded by the prepositions on or auf 
Ex.: 

* The primitive form of ba is bar, and is used every time when, in 
Uie formation of these words, two vowels meet. 

t When too is combined with a word beginning by a vowel, an t ii 
mserted, to avoid the hiatus. 



58 



am fpatefleit/ lateet : 
am dftejlen, ofteaest ; 



auf hai QmcaitfUf most minatelj ; 
auf has gejci^tptnbefle, most qaicklj. 



The Superlative sometimes also takes the ending end« 
Ex.: 



\V. 



fmf^fUnS, at the soonest; \}b^\icni, at tlit most. 



The following adverbs form their degrees of compari 
son irregularly : 

gut, well ; ^t^tx, better ; am bcjlett, best , 

Vifll, much ; m^ifx, more ; am mti^m, most ; 

hili, soon ; c^ct^ sooner ; ant cl^eflen, soonest ; 

gem, willingly ; licbcT/ more willingly ; am Ite^flen, most willingly 



^ 




CHAPTER X. 



OF CONJUNCTIONS. 




\ 

§ 76. The following is a list of the principal con 
junctions. 

1. SIMPLE CONJUNCTIONS. 



Unb, and ; obcT, or ; 

abet; olletn, but ; 

{cnbcm, but (after a negation) ; 

aU, when, than ; 

bcnn, for ; ba, as ; 

tOcHf because ; 



n>entt; when, if; oB, if, whether; 

toann, when ; bann, then • 

hai, that ; 

bod^/ yet ; 

cBe, before ; 

alfO/ thus, consequently. 



2. COMPOUND CONJUNCTIONS. 



JDamit. auf bof, in order that ; 

cbglcid), obJd)on, although ; 

noiS^bcin; after; 

mbcrn, while ; 

mit^in, consequently ; < 



cnttDcber . . . obet^ either ... or , 
tocbcT. . .ne6), neither. . .nor ; 
fotDo^t. . .aU, as well. . .as ; 
ta)te.. .fo, as., .as; 
je.. .bcf^o^ the., .the. 



The conjunctions are followed now by the Subjanctivo 
and now by the Indicative Mood ; some of them change 
the construction of the sentence, others do not change it 
(See the following Chapters.) 




59 
CHAPTER XL 

OF THE USE OF THE MOODS. 



1. INDICATIVE MOOD. 

§ 77. The Germans generally employ the Indicativ 
Mood, where in English, for the sake of brevity, the 
Infinitive and Present participle are used. Ex.: 

3d) glaube, bag cr cin Tcdbtfd6ajfcncr I believe him to be an honest 

ajiann i|t. man. 

SBir l^abctt immct gcfunbcn, bag ct We have ever found him to speak 

bic SBal^rl^cit fprac^. the truth. 

3^ toeig misji, VoaS ic§ t^un foil. I do not know what to do. 

Semanb; bcr in JDcutfc^^lanb rciflc, Some one, travelling in Germany, 

fanb found 

HBcil id^ ttlcij^t rci^ bin, ^aBc x6^ Not being rich, I have no friends 

fcinc Srcunbc. 

3^ ^^t c5 gcfeiftcn, atS id^ DorBcis I saw it in passing. 

9Kan mat^t fld^ oft Dcr^agt, inbcm . We often make ourselves hated by 
man bte Sa^rl^feit fagt. speaking the truth. 

(It will be remarked, that sentences of this kind are 
formed by circumscribing the English and adding either 
a relative pronoun, or one of the conjunctrons, baf , ba, 
xotxi, (x% inbem, tocnn.) 

SBcnn man lange franf gcttJcJcn ifl, After having been ill for a long 

ful^lt man ben SBert^ ber ©efunb^ time, we feel the value of health 

l^ctt beflo mtfyc. the more. 

($]^e man rebct, mug rami bcnfetu Before speaking, you must think. 

Sometimes the Imperative is replaced by the Indica- 
tive Mood. Ex.: 

JDu blciBii ! Stay ! 

3^r fommt Igcr ! Come here t 

2. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD l./ // 

1. When relating or quoting what has been said^w 
done, the Subjunctive Mood must be used in German. 
Ex.: 

Cr fagtc mir, bag cr franf gctocfcn He told me that he had been ill. 

todrc. 

5Kan fragtc un3, tt^clcJ^ca unfcr 93a« They asked us, which was oui 

tcrlanb wore. country. 



60 

^d) glaubtc, bag cr franf tt)drc, I thought he was ill.* 

2Bir i^bxtcn, hex Bug \d abgcgangcn. We heard the train had started. 

2. After the conjunctions tocnn and ob, if, when th« 

verb is in the Imperfect or Pluperfect tense, Ex.: 

2Bcntt ©ic cl^cr gcfommcn tt)arctt. If you had come sooner. 
aScnn i6) »iclc grcunbc ^attc. If I had many friends. 

3(^ fragte i§n, eb cr c« louptc* I asked him, if he know it. 

8. In exclamations and wishes, where the conjunction 
M understood. Ex.: 

*atte id) ®clb ! If I had money ! 

§i<li), toare i6) gefunb ! Ah ! if I were well ! 

4. Instead of the Conditional Mood* Ex.: 

3(5 fotrnte rci^ fcin. I might be rich. 

3(^ Xo^xt gludttidi^cr. I should be happier. 

3^ ^attc mc^ft grcunbe. I sliould have more friends. 

In general the Subjunctive Mood is used to express 
a thing of which we are not quite sure, and sometimes 
by using either the Subjunctive or Indicative Mood we 
show our belief or disbelief of an event or a circum-; 
stance. Ex. : 

3c5 ^aBc ge()crt; ba§ bet RcniQ ans'\ 

gefommen ip. II have heard, that the king has 

3ci6 ^ftbc Qc^xt, Hi bcr ^onig ons [ arrived. 

gcfommcn fei. J 

SRan ^ai un5 gcfagt, ba§ bcr Sricbc^ 

gcfc^toffctt ijt. (They have told us, that the peac« 

SD2an ^at un« gcfagt, bet Srtcbe fei [ is concluded. 

gcfdfjtoficn. J 

In the first case we express our belief of the news, in 
the second we merely mention it, without believing it yet 
ourselves. 

8. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

§ 78. The Imperative Mood, as we have seen, has 
only the second person of the Singular and of the 
Plural. When we wish to express a command to a 
third person, we make use of tne present tense of the 
Subjunctive Mood, or of the verbs \oUm, shall, and 
niogeu, may. Ex.: 

* The Subjunctive Mood is likewise used in expressing the opinion 
we had of ourselves, but which we have no more at the timo we art 
ipeaking. 



61 



Qifomme 



eifcaSmmcn. | He may or ,hdl come. 

<Ste m^gcn fommcn. They may come— let them come. 

In the first person of the Imperative Mood wc ernploj 
the verb laffciu Ex.: 

Sing. £af mi gc^cn. I t ^^ „. „^ 

We may also say: flcl^cn toxx; or: toir tooHcit gcl^cit, wo 
will go. 

4. INFIKITIVE MOOD. 

§ 79. The German Infinitive is used with or without 
the preposition gu. It is used without gu : Jjk^ 

1. When it is the subject of a proposition. Ex.: 
fQki trttifen ifl ungefunb. To trii^k much is unwholesome. 

r^ 2. After the verbs bilrfcn, tonmn, laffcn, mSgcn/ /^ 
Mitiiffcn, foHcn, tt)crbcn, tooKen, l^clfcii, fjbvm, Ic^ren, Icrncn- 
|>I)cn, fii^Icn. Ex.: q^^^^x.— 

3(^ barf fiojfcti. I may hope. 

S)u fannfl fd^retbcn. Thou canst write 

@r mug arbcttcn. He must work. 

SQStr borcn il^n reben. We hear him speak. 

SBir fa^en fie tangen. We saw her dancing. 

SD^ctniiBrubcr lemt iti6)nctt. My brother learns drawing. 

In all other cases the Infinitive is preceded by the 
prepof ition JU. Ex. : 

6r tt)imf(^t tnit S^^en gu ftnrcAcit. He wishes to speak to you. 

ffl3ir bojfctt tncrgcn cinen Srief gu er« We hope to receiye a letter to 

l^altcn. morrow. 

3(!b btttc (Sie, etncn 9Cug(nbU(i oufgu^ I beg you to get up for a mo 

jtc^cn. ment. 

3c$ furd^te ci if)xa gu fagen. I fear to tell it him. 

(SiS tfl traurtg/ feme Steunbe gu It is sad to have no friends. 

l^abcn. 

SBir babcn no(^ bret !D2ctlen gu We have still tlirce miles to go. 

macpcn. 

If we wish to indicate precisely the object, the motive 
of an action, um is added to the prep. gu. Ex. : 

3(^ fommc; um mtt Sfftttn gu I come in order to speak to you 

(vcecben. 

©ir Icbcn nid)\, um gu cffcu, fonbcm We do not live in order to eat 

toir c()cn, um gu Icbcn. but we eat in order to lire. 



62 

Every German Infinitive may be taken substantively 
and bo preceded by the article. Ex. : 

ba« XxMm, drinking ; bad 3^angcii, dancing. 

^ 6. PARTICIPLES. 

§ 80. The present participle is mostly employed as 
an adjective. Ex. : 

S)cT ftcT^enbe ®rei« ; tbe dying old man. 

2)ie Icibcnbe SKcnfc^^cit ; suffering humanity. 

3)a« kjcttbe ^inb ; the reading child. 

There are, however, cases, where the present Parti- 
ciple is also used in German to unite two sentences into 
one; which, however, can only take place, when the two 
sentences have the same subject Ex. : 

3ittcmb fagte cr mix He told me trembling 

^rrot^ettb t>or (S(^am cntfemte er Blushing with shame he with* 
fi(^. drew. 

§ 81. The past participle serves not only to form 

the compound tenses of verbs, but it is also very often 

used as an adjective. 

din gefronted ^au^t -, a crowned head. 

5)a« gclicbtc ^wb ; the beloved child, 

^er angefatigene ^rief ; the commenced letter. 

The past participle replaces sometimes the Imperative, 
the Infinitive, and even the present participle. Ex.: 

©etmnfcn, gcfpiclt! Let us drink, play ! 

^"1 2)ai5 l^eiflt gcarbeitet (instead of: That is called working. • 

"^ arBeitcn). 

Sr fam gclaufcn, gef\)nin9cn. He came on running, jumping. 

y-^.^ ,-^ /, .^ S o metim ^ g aloo the past participle of those verbs Ae* 
.,. ' ^' " * " Infiniti»<» of whio h i s uoed without 3U (§ 79), is replaced ./ 
" •' ? .h t^®ir Infinitive, Eaw u ki^t^j 7ctl^U/t^*U^ Ouu^^^ 
luL^ ^-VL'ftu^^^ h^^ i&tt anfommctt fcl^cn I have seen him arrive. ^^^ /.^^^JVj;^ 

'' @r 't)ai bcga^tcn muffcn (gcmugt). He has been obh'gcd to pay. " 
3Bir l)abcn i^n fingcn ^orcn (ac« We have heard him sing. " 

96rt). 
vSic fiat c8 if^m nidjt fagcn burfcn She dared not tell him. 

(gcburft). f 

In rhetoric^s'tyle, the past participle also serves to 
connect two sentences and to render the expression mor« 
concise and distinct. Ex.: 



63 

53mi fcinctt grcunben Jjetratl^ctt, »on Betrayed by his frienils, pene- 

femen Setnben t^crfotgt, entflc^ cuted by his enemies, Tiiemis- 

S^emiflofled ttadb ^erften. tocles escaped to Persia. 

^ie Unf(i(|ulb ifl bet ^ecle ®lu(!; Innocence is the happiness of the 

(Stnmal txrf^iergt unb aufgeaebcn, soul ; once forfeited and lost, 

Skxiait fie uni8 tm (jan^ett Seben, it wiU leave us for ever, and 

Unb feme 9ieu' brtngt fte guruc!* no repentance can recall it. 



# 



CHAPTER XIL 

OF THE USE OF THE TENSES. 



1.' PRESENT TENSE. 

\ § 82. The Present Tense is used in German as in 
English, and in addition in the following case, where the 
Perfect is substituted in English ; viz., when speaking of 
any length of time past, up to the present moment, and 
including it. Ex.: 

SQBir tool^nen fcil funf Sa^tcti in "We haye been living in this 

blefem ^aufe. house for five years. 

3^r JD^cim ifl \(S)en elf Sa^te Their uncle has been dead these 

tobt. eleven years. 

3d) ^abc c5 fd^on fcit mcincr I have liad it from my childhood. 

^mb^cit. 

<Beit toann fittb ©le l^ict? How long have you been here? 

Sd^ twirte betcitS fcit cincr Stunbc I have been waiting for you this 

oufSic. hour. 

2. IMPERFECT TENSE. 

^ § 83. The Imperfect Tense is used in German, 
!• In historical narrative. Ex.: 

gricberid) bcr Orof c tear ein aroflcr Frederick the great was a great 
gclb^icrr, abet er liebte uno bcs general, but he also loved and 
f(^u|^te audb ^ic 2Btffenf(!b<tftctt. protected the sciences. 

\ 2. To express a time with relation to another. Ex.: 

^6) fcl^rieb/ al5 bu famfl. I was writing when you came. 

ids fie mi$ fo^^ flng ftc an git When she saw me, she began to 
\^ toeincn. cry. 

IBol^renb bcr Sturm tobtC; fdjlief er Dunng the noise of the storm he 
gang fefl. slept quite soundly. 

3. To narrate events, of which the narrator was an 
eye-witness. Ex. : 



64 

defUttt erefgncte fi^ cin fonbcrl^arcr Ycaterday a straage accident 
©orfall unt«r mcincm Scnflcr. happened under my window. 

iDcr $ro{cffoT ^iclt cine lange IRcbC; The professor made a lone 
wnb tt)iT beglcitcten il^n nat^ ^^aujc speecli, and we accompanied 
jutud. lum home. 

8. PERFECT TENSE. 

"^ § 84. The Perfect Tense is used 

1. In relating events of which the narrator was not an 
eye-witness. Ex. : 

(Si l^at {t(i^ em fonberlbarct SSorfoH A stninge accident has hap< 

crcignct. pened. 

-IDcT $rofcffct l^ot etne lanoe fRebe The professor has made a long 

gc^oitcn unb fcine 3u^drcr speech, and his auditors will 

XDcrbett fie bruden lajfen, have it printed. 

25cr ^crjog ijl gcflcm in S3, ongcs The duke arrived at B. yester- 

fommcn. day. 

*^ 2. In expressing any definite past time, without 
reference to another (when in English the Imperfect 
Tense is used). Ex.: 

Scfe bin fituU in bet ^irci^c gctucs I was at church to-day. 
fen. 

9Dir finb gcjlcm anacfommcn. "We arrived yesterday. 

34! ^><ibe bicfen &orgctt mcine I lost my pocket-book^ this 

S3ricftaf(^)e terlorcn. morning. 

SKeitt Srcunb J^at ttorigc^ ^o^x My friend performed along jour- 
cine aroje Slcife jcmadjt. ney last year. 

Sinb <&ie gcjJcm im JJonjert gcs "Were you at the concert yester- 

tocfcn? day? 

§ 85. The Pluperfect and Future Tenses are em- 
ployed in German as in English. 

Observation. In English there are three forms for the Present and 
Imperfect, and two forms for the Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses ; viz.: 
I work, I am working, I do work, I worked, was working, did work ; 
I have worked ; I have been working ; I had been working ; — ^but in 
German they are nil supplied by the simple form : {(^ arbeitey {(^ QXs 
hiiicU, t(^ ^aU gearbcitct^ t^f l^otte gearbeitct. 

CHAPTER Xin. 

OF THE CONSTRUCTION. 

§ 86. The German constniction differs in several 
points from the Enelish. There are two principal 
rules to be observed: 1. that the word, expressing 



« 



65 

ihe principal idea, is always placed after those words 
which express only accessory ideas; 2, that the ex- 
pression which is, so to say, the key of the sentence; 
and without which the sense could not be well under* 
stood, is always placed at the end of the sentence. 

PARTICULAR RULES. 

> 1, The adjective is always placed before its sub- 
stantive, and preceded by all those words which depend 
on it Ex.: 
(Silt geaen Scbcrmann Itfoflt^cr A man, polite to everybody. 

IDte Sl^nen ))org€{lcTn gugcf^ftdttcn The goods sent to you the day 
SBaarem before yesterday. 

2. The Dative generally precedes the Accusative, ex- 
cept when both are personal pronouns, in which case the 
English construction is used* Ex.: 

®ebcn <3te bcm <&crm e{nen ©tul^l. Give a chair to the gentleman. 
3^ ffoibt Sf}Xim ©ruber cm Sdud^ I have lent a book to your bro- 
gcUe^ctt. ther. 

But: 

3^ f^cnfe fic S^ncn. I give them to you. 
^an fagte ci und. They told us so. 

.®r fc^^rieb e« mix. He wrote it to me. 

^ If one of the cases is a pronoun, it is placed before 
the noun. Ex.: 



3^ fonn c9 meinent Qteunbe nid^t I cannot refuse it to my friend. 

abf^laacn. 
3^ lei^c cir meine Scbcr. I lend thee my pen. 

8. The Nominative case is placed after the verb, or 
after the auxiliary, when there is a compound tense, 
whenever the sentence begins with any other word than \ 
he Nominative. Ex.: 

SWorgcn fomme f^ ni(^t To-morrow I shall not come. ^4^ 

^OTt ^obcn loir lange gcwo^nt. We have lived there for a long 

timOi 

ffUi^ if! er ntc^t, aBcr elBrli^* He is not rich, but honest. 

8ur meine ^eunbe ^aoe t^ Oicle For my friends I have much 

®cf&nia!ett. courteousness. 

IDte SauXen !ann i<^ nt^t anis I cannot bear idle folks. 

^^en. 

©en SKabci^cn flcl^t bte <Stttfams Modesty is becoming to girls. 

fett an. 



66 

There are, however, some conjunctions which do not 
sause the transposition of the Nominative, such as unb, 
bcnn^ abcr, atlein, ba, and in general all those words 
which cause the verb to be placed at the end of the 
sentence. (§ 90.) # 

4. The Nominative is also placed after its verb, in 
% sentence which serves as complement to the one pro- 
oeding it. Ex.: 

fficnn er !ommt, acf}t i6) fort. When he coraee, I go away. 

aOcitn ©ic a ocfe^kn, fo mug ex If you command, he mnat do it 

ts tl^un. 

3c mtljx i(5 trlnfc, bcfio burjltgcr The more I drink, the more 

hin i6)* ^ thirsty I am. 

Scrni bic ©iticn gcttJinnen, fo »crs When one party gains, the others 

licrcn bic Slnbcnt. lose. 

5. The Nominative is placed after its verb, when the 
conditional particle ttJCim is suppressed. Ex.: 

9kbcitct (f;r nic^t, fo bcfommt i^r If you do not work, you do not 

au6) kin ®clb. get any money. 

93ifl bu nic^t flcijig, fo raadfjfl bu If thou art not diligent, thou 

fcinc Sortfdt^rittc. wilt make no progress. 

6. Interrogative sentences are formed without the help 
of any auxiliary verb, by merely placing the verb before 
its Nominative. Ex.: 

®cT)cn ©tc Jcutc <mi ? Do you go out to-day f 

^iliiQcn @ic ci nt(^t ? Do you not approve of it? 

^ommt bcr 3!ftann ntc^t toicbcr ? Does the man not come back 

again ? 

Negative sentences are likewise formed without the 
help of auxiliary verbs. Ex.: 

^(f) tt>cig e« n\6)t I do not know it. 

Qx fommt ni^U He does not come. 

7. The Nominative is placed not only after the verb, 
but also after the adverb and other words depending on 
the verb, if the sentence begins with the neuter personal 
pronoun c6. Ex.: 

@d fam gcflcm Scmanb. Somebody came yesterday. 

(Si crcignct ^6) xii^t aUc ^age cine Such an opportunity docs not 
folc^c (^clcgcnl^ctt. happen every day. 

{ 87. The Germans place certain words at the end 
of the sentence, which are its key^ and without which 
the sense would not be understood. These words are : 



r 
I 



67 

1. The attribute of the subject, 

2. The adverb referring to the verb of the subject 

8. The preposition with its regimen or in its place th« 
kelative particles baran, barum, &c. 

4. The prepositions and separable particles with 
which the verbs are compounded. 

5. The Past Participle and the Infinitive. 

6. Lastly the verb of the subject. 

1) When the sentence begins with one of the conjunc 
tions iDcmt, if; totii, because; obfdjon, although; M^» 
that; bamit^ in order that; itt>0Vf tljt, before; ot^ ^, 
when; toaljrcnb, while; nadjhtm, after; M^f until; 2) 
when the sentence begins with a relative pronoun ; and 
3) when it begins wim an interrogative pronoun or ad- 
verb, provided that the interrogation b6 indirect 

Examples, 

1 3(6 bin mcinctt grcunbcn gc* I am truo to my fiiendu 
trcu. 
<Scib gcgctt Scbcrmann Ij6fs Be polite to every one. 

2. IDiefe ^xau licbi t^re ^inbcr This woman does not love her 

nt^t. children. 

JDcr ^tanfc bcfinbct fid^ bej|cr. The patient is better. 
<Sie ftngt biejcd £teb f^on. She sings this song beautifully. 

3. 2Bir fprc<^^cn »on unfcm @cs We spealc of our affairs. 

fc^aftcn. 

2Ba8 madden <Sie bamit ? What are you doing with it ? 

SSoHcn <£ic batjon ? Do you wish some o^ it ? 
3<6 bcfummcre tnfci^ ni^t bas I do not trouble myself about it 

rum. 

4. aKa(J(;ct bic JT^ure gu. Shut the door. 
<£d)rciben Ste bicfc S3ricfc ob. Copy these letters. 

3ci^ Mc altc SKorgcn frul^ auf. I get up early every morning. 

5. Z^ babe locate nod^ nit^tS gc* I have not yet eaten anything 
• gcffcn. to-day. 

6r i^attt mid^ um @rlaubnig He had asked my permission. 

gcfragt. 

3(ip l^abc bic (S^rc, mi(i) Z^mn I have the honor to wish yon 

gu cmVfcbUtt. good morning. 

6. SOcnn iii) l^ud^cr itnb Srcunbe If I had books and fiiends. 

l^&tte. 
3(6 tocifi mii)t, cb cr gliitfli<6 I <^o n<>t know if he is happy. 

iff- 
9^i id) i^tt gum erflen SWalc When I saw him for th* first 

fab. time. 



^ 



;*■ 



68 

SBii^tcnb er auf bcm Sanbe )coax* While ho was in the eountrjr. 

3(b filaubc, bai ex fel^r gufnes I believe that he is very happy 

ben i%. \- 

f^t^tni^e, Md)€K ittfriebcn ift, He who is conteoted, is happy. 

iff glumi$l 

Qtffeti (Bit, yoct btefm Snef Do yon know who wrote tlik 




TABLE 

OP ALL IRREGULAR FORMS OF DISSONANT AND 

IRREGULAR VERBS. 



ITie first column contains the irregular formy the second the tense ts 
which it belongs, and the third the Infinitive of the verb.) 

af , fife Imp. Ind. and Subj. cj|eit, to eat 

bacffl, bficft Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pen. bacfen, to bake 

banb, bdnbe Imp. Ind. and Snbj. binben^ to tic 

barg, barge do. bcrgcn, to hide 

bat, bote, do. bitten, to beg 

befall, befoble do. befe^len, to command 

bcficklh bcftc^U Pres. Ind. 2d and Sd pers. do. 

bejlif/ oefliifje Imp. Ind. and Snbj. |i(^be|Ici§cn, to apply 

one's self, 

bcfliffcn Past part. do. 

bcfoblcn do. befcl^Iett/ to command 

begann Imp. Ind. I>vi).uhiu, to begin, 

bcgonn; bcgcnnc Imp. Ind. and Subj. do. 

bcgcnnen Past Part. do. 

betoog, bcto6ge Imp. Ind. and "^ ubj. bewegcti; to moT^ 

bctoogcn Past Part. do. 

btn,«bi^ Pres. Ind. Ist and 2d pers. fein, to be 

birg Imperative bergen, to hide 

btrgft; birgt Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pers. do. 

hi^, bijfe Imp. Ind. and Subj. betflen, to bite 

blfifefl, bUUt. Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pers. bCafen, to blow 

blteb; bUebc Imp. Ind. and Subj. hUihm, to remain 

hiici, bltefe do. blafen, to blow 

bog, boge do. bteaeit, to bend 

borjt, boqlc do. beiitcn, to burst 

bot, bote do. bicten, to offer 

bra4f/ brad^c do. bredb^n, to break 

brcu^te, be n.. tc do. brmgen, to bring 

brannte Imp. Ind. brennen, to bum 

brfitfl^ brat Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pers. braten, to roast 



drift 


Imperative 


6«^oi, to break 


bridjp, Sufti 


Pre8.1[id.2aaad3dper9. 


do. 


tiict, iriElc 


Imp. lad. &Qd Subj. 


rnten, to roast 


».T 


dtf. 


,ntcn, to think 


rreB.lnd.lBt«id2dpcni. 


urftn, to dare 


btatia, fcwns* 
briW 


Imp. Ind. and Siibj. 


linooi, to pre.. 


Imperative brc|(^, totbrasb 


I>rea.lDd.2daDd3dpers. 


do. 


Imp. Jnd. «d Sabj. 


do. 


bUTfW, tutfie 


do. 


uifctl, to dare 


«n¥|aljt 


Imp. lad. tmfUiktt, to reeora 


(mipficgl 




do. 


cmvfK^llI, (inpficWi 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pcra. 


do. 


emi)f«W, empfoWe 


Imp. Ind. nnd Subi. 


do. 


m»fcbl«i 


Past Part. 


do. 


fibtid), tibUAt 


Imp, Ind. and Sabj. 


tblci*(lt, togTOWp»Ie 


crtliften 


PaatPart 


do. 


crlifft 


ImpenitiTe 


tI6|(^n,toeitinp.i.h 


crlWcil, rtliiftt 


PreB.lDd.2dand3dpen 


do. 


ttlojd), «lo[ftc 


Imp. Ind. and Sabi. 


do. 




Pait Part. 


do. 


TJ*d^^Ctf*6«. 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


sj^otkn, to aonnd 


Past Part. 


do. 


^i^?af"(r[*rdft 


Imp. Ind. and Snbj. 


if<^Kden, to be fright 
ened 

do. 


trtdjtitf 


Imperative 


erjitirL*!, ctftferi* 
cntbtcaen 


Pre.. lad. 2d and 3d pen. 
Past Part. 


do. 
do. 




Imp. Ind. and Subi. 


em&am, to consider 


fibril, jaijtl 


PMtPart. 


do. 


Pre.. Ind. 2d and 3d pera. 


a^rra, to drive <in « 






carriage) 


iallil, (atlt 


do. 


alltn, to fall 


fonb, fintc 


Imp. lad. and Subi. 


nbin, to fiad 


i?' 


Pre8.1nd.2dand8dpera. 


ongcn, to catch 


do. 


[^hn, to fight 


Imp. Ind. and Subi. 


alien, to iaU 


jifi'dn 


do. 

Pre.. Ind. 2d aad 3d per.. 


Bnger, to eatcL 
kAtcn, to braid 


flpdjt/flcdjte 


Imp. Ind. and Subi. 


do. 


as 


do. 




do. 




^''''t'^'ibtc 


do. 






do. 


:fttcn, to Eght 


K'it^c' 


do. 


ttffm ,to eat< of ani ma) i 


do. 


ritrtn, to freeie 




Imperative 


Kf[tn, to eat 


iriiicft.frifil ■ 


Pre.. lud. 2d and 3d pertu 


do. 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


a^Tfit, to drive (in b 






carriage) 


aaS, SiSbt 


do. 


flebm, to give 
Idttn, lo be ivortb 


Salt,flil!t 


do 



71 



ficbaden 

^cbaXf gcbare 

gcbctct 

gebicr 

fjcbicrf}, Qcbictt 

Qcbiffctt 

gcblafcn 

geblicben 

gebogen 

gcborcn 

gebcraen 

flcborjtcn 

gcboten 

(fcbrac^t 

gebrannt 

gcbratcn 

gebrodbcn 

gcbunben 

geba(!bt 

gcbte^, gcbiebe 

gebte^en 

0cbrof(l)cn 

fjebrungen 

gebungcn 

geburft 

gefol^rcn 

gcf alien 

gefangen 

gefio^ten 

gefloaen 

geflopen 

gcfloffctt 

gcfocbten 

gcfrcffen 

gcfrorcn 

gcfunbcn 

gcgangcn 

gcgcben 

gcgcffcn 

gegltc^en 

geglttten 

gcglomtncn 

gegobrcn 

gegolten 

gcgoffen 

gcgrabcn 

gegrijfctt 

{;€ba(tcn 

gcl^aucn 

ge^cifcn 

ge^oben 

ge^olfen 



Past Part. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Past Part 
Imperative 

Pros. Ind. 2d and 8d pcrs. 
Past Part. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

dd. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
.mp. Ind. and Sobj 
Past Part. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. . 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 



bacfen, to bake 
gcbdrcn, to bear 
bctcn, to pray 
geboren 

gcbdrctt; to bear 
cigcn, to bite 
blafcn, to blow 
bleiben; to remain 
bicgctt; to bend 
gcbdren, to bear 
wrgcn; to hide 
bcrjten, to burst 
bicten, to oflfer 
bringcn, to bring 
brcnncn, to burn 
bratcn, to roast 
bred^ctt, to break 
bmben, to tie 
bcnfctt; to think 
gebcil^en, to prosper 

do. 
brefc^en, to thrash 
brtngen, to press 
btngen, to bargain 
burfcn, to dare 
fasten, to drive (in s 
carriage.) 

(dien, to fall 

angcn, to catch 

c(§tcn, to braid 
flicgcn, to fly 
flicbeit, to flee 
flie^en, to flow 

fc^ten; to flght 
reffen^to eat(of animalf 
fricrcn; to freeze 
finbcn, to find 
gcBcn, to go 
gebcn, to give 
cffctt. to eat 
gletdpen, to resemble 
gleitcn, to glide 
gltmmen, to glow 
gdlfftcit; to ferment 
gcltcn, to be worth 
gicfen, to pour 
grabcn, to di^ 
grcifcn, to seize 
baltcn, to hold 
bauen, to hew 
^etgeit; to be called 
beben, to lift 
^clfcn, to help 



!' 
k 



72 



getoimt 




Past 1 art. 


genommm 




do. 


geflungeti 




do. 


gefnijfen 




do. 


gefommen 




do. 


gefonnt 




do. 


gefTC(^en 




do. 


geCaben 




do. 


ficlang, ^dhx^t 


Imp. 


ind. and Snbj 


gelaffen 




Past Part. 


gelaufen 




do. 


gelcaen 
oelefen 




do. 




do. 


c)elie(en 




do. 


geltttcn 




do. 


gelogctt 




do. 


gelttttaen 
gcma^ten 




do. 




do 


gemeffen 




do. 


gemtebeti 




do. 


gemoc^t 




do. 


gemolfen 




do. 


gemuSt 




do. 


genonnt 




do. 


^cnas, gen&fe 


Imp. 


Ind. and Sabj. 


genefen 




Past Part. 


genomtnen 




do. 


genoffen 
genog, gettdffe 




do. 


Imp. 


Ind. and Subj 


ge^)|tjfen 




Past Part. 


gepjbgctt 




do. 


ge^iefen 




do. 


gequolUn 




do. 


gcrannt 




do. 


geratl^ett 




do. 


gertebett 




do. 


geriffen 




do. 


geritten 




do. 


gerod^en 




do. 


geronnen 




do. 


gcrufeti 




do. 


gerungen 




do. 


gefatibt 




do. 


gcfd^ajfctt 




do. 




Imp. 


Ind. and Subj 




Past Part. 


geff^ieben 




do. 


geWle^t 


Pres. 


Ind. 3d pers. 


gefAienen 
gef^^afen 




Past Part, 
do. 



fcnnen, to know 
fltinmen, to climb 
flinacn, to sound 

fncifctt/ ^ pinch 
fommen, to come 
fonnen; to be able 
frie^^n, to creep 
labett; to load 
gelmgcn, to succeed 
laffcn, to leave 
laufctt, to run 
liegen, to lie (dowdi) 
k(en, to read 
leil^en; to lend 
veibctt, to suffer 
liigen; to lie (speak an 

untruth) 
gelingcn, to succeed 
mahUn, to grind 
nujpl, to measure 
metbctt/ to avoid 
mogen, to like 
meucn, to milk 
muffen^ to be obliged 
nennen, to name 
genefen; to recover 

do. 
ne^tnen, to take 
gcnicgctt, to enjoy 

do. 
^feifen, to whistle 
^0egen (Sftot^ kO# t« 

consult 
^rclfcit, to praise 
qucUen, to spring 
rcnnen^ to run 
ratl^en, to advise 
reibcn, to rub 
rctSeh, to snatch 
reiten, to ride (on honM> 

back) 
rteci^en, to smell 
rtnncn, to flow 
rufcn, to call 
rmgen, to wrestle 
fenoett; to send 
f(^ajfen, to create 
gefcpclffcn/ to happes 

do. 
fcbetben, to part 
gcfd^^en^ to happen 
Kt^emen, to seem 
{(i^Iafcn, to sleep 



78 



getelaaen 
ge (i^ltd^en 

geWliffctt 

9cf*toffctt 

ge d^lungen 

gef(i^mtf|cn 

gef^molieti 

gcjd^nitten 

lecbcben 
geii^oltcn 



9c 

flCl 



c^oren 
^neben 



ge d^ritten 

gef(ibuttbcn 

get(i^tt>teaen 

gef(ibtooIlen 

gclc^toommen 

ge|(!btt)oren 

gefd^tounben 

geWloungen 

gefebcn 

gefcffctt 

gcfoifcn. 

gefoniten 

gcfottcn 

gcfpteen 

gcWilfctt 

gefvonnen 

gcfpToAcn 

gef^)roJlett 

gefrrungcn 

gejianben 

gefticgctt 

geflofl^m 

gefloblcn 

geflorben 

geflofm 

gcfirt(ibcn 

gefhttten 

gefhtnfctt 

gefungen 

gefunfett 

getbott 

getragm 

getreten 

getrieben 

gctroffcn 



Past Part 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
' do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

dc 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do 

do 



{(i^lagen, to beat 
\d)ki6)tnf to soeak 
{(bleifctt, to "whet 
fcblctSen, to split 
((bltef en, to shut 

>UTi0cn, to devour 
metgen, to throw 
melgen, to melt 
neiben, to eut 
nauben, to snort 
ieben, to push 
elten, to scold 

dberen, to shear 

(bte|en, to shoot 

(btciben, to write 

dbrcien, to cry 

(bretten, to step 

(binben, to flay 

^XOcmUf to be silent 

(btt>euen/ to swell 

(btoimmen; to swim 

(bworcn, to swear 

cbtotnbcn, to vanish 

(btomgen, to swing 

e^n, to see 

l^en, to sit 

faufctt; to drink (of ani 

mals) 
ftnncn, to meditate 

teben, to seethe 

pcien, to spit 

pUiicn, to split 

pinnen, to spin 

ixtd)cn, to speak 

pnefieit, to germinate 

pringcn, to jump 

leben, to stand 
fUtgeU/ to ascend 
ficcben, to sting 
fleblen, to steal 
flerben, to die 
fbfien; to push 
fketcben, to stroke 
fbretten, to contend 
^tnfeit; to stink 
ftngeit; to sing 
finfcn, to sink 
tbun, to do 
tragctt, to carry 
tretcn, to tread 
tretben, to driva 
trcjfcn, to hit 



Idwiim 


I'aat Part. 


ttltgcn, hugen, lo 


Bftnmfm 


do. 


tcMen, to drink 


BTOOI^W 


do. 


IDaf4<n, to waBh 


sroonbt 


do. 


nenben, to tara 


acreoim, gneSnne 


Imp, Iiid. andSobj. 


gnoinnen, to win 


BOoa^lcn 


Past Fart. 


Wfl^ttn, to grow 


flcroefw 


do. 


f(in, to ba 


flrtji*cn 


do. 


nci*t«,lo yield 

lMi((n, to show 


ifloiricn 


do. 


fl.B»flm 


do. 


miegen, to weigh 


gtnennm 


do. 


gewrnnen, to win 


ptioortcn 


do. 


BJerficn, to eaUat 


gflwrtm 


do. 


Wetben, to become 


gnoorfnt 


do. 


iwftn, to throw 




do. 


UitTtn, to entangle 




do. 


Winben, to wind 


gtwuft 


do. 


MiHen, to know 


aejicftw 


do. 


(d^en, Ifl acooBe, 


gcjpgen 


do. 


Jie^en, to draw 




do. 


junngen, to oompa" 


ImperatiTfl 


fl.6tn, togiv. 


i'rM.lDd.2dand3dponi." do. 


fliltft, gut 


do. 


gellen, to he vorth 


m 


Imp. lud. nnd Subj. 


ge^en, to go 


do. 


glei^en, to reaemhto 


do. 


flbitcn, to glide 


fllomm, aloBUoc 


do. 


glimmen, to glimmei 


gobr, gp^K 


do. 


gifcren, to ferment 


gi>lt, flolte 


do. 


fltlttit, to be worth 


grd^li, gr56t 


do. 


giegcn, to pocr 


Prea.Ind2d«nd8dp<^« 


.. groben, to dig 


gtiif, griiJE 


Imp. Ind. and Snbj. 


awifen, to Beiio 


nrub, grube 


do. 


gtaben, to dig 


Ijflif, ^iilfe 


do. 


gdfm, to help 
. Jattoi, to hold 
gaben, to have 
do. 




pMUnd,2d and Sd pent 

do. 
Imp Tad. and S>ihj. 


biib, glc&c 


do. 


fiautn, to hew 


fikU, ikUe 


do. 


ballcn, to hold 


6iW, fiilft 


do. 


betgen, to be eallod 


Prea.lDd.2d«nd3dpra 


. Wfcn, to help 


^ilf' 




do. 


m, ijiit 


Imp. led. and Snbj. 


bcbnt, to lift 


iS 


IiaperatiY« 


(fjen, to eat 


■jTcft, ifit 


Prea.Ind.2dand3dper» 
Imp. Ind. and Sub], 


do. 


oni, lime 


femmen, to coma 


ann, tannfl 


PreB.Ind.lBt and 2d pera [bnnm.'to be able 


fannlt, Knnte 


Imp, Ind. and Subj. 


Itnnen, to tnow 


n«ng,n4nfl« 


do. 


flingen, to sound 


flomm, Homme 


do. 


flimmm, to olimb 


fntjf, fnife 
Ummflr tcmii't 


do. 


tneifcn, to pinoh 


PreB.Iad.2dand3dperl 


tcmmen, to eom« 



75 



fottttiCj fonnte 

kg, I5ac 
lad, Idfe 



(affefl, im 
lauf jl, Iduf^ 
Ucf, Uefc 

ItClS 

icfcfl.rfefl 
tef; ltc{ic 
ritt^ Uttc 
tcg^ logc 

luh, lub 
maa, magfi 
maf , maf e 
mteb; miebe 

mijrfefl, mifit 
mot^te; mo^U 
rm^, mu^t 
mufte, mugte 

nannte 
ntmm 
nimmfl, nimmt 

quiU 

quiUfl; quint 
quoK; quoUe 
rang; range 
ranit; ranne 
ranntc 
rat^fl, rdt:^ 
rieb; riebe 
rjcf, tiefc 
xictfi, xUi^c 
rig, riffe 
xitt, xittt 

xo6)f roc^c 

'anDtc 
ang, fdnge 
ant, fdnfe 
ann, fdnne 
ag/ fdgc 
duffi, jduft 

\^alt, f(^dlU 



Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pcrs. 

do. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Imperative 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
Pres. Ind. Ist and 2d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 
Imperative 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 1st and 2d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 
Imp. Ind. 
Imperative 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 
Imperative 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 
Imp. Ind. 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
Imp. Ind. 
Imp. Ind. Subj. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pcrs. 

Imp. Ind and Subj. 



fciincn, to be abl« 
frieci^eit, to creep 
licgcn, to lie (down) 
lc|en, to read 
laffen, to leave 
laufcn, to ruu 

do. 
lc[cu, to read 

do. 
laffcn, to let 
(eiben, to suffer 
lugcn, to lie (speak w) 

untruth) 
laben, to load 
mogcn; to like 
mejten, to measure 
meibett, to avoid 
meffen; to measure 

do. 
m5g(n; to like 
mu])en; to be obliged 

do. 
ne^men, to take 
ttenncn, to name 
ttc^men; to take 

do. 
Vfcifctt, to whistle • 
Vjlcgcn (^atif k.), ta 

consult 
)pxci]cn, to praidc 
qucUcn, to spring 
do. 
do. 
ringen; to wrestle 
rinncn, to flow 
reitncn, to run 
ratl)cn, to advise 
rcibcn, to rub 
rufctt; to call 
ratl^en, to advise 
reigen, to snatch 
reitcn,to ride (on hotM 

back) 
xit(i}cn, to smell 
fcl^cn, to see 
jenbcn; to send 
ftnaen; to sing 
finfen, to sink 
gnnen, to meditate 
{t^en; to sit 
)aufen; to drink (of 

animals) 
{(^^cttcn, to 3C0ld 



WA, f*Lebc 


[mp. lod. ana 


Subj. 


idjuben, to part 


tocn, JtljiciK 


do. 




mtmn, to Mem 


KillfiVfcDilt 


Fks. led. 2d uid 3d pen. f^dtcn, to scold 


mWX IdjlSft 


do. 




(Slaf«., to sleep 


[(^Ungl imnQt 


do. 




ilaatn, to best 


Imp. lod. and Sulij. 


djlinam, to dsTou; 
^Ilid^n, to sDCalc 




do. 




do. 






■JiiflS 


do. 




^Iciftii, to whet 


do. 




Altiem, to split 
tlicgen, to etnt 


m,wm 


do. 




*iu3, «[uat 


do. 




SlSSXIo'Tit 


(bmilj 






(Ijmiljell, Mmiljt 


Pre..Ind.2dMid3dpers. 


'^ ' 'do. 


d.miff,ic*mifi« 


Imp. lad. and 


Sobj. 


i}mei$tn, to throw 


dinidj, Mmelit 


do. 




*mcIjM,tomelt 


cliiiitt, fd)ni«( 


do. 




SiKibcn, to out 


rijiiDi, |t^c6( 


do. 




(fenauBtn, to snort 


(l«b, fdjebe 


do. 




4ic6ni, to posh 


diLill, fi^olte 


do. 




Sdtcn, to seold 




do. 






do. 




ditefen, to shoot 




do. 




ijxtiUn, to write 


^ric, ((^ti« 


do. 




Sreitn, to ety 




do. 




Jwiten, to slep 


JumS? . 


do. 

do. 




^mmm, to swim 


arroani, f(^»ant( 


do. 




i$i«igtn, to 1)e silent 
4twlUn, to sweU 




do. 




Pp[!a.Ind. 2daDdSdpcn. 








do. 


Son, f<5»61[c 


Imp. Ind. .nd 


Bubj. 


do. 


^wotJ frijwtre 


do. 




4»arcn, to fester 


do. 






do. 






do. 






ilft 


ImperatiTe 






fic^fl, (ifllt 


Prea.Iad.2diind8dpcrj. 


do. 


[«ii,te 


Imp. lud. end Snbj. 


oufcn, to drink (orani. 

mals) 
flugtn, to suck 


as. fast 


do. 




Dtt, tottC 


do. 




icttn, toseetbe 


iC 


do 




pinntti, to spin 


do 




peien, to epit 




do. 




pldfiMftospHt 


do. 




pTtdjtn, to speak 


ssriS' 


do. 
Pre..Ind.2dBnd8dt*r8. 


Viti^, to >pesk 


SfniJ. 


ImperatiTB 




do. 


Imp. Ird. and 


Subj. 


pritgtn, to Rerminnto 


K'4^ 


do. 
do. 




le&cn, to sflng 
t(*n, to stiok 


pafS.fiaijt. 


do. 




bijUn, 'o steal 



flanb, jldnte 
j^anf, fidnfc 
ftvirb, jiurbc 

m 
ma, mt 

fticg, tlicgc 

fliibfl, jiiibl 
jh'rb 

jlrltt, flrittc 
flarb, fturbe 
t^at, tfjatc 
tl)u (c) 
KnMl/ tljut 
traf, trdfc 
tragft, trdgt 
tranf, trdnfc 
trat, trdte 
tricb, tricbc 
triff 

m\\ trifft 
trittj!^ tritt 
tritt 

trog, trogc 
triiq, truae . 
ccrbarb, »crburbe 
t»crbirb 

verbivbf!/ Jjerbirbt 
jjcrboTbctt 

UCTbTOffcn 

vcrbrog, Jjctbrofic 
ocrbarb^ ijcrburic 
tjcrgag, t)crgdgc 
tocrgcffett 
ttcrgiffcft, Jjcrgift 

»cr$o()rcn 
Dcrloren 
ucrlor, Jjcrtorc 
hjdd^(c|!, todcij^ji 
tt)anb, ti)dnbe 
toattbte 
tear, wdre 
teatb 
ttjarb 
loarfy tourfe 

tvclg/ ttci§ 



8 



Imp. Ind. and Siibj. 
do. 
do. 
Imperative 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pci-s. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Imperative 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imperative 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
Imperative 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers 
Imp. Iftd. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 
Imperative 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pers. 

do. 
Imperative - 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 
Imperative 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Past Part. 

" do. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 
Past Part. 

Pres. Ind. '2d and 3d pers. 
Imperative 
Past Part. 

do. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Imp. Ind. 

Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Imp. Ind. 

do. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Pros. Ind. 1st and 2d pers. 



flcljcn, to stand 
ftinhrif to stink 
|lcrbcn> to die 
ficc^cn, to sting 

do. 
ficigcrt, to ascend 
ilct)icti, to steal 

do. 
flo^cTt; to push 
ftcrben, to die 

do. 
flct)lcn, to steal 
flogcn, to push 
(hcici^cn, to stroke 
flrcitcrt; to contena 
ficrbcn, to die 
t^un, to do 

do. 

do. 
treffcn, to hit 
tragen, to cany 
trinfcit, to drink 
trctcti, to tread 
trcibcn, to drive 
trcffcn, to hit 

do. 
trctcH; to tread 

do. 
trugcTt, to deceive 
tragcn, to carry 
»erbcrbcn, to spoil 

do. 

do. 

do. 
^crbriegctt; to vex 

do. 
»cTbcrbcn, to spoil 
^crgcffcn, to forget 

do. 

do. 

do. 
^ex^cXjUn, to conceal 
t)crlicvcn, to lose 

do. 
toad^fcii; to grow 
toinben, to wind 
tocnbcrt/ to turn 
fcin, to be 
tocrbcTi, to enlist 
teetbcn, to becomo 
tocrfcn, to throw 
teaf^beU; to wasli 
teiffctt, to know 



78 

m6^, \oi6}c Imp. Ind. and Subj )a)ti6)tn, to yield 

totc«/ Xoit^e do. tocifcn, to snow 

XoiiL totUfi . PreB. Ind. Ist and 2d pers. tocUen, to be willing 

Xoixift, toixht Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pers. tocthttt, to enlist 

toixh Imperatiye do. 

Vuirf do. toerfcit/ to throw 

toirffl, toirft Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. do. 

toixfi, n>irb do. tocrbcti; to becomt 

YooQf toogc Imp. Ind. and Subj. toiegcn, to weigh 

XavLOjS, h)u(^)fc do. toad^fen, to grow 

tvarb, tourbe do. toerben, to enlist 

n)urbe, tourbe do. ivcrbcn, to becomt 

YovL\(i), toufc^e do. toaft^cti, to wash 

t\)u§tc, toiigtc do. triffcTi/ to know 

lief}, gtcl^e do. ici()cn; to accuse 

i'^S/ J^gc do. gte^cn, to draw 

|wang, ikoAn^ iti i^ingen, to oomp*! 



PRACTICAL PART. 



ALPHABETICAL LIST 



OF ALL THOSE VTORDS WHICH AEE MET WITH IN THE 15C EXERCIBia 
OP THE FIEST COURSE, AND WITH WHICH THE PUPIT^ 13 SUPPOSED 
TO BE QUITE FAMILIAR. 



1. SUBSTANTIVES 



$(bcnb 
§(malte 

9lufgabc 
9(ugcnbli(f 
S3anl> 
S3afc 
. SBaum 
SBcrcj 
JBcfud) 
Sicr 
SBime 
ffllatt 
S3lei 
Q3lcipift 

fflticf 

Srob 

©ruber 

Q3ruf|ct 

93uc^^ 

JDing 

JDnitc 

JDorf 

S5urfl 

JDu^cttb 

(Sifcn 

me 

(Sltcm 

(^milie 

©ngldnba 

Scbcr 

Sebcrmcffcr 

genftcr 



?^cucr 

Sinqcri^ut 

Slafdjc 

%im 

Srdulcm 

grcunb 

grcunbitt 

Sricbrid^ 

@abel 

©artctt 

©drtner 

@clb_ 

©cmufc 

©cfci^aft 

©cfdjici^tc 

©cfcHfc^aft 

(3c\ooi}i\i)dt 

®clb 

®utc 

^alsBinbc 

'Oanb 

•gatibct 

$anbfcJ)u^ 

•|au5 

«&cmrici6 

•^cmb 

'^crr 

•gunb • 

*ut 

Saf^r 



3talicttcr 

^affcc 

£alb 

^dfc 

^a|e 

^aufmann 

i^cHer 

^inb 

^irfc^c 
^laulcr 
^Icib 

jtcnigtn 

^crb 
5tncg 
^utjd^cr 

Men 
i?cl^rcr 
ii?eimTjanb 

2m 

S:6\t)c 

ii?ubtt)ig 

i^ouifc 

m 

SKabdjcn 
2)?agb 
^ai 
^laxm 



3Kc(fcr 

SWctad 

SKittag 

a)Jonb 

ajJonat 

9)Jorgcn 

©Gutter 

ajiu^c - 

9Zad)bar 
5Rad)barin 
dla6)xi^t 
Snabcl 

m^ 

JDbtl 

£)nfcl 

?l5aar 

^Japlcr 

^flaume 

*fcffcr 

•55funb 
3>ulver 

mti) 

fRe(i)t 

Slcgcnf^irm 

Oling 

^ad)e 

8d)tt)cflcr 
(Bdjuflcr 
(^(j^ncibcr 
(Bdjreincr 

ed)fcg 



82 



Sd^tnfcn 


©timmc 


ir^icr 


!Boiloano 


8^ulc 


©torf 


3^^urc 


J^i^alb 


B(i)nUx 


©tragc 


2:od;teT 


Saffcr 


Sc^ranf 


©trumpf 


Xud) 


liiJctter 


Scnf 


©tu^^l 


U^r_ 


mtin 


eilbcr 


©twnbc 


Unglucf 


smicn 


(Eo^n 


etucf 


Unrc(^t 


l^il^elm 


8onne 


©uppc 


©atcr 


ilBirien 


Sorgfalt 


Jag 


©cttct 


mo6^ 


'Svajicrgang 


2:antc 


©ergnugctt 


mixm 


v^picgcl 


Xa\(i)ir\tvL6: 


3a^n 


iTaubc 


iBiertcl 


3cit 


^m 


3:igcr 


aSogcl 

asoft 


3tmmet 


etcUc 


^W 


3ucfer 


eticfcl 


ir(}cil 


53otfc5ung 






2. ADJECTIVES. 




alt 


&art 


notl^ig 


trett 


angcnel^m 


^od^ 


nu^ltd^ 


t^curcr 


arm 


OfjCtt 


unartiq 


bef(!^€iben 


'i)uh\ii) 


rctd^ 


unbanfeor 


bofc 


iung 

fait i 


rein 


ttnglauHtdj^ 


bcutfc^ 


mii^ 


unglucfitd^ 


faul 


flcin 


d&ldfrig 


unn>ifTenb 


Pei^lfl 


franf 


c^lcd)t 


unn>o]^l 


gefillig 
gc c^icft 


lang 

(angfant 

Iciest 


c^nc« 
c^on 


\jortrefftid& 
toarm 


geunb 


c^toari 


toetg 


gliirftid) 


lei(!^tgMubi'g 


(^tocr 


ja^lrei*]^ 


go(bcn 


Itebcn^tcuriig 


tlbcrn 


gufriebcn 


grog 


mube 


tarf 




gut 


ncu 


traurig 






3. VERBS. 




abtcifen 


bclcibigctt 


crftnbcn 


gntfen 


abfc^tcibcn 


bcloljnctt 


crbalten 
manhtn 


^abcn 


a(^tcn 


bcmui^etti ft(^ 


l^ageln 


onfleibcn 


bcfu^cn 


cr^al^len 


l^cigen 


anfommcn 


bctrugcn i 


ergicl^ctt 


pungent 


antwortcn 


bitten 1 


erwartcn 


irrcn, fi(3J 


anjic^cn 


blcibcn i 


cffcn 


faufcn 


anjunbcn 


bitten 


alien 


fcnncn 


antocnbcn 


brauc^cn 


mbcn 


fommen 


ttrbcitcn 


btcdfecn 1 


Tcuen, pci^ 


fonnen 


aufntad)cn 


bringcn * 


Ticrcn 


lad)en 


mifjlc^cn 


banfctt ^ 


urci^tcn 


Ic^en 


ausgc^cn 


bcnfcn 


jebcn 


lei^en 


ausru^cn 


bonncnt 


icl)cn 


Icfcn 


bcfcl^lcn 


burftcn ( 


^cl)6vcn 


Iteben 


bcjinbcTt, pd) 


cmpfcl'lcn ( 


!^caMnnin 


lobcn 


bebaltcu 


cntbccTcn i 


jiaubcu 


(ugen 



83 



ma^cn 

mitt^cUcn 

mujfcn 

nc^mcn 

)>flangctt 

ratten 
rcgnctt 
fcigctt 

!d)anten, ftc^ 
cl^ta^cn 
ic^nciben 
[c^itcien 



fc^rciBcn 

icin 

i^cn 

pagtcren 

piclcn 

pcnctt 

jhafctt 

tabcltt 

tan^ctt 

t^etlcn 

tcbtctt 



trinfctt 
untcrl^altcti, fic^ 

»«beffcm 

Dcrbictcn 

»crfaufctt 

»crlicrcn 

»ctfprec^cn 

toarten 

toai}kn 

tt>cmctt 
tocrbcn 



iwicbcrfe^en 

tDifJctt 

tooUen 

tDunbcni, fic^f 
t\)un{(l;cn 
gciacn 

gcrrcifctt 

gumad^cn 

gurucfgcbctt 

gurucnommctt 

gurudfft^icfcn 

gtoeifeln 



4. ' DETERMINATIViSi ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNa 



bcr^ hie, ba« 
bicjcT; icttcr 
mcin, bcitt, fcm, k. 
bcintge, metntgcy k. 
bcrjcnigc, bicjcnigc, k. 
ic^; bu, cr 
t()n, fie, c3 



ntit; intci^, bir, bid) 
und, eud^, il^uen 
toct, \D(a 

tocld^cT; toddle, tt)cld;c3 
matt; nicmattb 
fcttt, ni^ti 
ietnatib; tnel)re 



onbcte, atle 
citt, cittgtg 
^toci, hxcif K. 
crjlc, gtocitc, K* 
gattg; l^olb 



abet, jotibcttt 

als, fur 

aufi aud; an 

Ui, bis 

cbctt, focbctt 

ba, ba»ott, batttit; K. 

burd^, bajutdfl 

el^etttoCs 

gefictm; l^cutc 

oft, intrttcr 

|cltcti,frat 

frul^; ftubcr 

gent; Qtm^ 



6. PARTICLES, 
lefdnigfl, lattge 

)\CX, bOTt 

icrab, l^crcitt, jc. 
l)itiab, j^ittaus, k. 
itt^ bariti, tooriit 
ntit; bamtt; k. 
Ja, neitt 

ob, obct; nut 
obne; ttad^ 
fcbr, fo fcbr 
fc^ott^ fett 



uitb, utttcr 
^te(, gu t>id 
ta)iet)tel/ fot^iel 
tocnig, tocttigcr 
Vott; »or 

tote, toarunt/ toetl 
n)o, tooi^itt, n)o(;ec 
tt)o»oti; ttJoniit 
ttjoran, toogu, jc* 
toattn, toeitn 
}n, gufommta 



EXERCISES. 



1. 

3Dle fRofc, th*e roBc , bcT ^naBc, the boy ; bjc (Srogmuttcr, the gitiitd- 
Qi other ; bie 9la(!^t; the night ; torig, last ; bcptcn, to possess. 

©ic 9?ofc ift einc fc^onc ©fume, ^'ol^amt ift cinfaulci 
^nabc. gouife ift cin ficigtges 3Kdbd)en. Unfcrc ®ro§mut* 
ter ift cine aftc grau. ©er §unb ift ein niitjltd^c^ St^ier, 
!I)iefcr armc SJtann ift fel^r franf. >Dic Dorigc ^aS)t wax 
fel)r fait, ^cinricf) ift niein alter grcunb. S^ercfe ift mcinc 
lilngfte ©c^mcftcr. £)er Oraf l^at eincn blinbcn ©ol^n unb 
cine btinbc STodjtcr. 3f)^ SSlai)hax bcfifet cin fc|one§ §au3 
unb cincn gro^cn ®artcn. 

2. 

2)cr S3cbicntc, the man-servant ; bet ©crud^, the smell ; b(c ©^Ta(l>c, 
the language ; cng((((I;, English ; frangojlfd), French ; klDOl^tlCtt; to 
inhabit ; Icnictl, to learn ; toicbcrfinbcn, to find again. 

You have a bad pen. Henry has a good father and 
a good mother. We have a faithful (man-) servant. 
Our neighbor inhabits a very small house. This flower 
has an agreeable smell. We learn the German lan- 
guage. My son has read a French book. My uncle 
has received an English letter. My sister has lost her 
black cat. Louis has found again his little dog. The 
(maid-) servant has made a good fire. 

3. 

5?eitt; no, none, not any, not a. 

SDlein 33rubcr trinft fein ®icr unb feinen SBein. SBir 
fffcn I)eute feine ©uppc unb fein ijfeifd^. §aben tow kin 
83rob unb leinen ^ndtx? Qd) cffe !ein fdjttJarjeS 53rob. 
Diefcr |)crr ift fein granjofe. ©icfe $Dame ift feine Sng* 
Icinberin. 3JJein Dnfcf I)at feine ^inber. Qd) ijobt feine 
Vnft fpajiercn ju gctjcn. Qd) I)abe fein ®elb bei mir. SKcin 



85 

©ruber l^at m6) fcincn ^Pfennig. 3)2cutc ©ol^nc l^aben Iciut 
STaubcn ntel^r, ^arl l^at feincn greunb mct|r. SBir tcfcn 
teinc bcutfcfien SS&i)tv mel^r. 3'^ tin fern ^inb mcl^r. 3'^ 
fprcdjc fein ifccutfd^. 

4. 

^aS SBcif, the work. 

I have no pen and ink. My cousin has no gloves. 
The birds have no teeth. This boy eats no fruit This 
woman drinks no beer. This gentleman does not speak 
English. What are you drinking? We* drink good 
beer and good wine. I have no more ink and paper 
This young girl has fine teeth. This poor mother has 
no more children. This man is not a shoemaker 
My son reads no more English works. 

5. 

T)ie Sdox\t, the purse, the exchange ; bic (B^ublabC; the d-awer; hoS 
?anb; the country ; f^cnfcit; to give (as a present). 

9Bo ift bein Sruber? S^ glaube, ba§ cr im ®arten ober 
in bcr S!Ud)c ift. ©iitb ®ie t)eutc in ber©d^ulc gett)e[en? 
3Weine ©d^mefter ift feit brei Slagcn auf bem 8anbc ; fie be* 
finbet fi^ nid^t n)ot)t. SSo^in gef|cn ©ie iti^t? S^ gel^e 
mit nteinem Sruber in bie Sirdie, unb t)on ba toerben toir gur 
Sorfe gc:^en. Slragen ®ie biefen Srief auf bie ^oft, el^c ©ie 
in^ Zijtakv gc|en. SBol^in l^aben ©ie mein gebermeffer 
ge(egt? S^ ^oit e« in bie ©d^ubtabe gelegt. 2Bo:^er lommen 
biefe S'naben? Qi) glaubc, fie lommen an^ bem SBatbe. 
SBenn Saxl au6 ber ©5)ute lommt, fo fd^iden ©ie i:^n ju mir. 
ic!^ tDiIt i^m ein fdE|5ne6 SudEi fdEienfen. 

6. 

JDcT ^tdUf the stable ; bet SQali, the ball ; ba5 jtonjcrt; the conocrt 
ba« ©(!f)auf^)icl, the play ; has SBirt]^5l^au5, the inn, the tavern ; baf 
ScUertu(§, the napkin ; ba5 2!ij^tuc^, the table-cloth ; bcr Sflcjfe/ th 
nephew ; gc^^cti; to go, to walk. 

"Where have you been, my (ihildren? We have beea 
at school and at church. Is the coachman in the sta 
bie? Is the (maid-) servant in the cellar? My mothex 
has been at the market, and my father at the post- 
oflSce. We shall go to the ball this evening. My bro- 
thers will go to the concert or to the play. My cousins 

8* 



86 

have been in the country these two months.* This 
man goes every day to the tavern. Where do you come 
from at present? We come from a walk. My aunt 
comes from church, and my uncle comes from the 
exchange. Your nephew comes out of the garden. 
Put these napkins into the drawer and this table-cloth 
uito the cup-board. Do not go out of the room. 

7. 

Jjct %ki^f application, assiduity ; bic S3ef(^c{bcn^eit; modesty ; hit 
fienntnig, knowledge; bet SScmaiibtc, the relation; bet SQaacx, the 
peasant ; bet ^ftlaft, the palace ; tod ®nt, the estate ; baS £anb^ the 
land ; ^radjtl'g, magnificent ; ^crrli^, splendid ; arbcitfam, industnouo. 

§aben ©ic SScrgnitgcn auf bcm Canbc ge^abt? ^abcn 
©ic SSerttjanbtc in Sofn? S33ir l^abcn bort Irtne aSertoanbtcn, 
abcr t)ielc grcunbc. Wldn 3lad)bav Ijat @elb unb fitcbit, unb 
er ift bod) nicl)t gufrieben. ©iefcr fungc SKann fjat tJielen 
SSerftanb unb. Dicle ^cruttnif[c ; cr ift fc^r bcfdEieibcn. Qi) 
dabc UnglUcf gc^bt; ic^ l^abc fcl)tcdf)tc ©cfd^aftc gcmac^t* 
3^re Sinber ^abcn gfeig unb ^Bcfd^eibcnl^cit ; fie iperbcn Don 
^ebcrmann gcfiebt unb gelobt. $Kein Difdm befitjt gro^c 
©liter, ^prdd^tige ^ala^it unb I)errlic^e ©cirten. Qn unferm 
Canbe gibt e6 grope ©tSbte, fc^one !I)5rfer, rcid^e SaufJeutc, 
arbeitfamc 4Bauern unb Dortreffticlien ©cin. 

8. 

!Da5 ®lurf, (good) luck, happiness ; bcr SScrbruf ; vexation, trouble , 
muntcr, gay; t^erfolgett; to persecute; bci, with, at the house of; bad 
ttnglucf; bad luck ; tS ifl m6gti<!^, it may be. 

You have been playing to-day; have you had good 
iuck? We have had bad luck; we have lost every- 
thing. If we had money, we should also have friends. 
If you were in (bad) trouble, you would not be so gay, 
Wc should have had pleasure, if you had been with 
us. It may be that you have knowledge, but you are 
not modest. If this man had had good luck, he would 
not be so poor. It is sad to have enemies, who perse- 
cute us. 

9. 

£)a« ^olif the wood ; »on •&olg, ^oljem, of wood, wooden ; bcuS ®clb, 
the gold ; ijon ®o(b; golbcn, of gold, golden ; bcr OtiJ, the handle i 
bit f&xuctt, the bridge ; bie ixfip^i, the staircase ; bet <^toff; the stuff: 

* See ^ 82. 



87 

bie <Selbe; silk ; bie ® aum^voUc; cotton ; bte Seintoanb, linen ; hai i^cbcr^ 
leather ; bet ©tcin, the stone ; ber SKarmor, the marble ; haS ©IfcnBein^ 
ivory ; bie 3citung/ the newspaper ; bic 25ofc, the box ; bet ©efonbtc. 
the ambassador ; bet ^aifet; the emperor ; S^lcfletl, Silesia ; JDcfhcid^; 
Austria ; tttffifc^, Russian ; ^otttoafjicrif to preserve. 

^tinxxd) f)at fcinc golbcnc Ul^r l)crtorcn. Souifc l^at i^rcn 
fitbcrncn Soffct gcrbrod^cru SDic feibcncn ©toffc finb t:^curer 
ate bic baumnjottcncn. SDicfc^ 2Bcffcr f)at cincn ]^5tjerncn 
©riff. aSBir l^aben cine fteincrnc 53rticfe unb cine ntarmornc 
Streppc gefcl^cn. Ocbcn ©ic mir uieinc tcincncn ©trilm^pfe 
mib mcinc tebernen ©i^ul^e* 5Dcr Zaiat t)a:m\)xt \xi) am 
beftcn in eincr bteicrncn !I)ofe. ©aben ©ic bic flcftrige ^ci^^ 
tung gclcfcn ? !Die l^cutige ift nod) mi)t angef ommcn. SKeinc 
©(^iDcfter l^at einen clfcubeincnten gingcrfut ajicin SSatcr 
f)at brcigig Stten fd^Icfifd^e geinwanb gefauft. 5Der ofterrcid^* 
ifd^e Saifer njirb Don feincm SSotfc geliebt. ©er ruffifcl}c 
(>3cfanbtc ift abgcrcift. 

10. 

^ic SBoIlc, wool ; bet Saal, the saloon, hall ; bic Silbfautc, the statue ; 
bic ^ctkf the chain ; bie ^anf, the bench, the bank ; bcr £ncpf/ the 
button ; baS ©tudf; the piece ; baS SQBcrfgCUg; the tool ; Spanfcn, Spain ; 
tttdnjcnb, bright, splendid ; flolj, proud ; baucrl^aft, durable, solid ; 
poUanbtjd^, Dutch ; \^mudtn, to adorn ; gefadcn, to please ; )?0T}tc](|en; 
to prefer ; motgcti/ to-morrow. 

I do not like (the) woolen stockings ; I prefer cotton 
(ones). This hall is adorned with marble statues. Mv 
uncle has given me a gold chain. I am tired; I will 
rest a little on this stone bench. Do you prefer silk 
or metal buttons? Iron tools are more solid than 
wooden (ones). Our servant has lost two silver spoons. 
I like to-day's play better than yesterday's. (To-day's 
play pleases me more than yesterday's.) To-morrow's 
ball will be very splendid. We like the French wines 
and the Dutch cheese. The Spanish ambassador is 
prouder than the English. 

11. 

fQcx, who ; toci6)cXf wh6, which ; bic*S3ricftaf(!^e, the pocket-book. 

aScr ift biefer §err? SBcr ift bicfc ©ante? SBer I)at 
3l)ncn bicfcn SRing gcgebcn? S33cm l^abcn ®ic Qf}vm 9?cs 
gcnfrfiirm gclict)cn? 9Son totm fjabtn ©ic bicfc I^Ubfd)c ^Bricf^ 
tafciic crl^altcn? 2Bcn fucficn ©ic? jS^v totn ift bicfc fc^oiic 
U^r? fficffcn Sinb ift !ranf ? SBcffcnSuc^ ift bic6? 2Scl» 



88 

t)tx\)on biefen ©todcii ift bcr S'^rigc? SBctc^c don blcfeb 
gcbcrn {ft bie beftc? SBctd^cS \)on biefen tinbern ift S^i 
3Jeffe? 2Son tod(i)tm biefcr Dfftjicrc ^abcnSie ba^ $fcrb 
ijefauft? 2Ba« ^aben ©ic bafiir bego^tt? aSouon f priest 3I)i 
©ruber? Soran benlen ®ie? SBomit l^aben ®ie biefen 
gcmadit? SBoburd) ift ber 2JJann fo ungUidndi gciDorben? 



12. 

'Die SBcmunft; reason ; ba3 ©cfcci^t, the battle ; bcr 3et^tten(eT)TeC| 
the drawing-master ; cx^af)ttn, to hear ; \>enuunb€n, to wound ; ubcr« 
HcbcTt, to deliver ; fommcti burc3(>, to pass by ; eS ijl bic SHebc, they are 
talking. 

Who is that man? Who are these ladies? Of whom 
do you speak ? To whom do you write ? Of what are 
you talking? Who has done that? To whom have you 
given my cane? For whom do you work? What do 
you seeK? What did he answer you? What have 
you taken? What is man without reason? Where is 
Louisa? Does she not know that the drawing-master 
will come? What would he say, if she were not herel 
Who has been in my room? To whom have you told it ? 
From whom have you heard it? By which towns have 
you passed? In which battle has your brother been 
wounded? Which of your brothers is arrived? With 
which of these gentlemen have you been in Paris ? To 
which of these servants have you delivered the letter ? 

13. 

2)cr or ttjclc^ct, who ; bcffeu, bcren, whose ; bic JTa^fctfcit, valoi, 
bravery ; bcr fBcxtl), the value ; bic ^Hpi^c, the point ; bcr ©bcljicin, the 
precious-stone ; bcr SBcinl^dnblcr, the wine-merchant ; bcr (Eci^tcicgcts 
fo^tt, the son-in-law ; brcit, broad, wide ; gcraumig, spacious ; rcttcn^ 
to save ; ru^mctt, to boast ; jlerbcn, to die ; an»ertraucn, to confide ; 
|ubringett| to spend ; abhxc(i)C\\, to break down ; ba unten, down there. 

§ier ift bcr junge 2JJann, bcr ba^ i!inb unfer^ 9Zad)bar« 
Ijcrcttet I)at. ©a^ ^axi^, mi6)t^ ©ie ba unten fel^en, gc^orl 
meiner Stantc. !Dte 3^^^^^ toddjc x6) bettjo^ne, finb fe^r 
(jeraumig, Scnncn ®ie bie ©ante, Don ber toir fprerf|cn? 
iSJo ift ber armc Stiabc, bem ©ic ba6 53rob flcgeben ^aben ? 
t)er iSebiente, bcm ic^ meinc Sriefe anuertraut l^attc, ift nic^t 
iurlldgefontmen^ |)aben ©ic ben ©otbaten gefe^en. beffen 
aWntter geftorben i^? ©er innge Dffigier, beffen SCapferfeU 
man fo fe^r xnljmt, ift bcr ©d^toicgerfolin metne^ 5Rad^barft 



89 

■ 

Dcr $BciuI)clnbIcr, bcu ©ic bci mir gcfcl^cn l^aben, l^at mh 
5tp5lf g(afrf|en Sorbcaujc gcfdfjicft !Dic 4Banber, bie @ic mir 
Oefd^icft Ijahtn, finb gu brcit. !Dic STagc, njefcfic td^ mit Q\)mn 
3ugcbrad}t l^abc, finb bie angcne^mftcn meinc^ Seben6 gctDcfcn. 
S)a ift bcr S3aum, untcr bem \mv fo oft au^gcrul)t l^abcn. 
3)a^ finb Sbelftcine, bercn SBertl^ id^ nidfjt leune. ^icr ift 
ba6 aKcffer, beffen ©pifec ^axl abgebrocI)cit i)at JDa^ finb 
bie $errcn, bcnen wiv bie 5Wact)rid^t mitgettjettt Ijabcn. 

14. 

S)ie ^ti^tiofcit, facility, ease ; bie SHed^tlid^fcit; honesty. 

There is the little boy who writes so well. This is 
a young lady who speaks with much facility. I do not 
like (the) children who speak too much. This is the 
physician that I have seen, the lady whom you know. 
These are the books which you look for. Where is the 
letter of which you speak? This is a toan whose 
honesty I know. This is not the merchant of whom we 
have bought our ribbons. Tell me, to whom you have 
given my cane. Do you know to whom this beautiful 
garden belongs? I do not know of which garden you 
speak. Are these the children whose father is dead ? 

15. 

* 

3)a5 XoclS, that which, what; bcr Summer, grief; bic ©cfunb^cit; 
health; begcancn, to happen; tjerlangcn, to ask, demand; ^orcn^ to 
hear ; bcgteifcn, to conceive, to understand ; l>crmetbcn« to avoid ; feBt 
Uib t^vm, to give great paia. 

®agen (£ie mir, luaS O^nen am beften gcfallt. Srgal)Ien 
©ie mir, njuS er Qijxxtn gefagt l^at. Q6) tt)ei| nid^t, tt^a^ 
Sie njollen. SQSiffen @ie, toa^ 3^m begegnet ift? @eben 
©ie mir, nja^ ©ie mir t)erfprod^cn l^aben. ©agen ©ie un^, 
lua6 ®ic baDon benfen. ©lauben ©ie nid^t Sitter, toad er 
fagt. Gr ijat mir feinen S'ummer nidEit anDertrauen tooUtix, 
lua^ mir fe^r teib tt)ut. §ier ift, n)a6 ©ie Dertangen. lflt\)» 
men ©ie, luae ©ic ttjotten. Sr fprid^t t)on SlHem, toa« er 
()ort. ©a^ ift e^, n)oriiber ic^ mid) freue. ©a^ ift e^ nid^t, 
moran id^ benfc. §aben ©ie gel^ort, roa^ er gefagt l^at? 
©egreifen ©ie, loa^ er bamit fagen toxUl 9Jermeiben ©ie 
immer ba«, tt)a« ber ©cfunbfieit fd)abli^ ift. ©))red)en ©If 
nie uon bem, toa^ ©ie ni^t uerftel^en. 



i 



90 
16. 

55ctr«bt ubcr, grieved at ; fid^ Bcflcigcn ubcr, to complain of. 

I have understood what you have told me. I shall 
ive you what I have promised you. Do you know what 
le wants (will) ? Has he told you what has happened 
to him? We do not speak of everything that we hear. 
We do not always say what we think. That is all 
^hich I can tell you. Do you know of what I think, 
of what I speak? This it is, about which we rejoice. 
This it is, at which I am grieved and of which I com- 
plain. That which is beautiful is not always useful. 

17. 

®a\\lf quite, aJ.l, whole ; 5lflc«, eyc^thing ; all, atlc, all ; bic 2JJ6Bcl, 
the furniture ; bet 2Bo()ltl)atcr, the benefactor ; bcr 5(mrefcnbc^ the 
person present; bet @cban!c, the Ibought, the idea; angclcgt, ar 
ranged ; ^6) lucnbcn, to apply ; at(c X9qc, every day. 

3(1) l)abe kire§ gefe^en. Slltc bicfe 2Wobet finb fc^r fd^oit. 
SlKe meinc ^iiibcr finb au^gegojrgen. ©er 901136 (Sartcn ift 
c\ut angetegt. 2Bir l^abcn bcu gangcn Stag unb bic ganjc 
'isia6)t gearbeitet. §crr 9?. ift bcr SBotjtl^fitcr allcr UnglUtf^ 
(id^cn. 9Bir l^abcn c« alien Shihefenbcn mitgctl^cKt. Mc 
itiiferc 3ScnT)anbtc finb abgcreift. 2lQe btcjicntgcn, njctd^c I)icr 
toarcn, ^abcn c6 gc^5rt» S^ ift bcrfctbc §crr, ben njir gcftcrn 
gcfel}en l^aben. S^ ift intmcr btcfelbe Slnttuort. (Sr fagt 
hnmer baffelbc. 3^ ^^tte ben namlic^en ©cbanlcn, id) tDotttc 
ba^ 9JamIt(^e tl^un. Ocbcn ®tc mtr Don bcmfctben Xvid)c, 
don bcr namtidEien 8ctnn)anb. 2Sir l^aSen c^ bcmfctben ^auf=» 
niann gcfdEiicft, bcrfclbcn gran c^ gcfagt Sr l^at fid) an bcit* 
felben 2lbt)o!atcn gcn^cnbct. Qd) \)abt t% fclbft gcl^Srt. 2Bir 
merben c^ 3'^ncn fctbft bringcn. ®agei» ^4C cS i^m fetbft. 

18. 

S)(c gamilie, the family ; |lctbli(!f>, mortal ; ubctfj^^tcmmt, inundated, 
overflowed. 

All is lost. The whole country is inundated. The 
whole family are (is) in the country. All m^n are mor- 
tal. All my friends are arrived. I see you every day. Wo 
have seen it ourselves. The king himself has spoken of 
it. It is the same man and the same woman. They aro 
the same children. We inhabit the same house. You are 



91 

always the same. I have bought of the same ink, of 
the same paper. I have given it to the same servant 
My sisters will come themselves. One must not always 
^peak of one's self. 

19. 

9lid)t fo, not so ; cbcn fu, \o, as, just as ; mct}x dS, more than ; tocnt* 
jcr aU, less than; bcr ^upfcrfli^, the engraving; bic fianbfartc, the 
nap ; bic ^cUijnnnQ, the reward ; bic ©cbutb; patience ; bcr Zi}aUx 
.he crown, dollar; crfrcut, delighted; ijcrbicucit; to deserve; au«gcbeii, 
io spend (money). 

©u bift 0r5ger, al^ xi) ; abcr bcin Srubcr tft nidjt fo qvo% 
aU id^. aWcin Dl^cim ift ebcn fo r^id), al« beta 2Sater. SBir 
[)abcn cbcn fo ijicic SUd^cr, ate ®ic ; abcr toiv ffobtn nid^t 
fo Dicic ilu:pfcrfttdE|c unb 8anb!artcn. SDictn ©o^n, bu bift fo 
Pcipig flcipcfcn, bag bu cine Sclol^nung ucrbicnft. Qd) l^abc 
nid^t fo uicl au^gcgcbcn, ate ®ic gtaubcn. Q6) bin barubcr 
cbcn fo crfrcut, ate ©ic. ^l^rc ®rf|tt)cftcr l^at cj^cn fo fdEiiJnc 
Stcibcr, ate bic mcinigc. SWcinc ©ol^nc arbcitcn nid^t fo t)xti, 
ate bic O^rigcn. §crr 9?. l^at mcl^r Sinbcr, ate toir ; ic^ 
g(aubc, cr ^at bcrcn mc^r ate ncun. gouifc l^at tocnigcr 
grcunbinncn, ate ^cnricttc. ©ir finb l^cutc ficigigcr gctocfcn, 
ate gcftcrn ; toir |abcn itod Slufgabcn mcl^r gcmac^t. Qi) 
f)abc Did (Scbutb, abcr ©ic ^abcn bcrcn nod() ntc^r. §cinric^ 
^at l^cutc ntc{|r ate jc^n ^ricfc abgcfd^ricbcn. ®ic lonncn 
i^m nic^t locuigcr ate gtpci SEl^alcr gcbcn. 

20. 

2)cT SIrbciter, the workman ; bcf(^dftigt, occupied, busy ; gcf^idft, 
chner ; jdjlafcn, to sleep. 

Is your brother as tall as I? He is not so tall as you. 
Has he as many books as I? He has not so many books 
as you. The young man has as beautiful engravings 
as you. I love him as much as you love him. You 
do not love me as much as I love you. Your cousin 
was so busy, that he did not see me. Your physician 
is more lucKy, but not so clever, as ours. This physician 
is very rich, he has more than thirty houses. This 
workman asks no less than six dollars. The child has 
slept more than two hours. Our gardener has many 
shildren, I believe that he has more than nine. "VVo 
have done to-day three exercises more 



92 

21. 

3c mc^r. . .bcfto mcl^r; the more. . .the more; \i Xocni^tx- . .btfV Uxnti 
|cr, the less... the less; tie Sreubc, the joj; bic 43cJar.WTir.g/ the 
treatment; ttac^jic^tlg, indulgent; ftrcng, strict, severe; toClltUTiftig, 
reasonable ; Icibcn, to suffer ; crlcibctt, to endure ; na6)hcnUn, to re- 
flect; gujicl^en, to incur; crmimtCTtt, to encourage; bcobai^tcn, to ob- 
serve ; anfc!^cn, to look at; fii) bctrubctt; to give up one's self to. . . 
'c(;(ctt, to fail ; ct»a3 ^obcn toibcr. . ., to have a grudge against ; nun 
DOW ; fcnjl; formerly. 

Q6) \m^ niijt, toa^ bir feljlen mag, licbc QvLlk ; jc ntc^r 
man l^ier lad)t, bcfto ntel^r njeinft bu ; jc me^r man bid^ cr* 
nmntert, bitfi bcr greube gu itberlaffcu, bcfto mc^r bctriibft bu 
bid). 9iun ift c§ cine Sicrtclftuubc, ba§ id^ bid^ beobad^tc, 
unb Je mc^r id^ bid^ anjc^c, bcfto tocnigcr begrcifc id^, toa« 
bi6) fo fc^r locincn mactjt. — 2ld^, licbcr Dnfcl, @ic toiffcn md)t 
3lUe«, h)a§ idf) ju Icibcn Ijabc. 3'cbcrmann l^at cttoa^ toibcr 
mid^, unb jc mcl^r ii) iibcr bie SScl^aubluug nadjbcnic, bic i^ 
crlcibc, bcfto n)cnigcr famt id) bcgrcifcn, toad fie mir gugegogcn 
Ijabcn mag* ®o glud (idj id) auf bcm 8anbc tear, fo unglu* 
lid) bin id) in bcr ^tabt @o nad^fidfjtig ®ie fonft loaren, fo 
ftrcng finb ©ie jcfet. — ©u bift nie gufricbcn, mcin ^inb ; ie 
mc^r bu :^aft, bcfto mcfir tjcrlangft bu. Qt toenigcr man 
mi:nfd)t, bcfto gufricbcncr ift man. Qt alter man ift, befto 
ucrnunftiger mug man fcin. 

22. 

Xcx aBunfd^, the wish ; gcijig, avaricious, stingy ; »crfd()»cnbcrif<% 
[)rodigal, extravagant ; {patjam, economical ; It^vcei^), instructive , 
jdjabti^, hurtful, noxious ; tocid), soft ; gclc^rt, learned. 

As happy as we^were in the country, so unhappy are 
we in the town. As diligent as this young man is, so 
idle is his brother. As instructive' as are good books, 
so hurtful are bad (ones). As extravagant as is Mn N., 
so avaricious is his uncle. The more money one has, 
the more friends one has. The more he drinks, the 
more he is thirsty. The softer (the) pens are, the 
worse they are. The less desires one has, the more 
happy one is. The more one begs him, the less he 
does it^ The less money he has, the more economical 
he is. The more learned we are, the more modest we 
ought to (must) be. 

23. 

Seber, every, every one ; cinigc, some ; ba5 5Utcr, the age •, Mr 



93 

5(IaniC, tlie plant; bcr ^if)kx, the fault; bafi fQi\{, the evil ; fofUn, t# 
cost ; cTfuHcn, to fulfil ; fic^cn Wihcn, to stop. 

3;ebe« 3l(ter t|at feiuc ^flid^ten. Qtbtv ^at feme ?ppi(^< 
erfiittt. 3^eber SSamn, jebc ^flanje, jcbe^ Xiyicv tft nu^Iicf> 
a)ian niui3 iebcn Stag gut antocnben. ©lefer Snabc bteibt 
bei jebem §aufc fte^cn* Qtbtv l^at feme g^^ter. Qi) ffaU 
Qchtm ein Sud^ gefcl)enft, Senuen ©ie eine l)ou bicfen 
©amen ? 3^^ I^nne einigc t)on biefcn ^erren, aber id) f ennc 
fcine Don biefen !Damen. Sf[en ®ie einige 4Bimcm ©a finb 
lijoue 2le))fcl'; gcben ©ie mir einige. ^'^ntanb l^at mir gefagt, 
bag ©ie morgen abreiften. fStan mug Don 5Kiemanb(em) 
Sofe^ rebcn. Qi) lawn e^ bir nidjt geben, bcnn id) l^abe eS 
3emanb(cm) Dcrfprodicn. Sliemanb mi^, bag ®ie |ier finb. 
®ir l^aben e§ S'iicmanbCcm) gefagt. Qd) I)abc fein^ Don 
ineincn Sild^ern Dertoren. Qi) I)abe ni^t^ gu tl^un. SBir 
f)abcn Don ntd}t§ gcfprod^cn. 

24. 

2)cr ©tanb, the station, the state ; bcT ?utj!, the prince ; bcr Unfer» 
tljan, the subject ; bcr (Stubcnt, the student ; baiS ©craufd^, the noise ; 
frj'rfjrcdfcn, to frighten, terrify ; clnmol, once, some day. 

Every station has its pleasures. Every noise terrifies 
him. I have told it to every boy and every girl. Every 
one must die some day. The prince speaks to every 
one of his subjects. Lend me some pens. We have 
seen some students. Some of our friends will come 
this evening. I shall take some of your books. Nobody 
knows it. I know nobody. I shall tell it to nobody. 
None of my friends will come. Do you know some of 
these ladies? I do not know any of them. I have 
spoken to none of the gentlemen. I speak of some 
one, whom you have not yet seen. I have lent my 
umbrella to somebody who will return it to me to- 
norrow. 

25. 

Set (Sine, the one; bcr Slnbcrc, the oUier; ©cibe, both; (inanbci, 
one another; mc^rcre, several; gc\\)i{l, certain; jcbcr bcr/ any one 
who; ttJcbcr.. nodj, neither., .nor; bcr 93ortT)urf, the reproach; bci 
9lb{d;icb, the leave ; bas ©cfc^, the law ; ba3 f&cin, the leg ; fcUcn, sel 
dom, rare ; gcborcn, born • trcnncn, to separate ; beneiben, to envy ; 
9ertl)elbicien« to defend ; angrctfciti to attack. 

(5r gibt bcm Sinen, toa^ er bent 3lnbern nimmt. 53eibe 
^abcn Unreefjt. Gr I)at ©eiben SSomitrfe gemart)t; abe< 



94: 

toeber ber Sine nod) bcr Slnbcrc l^at fie berbient. Q^ ffabt 
Don Sciben Slbfdjieb genommen. !IDie[er ©olbat f)at bcibc 
Seine Derloren. ©iefc beiben S3riiber tieben fid^ fc^r, fie 
flel^en nie ol^nc einanber an^. ®ie Bnnen fid^ nid^t t)on ctri* 
anber trenncn* @citn ©ie utir einen anbern ^ut unb anbcrc 
^anbfd^ul^e* Sencibet ni(^t bad @iM 3lnberer* ©^re^cn 
Sie mir t)on ettoad Slnberm* 0^^ ^^^^6 bariiber md)t^ ®c# 
toiffes. Sin 8en)iffer fierr unb eine getoiffe ©ante l^aben c^ 
mir erjal)tt. 3^ ^^^e ed bon SUJel^reren gel^firt @« tft 
felten, bag man mel^rere ijreunbe fjat Qd) tottrbc bit eine 
Seber tet^en, toenn id^ mel^rere ptte. Sir liaben ntel^rcre 
2^age in biefer ®tabt gugcbrad^t Q6) fage ed cinem -pfeben, 
bcr cd l)oren toiK. S33ir toerben un« gegen ^'eben Dertl^cibigen, 
bcr und angreifen toirb* ©ad Oefefe n)irb O^i^^i^ beftrafen, 
bcr ed nid^t beobad^tet 

26. 

!Die ?5cTfon; the person ; bic £angct»cilc, weariness, ennui ; tool^lt^a^ 
til]; charitable. 

* The thing is not yet certain, A certain boy has told 
me so (it me). I have given your book to a certain 
school-boy. My father knew nothing certain of it yet. 
Several of my friends know it I have received to- 
day several letters. I have heard it of several persons. 
Give me another shirt and other stockings. One says 
this, the other says that. Have you no other ink, no 
other pens? These two boys love one another; they 
are both diligent Men must love one another. These 
two friends think often of one another. Every one 
who is rich ought to be charitable. Whoever is in- 
dustrious has no ennui. 

27. 

JDic ©clcgcn^jcit, the opportunity ; gctrd()nt; accustomed ; bi^, thick, 
fdt; gic^en, to pour; (enu^H; to profit by, to make use of; ft(]^ (utf 
^aUen; to stay. 

Sd) gel)e morgen nad^ Sladjen. aJiein 2Satcr ift fdjon gc* 
ftcrn I}ingegangen. Q^ war nod^ nid^t ba. ©ie liaben 
nidjts babei gen)onnen. 0^ '^^^^^ ^^^ i>^^^ S^tige bort auf* 
fatten. SBir liaben bie 5Rad^t bort 3ugebrad^t S^ ^abe c« 
tl^m tjerfprod^en, unb id^ werbe baran benfen. SDie 5Dintc toax 
ttxoa^ gu bidt ; td^ l^abe cin mcnig SQBaffer bagu gegoffen. ^ii) 
bin nid)t baran gett)5]^nt SBoacn @ie fid) auf bicfe SSani 



95 

ki^cn ? S^, id) will mid) barauf fc^cn* 3ft Sf)V §crr SSutct 
im 3"iitner? 9?ein, cr ift ni^t bavin. ffiJa^ ijobtn @ic nc* 
ben Sijxt SSiumtn gcpflmijt? 0^ ^<i6« ©cmitfc l^lngcpflanst. 

©inb ®ic mit mcutcm ©ol^nc gufricbcn ? (Ja, id^ bin fc^r 
gufricbcn mit il^m^ §abcn ©ie utit bem gurftcn fiber mein 
Ungtfid gcfprod^en? Qti) l^abc nod^ nid^t mit il^m barUber gc* 
fprod^cn* ^abcn ©ic ©ricfc crl^attcn? 3^a, id^ l^abc tottd) 
txijalttn. SBottcn ©ic cin ®Ia« SBcin? 3^^ banic S^ncn, 
ic^ l^abc fd^on todd^cn getrunfcn. ^aben ©ic ®clb ? dltin, 
id) |abc !ein«. 2)a§ ift cine gutc ©clcgenl^eit, id^ luerbc fie 
bcnu^en. 

28. 

Have you some wine? I have some, I have none. 
Has your brother any ink? He has some, he has none. 
Hast thou any paper? I have some, I have not any. 
Have these gentlemen any horses? They have some, 
they have none. Has your aunt any sisters? She.has 
two. Has thy cousin been to the ball? She has not been 
there. Is your uncle gone into the country? He is gone 
there this morning. Will you think of my affair? I 
shall think of it. We shall gain much by it. The 
wine is too strong; pour a little water into it. How 
many faults have you made? I have made six. Have 
they spoken of the war? Yes, they have spoken of it 

29. 

S)cr JDicnfl, the service ; tcr Unbanf, ingratitude ; taS Scifpicl, the 
example; bie ^crlcumbunc}/ calumny, slander; baiS (Slenb; the misery ; 
toid^tig, important; Idc^crlic^, ridiculous; ad&tungSttJcrt]^; respectable; 
abgcfd^macft, absurd ; f^redlic^; frightful ; Bo«l^aft, malicious ; xc^tli6), 
honest ; ftd^ ht\d)\Dtxtn, to complain ; ttmn\cn, to do ; lafient, to back- 
bite, to slander ; ^tXQt^cn, to forget ; tei^tn, to pull, to snatch ; ^er« 
mut](|Ctt; to suppose, to presume ; ft(i^ uBetlaffett; to gire one's self up 
to ; cineit ©cfallcn finbcn; to take pleasure in ; ^itxtdi^, rather, pretty ; 
bisweilcn, sometimes. 

@ie befc^toeren fid^ iiber ben UnbanI ber aBenfd^en; ja, 
man beIoi)nt ii^totxkn fel^r fc^Iedjt bie toid^tigften ©ienfte, 
mib e^ gefd^iel^t gicmlid^ oft, bag biejenigen, bcnen man am 
nieiftcn ®ute^ ern)iefen l^at, bie Unbanlbarften finb. Qi)t 
DJadjbar 9?obcrt gum S3eif|jiet ift ber unbanfbarftc SlBenfd^ 
oott ber S5?cft. Qv finbet * cinen ® ef aKen baran, f einc SBol^f* 



96 

lister gu laftcrn- Gr §at mi<i) biefcr STagc Don ben ladjcrfiify 
ftcn ©ingen untcr^Itcn; cr f)at Don ben Qd^tung§tt)crt^eften 
^erfonen Sofe^ gefagt unb fid^ ben abgcfd)marftcftcn a3cr^ 
temnbungcn iiberlaffen* Sr Dergigt, bag totr i^n au^ beni 
fc^redli^ften gtenbe geriffen l^aben. ©ae betrubt mi^ mc^r, 
ai^ @ic glauben* ^err ^Robert \pxii)t anbcr^, als cr bcnft. 
gr ift ni^t fo bo§I)aft, ate ©te Dermutfjen. iCer red;ttid)e 
8J?ann \px\6)t nid^t anbcr«, ate er bcnft. 

80. 

2)a5 S5crBrc(^cn, tlie crime ; ba3 SSctf^rcdfjcn, the promise ; bet ^tq, 
the road; bet Umfianb^ the circumstance; hie ^aac, the ttituation; fut|, 
short; bcllimmt, positive; mctftoutbig/ remarkable; ftngen, to sing; 
»crbicncn, to desei-ve ; cntrcifcn, to snatch away ; bej(!()ulbigeti^ to ac 
case ; [id) cvinucnt, to remember ; gctool^nli^; usually, generally. 

My sister sings better than she plays. You are hap- 
pier than /ou deserve. The ladies speak generally 
more than they write. You have come sooner than I 
thought. Mr. N. is the cleverest physician (that) I know. 
We speak of the cleverest physician of the town. They 
accuse him of the most frightful crime. He has given me 
the most positive promise to write to me. We shall 
take the shortest road to go to S. I remember still 
the most important circumstances. I have been at N. 
yesterday; it is one of the most remarkable towns of 
Europe. We have rescued our friends from the most 
unhappy situation. 

81. 

JDie 2Bcintraubc, the bunch of grapes ; tcif, ripe ; orbncn, to arrange ; 
tJCtgci^cn, to pardon ; laufcn, to run. 

<£e^cn (2ie fid) neben xnid). Sefen ®ie mir, Moa§> ©ie gc* 
fc^rieben I)aben. Setriibcn @ie fi^ nid^t ntel^r barubcr. Ser* 
lien @ic bcnfcn, bebor ©te fd^rciben. Drbnen ®ie bicfe 
fflriefe, bebor ®ie toeggefien. ©ffen ®ie leinc SBetntraubcn 
mcl^r; fie finb nod^ nid^t reif. Sommen @ie t)ter]^er, mein 
grcunb. ©el^en ®{e bortl^in, meine Siebe. ©j^red^en tuir 
nic^t niel)r babon. SBir tootten un§ gu SCifd^c fefeen. ffiSit 
iDoHcu cin toenig fpagieren gel^cn. 2a^t m^ unferen JJctnbcn 
I3erjeil)en. 8a§t un^ nad^ ^aufe gefjen. SSSir tooUtn nidjt 
tfinger bleiben. @ti)tn toir lieber in bie <Btaht guriidf. S'ommt 
^inber, eS ift fc^on fpat. 8anf ntdjt fo fel^r, ^einrid(|. S)u 
3cl)ft nidjt mef)r mit, toenn bu nidjt artigcr bift 



97 

32. 

iDie itugenb, virtue ; ba3 Saflcr, vice ; atxcd)t, just ; rufcn, to call 
Jaffcit, to bate; ^(aubctn, to chatter; ^cruntcrgc()cn, to go down, 
descend ; nal^ct ttctcit; to approach ; ^oxtjcx, before, beforehand. 

Let us give a piece of bread to this poor little boy. 
They call us, let us go down. Madam, take another 
(one more) cup of coffee. Let us read the newspaper 
before. Let us be just to every one. Let us love virtue 
and hate vice. Let us approach a little, come a little 
nearer. Look here, Sir. Let us hope always. Let us yet 
^\ait a moment. Do not go away yet. Wash yourselves 
before you go out. Go to bed. Do not get up. Let us 
work at present We will not chatter any more. 

33. 

3)[c £ugc, the lie ; bcr fiiigncr, the liar ; bcr 2Ku(f iggang, idleness ; 
bcr <B6)mcid)Ux, the flatterer ; bcr 9ldd&fle, the neighbor ; hex Umgang; 
the intercourse; cracBcn, addicted; aUgcmcitt, universal; flicl^en, to 
flee, to shun ; ijetiU^tcn; to despise ; ^6) l^ingcftctt; to give one's self 
up to. ... 

Q6) l^affc bicfeu 2)?cnfd^en ; cr ift cin Silgner. SBir l^affen 
ben 9)lu|fig3ang. ©ir toerben- tmmer biejenigeti Ijaffcn, bic 
bcm Caftcr crgeben finb. Qd) l^affc 9?icmanben. ®ott xoill 
nid^t, ba^ xok S'cmanben l^affen. t^affct btc giige, abcr ija\\tt 
euvcn 5reM)ftcn mcf)t. gliel^c bic 53(Jfen unb fud^c ben Untgang 
bcrienigen/ toclSjt tugenbl^cift finb. !IDiefcr 3Kenfd^ toirb alU 
gemein Dcradjtct; S^ebermann fltcl^t il^n. SBir flicl^ett alfe 
biejenigen, mldjt \\d) bent 3JiUffiggange l^ingeben. 2JZein 
£)nfel ijat mix gcrat^en, bte ©efettfd^aft biefer jungcn Seute ju 
fliel^en. ?agt nn« bte @d^mcicf)Ier fltel^en. ©ie ^cit ^kijt, 
man mug fie benu^en. 

34. 

Why do you hate me? I do not hate you. We must 
hate nobody. I have always hated (the) flatterers. Shun 
the evil and do (the) good. I shun (the) bad compa- 
ny. Shun the wicked. Let us all shun vice. Your sister 
must shun the intercourse with these ladies. Stay; do 
not flee. You have nothing to fear. Everybody shuns 
(the) liars. We must profit by our time. We despise 
those who do not fulfil their duty. He who is despised, 
is unhappy. Virtuous people are loved and esteemed. 



98 



35. 



JDre hnfunft, tLe arrival ; bic ®e\afix, the danger ; ter UeBennitil, 
haughtiness ; bcr SBittb; the wind ; unbctatitlt^ anknown ; fid} he^f}aft 
tiatn, tOibe busy; jic^ ijotnc^mctt, to determine upon, to intend ; fiiji 
^uten, to beware ; jidj bcffcrn, to improve, to mend ; fid^ \>exixxtn, to 
lose one's way; ji(^ aUiSic^eit; to expose one*8 self ; {t^^ gu^tc^en^ to 
incur. 

Qi) ^abc tnid^ ben ganjcn Slficnb bcfi^Sftigt ^d) toerbc 
Bti(^ jct^t anflcibcn. SBirft bu l^cutc fpaiicrcn gcl^en? Sd) 
freuc mi^ ilber bic Slnlunft utcincd SSater^^ 5Dic gangcnjcUc 
i[t bemicnigcn unbcfannt, bcr fid^ gu befd^aftlgen totx^. S!axi 
i^at fid^ Dorgenommcn, bicfcn SRa^mittaJ nad^ 91. gu gcl^en. 
SBir tDcrbcn un« bort Did SScrgniigen mat^en* 2D?an ift 
gtilcf lid), tocnn man fid^ tool^I bcfinbet 8obe bid6 nid^t fclbft ; 
^i'ttc bicfi t)or bcm Ucbcrmutl^^ S5cr SBinb legt fid^ ; totr be* 
lommcn gutc« SBcttcn JRul^en ©ic cin tocnig au^. SDtefcr 
©d^iltcr f)at fid^ gebeffcrt SBir l^abcn une Derirrt Qf)x f)ait 
mi) cincr gro^en ©cfal^r avi^t\t^t SBir toilrbcn un^ ^or* 
mitrfc jugcjogctt l^abcn, toenn toir ba« getl^an l^attcn. 

36. 

Wash yourself. You are not yet washed. I have 
washed myself this morning. Will you not wash your- 
self? At what do you rejoice? I rejoice at seeing you. 
We rejoice at your happiness. I cannot rejoice more. 
My sisters intend to go to the ball. This dog has lost his 
way. I shall not expose myself to this danger. At what 
are you busy? I am busy reading. You will incur re- 
proaches if you do not go there. Beware of doing that. 
My cousin will never mend. We have been very much 
amused yesterday. Louisa is not yet dressed. You are 
mistaken, she is already gone to church. 

37. 

3!)cr £)fcit, the stove ; ba3 fQcit, the bed ; ba« ®xaS, the grass ; S)et« 
Tangeit; to desire ; ji(i& fc^cn, to sit down ; jlcljen, to stand ; liegen, t« 
L^e; ft^en, to sit. 

@c^c bid^, mciu ^inb. Q6) bin nid^t miibc ; id^ fc^c mlt^ 
cttcn. ©cfecn ©ic fid^, id) iDcrbc mid^ a\i6) fcfecn. ©c^cn 
©ic fid^ nid^t auf jcncn ©tul^I/ cr ift gerbrod^en. SBir tooffen 
und auf bicfe San! fcfeen. 8ouife unb ^enrictte, fommt imb 
fcfet cu^ ncbcn mid^. S33arum fi^jcn ©ic nid^t? Q^ fjait gu 
lange gcfcffcn, x6) lann nid^t ntcl^r fifecn. @« ift mir umiiSg? 



99 

lid), bcu o<J»3<^" 3:ag gu fi^en* 2Bo ift bciii S3rubcr? @t 
[itjt t)or bcr Spr* S)tc ganjc gamitic fa§ urn ben i£if4 
permit. 2Kcin SBatcr bcrtangt, bag id^ immcr fifee* SSarura 
ftc^en @te, meine §crrcn? ©cfecn ©ic fid^* S'c^ lann nid^t 
tangc ftel^en, id^ bin foglcid^ milbc. Qi) l^abc ilbcr einc ©tunbe 
!)icr gcftanbcn, urn auf bid^ gu toartcn* SD3o ift bcin §nnb, ^arl? 
(gr ticgt l^inter bcm Dfcn* 2Hcin SScttcr tag geftcrn urn itfjn 
\\l)X no(^ im Scttc. SBir l^abcn bie iefet im ®rafc gclcgcn, 

88. 

2)ct (5I;ot, tlie choir, the quire; gtoifti^ctt; between; tcr ^piaj, tb» 
room. 

Sit down, if you please. I beg you to sit down. I am 
sitting already. I sit down where I find room. Will you 
not sit down? I shall sit do'wn by your side, make 
room, that this gentleman may (can) sit down. You do 
not sit comfortably, (well,) Miss. I did not sit comforta- 
bly there; I have been sitting between your two sis- 
ters. Where were you sitting at church? We were 
sitting in the choir. These gentlemen are always 
standing; ask them t<j sit down. I have been stand- 
ing (for) a whole hour. 

89. 

©cborcn twrbctt, to be bom ; gcfaflctt, to please ; TnigfaHen, to dis- 
please ; c5 gcfdllt mix l^icr, I like it here, I like this place ; gcfdlligfJ, 
if yon please ; fc^tDeigett; to be silent. 

aSiffcn ®iC; wann ®ie gcBorcn finb ? Q(!l) bin im Tlomt 
SWai gcborcn. Stbtx 2Kcnfd^ \mxb geborcn, unt gu ftcrben. 
©icfer ^abc tourbe nad^ bcm $Eobc fcined 33atevd geboren. 
S)icfe« 48ud^ gcfclBt mir. !Diefcr ©arten toilrbc mir bcffer 
gefaHcn, tt)cnn cr grSger toftre. fOlm ^nt toirb O^nen gc* 
fatten. aBicgcfatttc«(>^nen]^icr? @« gcfclttt mir ^ier fri)r 
gttt. e^ toilrbc mir abcr nod^ bcffcr gcfatten, toenn id) cinigc 
grennbc bcl mir l^attc ; attcin melnc grcnnbc gefatten fid^ auf 
bent ganbc ntd^t. @6 l^at mir immer beffer auf bem ganbc 
al§ in ber ©tabt gefatten. SBarum fd^toeigcn ©ie? S^ fann 
nidjt fc^toeigen, toenn td^ etoa6 fel^e, toad mir migfattt. 6tn 
(imger SWenfd^ ttiu^ immer fd^tDeigen^ toenn Stterc gentc mit 
nuanber reben. ©d^toeigt^ id^ toitt nid^t^ mel)r bation ]^8ren 

40. 
When were you bom ? I was born in the month of 



100 

September. Corneille was born at Rouen. We are 
all born, in order to die. I am born to be unhappy 
I like this lady very much. I do not like it in the 
country. I liked it much better in the towTi. Do you 
like this place? We like it better here than at our 
house. Come here, if you please. That has not pleased 
me.* Be silent. My aunt cannot be silent. We are silen 
when ladies speak. I shall not be silent. I have 
been silent too long. Why have you been silent? If I 
had been silent, I should have done better. 

41. 

9lac^, after. 
S^atifc unb nad), by degrees; iiad) toic t>or, always the same; crjl, 
only, tut ; hit ^citC; the side ; t(i& S3ilb; the picture, the portrait ; hit 
SD^cmung, the opinion ; bcr %aXt, the time, measure ; bcr Stnfij&cin, the 
appearances ; fparett; to economize. 

Seine gttern finb md) ®ott beinc gr6§ten SBo^ft^ater. 
3d) reife ntorgen m6) gonbon, imi njerbc crft ttad^ brci 
SBod^en toieberlommen. 9lac^ tceld^er ©eltc mug man gel^cn, 
um mi) bem ©d^Ioffc gu fomnten? Qi) toerbc tiad^ bcni 
2lbenbe[fett ju ^'^nen lommen. !IDiefe« Silb ift m6) ber 5Watxir 
gemalt. §err lit. toat ijkx nnh f^at m^ Sf)ntn QtfvaQt 
5tBem 2lnf§eine m6) wirft bu beinen ^rojeg Derlieren. 2Kcincr 
2Keinung nod^ toerbe id) i^n gciDinnen* ©iefe SBaarc loirb 
m6) ber gfic berfauft. Qi)v Sruber Heibet fid^ timtier na6) 
ber 3Wobe. ©ie- tanjen nid^t mi) bem STafte. Qi^ l^aBe bir 
geratl^en ju fparen, bamit bu uac^ unb nodj retd^ toerbeft ; 
attein bu lebft mi) tt)ie Dor. Q^ bemol^ne eine ©tube, bic 
uQc^ bent ®arten get)t. 9?ad^ bem, toa^ S^x Sruber niir 
gefagt fjat, finb @ie mit ^fj^^wt Sel^rer fel^r gufricben. "iflad}^ 
bem U)ir eine ©tunbe gctt)artet l^attcn, gingcn n)ir fort. 

42. 

f&d, with, at. 

JDic Sauiic, the humor ; btc Slngclegenljcit, the affair ; ber @t(cl, tU 
handle; bic ^linge, the blade; bic (S()rc, honor; bic <Bdj[a(i)t, the 
battle ; cin 9lomcr, a Roman ; has @cBurt5fcft, the birthday ; tJerfid^crn, 
k> assure ; ^^ erfunbigctt, to inquire ; anne(;mctt, to accept ; bcgcgnen^ 
to meet ; l^olcn, to fetch ; unifomntett; to perish ; in 3!6rdncn axtSlbxct 
i;tn, to burst into tears ; tDi(^ttg/ important. 

Sd) tear biefcn SDlorgen bet bem l^reugifc^en ©efanbten. 
Er U)ar bei fe^r guter S^une, naljm mid) bet ber §anb unb 
ijerfid^erte mid), bag er \id) l^eute nod) bei bem 3Ktnifter nac^ 



n 



101 

mciuu idugelegenfieit eriuubigcn \Derbe. Q6) fanb i^n bci 
Jifcljc, unb ba^te ki mir felbft, ba| er ntcinen Scfud^ nidjt 
aune^meu itjcrbc* S'd) l^attc eincn tDtd^tigcn S3rtef bel inir, 
ben id) i^m iibergeben Ijabe* §aben ®ic ®clb bei fi(^? S3ci 
tpcm tDoIjnen ©ic? 3^^ n)o|uc nal)c bei bcr Sir^c, ni(^t 
meit t)on ber ^oft. ^Jteljinen ®ic bae SDlcffcr bei bem ©tict 
luib nidjt bei ber Stinge. S5er Sine nal^m il)n bei bem So^jfe 
bcr 3lnberc bei btn ^einen. Qd) Derfid^crc ©ie bei meinei 
@()re. Qfi) begegnete i^m beim ^erauegel^en am bem Jtl^ea* 
tcr, Sir toerben e^ i^m bei ^elegenl^eit fagen. SBarum 
fifeen ®ie beim geuer, fiub ©ic nid^t tt)O^I? 8egen ©ie ntir 
bic SBaaren bei ©eite; i^ tperbc fie l^olen laffen* aJiein 53ru* 
ber ift in ber ©^(adjt bei 8ei|)jig nmgclommen. SSd biefcn 
SBorten brad^ er in SHjranen an^. $&ix toaren immer ju* 
fammen, bei Zaq unb bei ?iadjt S^ tear eine alte ®ett)oI)n# 
f)eit bei ben 9tomcrn, feincn greunbcn an if)rem ©eburt^tage 
®efdjenfc gu fd^icfen. 

a»U, with. 
S)ic ^lugl^ett; prudence ; bcr SKutl^, courage ; bie glintc, the gun ; Vu 
^ugc(, the ball ; bie Sanbf^aft, the landscape ; baS ©ctoifjeii; conscience ; 
bie ©timme^ the voice ; ba3 -©auipttoort, the substantive ; bcr StnfangS* 
buc^flaBC/ the initial letter ; l^anbcln, to act ; labcit/ to load, to charge ; 
j3orgc()ctt; to pass ; Bccljren, to honor. 

aJiit n^em finb ©ie fjjajieren gegangen? 2Kit n^eldjer 
'Same f)aben ©ie getanjt ? §anbeln ©ic ftet^ mit ^lugl^eit, 
Dert^eibigen ©ic fic^ mit 3Jatt]^? £)ie ©d^iinl^cit t)ergel)t 
mit ben ^^al^ren* Q\t ^Ijrc glintc mit einer ^ugel gelaben ? 
Si)X greunb l^at mid^ mit einem Sefnd^c beef|rt» 3Jian ift 
fel^r gufrieben mit i^m. @r ift gcftern mit bcr ^oft angc* 
fommem @r tragt cinen braunen 9todC mit gotbenen ^nB^fen^ 
©er jnngc fStann mit ben langen §aaren ift ber ©ol^n be^ 
i^aufeg* ^abm ©ic ben SWann mit ber grogen 9Zafe unb 
ben fd^toarjen Slugen gefel^cn? SKein tob, bn mu^t bein 
gfeifd^ mit ber ®obeI unb nid^t mit ber §anb effen* SWeine 
©afc l^at mir mit Sll^ranen in ben Slugen crgiil^tt, ba§ fie 
morgcn abreifen mu§* SDiefc ganbfd^aft ift mit bem ffllei*= 
flift, unb nidjt mit ber geber gejeidinct* Qi) fann biefe^ 
©efdjcn! nid^t mit gutem'®etoiffen annet)men* Sr trat mit 
einer ^iftolc in ber §anb l^erein, unb fd^rie mit tauter 
Stimmc^ Qm SeutfdEien mirb j;ebe3 §aupttt)ort mit einem 
gro^en 2lnfang§bud^ftabeir gefd^rieb'en. 

9 



102 

44. 

SCuS, out of, from, of 

IDie drfo^ruttg, experience; bic Slbftd&t, the intention; hex lAeih, 
•nvy; hit UebuxiQ, the exercise; hit Strafe, the punishment; boJ 
^idft, the light; htx Zoh, death; hit %ux6it, fear; bet ^aii, the 
throat; fonfi; otherwise; uBerfcj^eii; to transhite; Sal^r auS, 3a^t 
tiUf from year to year. 

SBa6 ntadjcn ©ie ? -^c^ ubcrfcfec au^ bem !Dculf(f)cn iu'« 
Jranjofifc^e* SBol^er fommeit ©tc? SBir fommcn aud bcr 
Sd^ulc, ou^ bem ®orten. SBol^cr flnb ®ic? 0^ ^iw ^i^^ 
93crfin, unb mem grcunb ift au« 8^on. SBcr l^at au« bicfcm 
®tafe flctrunlcn ? ^c^ toctg c^ au« (grfal^rmtg. 3^ l^abc 
ed au6 gutcr Slbfid^t, aud gicbc gu il^m gct^an^ ^^d^ crfe^e 
aii^ S'^^^nt Sricfe, bo^ ©ie nod^ immcr untool^I fmb* SDie 
g^otcra lommt au^ Slficn* 5Diefc S3ifbfdulc ift am 2Jiarmor. 
3:)iefc §Utc finb au« bcr SKobe* Sr fc^rcit au« t)ottcm ^alfe. 
3(^ fiebc {^n Qu6 ganjem ^crgcn* SKcin Srubcr fommt feit 
ad^t SEagen nid^t au^ bcm ^immen @t\)t mir au^ ben 
Slugcn, ber Sleib fprid^t au^ 3^n^n. S'd) l^abc langc nid^t 
mel^r ^laDier gefjjielt, id) lomme ganj ou« bcr Ucbung. ©ad 
8{dE)t Ift au«. mt bcm Sobc ift 2iac« am. S)cr ©d^ulcr 
mup aud gutcm SBittcn unb nic^t aud gurd^t t)or ©trafe 
arbeitcn; fonft tt)irb cr S'atjr auS 0<^^i^ ^^^ i" i^i^ ©c^uic 
gcl)cn, o^nc grogc tjortfd^rittc gu mac^cn. 

9(uf, on, upon, at. 

JDic SBelt, the world ; hoS fBoxt, the word ; bie 3agb, the chase ; hit 
fciter, the ladder ; bet iaxm, the noise ; ber goU/ the case ; has @ej!c^t, 
the face ; fleigcn, to mount, ascend ; i\oin^tn, to compel ; folgen, to 
follow ; tttaplpeti, to catch ; re^neit, to reckon. 

2luf SBicbcrfel^cn ! S^ ^o% auf bem SoOc tocrben toir 
im« iDicbcrfel^cn. 9?id^td auf bcr SBctt gcfattt mir bcffer aU 
ein Sail. Q6) glaube bir auf bciu S33ort* . SDod^. frcuc bid^ 
nid^t gtt fcl^r barauf, er fann Icid^t auf t)icrjc]^n 5lagc auf* 
gcf^obcn mcrben^ 3)ic{nc 53rtibcr gcl^cn morgcn auf bic 3^agb, 
unb id^ tt)crbc aufd 8anb gcl^cn* ©c^cn ©ic fid^ auf eincn 
StuI)I, unb ftcigcn ©ic nid^t auf bic Scitcn SBir l^abcn i^m 
kief^ ©ummc auf fcin gutcd Ocfid^t gelicl^em Sr lam auf 
mid^ lod, unb wotttc mic^ gtuingcn, il^m gu folgcn. 3?d^ l^orc 
8arm auf bcr ©tragc; man l^at cincn 5Dicb auf frlft^cr tfjal 
ertappt. SKcinc SJhittcr ift brci SSicrtcI auf ficbcn Ul^r ab* 
gcrcift, SBic l^cigt bicfc ffltumc auf bcutfd^? ©inb ©ic b5fe 



103 

mif mid) ? SBic bielc ©rofd^cn gefjcit auf eincn X^akx 1 Qd) 
tDcrbc auf furjc 3^^* t)erreifen^ 2luf atte gciCc bin id) abcr 
bi^ gum fUnfgcl^uten biefc^ ajiouats totcbcr gurUd, 2luf« 
Cfiugfte toerbc id^ bi^ gum gtooujigftcn blctbcn* ®ic fonncu 
ed auf mciue ©cfal^r t^um 3^^ l^abc auf immcr Slbfd^icb 
t)on i^m gcnommcm ©r l^offt gtoar nod^ immcr auf mid)^ 
attctn idl) l)abe i^m erffcirt, ba§ er auf mid^ nid^t me^r gu 
cd^ncn braud^t, 

Ucl^cr^ over, above. 
lDa< @ktt)itter, the thunder-Btorm ; has ^6)\0txht, Uie sword; bet 
^d)Wi^, the perspiration; hit ^tixn, the forehead; hit Mro^, the 
force; iai ©elittgen, success; nag, wet; Bc|ianbt0, constantly; am 
fdnglid^, in the beginning ; fc^ulbig fcitt^ to owe ; m ^^ulbcn jiccfctt, 
to be in debt. 

e^ ftcl^t ein ©clDittcr Ubcr ber ©jtabt. S)a3 ©d^tt)erbt l^iug 
Ubcr fciucm S'opfe* !IDcin 2Settcr fifet beftdnbig uber feincn 
Silc^cm. Sic §aarc l^cingcn if)m iibcr bic 2tugcn. 35er 
©d^ttjeig fief il^m ubcr bic ©time* (Sr ftedEt bi^ iibcr bic 
Dl^rcn in ©c^utbcu. ©a^ ift iibcr feinc ^rSftc, iibcr feincn 
3Scrftanb* ©iefc jiungcn 8cute fd^Iafcn immcr iibcr bcm 8cfcn 
ein. SUicine ^S^an ift iibcr fUnfgig mh id) bin iibcr fed^gig 
a^a^re alt. S)tcfc« SCud^ ift ubcr gtucl gCen breit* SBir 
miiffen iibcr bicfen iJIug, iibcr icnc S5riidEc. Qd) tt^crbc iibcr 
graulfurt nad^ Scipgig reifcn. • Sic gl^rc gcl^t iibcr im SRcid^* 
t^um* §cutc iibcr ad^t £agc lommt mein SJater an. ©r ift 
iibcr ein |a(bc6 Qaf)v Derrcift gctt)efcn. iCcin 3Scttcr ift mir 
iibcr ^unbcrt SD^alcr fdjulbig. grcuc bid^ nidjt gu friil^ iibcr 
ba^ ©efingcn beiner Unterncl^mung ; hn bift no^ nid^t iiber 
ben ©erg. g« rcgnct fcl^r ftarf, toir finb iibcr unb Uber nag 
gett)orben. ©ein grcunb fd^rcibt un^ niijt mcl^r; anfdngfic^ 
crl^icltcn )uir S3riefc iibcr Sricfc Don il^m. 

47- ' 

©cgctt; against, to. 

2)le 2Baffc, the weapon ; ba3 ©cfefe, the law ; bic Duittung, the 
receipt ; bet JDienjl, the service ; too^tt^atig, charitable ; tragcn, to 
carry ; Bctounbcm, to admire ; totUtn, to bet ; Icijicn, to do ; httxtttn, 
to set foot upon ; freilajfett; to set at liberty. 

5Dicfcr ©cncral tragt bic SBaffen gcgen fein 33atcrlanb. 
Scr gcgen fein ©citJtffen I}anbclt, ^anbctt gcgen ®ott unb 
&ad ®cfc^. Qd) bctounbcre feine 8iebc gcgen feine gamifie 
mib feinc Serene gcgen feinc gvcunbe. Unferc ijilrftin ift ttjol^fc 



104 

t^atig gcgcn bic Slrmcn* Soriolan toav uubanlOar gcgcu fctii 
93atcrlaub, (5r ift frcigelaffcn morbeit gegen fetn SSerfpre^cn, 
ba^ 8anb «icf|t toiebcr ju betretcn. 0^ ^^l^c i^« gcgcn Quit* 
tung besal)ft. ^d) tocttc gcl^u gegen cin«, bag cr uid^t toic* 
berlouunt. SDiefer 5Dienft ift ni^td gegen benjcnigen, ben 
©ic utir geleiftet l^aben. >Diefc« S)orf liegt gegen 5Rorbea. 
Sr fc^Iief gegen gtoei UI)r ein, unb ftanb gegen neun Uf)r 
toieber auf. 3Kein gnfel toirb gegen Gnbe beS SBinter^ an* 
?ommen. 

■ 48. 

3Bcntt, if, when ; cB, if, whether ; toatttt, when, 
©cil; because ; toa^rcnb, while, during ; bcr ^aif), the advice ; Huq, 
wise ; untcr^Itcnb/ amusing ; VCtBicten, to forbid. 

Qd) iDcrbe il^n genjig betol^nen, toenn id) nttt i^m gufrteben 
bin. Qd) toerbe e^ Sijnm fagen, ujenn ©ie in mir tommciu 
Caffen ®ic mid) hjiffen, toann ©ie lommen tt)erben« SBenn 
'd)x QlMlid) feib, fo erinnert eud^ ber SDienfte, bie wiv cud) 
geleiftet f)aben. 28enn id) iDU^te, toann er guriicffdme, fo 
miirbe id) e« Qfjntn fagen* SBenn nteine ©d^toefter Hug ift, 
fo tt)irb fie meinen 8tat^ befotgen. SBenn fie after fein toirb 
unb ettt)a$ mel^r ©rfaf^rung toirb ertangt l^abcn, fo toirb fie 
finben, ba^ id) $Red)t l^abe. Qd) toei^ nic|t ob ba§ h)af)r ift 
gr fragt, ob ©ie niorgen abreifen iDcrben. Qd) tann nid)t 
an^gel)en> ttjeif ber Slrgt e« mir bcrboten l^at. Qd) iDitt 3^^ncn 
tin unterl^aftenbe^ 4Bud| lei^en, njeil ©ie nii^t auSgel^en Ion* 
nm. 6r arbeitet flei^ig, tod^renb fein S3ruber fpajieren gel^t. 
Sr tpirb tdglic^ t)on feinen 8c{)rern gelobt, n^iiljrenb fein ^ru^ 
ber ftetS Don i()nen getabeft tijirb* 

49* 

^a, as, because ; alS, when. 

2)cr ^taatf the state ; annelbntcn, to accept ; cmlabcit/ to invite ; )»r< 
Wcrfen, to reproach ; aufwcctcn, to awake, to rouse ; trcnttett* to se- 
parate ; _ j^intcrlaffcn; to leave ; ^orBctgel^cn; to pass ; uugcrat^en, ill- 
bred ; iunftig, in future ; Icife; low, soft. 

!J)a tc^ l^ente feinen 53efud) nid)t annef)men lann, fo \mU 
id) il)n auf fiinftigen ©onntag einlabcn. ®a id^ niorgen ab* 
reifen ntn^, fo bin id^ gefommen, urn 2lbfd^ieb Don 3^nen gu 
iicl^men. $Da ntein SSater frani ift, fo lann id) md)t \paiitxtn 
gel^en. SBeil iuir fiird^tetcn, ©ie aufjumetfen, fo ^abeji tt)ir 
(eifc gefprod^en. ©a tt>ir getoo^nt tDarcn, mit einanber gu 
(cbcn, fo I)attcn ioir Dicte 3Wiif)c, un§ gn trcnnen. 2Jl^ 



105 

?J5eIopiba§ bcm Spamtnonba^ tjomarf, bag cr bcm (Staate 
feinc Sinbcr Ijintcrtaffc, anttoortctc biefcr: ®u tl^uft nod) 
ipcnigcr fur bad 3SatcrIanb, ba bu i^m nur cincn ungeratfjcneii 
©ol^n l^intcrtaffen wirft 3(te SEitud cincn SEag l^attc Dorbci^ 
Bcl^cn laffen, ol^nc Ocmanbem titoa^ ®nM }]X crltjcifcn, fagtc 
cr : SS) ^^^^ ^^^^^ 2^^9 t)crIorcn. 

50. 

ftOoKcit, to be willing; fditnctt; to be able, to know; laffcn, to kt, 

to allow, to have (done). 

©cr S3cfcl^l, the order ; bie StcifC/ the journey ; bic 5(ufmcrffaniFcit, 
the attention ; bie fiuj^^ the mind, the wish; bcr S3obctt, the soil; 
e igcnprnif 3, obstinate ; fcudjt; moist ; Bcfonbct«; particular ; »orgcru(ft, 
advanced ; untcme](>mcn; to undertake ; jic^ tudtmcn, to warm one's 
self; (£c§littf(i^u^ laufcn, to skate. 

$Dic Sinber mcincd 9?ad^bar« finb fo eigenfinnig, bag fie 
uic bic 53cfc^Ic tijrcr ©Item crfuHen irollcn* SJitt bcr SJatcr 
fie auf bm ©pajicrgang mitncl^mcn, fo looKcn fie gu §aiifc 
keibcn ; n^ill bic SDiuttcr, bap fie arbcitcn, fo toolkn fie au^^ 
geljen. S^ ift fait, tt)ir wotten itfd §aud ge^cn, obcr voir 
tvoUtn cin ttjcnig f^iclcn, nm un§ ju crtt)armcn. SDic 9tcli^ 
gion n^itt, bag toir fcincm Slnbcrn tl^un, iDad UJit nid^t moHcn, 
bag man c0 nnS tf)uc, ©icfc ^flanjcn iDottcn cincn fcndjtcn 
©obcn nnb cine bcfonbcrc Hufmcrlfamfcit, SBir f5nncn uici 
tfjun, njcnn n)ir nur tooKcn. SBir njcrbcn bicfe . 9?cifc nidjt 
mc^r untcrncfimen Bnnen, tocil bic -^al^reSjcit fd^on ju n)cit 
Dorgcriidt ift SBcr mit 9?n^cn rcifcn mill, mug bic ©prad^c 
bed Sanbcd fcnncn, in tocld^cm cr rcifct. ilonncn ®ic ©d^fitt* 
\d)Vi\j laufcn? Qdj fonntc cd el^cbcm n^ol^t; abcr fcitbcm i^ 
bad 53cin gcbrodjcu Ijabc, lann ic^ cd nic^t mct)r* Qd) I)abc 
mir cin paar ncuc ©ticfct madden laffcn. 5Dicfcr Scorer (agt 
feinc ©d^itfcr ]^inauv^gct)cn., fo oft f[e ?uft l^aben. 



106 



DIVERSE EXERCISES. 



1. 

THE CANE-PIPE. 
(The Tocabolary is to be found at the end of the exercises.) 

6m ^onig ^atte cinen ©d^afemciftcr, bcr fid^ Dom §irtcii* 
ftabc ju bicfcm iDidjtigen Slmtc cmporgcf^toungcn l^atte. SDcr 
©c^afemciftcr tourbc abcr bci bcm Sonigc bcrflagt, bag cr ben 
loniglid^cn ©c^afe bcraubc unb bie geraubtcn Softbarfcitcn in 
cincm ©ctoBIbc Dcrbcrgc, ba^ utit cincr cifcrncn SCl^ttr Dcr* 
fcl^en feu 

35er fl5ntg befud^te ben ©d^afemeifter, befal^ fcinen ^afaft, 
unb aU cr an bie eiferne £pr lam, befal)t er, fie ju iJffnen. 
2lf« ber S5mg l^incmtrat, tear er ganj erftaunt. Sr fal^ 
n\d)t^ al« bie bier SBanbe, eincn lanblid^en 2^ifc^ unb einen 
©trol^feffeL Sluf bem Zi\^ lag eine §irtenpte, cin §irten* 
ftab unb cine §irtentafc^e, 

©er ©d^afemeifter abcr fpradj : Qn meincr -^ugenb ^nktt 
16) bie ©(^afe. ©u, o fiSnig, gogft mid^ an beinen ^of» 
§ier in bicfcm ©emotbe bra^te 'vS) fcit ber ^cit tfiglic^ cine 
©tunbe in, erinnerte mid^ mit grcuben meincr borigen ©tan- 
be6, unb ttjicber^ofte bie Cicber, bie id^ cl^emal^ 3um 8obe bc§ 
©d^epferd fang, al^ id) friebli^ mcine ^ecrbc ptetc^ Sld^, 
(ag mid^ n)icbcr gurUdtfel^ren auf mcine t)atcrlid^cn glurcn, too 
id) glildEtidfjcr tear, al« an beinem ^ofc ! 

©cr SiJnig tear fc^r crjUrnt iibcr bicienigen; mcld^e bci 
cblcn SDJann Dcrlcumbct ^ttcn ; er umarmtc ifjn unb bat i^n 
bci il)m in bleibcn. 

2. 

THE THREE ROBBERS. 

©rci SRciubcr morbctcn unb plilnbcrten eincn Waufmann, 
bcr mit cincr SWenge ®clb unb fl'oftbarleitcn bnrd^ cinen 
©alb rctftc. ©ie braditcn ben geraubtcn ^djdii in i^re 



107 

^oi)U, unb fdjidtcn ben jiingftcn Don {^neii in bie ©tabt 
urn gebcnsmittcl cmjufaufcn* 

2lte cr fort toax, fagtcn bic bciben anbcrcn : SQBariim [oHcii 
tDir bicfc grogen SRcid^tpmcr mit biefcm Surfc^eit t^citcn? 
SScnn cr gurttcffommt, Gotten toir il^n tiJbtcn* 

SDer jiungc SRSubcr bac^tc untcrtocg^ bci \id) : SBic glilrftid^ 
njare id^, mnn aU bicfe6 @clb mlr gel^Brtc ! Qi) toitt nteinc 
jwci ©cfai^rtcn Dcrgiftcn, fo bcl^oltc xi) e« fur utid^ alleiu. 
.-Site cr in bcr ©tabt angcfommcn war, fauftc cr 8cbcn«* 
mittd ein, iijat ®ift in ben SBein unb fcl^rtc in ben SBatb 
gmiidf* 

Saum tear cr in bic ^ol^Ic gctreten, ate bie bciben anbe=» 
rcrt auf il^n gufprangen unb xi^n mit i^rcn SDotd^cn burdj* 
bo^rtcn. §ierauf fefeten fie fid], a^cn unb tranlcn ben tjcr* 
giftcten aBctn. ©ie ftarbcn nntcr l^eftigcn ©djutcrjen, unb 
man fanb i^re Scid^name mitten nntcr ben ©d^afeen, wctd^c 
fie aufgcl^auft I)attcn. 

3. 

THE PILGRIM. 

3n cinem |3rad;tigcn ©d^Ioffc, Don bem fd^on langft jebc 
©pur t)crf^tt)unben ift, Icbtc einft cin fc^r reid^er SRitten 6r 
t)crtt)anbtc-t)icl Oclb, urn c^ gu Dcrfd^onern, aber cr t^at toe* 
nig fiir bie SIrmcn. 

©a fam cinmal cin armcr $ilgcr, bcr um cine 9?ad^t]^cr* 
berge bat. ©cr SRitter n)ie« il)n trotjig ab wib fagtc : ©icfc^ 
©t^tog ift Icin ©aft^of. — ©rlaubt mir nur brei ijragcn, 
fagtc bcr ^ifgcr, fo wilt id) toeiter gcl^cn, — ©a^ gebe id^ 
in, Dcrfefetc bcr 9tittcr. 

SBcr bctpol^ntc tjor Sud^ biefc^ ©c^Icg ? fragtc bcr ^ifger. 
— Tltin SSater, — SEcr war Dor il)m bcr ^Scwol^ner biefeS 
©d^Ioffe^? — SWein ©ro^Daten — Unb wcr wirb nad) Qxid) 
barin wol^ncn ? — SDicin ©ol^n, mm c^ ®ott Witt* 

9?un, ^pxai) bcr ^itger, mxxn Oeber nur cine gewiffc ^ci 
In biefem ©djtoffe tool^nt, unb wenn immer (Siner bem 2ln* 
bcrn ^lat} barin mad^t, fo feib Q\jx nur ©ciftc l^icr unb bag 
©d)to6 ift wirHid^ cin ©aft^au^. 2Scrwenbet balder nic^t fo 
Diet um bicfed §au« fo fcl^r gu Derfd^oncrn, wetd^cd Qljx nur fUr 
fo lurgc ^dt befifet, SC^ut licbcr ben Slrmcn @iiM, fo werbet 
Q^x im ©immcl cine cwigc SSBol^nung criangen. — ©cr SRitter 
nal)m bicfc SBortc gu ^crgen, gcwcil^rtc bem ^ifger feinc ©itte 
ttnb wurbc fur bic golgc wo^Itptiger gcgen bic 2tnncn. 



108 
4. 

THE ROBm-REDBREAST. 

(Sin 5Kot^fc]^Icl^en tarn in bcr ®trcngc bcSSBintcrS an 
ta^ 55cnftcr eine^ frommen 8anbmann«, ate 06 c§ gem l^ineui 
mo(^tc, ©a fiffnete ber ganbmann fctn genftcr unb naf)m 
ha^ gutraulid^c iijkxS)cn freunblid^ in feinc SSJol^nung^ 9?u?i 
plcftc c^ bic Srofantcn itnb ^Hxndjen auf, bie »on frinem 
iijd^c ficlcn, unb bie Sinber be« 8anbmann« liebten ba« 
U5gtein fe^r^ 

Slber ate nun ber tJrii^Iing UJieber in ba6 8anb fam itnb 
bic (Sebiifc^e fid^ betaubten, ba fiffnete bcr ganbmann fein 
genfter, unb bcr Heine ®aft entpol^ in ba§ nal^e SSSalbd^en, 
unb baute fcin ??eft unb fang ein frofjlid^cs gicbd^cm 

Unb fiefjc, ate ber SBinter toieberlel^rte, ba tarn ba^ dioti)^ 
fe{)tc!^en abermate in bie SSol^nung bed Sanbmannd, unb l^attc 
fcin SSJeibd^cn ntitgebra^t >Dcr Sanbmann abcr unb feinc 
Sinber freuten fid) fel)r, ate fie bic bciben Stl^ierdjcn fallen, 
bic fo gutrauKd^ um^crft^auten* Unb bic Sinber fagten : !iDic 
935gel(|en fe^cn un5 an, at^ ob fie unS etnja^ fagcn toottten. 

©a antoortcte bcr SSatcr : SBcnn fie reben Bnnten, fo 
witrbcn fie fagcn : 3ii^^^^w<^w crnjcdt 3wtraucn, unb Sicbe er^ 
.^cugt @egen(iebc. 

5. 

THE VOICE OF JUSTICE 

dm rcic^cr a)?ann, 9?amcn« S^t^feS, gcbot feinen ^ncd^ 
kn, cine arme SBittnjc fammt il^ren ^inbern au« tl^rer SSBo^r- 
nung gu Dcrtrcibcn, tt)ci( fie ben gctD5^nIid)cn 3in« ntd^t gu 
gal^Icn t)erntod)tc. Site bie SDiener famen, fprad^ ha^ SBcib : 
2(4 tjcrgic^et cin tt)cnig ; t)icCeid)t, bag cuer §crr fid^ unfcr 
crbarmc ; x6) toiii gu i^m gc^cn unb ifjn bitten* 

©arauf ging bte SBitttDC gu bent reid^cn Warn ntit i^rcu 
Dier tinbcrn, cin« fag !ranl barniebcr, unb alte flcl^tcn, fie 
nid^t gu Dcrftogcn. S^r^feS abcr fprad^ : aKcine Scfel^te ton 
id) nic^t anbern, c§ fci benn, baj3 3^r Guere ©d^ulb fogtcic^ 
^e5af|{et. 

©a tt)cintc bic abutter bittertit^ unb fagte : 2ld^, bic ^Jflcge 
ilnc^ franfen ^inbc6 I)at aft nieincn SScrbicnft ijcrgc^rt unb 
meiuc Slrbeit gef)iitbcrt, Unb bic Jlinbcr flcl)ten mtt ber 
SKutter, .fie nid^t gu tjcrftogen. 

abcr G^r^fc§ inanbtc fic^ JDcg t)on it)ncn iinh ging in fcin 



109 

Sartcnt)au^ unb leijte fid) auf baQ ^olfter, ju rui^cit, \m tx 
pffegte. d^ toax aber ein fd^tDiiler Stag, unb bi(|t am ®ar* 
tenfaat fIo§ cin ©trom, ber t)cr6reitcte ^u^Cung, iinb c§ tear 
cine ©tiCc, bag fein SUftd^en ficfi rcgte. 

S)a ^artc S^r^feS bag ®eng|)cl beg ©c^itfg am Ufer, abei 
eg tonte t^m Qitii) bem ©etDinfel ber tober ber armen SBittlne; 
nnb er n^arb unrul^ig auf fetnem ^olfter* 

©arnad^ fjoxdjtt er auf bag 9taufcf|cn beg ©tromeg unb eg 
bitnlte tl^n, alg rul^t er an bem ©eftabe eineg unenbtid^en 
aJieercg, unb er toUitt \id) auf feincm ^fU^fe* 

Sllg er nun n)teber l^orc^te, erfd^oH aug ber ^Jerne ber ©on* 
ner eineg ®en)itterg, unb er gfaubte bie ©timme beg ©erid^tg 
ill Derne^men. 

^nn ftanb er pWfelid^ auf, eilte nad^ §aufe unb gebot fei* 
nen S^edjten, ber armen SBitttDe bag §aug ju offnen* 3lber 
fie n)ar fammt il^ren 0nbern in ben Safb gejogcn unb nir* 
genbg ju finben* Unterbeffen tuar bag ©emitter Ijinauf gcjo^ 
gen, unb eg bonnerte unb fiel ein geujaltiger Stegen. S^rt)fcg 
aber tDar t)oU Unmut^ unh n^anbette umf|er» 

5lm anbern STage ijernal^m S^r^feg, bag !ranfc ^inb fei 
im SBalbe geftorben unb bie ajhttter mit ben anberen l^intDeg* 
gegogen* ©a n^arb il^m fein ®artcn fammt bem ®aal nnb 
^otfter jutDiber, unb er geno§ nic^t mel^r bie ^Ul^Iung beg 
raufd^enben ®tromeg» 

Salb nad^^er fiel Sl^r^feg in eine Sranfl^eit, unb immer in 
ber §i^e beg ^Jieberg t)erna^m er beg ©t^ilfeg ®eligpet unb 
ben raufd^enben ©trom unb bag bum^fc STofen beg ®etDitterg. 
2lffo t)erfd^ieb er. 

6. 

THE PEACHES. 

din Sanbmann bra(^te aug ber ©tabt fitnf ^firfid^e mit, 
bie fc^onften, bie man fe^en !onnte. ©eine Sinber aber fal)en 
biefe grud^t gum erften 2l?ale; begl^alb wunberten imb freuten- 
fie fid) fel^r Uber bie fdjonen 5lepfel mit ben rdtl^Iid^en Sadfen 
imb bem garten glaum, ©arauf t)ert^eilte ber 2Sater fie unter 
fcine t)ier ^naben, unb eine er^ieft bie aWutten 

am Hbenb, afg bie Sinber in bag ©d^Iaffdmmcrfein gingen, 
fragte ber SSat^r : 9?un, n^ie ^aben eud^ bie fd^onen ?(e^)fcl 
gef^medft? 

§errlid), lieber SSater ! fagte ber 2leftefte. 6g ift eine fd^iJnc 
SJruc^t, fo fauberfid^ unb fo fanft »on ®efd^madE. S^ ^'^^^ 

9* 



110 

mtr ben ©tc'm forgfom t)mDal)vt imb :t)tK nitr barauS ftnen 
©aum erjiel^cn. 

Srat) ! fagte bcr 9Satcr* ®ae ^eigt ^au^tjdltcvif^ fiir bit 
3u!unft gefovgt, tok c« bcm ganbmann gcgicmt 

Qd) l^abe bie mcintgc fogleid^ aufgcgcffcn, rtcf bcr ^itngfte, 
tmb ben ©tein fortgetoorfen, unb bie OKutter f)at mtr bie 
^(iffte i)on bcr il^rtgcn gcgeben. D, ba^ fc^mcdt fo fiig unb 
gcrfd^miCjt im 2Kunbc ! 

D?nn, fagte ber SSater, bu l^aft gtDar nidjt fcl^r Rug, aber 
bod^ naturlic^ unb nad^ finbtid^cr ffiJeife gel^anbclt giir bie 
^(ugl^eit ift aud^ nod^ 9Janm genug im 8ebem 

35a begann ber gtt)eile ®ol^n: Qd) fjobt ben ©tein, ben ber 
ttcine 4Bruber forlnjarf, gefammcit unb aufgeffopft. @^ \mv 
•ia S'crn bartn, bcr fd^medEte fo fu§ h)ie cine dhi^. Slbcr 
jtcincn W^\^^ ^^^^ i'i) tJcrfauft unb fot)ieI ®elb bafiir crl^at 
ten, bag id^, ttjcnu '4 ^^^ ^^^ @tabt fomme, tool^t iwblf ia^ 
fiir faufen fanr^. 

S)cr 3Satcr fr^iittefte ben So}3f unb fagte : Slug ift ha^ 
jtuar, aber finbfidt) unb natiirlid^ h)ar e6 ntd|t» Sett)al|re bid) 
ber §immcf, bag bu fein totfmann tDcrbeft I 

Unb in, Sbmunb ? fragte bcr SSater. Unbefangen unb offcn 
anttDortete (gbmunb : ^c^ ^abc meinen ^firfic^ bem ©ol^nc 
unfer6 5Rad^bar«, bem Iranfen (Seorg, ber ba« ^ieber ^at, ge* 
bradt)t Sr ttJoUte i^n ntd^t ncl^men, ba ^ab' id) x\)n il^m auf 
ba« 4Bett getegt unb bin l^intocggegangen^ 

Sflnxif fagte ber SSater, ttjcr .l^at benn tt)ol^I ben beften @c* 
brand) t)on feinem ^firfic^ gema^t ? 

35a riefen fie aCe brei: 3)a« l^at S3ruber ©bmunb getl^an ! 
•— Sbmunb aber fd^toieg ftitt. Unb bie abutter umarmte i^n 
mit eincr S^^rdn' im Sluge. 

THE DESERT ISLAND. 

(Sin reidjcr, guttt)atiger 3Kann njoflte einen feiner ©ffabcu 
glUdf(id) madden: cr fd^cnfte il^m bie greilieit unb Iie§ il^m cin 
Sdf)iff mit bielen !6ftli(|cn SBaa'ren au^riiften. „®ef/' fagte 
cr, „unb fegle bamit in ein frembcS 8anb; tt)Ud^ere mit biefcii 
SBaaren, unb aKcr ©ctDinn fott bein fein/' — 35er SflaDc 
reifte ab; aber faum trar cr cinige ^txt auf ber ®ee, aU fid) 
ein l^eftigcr ©turm crl^ob unb bad ©djiff gcgen cine Slippc 
njarf, bag cd fdEjeiterte. !iDie Kftlid^cn SBaarcn berfanfen iui 
WlttXr aUc fcinc ®cfdl|rtcn famcn nm, unb cr felbft crrcicfttc 



ill 

mxt gcnoucr ^otf) ba§ Ufer eincr S^\cU ^ungrig, nacft mib 
oI)nc §ttlfe, ging cr ticfer in'd 8anb Ijinem, unb ttjeintc fiber 
fcin Ungturf, ate cr bott fern eine groge ©tabt crblidte, and 
bcr il^m eine 3D?enge Sintool^ner ntit gro^em ®c[d^rei entgegen 
tarn. „^tii unferm ^Untge!" rtefen fie il^m git, fc^ten i^n 
aitf eiiten l^rSd^tigen SBagcit unb fUl^rten x^n in bie ©tabt. 
@r tarn in ben fonigtic^en ^alaft, too ntan i^m einen $ur* 
t^urmantet anfegte, etn SDiabem urn feine ©tirn banb iinb 
l^u einen golbenen STl^ron befteigen Iie§* !Die SJorne^inen 
Iraten urn il^n l^er, fielen t)or il|m nieber unb fdjiuuren iin 
S?amen be^ gonjen SSoIfe« iijm ben Sib ber STrene. 

S5er neue ^iJnig glaubte Slnfang^, attc biefe §errlicf)feit 
fei ein fd^finer S:raum, bid bie gortbauer feined ©lUded i^n 
nid^t me|r gweifein lie^, bag bie n^unberbare 53egeben]^eit 
roirffid^ toal^r fei. — „^6) begreife nid^t," fpradf) er bei fid^ 
felbft, ntoa^ bie Slugen biefed tt)unberlid|en S5oIfe« bejaubert 
^at, einen nadften grembting gu feinem ^5nig gu ntac^en. 
©ie tt)iffen nid^t, tt)er id^ bin, fragen nid^t, too i6) ^erfomme, 
unb fe^en mid^ anf il^ren SE^ron ! aBa6 ift bd« fitr cine be* 
fonbcre ©itte in biefcm 8anbe?'' 

8. 

CONTINUATION. 

©0 bad^tc er unb n)urbe fo neugicrig, bie Urfadjc fciner 
5rl)ebung gu toiffen, bag cr fid& entfc^fog, einen Don ben 9Sor* 
ne^men an feinem §ofe, ber i^m ein toeifer Warm gu fcin 
fcl}ien, unt bie 3lufI5fung biefcd JWatl^fete gu fragen. — „SSe* 
gicr!" rcbete er i^n an, ntoamm Ijaht xf)x mid^ benn gu eurem 
ffiilnige gemad^t? SSJic fonntet i^r tt)iffen, ba| id^ auf eurer 
G'nfcf angefommen fei ? Unb toa^ tt)irb enblid^ mit mir iDcr* 
ben?'' — ,,§err!" antiDortete ber SScgier, „biefe ^nfet iDirb 
Don ©eiftern betuo^nt. ©ie l^abcn Dor tangen ^tittn ben 
attrndd^tigen gcbeten, il^nen ift^rtid^ einen ©oI)n Slbamd gu 
fcnben, bag cr fie regiere. ©cr Sllfmiic^tige Ijat ii)xc S3itte 
angcnommen, unb Wgt affe ^'^^re, an bem ndmlid^en STage, 
einen SKcnfc^cn an i^rer ^'nfef lanbcn. 35ie Sintool^ner cilcn 
if)m, ioie bn gcfcl^cn l^aft, freubig entgegen unb erfcnnen i^n 
fUr i^ren Dbcrl^errn ; aber feine 9{egiernng baucrt nid^t lan^ 
ger ah ein 3^a^r. S\t biefe ^txt Derfloffwi unb ber beftimmtc 
Za% tt)iebcr erfd^icnen, fo tt)irb cr feiner SBUrbc entfc^t ; man 
bcraubt i^n be« Bnigtid^cn ©d^mudEed unb legt i^m fc|(ec^tc 
S'feibcr an. ©cine Sebicnten tragen il&n init ®etDa(t an^ Ufei 



112 

aiib legcn t^n in cm bcfonbcr^ ba^it gebautc^ ®cf)iff, ba« i^ 
auf eine anberc Sn\d bringt. £)tc ^nfct ift \m)t imb Sbc ; 
iencr, bcr nac^ Dor njenigcn SEagcn cm mdd}ti9cv ^dnig mar^ 
fommt t)icr nadt an unb finbct tucber Untcvt^ancrt noc^ 
grcunbc. 9?icmanb nimmt an fcincm Unglucfc ZiitiU unb n 
mug in bicfcm toiiftcn 8anbc ein traurigc^ unb fummcrtJoQcd 
gcbcn fU^rcn, tocnn er fein ^al^r nid^t ffug angcn?cnbet ffat 
kad) ber $erbannnng be^ attcn ^5nigd gc^t ba^ iBoK htm 
iicucn, ben i^m bic Sorfcl^ung be« Slttmad^tigen icbe« QalfV 
Dl)nc Slu^nal^me fenbct, auf bie gcttjo^nlic^e SBetfc entgegcn 
unb nimmt it)n mit gteid^er ^Jrcubc, tt)ie ben tjorigen, aiif. 
S)ie«, §err I ift ba« ctoige ®efefe biefe6 9Jcid^e«, ba« fein 
SiJnig ipftl^renb feiner Siegierung auf^eben tann.*' — „®iub 
bcnn auc^ meine SJorgctnger/' fragte ber S5ntg toeitcr, „t>on 
bicfer furgen ©auer ifjrer ^ol^cit unterrid^tct gett)cfen ?** — 
rrSeincm i)on i^nen,'' anttoortcte ber SSegier, „n)ar biefe^ ®cfe^ 
ber SSergdngti^feit nnbefannt; aber einigc liegen fid| tton 
bem ®Ianje, ber i^ren "Zijxon umgab, blcnben ; fie t)erga5en 
bie traurige B^^^i^^ft unb t)erlebten i^r 3^a^r, oj^nc tocife ju 
fein, Slnbcrc beraufdfitcn fid^ in ber ©u|igfeit i^red ®iMt^ ; 
fie gctrauten fid) nicfit, an bie toUfte S^\d ju bcnfen, aue 
gur^t, bie 2lnne]^mlic^feit be« gegcntoSrtigen @enuffe« gu 
dcrbittcrn ; unb fo taumcften fie, toie 2^run!ene, au6 einct 
greube in bie anbcre, bi^ i^re S^xt nm tear unb fie in bad 
Sd)iff gctt)orfen ttjurben, SBenn ber ungtildlid^e 2^ag fam, 
fo fingen Wit an, fid) gu beflagen unb i^re SSerbtenbung gu 
bcfcufgen ; aber nun n^ar ed gn fpdt, unb fie wmrbcn o^ue 
©d^onung bem (Stcnbc Ubergeben, bad fie ertoartete unb bcm 
fie burd^ SBeid^eit nid^t l^otten t)orbeugen moHen." 

9. 

CONTINUATION. 

©iefe grgar)fung bed ©ciftcd erfiirite ben Sdnig mit gurc^t, 
r fdf)aubcrte t^or bem ®d)idfat ber Dorigcn £6nige guriidE unb 
toiinfd^te, il^rem UngtUdfe gu eutgel)en, Sr fal^ mit ©c^redfcn, 
ba§ fdjon einige aBod)en Don biefem furgen ^^al^re Derpoffcn 
marcn, unb bag cr eifen miigte, bie Ubrigen 2^age feiner hlt^ 
gicrung bcfto beffer gu niifeen. „SBeifer 9Segicr !'^ fprad^ cr g\j 
bcm ®eifte, bu l^aft mir mcin liinftiged ©t^idEfat unb bie lurge 
•Cauer meiner Kniglic^en 2JJad^t tntttdt ; aber id^ bittc bic^, 
[age mir a\\6), n)ad icb tl)un mu6, lucnn id) bad Cfenb me^ 



v» 



113 

Rer SJorgfiuflcr t)cnnctben toxUj' -— ,,grimicre bid), ^crr !• 
anttoortctc bcr ®ctft, „ba§ in nacft auf unferc 3^nfcl gcfom* 
men bift ; bemt cben fo totrft in toicbcr J^inau^gctjcn unb nic* 
male guractfcJ^rciL G^ ift olfo nur ein cinjiged 2KitteI miJg* 
fid|, bcm SDiangct boriubcugen, bcr in jcncm Sanbe bcr SSer^ 
bnnnung bro^t : tDcnn bu eS namlid^ fru(|tbar mad^ft unb mtt 
gintoo^ncrn bcfefecft. 5Dic« ift nod^ unfcren ©cfefecn t)er. 
gfinnt, unb beinc Untertl^ancn finb bir fo t)oUfommcn gel^or* 
fam, ba§ fie l^ingc^cn, too bu fie l^infcnbeft. ©d^idc dfo 
cine STOcngc Slrbcitelcutc l^iniiber imb tag bie h)itftcn gclbcr 
in fruc^tbare Slcdcr t)crn)anbeln ; bane ©tdbte unb aSorratl)^- 
I)aufer unb ijcrforgc fie mit alien notl^bilrftiflcn Ccben^mittcln, 
aWit (Sinem SBort : bercite bir ein nene^ ^cid^, beffen Sin* 
h)o^ncr bid^ nad^ beiner SSerbannung mit greuben aufnefimcn. 
abcr cile, lag Icincn 5lugen6IidE ungenU(jt ijoriiber gel^en ; 
benn bie ^eit ift furj, unb je me^r bu gum Slnbau beiner fiinf* 
tigcn SBolinung t^uft, befto gfttdlid^cr toirb bein 5lufentl)att 
bort fein* ISDenfe, bein ^^al^r ift-morgen f^on um, unb nli^je 
beine greil^cit toie ein !Iuger glil^tting, bcr bem 3Serberben 
entgel^en toiii. SBenn bu meinen 9?atl) tjcrad^teft ober gau* 
berft, fo bift bu tjerloren, unb langefi Sfenb ift bein 8ooe," 

£)er Sonig tear ein Huger 3Kann, unb bie 3icbe bc^ @ei^ 
fte« gab feiner (Sntf^tie|ung unb feiner Sll^dtigfeit gliigel. 
gr fanbte fogleid^ cine SKenge Untertl^anen ah: fie gingen 
mit greuben unb griffen ha^ SJerf mit 6ifer an* 35ie 3^nfel 
fing an fidf) gu Derfcfjonem, unb el^e fed)6 3Konben ijergangcn 
waren, ftanben fc^on ©tSbte auf il^ren blitl^enben 2luen 
JDeffen ungead^tet lieg bcr S'onig in feinem @ifer md)t nac^r 
cr fanbte immer mel^r (5in.lt)o|ner l^iniiber; bie folgcnben 
toaren nod^ freubiger, ate bie erften, ba fie in ein fo too^I 
angebauteS ?anb gingen, ba^ i()re greunbe unb 5lnbenr)anbteu 
beti)o^nten» 

10. 

THE END. 

Unterbeffen lam bae gnbe beS ^^al^re^ immer nai)er. ©ic 
Dbrigen ^bnige I)atten t)or biefem SlugenbfidEe gegittert, biefer 
fa^ i^m mit @el|nfu(^t entgegen; benn er ging in ein 8anb, 
mo er fid^ burc^ feine Huge 2^^atigfeit cine bauembc S33o]^* 
nung gcbaut I)attc. — ©er beftimmte Stag erfd^ien enblid^, 
Der S)cinig tourbe in feinem ^alafte ergriffen, fcine§ 5Dia* 
bem§ unb feiner fbnigiidE|cn Sfeibung beraubt unb auf ba3 



114 

RuiocrmeibUd^c ©d^iff gcbrad^t, ba« il^n m^ fcincm SPerban* 
fiungSortc ful^rtc, ^aum tear cr abcr am Ufcr bcr ncuen 
O^nfcl gclanbct, afe i^m bic Sintool^ner mtt grcubcn cutgcgcn 
eitten, i^n mit grower &ju cm^jfingcn/ unb fcin §au|rt ftatt 
|cnc« !J)iabcm«/ bcffcn fierrlid^fcit nur cin 3^o^r toft^rtc, nrit 
etncm un6mDcIHi^en ©lutncnfranjc fd^mildtcn* SDcr 2ltt 
mSd^tigc bcto^ntc feme SBei^^cit : gr gob il^m bic Uuftcrb:» 
lid^fett feincr Untert^anen unb mac^te i^n gu i^rem cioigen 
Sonige. 

©er reid^e, njol^Itl^atigc SKanii ift ®ott ; ber ©f(at)e, ben 
fern §err f ortfenbct, ift ber SKcnfiS^ bei feiner ®eburt ; bic 
3nfe!, too cr antanbet, ift bic S33eft ; bic Sinttjo^ner, bic iljm 
freubig entgegcn fommen, finb bie Sttern, bic fiir ben nacften 
ffieincnben forgen* !Der 3Sejier, ber il^n toon bem trourigcn 
Sd^lcffal, bad it)m beuorfte^t, unterri^tet, ift bie SBciS^ett. 
Da« Soi)X feiner 9tcgierung ift bad menf^fi^c 8eben, unb 
bie tDilfte ^'nfef, iDOl^in cr gcfiil^rt toirb, bic fiinftigc SBcIt. 
Sie Slrbeitdleute, bie cr bal^in fenbct, fmb bie gnten SBcrfc, 
bie cr tt)a^renb fcined 8eben6 berrid^tet. !iDie S'Cnigc aber, 
tDcI^c tot il^m ba^ingegangen finb, o^nc fiber bad Ungliid, 
bad il^ncn brol^tc, nad^gnbenfen, finb jenc tl^iJrid^ten Siyknfd^cn^ 
bie fi(^ bfod mit irbifc^en greuben befc^Sftigen, ol^ne an ifyc 
8eben nad^ bem S^obe gu benfen; fie ttjcrbcn mit ett)igem 
Slenb bcftraft, ttjcil fie bor bem S^I)rone ht^ Stffmttc^tigen mit 
^iinben crfc^cinen, bie an guten SBerfcn leer finb* 



VOCABULA R Y. 



1. 

^(^atmetflct, trcftsurer ; .girtcnjiab, slicpIierd's-stafF; 5(mt, office ; fi<J| 
fctnpox^ti^wingcn, to rise ; tcrllagcn, to accuse ; bcraubcii; to rob ; ^i^a^ 
treasure ; ^ojibarfcitcn, trinkets ; ©crbcrgcn, to hide ; ®ecobibt, vanlt ; 
»crfc^>cn, to provide ; bcfcl^en, to examine ; crflaunt, surprised ; (dnblic!^^ 
rural ; (Etrc^{cf|cl, chair of straw ; .girtcnjldtc, cane-flute ; «6irtcntaf^C| 
pbophord's-bag ; ^^utcrt, to look after ; (S^laf; sleep ; gte^cn, to attract; 
^of, court ; gubringcn, to spend ; bcr Dorigc Stanb, the former state ; 
tt)tcbcvt)olcn, to repeat; ^itt, song; l^ob, praise; <B6)bp^CXf Creator; 
fricblid), peaceably; •gccrbc, flock; vaterd^c SlurcH; native fields; 
ergumt, angr}- ; vcrlcunibcn, to slander; cbcl, excellent; iimamicn, te 
embrace. 



J 



116 

2. 

SRdubcr, robber ; ntorbcn, to murder ; vlunbcnu to plunder, to rob 
Itoftbarfcitcn, valuable things; <&dl}le, cavern; ichew&mittd, victuals; 
fort, gone ; ©urf(!^e, fellow ; tobtcn, to kill ; untcrtocgg, on the road ; 
©cfd^rte, companion; tctgiftcti, to poison; bcT)oltcn, to keep; ®i\t, 
poison; taum, scarcely; txttcti, to enter; lufpringen, to rush upon; 
Veld}, dagger ; butd^bol^rcii, to pierce ; jeftifj; violent ; • i^ci(!bnam, 
«orpse ; auftjaufcn, to accumulate. 

3. 

^pVLX, trace; »?ctfd^tt)mbctt, to disappear; fftitUx, knight; »cm(n» 
Ont, to spend ; Joctft^oncnt, to adorn ; ^ilgcr, pilgrim ; Sflad^t^crbcrf^c, 
right's-lodging; obttJcijcn, to refuse; Uo^iQ, haughtily; ©aft^fof, 
iun; %taQtf question; tocitcr f^c^^cn, to go on his way; jugebftl, 
grant ; bctooftnctl, to inhabit ; ®aft, guest ; \cix(ii^, indeed ; licbcr, 
rather ; •pimmcl, heaven ; ctt)lg/ eternal, everlasting j SBol^nung, habi- 
t ition ; crlangcit; to acquire ; gcirdl^rcti, to grant ; fur bic Solgc, afte 
wards ; Vuoi&lftjdtig, charitable. 

4. 

vitrcngc, rigor; SBinter, winter; frontm, good-natured; i^anb* 
I mm, peasant; ols ob, as if; jutrauli^, confidently; frcunbli(i^/ 
f.dendly; SBobiiung, house, dwelhng; au^vSexi, to pick up; fflro* 
[jimcti, ^rumqcTt, crumbs; Srul^trng, spring; fianb, country; ®es 
lu{(^, bushes; ft^ bclaubcn, to leaf, to cover themselves with leaves ; 
f tttjiicgcn, to fly away ; baucn, to build ; 5JicJt, nest ; fr6^li(^>, joyful ; 
biebene^rcn, to return; abcrmoliS, again; tnitbringcn, to bring along 
with one; um^crjc^aueti; to look about; anfc^cn,to look at; Butrauett; 
( onfidence ; crtDCCfcn, to arouse ; crjcugcti, to produce. 

5. 

(SJcbictcn, to order; ^nedjt, servant; SBitttoe, widow; k^ertreibcHi 
10 expel; idf)rlic!^, annual: ^iwi, rent; ©crjielf^en, to tarry, stay; cr* 
barmen, to have pity; Jnranf bamicbcr licqcrt, to be ill; flc^^cn, to 
implore; tjcrflofcrt, to expel; ©cfcM, order; dnbem, to change; 
e« }ci bcnn, except; <Bd)ViiOf debt; bitter(i(3(), bitterly; $jlcge, care, 
nursing; ^crbienfl, gain; tjcrjcl^rcn, to cons^ime; t^cr^tnbem, to hinder; 
^ii) locqtocnbctt, to turn away; ©artcn^aus, summer-house; fi^ tcg6t, 
tolieiown; $olflcr, cushion; ni^cit, to repose; ppcgctt, to use, to 
be in the habit; f^tout, sultry, verj' hot; bicl)t, close by; jlicflcn, 
to flow, to run; ©trom, river; tcrbrciten, to spread; ^ul)lung, 
coolness; (BtiHc, quiet; fiuft, nir; pc^ rcgcn, to move; ©cliSpcL con- 
tinual lisping; ^(i^ilf; reed j Ufcr, bank'^ tonen gtci(i(;, to sound like, 
fco resemble: ©etoinfel, whming; unru^tg, restless; bama^, then; 
^fordjcn, to listen; $Rau((i^ctu rustling; bduci^tcn, to seem; Ocjiabe, 
shore; imcnbUc!^, endless; fufyxoahcn, to toss about; JDcnncr, thun- 
der; ©ctoittcr, thunderstorm; ^eric^t, judgment; loente^vnen, to 
hear; eilcn, to hasten; nIrgcnbS/ nowhere j untcrbcfjcn, in the mean 
time ; ^inauf jicT)cii, to come up : gctoaWg, violent* Unmutl^, depressed 
spirits; uml)ertDanbeIn/ to walk to and fro; ]^tnt\)cgjicl(|cn, to pasi 



116 

iway; juwibcr toctben, to be disgusted; gcnicf en, to enjoy; tauf((tm. 
to rustle ; <^ii^, heat ; gicbcr, fever ; bumpf, dull, hollow ; Xofetti 
uoise , ucrfd^^eibcrt, to expire. 

6. 

!^anbmann, couutryman; mitbrmgett; to bring along with one 
^\ix^\6)f peach ; tot^lic^, reddish ; f&adtn, cheeks ; jart, tender . 
g(aum;down; »crt^cilcn, to divide; ©d^laffdmmerlcin, little bedroom; 
((^mecfcn, to taste, to like ; fauBctUd^ unb ]a.n\t, delicious and Bvr^et 
at the same time ; ®cf(^)macT/ ta«te; ©teiit, stone* f orgf am, carefully ; 
fcniDaldrcn, to keep; ex^ici)cn, to raise; fiauS\)altcxi\a), economical j 
3ufunft, future ; forgcit, to t^ike care ; 9e|tcmctt; to become ; aufcffcn 
to eat up; fortWcrfeU; to throw away; §dlfte, half* jcrfc^mcljcn, U 
melt; jlDar, to be sure* Hug/ wise; na6) fmbli(3()ci: 2Bcijc, childlike; 
^anbeln, to act;^tug^cit, prudence, wisdom; SRaum, room; begin: 
nen, to begin ; fammetn, to gather, to pick up ; aufnopfcn, to open ; 
iKcxn, kernel; fc^utteln, to shake; bet»a^rcn, preserve; unbefangcn, 
unaffected ; oifcn, frankly ; ©cbrauc^, use ; H^rdne, tear. 

7. 

©utt^dtig, Kmd, charitable;^ fd)cn!en, to gi^^e, to present; <B(3^iff, 
ship; !6Plic^, precious; auSniftcn, to fit out, to equip; fcgeli), to 
sail ; tou4>cm, to make profit ; ©cWinn, gain ; faum, scarcely ; (sec, 
sea; b^^ig, violent; Stutm, storm; et^ebeit; to rise; £U^pe, cliff; 
jcbcitcrri; to wreck ; ^crfinfcU; to sink ; ©efdbrte, companion ; uitis 
rommctt, to perish; crrcic^cn, to reach; mit genauer SRot^, narrowly; 
Ufcr, shore ; nacft, naked ; <&uifc, help ; ticfcr l^incinge^en, to plunge 
into, to proceed farther; fcni; far, distant; erbUcfen, to perceive; 
SO^cngc, crowd ; cntgcgcn tommen, to come to meet; ^qH, prosperity ; 
blessings • 2Bagen, carriage ; Mantel, cloak ; befletgen, to ascend ; 
tie IBomcbmctt, the nobles ; um t^n ^ertreten, to surround him; ®ib, 
oath; anfangS, in the beginning; ^cxxliii)teitf splendor; Sfraum, 
dream; gortbauct, continuation ; tounbcrbar, wonderful ; ^egebenbcit^ 
event, adventure* tounberUdf), strange; bejaubem, to enchant; Sieinb. 
ling, stranger; befonbere, singular; Sittc, custom. 

8. 

Slcugicrig, curious; Urfad)e, cause, reason; (Sr^ebung, elevation; 
9liijl6fung, solution; 9ldtbfc(, riddle; xons toixi au« mir ioerben, wbai 
will become of me ; ©cifl, spirit; bettJOl^ncn, to inhabit; aUmd^tig, 
almighty ; lanben, to disembark ; entgcgeneilen, to hasten towards ; 
crfcnncn, to recognize, to acknowledge ; -Dberbcrr, sovereign ; fRegie< 
nmq, goverament; baucm, to last; ttcrjiicgcn, to pass; toicbcr en 
jc^ciucu, to reappear • 2Burbe, dignity ; cntjc^cn, to depose* beraubcn, 
to deprive ; ^Q)mvii, ornaments * \du)1 unb obe, desert and desolate ; 
mdd}tig, powerful; Untcrti^an, subject; Xljcil, part, interest; himmcr- 
t>oIl, sorrowful; SScrbannimg, banishment; SSorfel^ung, providence; 
5ludnaf)mc, exception ; aufncpmcn, to receive ; tjorig, preceding ; 9(lci(^, 
kingdom; aufl)cbcn, abolish; SSorgdngcr, predecessor; ^auet, dura- 
tion; ^o^cit, sovoreiojnty ; SScrgdnglidjfcit, transientness ; @(an), 
tplondor; blcubcn, to Mind; Sufunft, future; vcrlcbcn, to pas«, U 



117 

apend ; Bcraufd^cn, to intoxicate ; (Eufiigtcit, sweetness ; ^ gctrauen, tc 
dare; $(uncl)mli(^fcit, delight, sweetness; acgcntt)5rti<|, present; ®cnuf 
enjoyment ; Dcrbittcvn, to embitter; tauntCUl, to stagger, to pass ; trun 
fen, tipsy ; urn j^in, to be passed ; 93crBlcnbung, blindness, fascination • 
(cufjCtt; to sigh ; (£d)onung, forbearance, mercy ; Slcnb/ misery ; ubcr 
gcbcn, to deliver ; t?crbcugcn, to prevent. 

9. 

(irjaljlung, recital, story; erfullen, to fill; gurucfidjattbcnt, to tremble. 
Ec&ictial, fate; cntgcl^cn, to escape ; ©^rcdfcti, fright; bie ufcrigcn, tlu 




'.nac^cn, to fertilize ; befc^n, to fill ; t^ergcnnen, to permit ; Mmommcn, 
perfect ; gc^orfam, obedient ; SlrbcitSlctttc, workmen ; gclb, field ; Sldfcr, 
field ; baiicn, to build ; 93orrat]^§]^au5. magazine ; tjcrforgctt/ to provide ; 
not^burf tiq, necessary; ^cbcnSmittcl, victuals; l>ereiten^ to prepare; 
Uonibcrg^cn, to pass; ungcnu^t, without profit; $(nbau, culture; 
SSoI^nung, habitation, dwelling; Slufcntl^alt, stay, residence; SScts 
bcrbcri; ruin, destruction ; »crad;ten, to despise ; SRat!^; advice ; jaubcm, 
to tarry; !^co*, fate; SRcbc, discourse, speech; (5nt|(i^Uci§ung, resolu- 
tion; i^dtigfcit, activity; gtugcl, wing; baS 3Berf angmfcH; to set to 
work ; (SifcV, zeal ; flcl^cn, to be ; bluljcub, blooming ; §(uc, pasture ; 
bcfjcn ungcad^tct, notwithstanding; nac^blajjcn, to relent; angcbaut, 
cultivated; 5tocmanbtc, relations. 



10. 




table; SBcrbannung«ort, exile ; ^au^jt, head; toal^rcn, to last^ un^cr* 
Welfliq^, never-fading ; Slumcnfram, wreath of flowers ; fc!^mu«fcn, to 
adorn; bclo^ncn, to reward; Unflcrwi^fcit, immortality; t\d\.^^ eternal, 
everlasting ; fortfcnben, to send away ; ©cburt, birth j SBcU, 



world 



tocinen, to weep ; bc^orticl^em to await ; untcrrid)tcn, to mstruet ; 2Bcrf, 
work; vcrridfetcn, to do; nacipbcnfcn, to reflect; t^oricJ^t, fooli8)i; ii^ifd^, 
worldly; bcjc^^aftlgm, to occujy; lc<t/ emp^ 



118 



COLLECTION OF MUCH USED PHRAP15!Si 



L 



Thanks to God ' 

I owe it to you, 

God forbid! 

would to God! 

very well, I agree to that, 

directly, 

presently, by and by, 

this minute, 

to-morrow, then! 

as quickly as possible, 

as soon as possible, 

at the latest, 

at the most, 

to have done, 

never mind, 

come for it, send for it, 

all in all, 

by the by, 

just in time, 

importunely, 

about nothing at all, 

not by far, 

have done with it! 

by degrees, by little and little, 

by ourselves 

heedlessly, 

by turns, 

it is my turn, 

by snatches, 

to my taste, 

mcthinks, 

in my way, 



©ott fei S)an!l 

x(i) )7erban!e e^ btr; 

UtDai)xt ©ott ! 

toollte ®ott 1 

gut, baS la^ ic^ gelten, 

iejt Qkx6) ; 

fogIei(i& ; 

Dcn Sliigcnbficf; 

auf Tttorgenl 

fo fd^nett al§ mogli^ ; 

auf g clficfte ; 

fpdteftcn^; 

^od^ftenS ; 

fcrtig fcin; 

bag tl^ut nid^t^ ; 

^olen SieeS, laffen 6ice^ M^ 

SUeS jufammen genotnmen ; 

ba fddt ntir ein ; 

gur red^tctt 3cit ; 

5ur Unseit; 

urn md)t^ unb mibcr nid^tiS ; 

bet iveitetn nid^t; 

^orc auf bamit! 

nad^ unb nad^; 

untcr toier 2(ugcn ; 

ol^nc Ueberlegung; 

med&fcl^meife, nad^ bcr SRci^e; 

bie ^ei\)t ift an ntir ; 

ftildftocifc; 

nad^ nteinent ©efd^madte; 

nad& nictncm 93ebfln!cn; 

nad& mciner Hrt; 



119 



(vcll-grounded, 

among ourselves, 

anwillingly, 

till I see yoa again, 

by one's self, 

to the right, to the left, 

purposely, 

delightful, 

as usual, 

for my part, 

joke apart, 

Cheap, 
pitiful, 

against my inclination, 
unheard of, 
not to be believed, 
with a loud voice, 
with a low voice, 
what is the use of that 7 
straight along, 
partly — partly, 
that is to say, 
that is yet to be seen, 
to be, to do, 
at the end of a year, 
quite sure, 
in case of need, 
f the worst comes to the worst, 
repeatedly, 
at random, 
at break of day, 
at night-fall. 
In the heat of summer, 
in the cold of winter, 
sheltered from the rain, &c. 
a^ sunrise, 



2. 



griinblic^; 

unlet un^; 

ungem; 

auf SBieberfc^en ; 

fiir fid^ aUcin; 

red^t3, \\nU ; 

tntt %U\^, abfici&tn^; 

5um Gntjuden; 

lute gemo^nlid^; 

toa^ mid& betrifft; 

Sd^erj bei 6eite. 

tool&Ifeil; 

junt Grbarmeti ; 

luiber SBiQen; 

uncrl^ort; 

unglaublid^; 

mit lauter Stimme; 

ttiit leifer Stimme; 

moju ba^? 

gerabe §u; 

t^cil3— t^eiU; 

baS l^ei^t; ndmlic^ ; 

bal fragt fid^, 

fid^ befinbcn ; 

nad^ SBerlauf cincj3 3a^re5; 

gans gcmi^ ; 

int Sflotl^fadc ; 

tocnn*^ §unt Sleujcrften fommt; 

5U loicbcrMten SUlalen; 

auf^ (Scratl^eiDO^I; 

betnt Slnbrud^ be5 S^agcig, 

htx einbred^enber %i6it\ 

mitten im 6ommer; 

im l^drteften SQBinter; 

gcfd^ujt t)or bem Segen 2C. ; 

mit 6onnenaufgang. 



120 



3. 



To believe him 
to hear him, 
to speak candidly, 
to see him, you would take 
him for a common man, 

11 but two dollars, 
he is fond of flowers, 
as far as you can see, 
by dint of reading, 
without his parents' know 

ledge, 
beginning from the first; 
from afar, 
by day, by night, 
even and odd, 
suppose, 
by force, 
thunderstrucli, 
willingly, 
pray, 
candidly, 
in good humor, 
in bad humor, 
as well as one can, 
more and more, 

In all my life, ever, 

never to be forgotten 

all at once, 

indeed? 

so much the more, 

further, 

from the bottom, 

by word of mouth, 

with all my heart. 



4. 



toenn man ilf^in glauben foil; 
hjenn man \\)n fo reben f)i>xt; 
offenJ^erjig gcfagt ; 
hjenn 6ie il^n fo fel^en, fo fell 

ten 6ie il^n fur cinen gemci 

nen 3Mann l^altcn ; 
UB auf gmei 3:i^alcr ; 
cr ift ein greunb toon Srumcn, 
fo tocit, aU ba3 ©cfid&t rcid;!; 
burd^ toiele^ ficfen; 
df)M SGBiffcn feiner ©Item ; 

oom erften an gered&net; 

r>on ffieitem ; 

am %aQe, be^ 3la(i)t» ; 

gleid& unb ungleid^ ; 

gefe^t; 

mit ©eiualt; 

mie r>om 5)cnner geriil^t ; 

gem; 

id^ Uttc ; 

aufrid&ttg ; 

guter Saune ; 

ubkx fiaune ; 

fo gut man !ann , 

immer mel^r. 

in meinem Seben, toon ic ^cr; 

untocrge&Iid^ ; 

auf einmal; 

h)ir!«(3&? im (h-nfte? 

urn fo me^r; 

ferner; 

oon ©runb au^ ; 

munbltd^; 

oon ganjem .^ergen; 



121 



what are you about? 

what is the matter ? 

by name, 

by sight, 

for want of money, of time^ 

you have no reason, 

woll, what are you talking 

about ? 
anew, 

every year, every day, 
by writ, by rote, 
(to be) on the point (to be) 

gomgy 

on the very spot, 

in the first place, in the se- 
cond, in the last place, 

in the mean time, 

in some way, 

on the way, on the road, 

in return, 

in the open air, 

in broad day-light, 

in the open street. 

The other day, 

excessively, 

topsy-turvy, 

here enclosed, 

sooner or later, 

confusedly, 

whether you like or no 

you have hurt me, 

far from the point, 

on purpose 

not by far, 

to be sure, 

what is still worse. 



5. 



toaB l^aben 6ie toot? 

hja^glbt'^? ma^iftlo-S? 

bem 9lamen nad^; 

toon 5ltifel&en ; 

ax^ SUlangcl an (Selb, an 3ci^ 

Sic l^aben nid&t Urfad&e; 

nun, ttjotoon ift bic 9lcbc? 

toonSReuctn; 
jdl^rfid^, tdgKd&; 
fd^riftlid^, au^toenbig ; 
im Scgriff fein ; 

an Dtt unb 6teffe; 

junt ©rftcn, gum 3itoeiten, |um 

imterbeffen; 
cinigcrtna^en ; 
untertocg^ ; 
bagegen, gum ^rfa^c ; 
in ber freien £uft ; 
ant l^eHen S^agc; 
auf freter Strafe. 

nculid^ ; 

fiber aHe SJla^en ; 

unterft gu obetft, fopfubct; 

beifolgenb, inlicgcnb ; 

iibcr furj ober lang ; 

burd^einanber; 

man mag iDolfen ober nid^t ; 

8ie babcn mir mel^ getl^an ; 

ineit gefe^lt; 

abftd^tUd^ ; 

hex toeitem nid^t; 

gen)i& ; 

h?a§ ncdj) ^d^Iimmer ifl'; 



122 



nothing of consequence, 
somewhere, anywhere, 
nowhere, not anywhere, 
elsewhere, 

are we going anywhere ? 
something hurts me, 
what is your pleasure ? 
If you please, 
it is of no moment, 
what does it matter ? 
done! 

in what do you amuse your- 
self? 
I amuse myself in reading, 
I like fruit very much, 
he likes wine better than beer, 
nor I neither, 

Heaven be praised, 
to pass in a carriage, on horse- 
back, 
that does well, 
that will not do, 
he is to come home, 
you are very much to be pitied, 
there are my scissors, 
some one rings the bell, 
he has done you no harm, 

that is what he told me, 
thus did I answer him, 
that is just what you are, 
in this way we can arrange it, 
[ am cold, warm, hungry, 

thirsty, 
what ails you ? what is the 

matter with you ? 



nidji^ t7cn S3cbeutung ; 

irgcnbiuo ; 

nirgenb^; 

anber^iDo; 

ge^cn toir irgenbtoo l^in? 

eS t^ut ntir.etipaSme^; 

toa^ beliebt? 

fein 6ic fo gut; 

e^ ift ntd^t ))on ^ebeutung ; 

luaS fd^abet eS? 

tcpp! abgemad^tf 

mornit t^ertretben 6ie ftd^f bic 

3eit? 
id) uniex^alte m\6) mit £efen ; 
id) effe fe^r gem Obft; 
cr trin!t liebcr SBciti aU 5Bier; 
id) and) md)t 



6. 



S)cnt ^itntncl fei J)anf ; 
toorbei fasten, reitcn ; 

ba^ ge^t gut; 

boS ge^t md)t; 

cr foil nad) $aufe rommen ; 

8tc fmb iDo^l xed)t gu bcflagen ; 

ba ift mcitic Bd)ctxe; 

man fltngclt; 

er f)at S^ncn tiidfjta ju Seibe 

gctl^an; 
ba^ fagtc cr ntir; 
golgenbcg antwortetc id) i^m, 
fo fmb ©ic ; 

fo lonnen toir el ntad&cn; 
mtd^ friert, tnir ift toaxm, mxi 

IJiuitgcrt, mid) burftet ; 
loaS fc^rt 3^t^cn ? 



123 



£ am sick, 

be has a competency, 

E am much concerned about it, 

to have sometbin^: on one's 

mind, 
you have but to speak, 
ho needs but follow me, 
you have but to come for me 

about siz o'clock, 
I cannot but praise him, 
you may depend upon it, 



mtr ifl {ibel; 
cr ^at f cin Slusf ommen ; 
ei liegt tnir am ^crjcn; 
etmaS auf bent <ger5en (^aben 

8ic burfen nur rcbcn ; 

cr barf tnir mir folgen; 

Sic burfen ntid^ nur gegeu fed^l 

U^r ab^olcn; 
x6) !ann i^n nur lobcn; 
Sic !5nnen fi6) barauf tocrlaffcn. 



7. 



It is a pity, 

I know nothing about it, 

I never saw the like of it, 

there are eighteen of them, 

there are three people, want- 
ing to speak to you, 

what is the matter there ? 

three months ago, siz months 
ago, fifteen months ago, 

I have not seen you for such 
a long time, 

it will be crowded, 

there is nothing to say against 

it, 
It is impossible to bear it, to 

make him hear reason, 

IS there anything more beau- 
tiful than this garden ? 

he is a man of his word. 

Diy daughter got the fever 
yesterday, 

wo shall certainly^ have a 
thunderstorm 



e^ift 6d&abc; 

16) mei^ ntci^tiS ba))on; 

bclgleid^cn ^abe id) nie gcs 

fel&en; 
e^ finb i^rer ad&tje^n ; 
c5 t)crlangen brei Menfd&en, 

©ic su fpred^en ; 
h)aS gibt eS ba ? 
t)or brei SOlonaten, cinem fatten 

^a^x, funf SSiertelja^ren ; 
\6) l&abc 6ic fd(;on fo lange nid^ 

gefc^en ; 
c^ h)irb t)oU hjcrbcn ; 
bagegen ift nid(^t^ ju ^a^tn; 

cS ift ntd^t moglid^ avi^uf)aUm, 

t^n 3ur SBemunft ju bringcn, 
gibt cS ctmal 6d&5nereS aU 

biefen ®arten? 
cr ift cin 3Slann r>on 3Bort; 
mcine 2:od^tcr befam geflcrn 

bal Sicbcr; 
irir befommen gemi^ ciii @e« 

n?itter : 



124 



he lias had one, and you shall 

have one likewise, 
I have but glanced at it, 



er f)at tin^ befommen unb 6U 
foUen an^ ein^ l^aben; 

i^ ^aht nut cinen 23Hct bawiuf 
gettjorfen. 



8, 



They are already gone for it, 

how far have you got t 

I do not know what I am 

about, 
you have hit at the right point, 
that is too much. 
It is the same with all animals, 
it will be of no use, 
I have said so all along, 
what is to be done ? 
I do not know, which way to 

turn, 
come along? 
what do 3'^ou want, 
what is the name of tbat ? 
what is the meaning of that ? 
to faint, 
it is not to me, you must say 

that, 
it is, because I have been ill, 

why, he did not know him. 



tnan bcforgt e3 fd&on ; 

tok hjeit finbSie? 

id) meip nid^t, tooxan id) hin; 

©ic l^abene^ getroffen; 

bag gel&t gu toeit ; 

fo ift eg tnit alien S^IS^ieren; 

eg ttjirb nid&tg l[>elfen ; 

i(i) ^aie eg invmer gef agt; • 

mag foil gcfdf^elE'cn? 

id^ iDei^ ttid^t, too^n id) m\6) 

toenben foU ; 
hmm tnit! 
tDa§ toollen Sie? 
h)ie I|)ei6t bag ? 
mag l^etft bag ? 
cl^nmdd&ttg mcrbcn 
mix muffen 6ic ba^ md)\ 

fagen; 
bag ntad&t, meil id/ fxant ge» 

mcf en bin ; 
er fannte il^n ja nid^t. 



9. 



I am very glad of it, 

I am sorry for it, 

I am very comfortable, I feel 

very well, 
I feel very ill, 
to be well off, 
he has paid him a visit. 



eg ift ntir fel;tlieb; 
eg tlE>utmir leib; 
eg ift mit ted^t mol^l ; 

mir ift'g fc^led^t gu SMut^e; 
mo^I^abenb fcin; 
et f)at ifyn einen Sefud^ ge« 
mad)t ; 



125 



we have been tc see Mr. N. 

who is ill, 
he is coming directly, 
it is going to strike twelve 

o'clock, 
he has enlisted, 
what things are these, 
ho was just going out, 
what shall become of you ? 
don't believe it, 
have you finished the book ? 
how do you do ? 
how are you getting on 1 
it gets on well, 
that is a matter of course, 
I am going to tell you, 
what are you about ? 
he does not succeed in it, 
my honor is at stake, 

I shall come to see you, 

does this suit you ? 

this conduct does not become 

you, 
go to meet somebody, 
leave me alone, 
to be circumstantial, 

10 



h)ir l)aUn ^tmx 91. befud^t, 

berfran! ift; 
er mirb gleid& fommen ; 
e^ mirb gleid^ smolf fd&Iagen; 

er ift Sclbat gemorben ; 

mal fiir Sad&en fmb ba^? 

er mollte eben l&inaug ; 

ma^ foU au§ 3^nen toerben ? 

glauben6ie e0 janid^t; 

l;aben Sic bal S3ud^ aulgclefeir; 

tore gel&t*^? 

lute gel&t'g Ql&nen? 

e§ gc^t gut ; 

ba^ tjerftel[^t fid& i?on felbft; 

id^ milt (mug) Sl^nen fagen, 

mal fatigen Sie an? 

e3 gelingt il&m itid^t? 

nteine (S^re fte^t babei auf bem 

6piele ; 
i^ merbe 6ie befudfeen ; 
fte^t S^nen bag an ? 
biefcg 93etragen ge^iemt t\\6i 

nid&t; 
3emanbem entgegen gc(;en ; 
ge^* unb la^ mid) gufrieben; 
etmaS l^aarflein erga^Ien. 



A APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS, 

^— — " - " ^ — - - ■ II -. I — — _— ^ — ^_, 

German-and-English, and English-and-Ger- 
man Pronouncing Dictionary. 

By G. J. ADLER, A. M., Professor of the German Language and 
Literature in the University of New York. . One elegant large 
8vo voL, 1,400 pages. 

The aim of the distinguished author of this work has been to embody 
all the valuable results of the most recent investigations in a German 
Lexicon, which might become not only a reUable guide for the practical 
acquisition of the language, but one which would not forsake the student 
in the higher walks of his pursuits, to which its treasures would invite 
him. 

In the preparation of the German and English Part, the basis adopted 
has been the work of Flfigel, compiled in reality by Heimann, Feiling, 
and Oxenford. This was the most complete and judiciously-prepared 
manual of the kind in England. 

The present work contains the accentuation of every German word, 
several hundred synonymes, together with a classification and alpha- 
betic^ list of the irregular verbs, and a Dictionary of German abbrevia- 
tions. 

The foreign words, likewise, which have not been completely Ger- 
manized, and which often differ in pronunciation and inflection from 
such as are purely native, have been designated by particular marks. 

The vocabulary of foreign words, which now act so important a part, 
not only in scientific works, but in the best classics, reviews, journals, 
newspapers, and even in conversation, has been copiously supplied from 
the most complete and cop*act sources. It is believed that in the 
terminology of chemistry, mineralogy, the practical arts, commerce, 
navigation, rhetoric, grammar, mythology, philosophy, etc., scarcely a 
word will be found wanting. 

The Second or German-English Part of this volume has been chiefly 
reprinted from the work of FliigeL (The attention which has been paid 
in Germany to the preparation of English dictionaries for the German 
student has been such as to render these works very complete. The 
student, therefore, will scarcely find any thing deficient in thia Second 
Part.) 

An Abridgment of the Above. l2mo, 844 pages. 



D. APPLETON dj C0:8 PUBLICATIONS. 



GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS. 



Ollendorff's New Method of Learning to 
Read, Write, and Speak the Germaii 
Language. 

By GEORGE J. ADLER, A. M. 12mo, 510 pages. 
Key to Exercises. Separate volume. 

The German Grammar has undergone careful revision at the hands of a 
ripo scholar, whose position has made him acquainted with the wants of 
pupils in this country. He has adapted the whole to their necessities, and 
added what seemed necessary to a complete development of the subjeci 

Practical German Grammar. 

By CHARLES EICHHORN. 12mo, 287 pages. 

Those who have used Eichhom's Grammar commend it in the highest 
terms for the excellence of its arrangement, the simplicity of its rules, and 
the tact with which abstruse points of grammar are illustrated by means 
of written cjercises. It is the work of a practical teacher, who has learned 
by experience what the difficulties of the pupil are and how to remove them. 

Elementary German Reader. 

By Rev. L. W. HEYDENREICH. Professor of Languages at Bethle- 
hem. Pa. 

This is an excellent volume for beginners, combining the advantages 
of Grammar and Reader. It has received strong and cordial commenda- 
tions from the best German scholars in the country : among whom are 
Prof. Schmidt, of Columbia College, New York; William M. Reynolds, 
late President of Capitol University, Columbus, Ohio ; Edward H. Reichel, 
Prmcipal of Nazareth Hall ; W. D. Whitney, Professor of Sanscrit and 
German in Yale College, etc.. etc. 



D. APFLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS, 



Grammars for teaching English to Ger- 
mans. 

Ollendorff's New Method for Oermans to Learn to Bead, Write, 
and Spe£kk the Eng-lisli Langriiage. Arranged and adapted to Schools 
and FriTate Academies. By P. Ganda. 12mo, 699 pages. 

JBTey to the Exercises. Separate yolmne. 

Br^-an's Grammar, for Oermans to Iieam English. Edited by Frof. 
SomaxsEB. 12mo^ 189 pages. 



The Publishers have got out these volumes in view of the great num- 
ber of Germans residing in and constantly emigrating to the United 
States, with whom the speedy acquisition of English is a highly-desirable 
object. To aid them in this, the services of competent and experienced 
teachers have been procured, and the admirable Grammars named above 
are the results of their labors. 

The Ollendorff Grammar embraces a full and complete synopsis of 
English Grammar, applied at every step to practical exercises. It is con^ 
structed according to the " New Method," which has so generally ap- 
proved itself to public favor. A month's study of this volume will sup- 
ply the learner with such current idioms that he can comprehend ordi- 
nary conversation, and in turn make himself understood. 

Bryan's Course is briefer, and better adapted for primary classes and 
those whose time of study is limited. It presents the cardinal principles 
of the language, well arranged and clearly illustrated. The anomalies of 
English syntax are handled in a masterly manner, and the general treat* 
raent of the subject is such as to remove from it all difficulties by the way. 

Pronouncing German Reader. 

To which is added a Method of Learning to Read and Understand the 
German without a Teacher. By J. G. (EHLSCHLAGER, Pro- 
fessor Modem Languages in Philadelphia. 12mo, 264 pages. 

This reader is intended for beginners in the German language at a 
very early stage of their course. It devotes more space to pronunciation 
than any other grammar or reader extant, and will infallibly enable those 
who attend to its directions to read with ease and elegance. 



i>. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLIC Al IONS. 

Progressive German Reader. 

Br G. J. ADLER, Professor of the German Language and Literature in 
the University of the City of New York. 12mo, 308 pages. 

Th.Q plan of this German Reader is as follows : 

1. The pieces are both prose and poetry, selected from the best authors, 
cuid present sufficient variety to keep alive the interest of the scholar. 

2. It is progressive in its nature, the pieces being at first very short 
and easy, and increasing in difficulty and length as the learner advances. 

8. At the bottom of the page constant references to the Grammar are 
made, the difficult passages are explained and rendered. To encourage 
the first attempt of the learner as much as possible, the twenty-one 
pieces of the first section are analyzed, and all the necessary words given 
at the bottom of the page. The notes, which at first are very abundant, 
diminish as the learner advances. 

4. It contains ^1^6 sections. Th.Q first contains easy pieces, chiefly in 
prose, with all the words necessary for translating them ; the teoond, short 
pieces in prose and poetry alternately, with copious notes and renderings ; 
the ihirdj short popular tales of Grimm and others ; the fourth, select 
ballads and other poems from BUrger, Goethe, Schiller, Uhland, Schwab, 
Chamisso, etc. ; the fifth, prose extracts from the first classics. 

6. At the end is added a vocabulary of all the words occurring in the 
book. 

The pieces have been selected and the notes prepared with great taste 
and judgment, so much so as to render the book a general favorite with 
German teachers. 

Hand-book of German Literature : 

Containing Schiller's " Maid of Orleans," Goethe's " Iphigenia in 
Tauris," Tieck's " Puss in Boots," and " The Xenia " by Goethe 
and Schiller. With Critical Introductions and Explanatory 
Notes ; to which is added an Appendix of Specimens of German 
Prose, from the Middle of the Sixteenth to the Middle of the 
Nmeteenth Centuries. By G. J. ADLER. 12mo, 550 pages. 

For classes that have made some proficiency in the German language, 
and desire an acquaintance with specimens of its dramatic literature, no 
more charming selection than this can be found. Sufficient aid is given, 
in the form of introductions and notes, to enable the student to under- 
stand thoroughly what he reads. 



D. APPLET ON di CO:S PUBLICATIONS. 

Spiers and Surenne's French-and-English 
and English-and-French Pronoun- 
cing Dictionary. 

One Volume, 12mo, 973 pages. Standard Abridged Edition. From 
new and large type. 

'|1ie First Fart of this wdl-known and nniTersaHy popular work contains : 

W(Hd8 in common use ; 

Terms connected with science ; Terms belonging to the fine arts ; 

Four thousand historical names ; Four thousand Qeographical names ; 

Upward of eleven thousand w(n?dB of recent origin ; 

The pronunciation of every word according to the French Academy and the mottt 
eminent lexicographers and grammarians ; also, 

More than seven hundred critical remarks, in which the various methods of pro- 
nouncing employed by different authors are investigated and compared. 

The Second Part contains : A copious vocabulary of English words, with thc'r proper 
pronunciation. The whole is preceded by a critical treatise on French pronunciation. 

^ It embraces all the words in common use, and those in sdence and the fine arts, 
historical and g^graphical names, etc, with the pronunciation of every word according 
to the French Academy, tc^ether with such critical remarks as will bo useftd to every 
learner. It contains so ftill a compilation of words, definitions, etc., as scarcely to Ieav« 
any thing to be desired.'"— iir«to York Observer, 

Pronouncing French Dictionary, 

By GABRIEL SURENNE, F. A. S. E. 16mo, 556 pages. 

POCKET EDITION 

In the preparation of this new work, due regard has been paid to the introduction 

tr such new words and definitions as the progressive changes in the language have 

/tsndered necessary ; and for this purpose the best and most recent authorities have been 

oArefhlly consulted. It is therefore confidentiy anticipated that the volume will prove 

not only a useful auxiliary to the student, but also a convenient Pocket Companion to 

the traveller, wherever the French language is spoken. A vocabulary of proper names 

accompanies the work. 

*^ M. Surenne is a very prominent professor in Edinburgh, and all who use his book; 
may rely on having before them the purest style of the French tongue." — Ch/risUcM Zw 
ieUig^nctr. 



D, APPLETON <fc C0:8 PUBLICATIONS. 



Ollendorff's French Grammars. 



ST2ST liESSONS IN THE FBBNCH liANaXJAGE: being an Intro- 
duction to Ollendorff 's larger anunmar. By G. W. GS££N'. 16xiio, 188 pogea. 

OU[iENlK>BST>S NEW METHOD of Learning to Bead, Write, and Speak 
the French Language. Witii ftill Paradlgma of the Begular and Irregolar, Aux- 
iliary, BeflectiTe, and Impersonal Verbs. By J. L. JEWETT. 12mo, 149 pagei. 

OLLENDOBFF>S NEW BCBTHOB of Leaniing to Bead, Write, and 8p«ak 
the Frendi Language. With nomeroos Corrections, Additkwfl, and ImprGfre- 
ments, suitable for this Country. To which are added. Value's System of Freadi 
Flronundation, his Grammatical Synopsis, a New Index, and short Models of Ohh* 
mercial Correspondence. By V. VALUE. 12mo, 588 pages. 



Ollendorff's French Grammars have been before the public so long, 
and have had their merits so generally acknowledged, that it is unneces- 
sary to enter into any detailed description of their peculiarities or lengthy 
argument in their favor. Suffice it to say, that they are founded in 
Nature, and follow the same course that a child pursues in first acquiring 
his native tongue. They teach inductively, understandingly, interest- 
ingly. They do not repel the student in the outset by obliging him io 
memorize dry abstract language which conveys little or no idea to his 
mind, but impart their lessons agreeably as well as efficiently by exer- 
cises, which teach the principles successively involved more clearly than 
any abstract language can. They give a conversational, and therefore a 
practically useful, knowledge of the language ; the student is made con- 
stantly to apply what he learns. To these peculiarities is due the wide- 
spread and lasting popularity of the Ollendorff series. 

Prof. Green's Introduction, the first of the works named above, will 
be found useful for young beginners. In it are presented the fundamental 
principles of the language, carefully culled out, and illustrated with easy 
exercises. It paves the way for the larger works, preparing the pupil'i 
mind for their more comprehensive course, and awakening in it a desjre 
for further knowledge. 

Value's and Jewett's works are essentially the same, though differing 
somewhat in their arrangement and the additions that have been madeta 
the original. Some institutions prefer one, and others the other ; either, 
it is believed, will impart a thorough acquaintance with French, both 
grammatical and conversational, by an interesting process, and with but 
little outlay of time and labor. 



r 



D, AFPLETON ds C0:8 PUBLICATIONS. 



FRENCH GEAMMATIOAL WOEKS. 
Manual of French Verbs : 

Comprising the Formation of Persons, Tenses, and Moods of lh« 
Kegular and Irregular Verbs; a Practical Method to Trace 
the Infinitive of a Verb out of any of its Inflections ; Models 
of Sentences in their different Forms ; and a Series of the 
most useful Idiomatical Phrases. By T. SIMONNfi. 12mo, 
108 pages. 

The title of this yolome, given in taSL aboye, shows its scope and chanM:ter. The 
coi]Jugatlon <rf the verbs, regular as well as irregular, is the great difficulty that the 
Frencn student has to encounter; and to aid him in surmounting it, M. SimonnS has 
ap|>Iied his long experience as a teacher of the language. 

Companion to Ollendorff's New Method of 
Learning to Read, Write, and Speak 
the French Language. 

By GEORGE W. GREENE, Instructor in Modem Languages in Brown 
University. 12mo, 273 pages. 

As soon as the French student has learned enough of the verb to enable him to 
tamslate, this volume should be placed in his hands. It embraces ninety-two careAiIly- 
aelected dialogues on eveiy-day subjects, calculated to fhmiliarize the student with the 
most necessary expressions, and to enable him to converse with fluency. The dia- 
logues are Ibllowed by an important chapter on differences of idioms, in which are set 
forth those peculiarities of the language that cannot be dassifled under general rules^ 
accompanied by graifimatical hints and explanations. 

Oranunar for Teaching EngliRh to ErenchmeiL 

Grammaire Anglaise, 

D'apres le Sy^t^me d'OlIendorff, k TUsage des Fran9ais. Par 
CHARLES BADOIS. 12mo, 282 pages. 
The want of a condensed Grunmar Ibr teaching Frenchmen the EngHsh hnguag* 
long experienced by residents as well as travellers in this country, has been met by M 
Badols with this clear and practical Treatise, on the Ollendorff plan. In the course of a 
few lessons the learner is so fiimiliarized with the most necessary English words and 
■dVfflis that he can readily express himself^ and can understand ordinary conversatioD« 



J 



2). APPLETON A C0:8 PUBLICATIONS. 



French Beading Books. 



Elementary French Reader : 

With an Analytical Study of the French Language, Treatise on 
French Poetry, and a Dictionary of Idioms, Proverbs, Peculiar 
Expressions, etc. By J. ROEMER, LL. D., Pro! of theFroich 
Language and Literature in the College of the City of New York. 
12mo, 297 pages. 

** We inylte attention to this new French Header, which seems admirably adapted to 
the nfle of the student, and especially to the code of Instmction and expkmatioii ^h 
which it is introduced ; the wh<^ fonnlng, as we oonceiye, a book Qf ezeeedio^ Yalne to 
both learners and teachers, and capable of greatly fiicilitating the labors of haXtt^—Hr. Y. 
Commercial Advertiser. ' 

Roemer^s Second French Reader : 

Illustrated with Historical, Geographical, and Philological Notes. 
12mo, 478 pages. 
This YOlmne, like the preceding one, presents a seri^ of lively and entertaining ex' 
exacts, calculated to stimulate the curiosity and enH st the feehs^s^ the s<;jtolar in fliTor 
of the language. The selections are made from modem authors ezdoi^yely, and bear 
witness to the nice literary discrimination of the compiler. As a collection of elegant 
extracts, this volume is second to none; it has become a general fkyorite both with 



teachers and students. 



Aoemer's Polyglot Erencli Eeader. 

Modern French Reader : 

With a Vocabulary of the New and Difficult Words and Idiomatic 
Phrases adopted in Modem French Literature, By F. ROWAN. 
Edited by J. L. JEWETT, Editor of Ollendorff's French Method. 
12mo, 841 pages. 
One object of this yolume is to offer specimens of the French language as it if 
spoken at the present day, and presented in the works of the modem authors of France^ 
without the risk of sullying the mind of the young reader by indelicate expressions or 
allusions ; another is to flidlitate the task of the teacher by rendering the work attrac- 
Uto to the pupil; such selections hare therefore been made as will, it is hoped, be in- 
teresting and entertaining to the young reader, while at thd same time they will profn 
weiihj spedmens of Uie pecuHar style of their respective authors. 



D. APPLET ON & C0:8 PUBLICATIONS, 



Frenoh Oonversatioii and Gomposition Books. 
Guide to French Composition. 

By GUSTAVE CHOUQUET. 12ino, 297 pages. 

This Yolame is intended to serve as a reading and translation book, a text-book on 
Ebetoric, and a manual of French Gomposition and Conversation. The First Part com- 
prises a treatise on Bhetoric, written in French, but applicable to all languages which 
will discipline the mind of the learner in the elaboration of thought, and train his judg- 
ment for sound Utenuy criticism. The Second Part is devoted to Oompositton proper; 
contains analyses and models of narrations, descriptions, dissertations, letters, etc, and 
a list of subjects on which, after these models, the pupU is required to try his powers. 

Conversations and Dialogues. 

By GUSTAVE CHOUQUET. 16mo, 204 pages. 

A phrase-book is essential to those who would acquire an easy style of conversation 
in French. Such an auzlliaxy they will find in this work of Ghouquet's, which embraces 
dialogues on daily occupations and ordinary topics, involving those idiomatic expres- 
sions that most frequentiy occur. The author displays judgment in his choice of sub- 
jects, and tact in adapting himsdf to the oomprehendon of the young. With a knowl- 
edge of the phrases and idioms presented in this volume, the student can take p&rt in 
ordinary conversation with fluency and elegance. 

French as Spoken in Paris. 

. By MADAME DE PETRAO. 12mo, 252 pages. 

"Comment on parte 2k Faris,^ or how they speak French in Paris, is certainly a very 
desirabte thing to know; with the aid of this new and unique manual by Madame d« 
Peyrac, the knowledge may be gained without difficulty. Her volume is not intended 
for children, but ibr thosa who have partially acquired the language, and need only 
familiarity with an elegant style of conversation. To invest tiie subject with greater in- 
terest, the form of a domestic romance is adopted. A variety of characters are intro- 
duced, and lively tableaux of Frenoh Bfe and manners are presented. Teachers who are 
dlsaetiafled with the Beaders fhey have heretofore employed are recommended to pro- 
cure and exunAie this admirable Tolnme, which has been wannly oommeaded by 
srities and edacators. 



^ 



D. APPLET ON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS. 



Standard Beading Books for French Glasses. 



Select Poetry for Young Persons. 

By MADAME A. COUTAN. 12mo, 329 pages. 

MadAine Ck>iitBn's oollectioii, made du^g^ msDy years deroted to the fc»<w^«Tiy of 
French, embraces some of the choicest and best poetry in the language. While it is pe- 
culiarly adapted to young ladies^ schools, there is no class of students or general readers 
to whom it will not prove an acceptable and instructive companion. 

'"'- This is an admkable compilation. The selections hare been made with reference to 
purity of sentiment and poetic finish; the larger portion of the cfEiisions are among the 
best of the best authors, including the names of Lamartine, Beranger, Yictor Hugo, and 
other living poets of wide celebrity."—^. F. Commercial Advertiser, 

The Adventures of Telemachus. 

By FJfiNELON. Standard Edition edited by GABRIEL SURENNE. 

18mO) 893 pages. 

F^nelon^s world-renowned TiLxaiAqim wHl always retain its popularity as a Beader 
for French classes, on account of the purity of its style, the interest of its narrative, and 
the excellence of its moral The present edition is convenient in form, fitultiess in exter- 
nal appearance, and as correct as the editorial supervision of an accomplishsd scholar Bke 
Sttbenxk can make it. 

Yoltaire^s History of Charles XII. 

Carefully revised by GABRIEL SURENNE. 16mo, 262 pages. 
This is a neat edition of Voltaire's valuable and popular History of Charles XII., King 
of Sweden, published under the supervision of a distinguished scholar, and well adapted 
to the use of schools in this country. 

New Testament in French. 

According to the version of J. F. OSTERVALD. 12mo, 340 pages. 

Those who desire a neat, convenient, and Mthftil version of the New Testament in 
French, either for school classes or home use, win find it in this edition, which has un- 
dergone the supervision of Otktervald, and has the sanction of the University of Edln* 
burgh. 






i 



• > '^^ 






f^-t^ 



* . i < 






/6 ;'^ 



WlycCtAf • 



6 







7 lAricliA^ ' 



9 



-K/ 



» t 






.-x-u^ f-^ A ^/'-^^.^^ 






^t:.^> 



I » 






. iC cCv' .^^ c-^/t*:. 'i 



/ 



/It. 



^ 



.''. • \fC*. tf ' ■ L C(,\:(<L 



'"■-■ : (^ ri-'fi ^-O' ■ 



c-/ 



tL 



1 



:-t-c ^'^ 'int. i 






'< r C / ' / ,^ . : ' ^' Oi- ' 






» t < 



t i a: 



-' : ^ 



Cr- 



>V\A^^ .-{^^1 '.'^C 



. /"/ 



1 1 







I 



(y{A.AJiyfr^ 



iAA>[AA^ I ft 



j V 




/LAyiy*^ 







Vs-' ^ 



IjLA-^ 




\J3:>-. u>-ci/. 



• 




'^^i^j^/^*'^-^ 



v 

VI 



ij 



BTANDABD ITALIAN WOSKS, 



\ 



\ I 



\ 



OUtndorff '■ Spanidi Grammar. A New Metbod of Learnings to 

Bead, Write, and Speak the Spanish Language ; with Piactlcal 
Boles for Spanish Pronunciation, and Models of Social and 
Commercial Correspondence. By M. YBLAzqusa and T. Suoh- 
TsA, 13mo. 660 pages. 

KEY TO THE EXSBCISBS. Separate yolame. 

8eoaii«'f Keuman and Baretti'a Spmlih^md-Ttngligli and 
BugUsh-and-Spanish Pronouncing Dictionary. By Mabiano 
Yblazques ds la Cadkna, Professor of t^e Spanish Language 
and Literature in Columbia College, N. Y., and Corresponding 
Member of the National Institute, Washington. Large 8to. 
1,800 pages. Neat type, line paper, and strong binding. 



In the re^i 
6an<t woi 
in both^srac 
both ijK theii ' 



rork by Velazquez, more than eight thou- 
ioms, asd fSn^iar phrases have been acjded. It gires 
Ivalents of the words in generafuse, 
nSBVilivicar acceptations. 



J 



Prononnoing Minllh Diotionary. An. Abridgment 
Velazqnez^s Lar^Dlctiomry, intended for Schools, Colleges, 
arfd Tr^v^aturf^ in two ^^s. I. Spanish-English; n. Eng- 
lish-Spanish. By MABfc^b Velazqubz db la Cadbna. 18mo. 

Velaw^l^Fny InApdnotlon to Spanidi Conversation. By 

MiSjWO*Yna|<g^!^ db la Cadena. 18mo. 100 pagea 

f Keti JS^niBll Baader. Consisting of Extracts from 

the Works of t^e most approved Authors, in Prose and Verse, 
arranged in pridg^ressive order ; with Notes Explanatory of the 
Idioms and moAMifficnlt Constructions, and a copious Vocaba- 
lary. 12mo. 85]| pages. 

Tolon't Spaniah BEp^ari^^o. 156 pages. 

Xaatery 8eriM~8a)»ni^. By Thomas P^pKoaaaaflT. ISmo. 

V. — '• 



ifTAi^IAN 



TEXT-BOOKS. 



Fontana't ^ementtkry Grammar of the Italian Language. 

Progre8sTvel;(..aTra£^d for tX^e use of Schools and Colleges. 
12mo. 236 pages. y"^'^*^ 

Foresti't Italian Beader. A Collection of Pieces in Italian 
Prose, designed as a Beading-book for Students of the Italian 
Language. 13mo. 293 pages. 



y? 



i 



jC/l^ 



cLt^ ci^Uf^^f^ 



f 

* 



X 



STANDARD 






OUtndoriPt Frimarj 
and Speak the Italian; 
Orauunar. By O. W. <i] 



Kew X6fh0d{ 



Speak the Italian Lanj 
By E. Felix Fobebti,* 



EHY TO THE EXEBOISjB^. Separate T(i 



In OlIendorflTfi Gramntai 
tern by which the etadent 
of Itolian. Thip will rec< 



at the same time there ie 

who woald pursue a syBle. 

of translating and writing: m< language. 



wf 



igaage. Inti 
ISmo. 

Leamixigl 
With Adc 
D. 12mo. 



m 



\K8. 

to Bead, Writo, 
;tory to the Larger 
[pages. 

., Write, and 
IS and Corrections. 



is, for the fl^t 
acquire a c6ni 
nd them to |>i 
ojlack of rulet ai 
I tic grammat 



^ime, presented a syi 
irsational knowleac 



fle 



f^j \ Milliionse't Italian Biemo; ^ary. New 

^^^ M I dition of ten thousaoq njw words, ai 

k44w I 






^tical students ; wh: 
id principles for those 
course with tiie riew 



tiou. With the ad- 
many other improve- 
; Volume II. , Italian 



I 



ments. Volume I., Eigl sh and Ital 
and English. 8yo. iMl >ages. 

IkCt^ ^^^^rom VmoBKZo BottaJ^ I rqfessor* qf Mdfkm, New York CUy. 

ftylA/l M^i^" 1 ^▼^ 9^% with great g atificatiou, prour republication of Mill- 
^JiAJit house^s Dictionary, a wonk m hich is indi^>ensable to all students 
"'^V'^ " o' tlio Italian language. |n I aly and in il^gland this Dictionary is 
regarded as a standard wo|rk, miting great IcomprehensiTeness with 
most convenient dimensions. Its orthography and idiomatic trans* 
lations are in strict conform ty with the usage of the best Italian 
writers, whose works the aathor has efitiently studied with great 
care. I most cordially r^mmend it as the best Kalian-and-Bng- 



- D. APFLEIOir k 00, 849 and 861 Broadway, IT, T., 

. : 

300 SCHOOt- TEXT-BOOKS, 

Including the Departments ofEuglish, Lfitln, Greek, French, Span- 
ish, Italian, Hebrew, ani Syriac; of which a complete 

DESCRIPTIVE CATALOGUE 

WU be tent^ fine <^ ponftge^ to thoae applying for it. 



ttr 




i 



<X/ 




s 






